HomeMy WebLinkAbout4.565 Original Contract
</.5u5
Original 1
PROJECT MANUAL
for
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
WASHINGTON
JUNE 2007
GLENN A. CUTLER, P.E., DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES
STEPHEN SPERR, P.E., DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES
For information regarding this project, contact:
William Sterling, City of Port Angeles
36()-417 -4551
i KlTSAP BANK
B . SI ESS ACCOUNT AUTHORIZED SIGNER INFORMATION SHEET
,
~
3 3C, g€",N50~ f-x:.A
Ma]hnp~ ffJ'l&E:L.ES \ f) "'ie1fc::,.3
Federal Tax ID #.
k--
q 1- \ ')o~ l.1Y'-\
3(po l-)s/-~o~l
-
g CoS;l L-j5,- " ') (O~
Busmess Phone #.
Busmess Fax #
Type of Busmess'
~
G&t'E:{ZA L- G
/ 767J8 / L/ c5l. J g
Authorized Signers:
,. ''''"-X~/ / )" 7..;:'Y'W, 'W 0/' '" '>-< A ... '::. '=^~,:-w ~ "<;"<.'~ y NO' N!4%~%
For eacltisigner OJ}.t!1~~,ac'coll!lt~ pleaseJq'~nishttlie f~llowmg~
(Pn(jtocQPy,!t1Y~, f91..p' itrq~~e signeI;~'areffi:eed:al)
D 1-" M P L-E:
3'3 ft, g GN~ON eo~D
MaIlmg Address
CIty State ZIp.
foc- (}}oJhE:L.E"c;. /JA '18J"'S
Employer (If dIfferent)
Work phone'
E-Mail:
. c:.cJ M.
___ ____"-I
----\ \ \
Work phone: o,wO - -<.J I 7 - </ (p go
Home phone
Home phone:
Social Secunty #:
TItle (PresIdent, VP, Secretary, etc).
PlE-S\O~
A'ccess Word (can be mother's maIden name).
, 1S I ~I'l i1'Z..
Birth date'
<, 7"."<.I<<{::;?,%Vr^N>~W*'V
ex lratlOn date
Social Secunty #
Title (President, VP, Secretary, etc):
BIrth date
nver's License Number (attach,pli'otoqQ'py)
~~~~~ ~ire&re
~e~~~dafY;!p;J:Credit:~:ard; Mi1il'fl1'Yi:13;cgr,~~sp~Ii
Type/name
ISsUe'date ex.J'tr~ldlrs
Please return to Kitsap Bank Attn: New Accounts
P:pub _ data\forms\fsr\newbusmesssigners.doc (6/05)
ESCROW AGREEMENT for RETAINED PERCENTAGE
Port Angeles Senior Services & Community Center Addition, Project 06-11
Escrow No.: \., SOB \ '-\;te8
City of Port Angeles Contract No. ~
Completion Date:
TO.
THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT IS for the Investment of the
retained percentage of the above contract, In accordance with
chapter 60 28 of the Revised Code of Washington It IS limited
to FDIC Insured Washington State Chartered Banks who are
covered by the State of Washington Public Deposit Proteclion
Act
The underSlgned,.lkL~(l.l. YJA 1..~'1 M.~
"Contractor"), has directed the CITY OF PORT ANGELES (as
"City"), to deliver to you ItS warrants which shall be payable to
you and/or the contractor. The warrants are to be held and
disposed of by you In accordance with the following instructIOn'
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Upon delivery the warrants shall be endorsed by you
and forwarded to the City for collection You shall use
the momes to purchase Investments selected by the
Contractor and approved by the City You may follow
the last wntten dlrecllon received by you from the
Contractor, for each purchase, proVided the direction
otherwise conforms with this agreement Acceptable
Investments are
-fro Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the Umted
States,
-e Other obligations of the United States or ItS
agencies,
>& Obligations of any corporallon wholly owned by
the Govemment of the Umted States;
-B Indebtedness of the Federal Nallonal Mortgage
Association,
@ Time deposits In commerCial banks,
+: Other Investments, except stocks, selected by the
Contractor, subject to express pnor wntten
consent of the City
2 The Investments shall be In a form which allows you
alone to reconvert them Into money if you are required to
do so by the City
3 The Investments must mature on or pnor to the date set
for the completion of the contract, including extension
there of or thirty (30) days followmg the final acceptance
of the work
4 When mterest on the Investments accrues and IS paid,
you shall collect the Interest and forward It to the
Contractor unless otherwise directed by the Contractor
5 You are not authonzed to deliver to the Contractor all or
any part of the mvestments held by you pursuant to this
agreement (or any monies denved from the sale of such
Investments, or the negotiation of the City's warrants)
except m accordance with the wntten mstructlons from
the City Compliance with such mstrucllons shall relieve
you of any further liability related thereto
6 In the event the City orders you, In wntlng, to reconvert
the Investments and retum all momes, you shall do so
within thirty (30) days of receipt of the order
7 The Contractor agrees to compensate you for your
services In accordance with your current published
schedule of applicable escrow fees Payment of all fees
shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall
not be deducted from any monies placed with you
pursuant to thiS agreement until and unless the City
directs the release to the Contractor of the Investments
and monies held hereunder, whereupon you shall be
entitled to reimburse yourself from such mOnies for the
entire amount of your fee
8 ThiS agreement shall not be bmdlng until Signed by both
parties and accepted by you
9 ThiS document contams the entire agreement between
you, the Contractor, and the City, with respect to thiS
Escrow, and you are not a party to, nor bound by any
mstrument or agreement other than this You shall not be
required to take notice of any default or any other matter,
nor be bound by nor reqUired to give nollce or demand,
nor required to take any acllon whatever except as herein
expressly proVided You shall not be liable for any loss or
damage not caused by your own negligence or Willful
misconduct.
Feder
At.. DE R' ~Vc CO....,.s.~\)c:n"'" J I,..,\c..
- \/o3l1 L1l..\
By
Title'
f (2.Es \ () €Nr
Address
33(P gf]'lSol'l ~O
~Olt\ A/'l4t:1.f?'S tJ/1 ~SfDS
I
cn/,;;o}o,
DATE
DATE.
THE ABOVE ESCROW AGREEMENT RECEIVED AND
ACCEPTED on the _ day of 20_
BANK
By
Title
Address'
DISTRIBUTION
City Clerk
Flnanciallnstitullon
Contractor
File Copy
II-10
~
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
NOTICE OF AWARD
August10,2007
TO: Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
Attn: Walter L. Dalrymple
336 Benson Road
Port Angeles, W A 98363
PROJECT Descnptlon: Port Angeles Senior Services & Community Center Addition,
Project No. 06-11
The Owner has considered the bid submitted by you on July 17, 2007 for the above descnbed work in
response to Its Advertisement for Bids.
You are hereby notified that your bid has been accepted for the base bid in the amount of $361,789.34 and
Additive Alternate One in the amount of $13,875.20 for a total of $375,664.54.
You are required, as stated in the Information for Bidders, to execute the contract and furnish the required
Contractor's Performance and Payment Bond and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date
of this notice to you. "
If you fail to execute said contract and to furnish said bonds within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice,
said Owner will be entitled to conSider all of your rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your bid as
abandoned and as a forfeiture of your bid bond. The Owner will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by
law.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of thiS Notice of Award to the Owner.
Dated this IO~ay of ~tJ5-r , 20~.
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
BY:~ -I ~
Title:,ap"ry /J/;EEC7i11C /fie ~~~I/
Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged t IS I 2007 .
SIGNATURE
Print Name:J~'AL-'If'"ll. L. DP>L.f2..'lMflZ'
Title: rl2...a;t~
Please return signed original to the City of Port Angeles Public Works & Utilities Department, attn: Kathryn Neal
CC. City Clerk
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROJECT MANUAL
for
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
WASHINGTON
JUNE 2007
GLENN A. CUTLER, P.E., DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES
STEPHEN SPERR, P.E., DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES
R~~
Deputy irector @;))AJ
~Jz.~(r~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT 06-11
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
NOTICE TO PLANHOLDERS
ADDENDUM NO.1
TO THE PROJECT MANUAL FOR
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
(July 10, 2007)
The following changes, additions, and/or deletions are hereby made a part of the Project
Manual for the construction of Port Angeles Senior Services and Community Center
Addition dated June 2007 as fully and completely as if the same were fully set forth
therein:
A. Responses to Questions received as of July 10. 2007
1. Q. Are As-Built drawings of the Senior Center available?
A complete set of 1993 Senior Services and Community Center
drawings, marked liAs Built" I are available for inspection at City
Hall. Contact Kathryn Neal, Engineering Manager, (360)417-4821,
kneal@cityofpa us
2. Q. How will Liquidated Damages be paid?
Liquidated Damages will be calculated according to the 2006
WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal
Construction, Section 1-08.9.
3. Q. Given that the work is a remodel of a City building that will remain open to
the public during construction, will the City carry the Builder's Risk
insurance?
No.
B. PROJECT MANUAL
1. Replace the Cover Sheet (no page number). Signatures are added.
2. Replace the Table of Contents with the revised page (i).
C. PART I. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
1. Advertisement for Bids; page 1-1, Replace Paragraph 1 with the following:
Addendum NO.1
Page 1 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT 06-11
Sealed bids will be received by the Director of Public Works & Utilities at 321
East Fifth Street, P. O. Box 1150, Port Angeles, Washington 98362, until 10:00 am,
Tuesday, July 17, 2007, and not later, and will then and there be opened and
publicly read at that time in the City Council Chambers for the construction of the
following improvements:
2. Bid Form, page 1-8, Replace with the attached Bid Form Page 2 of 2 (page 1-8r)
showing Allowances for Finish Hardware and Carpet in the Base Bid.
D. PART III. SPECIFICATIONS. SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND SUBMITTALS
1. Section 1-12, ALLOWANCES, after Section 1-11 on page 111-13, Add the
attached new Section 1-12 (two pages).
E. PART IV -A, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. DIVISIONS 02-16
1. Section 07210, BUILDING INSULATION, change paragraph 2.2 Ac to
read:
Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batts: R-21 Walls, R-30 Roof.
2. Section 08410, ALUMINUM WINDOWS, Add the attached new Section
08410 (one page).
3. Section 013851 FIRE ALARM, Add the attached new Section 013851
(seven pages).
4. Section 013915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING, Add the attached new
Section 013915 (13 pages).
F. PART IV - F, PROJECT PLANS
1. SHEET A-2.1, 2FLRPLAN, Replace sheet with new sheet A-2.1 R
included in this addendum. New drawing includes door and window trim
details.
2. SHEET A-2.1 R, 2FLRPLAN, Add call-outs at interface between Existing
Computer Lab and Addition:
Provide low profile rubber transition strip between existing carpet
and new carpet. Existing carpet to be retained in existing
computer lab.
3. SHEET A-2.1 R, 2FLRPLAN, Add call-outs at existing windows in south
wall of Computer Lab and office.
Existing windows in south wall of Computer Lab and office to be
relocated to new addition where new window sizes correspond to
existing windows.
Addendum No.1
Page 2 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT 06-11
4. SHEET A-2.1 R, 2FLRPLAN, Add call-outs at the remodeled toilet room
(Additive Alternate 1 work):
Existing grab bars to be re-used in new private toilet room. Add to
existing grab bars a vertical 18" grab bar per new code.
In new toilet room provide:
A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser
B. Paper Towel Dispenser
C. Liquid Soap Dispenser
D. Seat Cover Dispenser
E. 24"x30" mirror with stainless steel frame and shelf
All items to be by Bobrick or approved equal.
At new handicap stall in existing women's toilet room, add stainless steel
grab bars, horizontal and vertical per code meeting the following criteria:
a. Stainless steel nominal thickness: min. 0.05 inch
b. Concealed mounting
c. Gripping surface: smooth, satin finish
d. Outside diameter. 1-1/2 inches for heavy duty application
Manufacturer: Bobrick or Bradley
5. SHEET A-4.0, BLDGSEC1, Replace sheet with new sheet A-4.0R
included in this addendum. New drawing includes exterior trim details.
6. SHEET S-3, Add a call-out to the upper level floor framing plan at the
bump-out on the south side. Between the beam at the bump-out and the
south wall of the bump-out the floor framing should be 2x8 DF #2 joist at
16" ole with Simpson LU28 hanger at the beam.
7. SHEET E-2.1, Wall mounted exterior fixture shall be a Wall Mount, 250
watt, metal halide, type 3 distribution with light cutoff, powder coat paint,
dark bronze. Kim Model WD18D3/250MH120/DB-P. No revised drawing
will be provided in this addendum.
8. SHEET E-2.1, The following products are approved as a prior approval
provided they meet the requirements of the equipment specified on the
drawing and have no additional physical impact on the design.
Lighting Fixtures:
Type B, BX: Prescolite CFRR626
Type X: Dual- Lite LXU-WE
Addendum NO.1
Page 3 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT 06-11
/ sianed /
GLENN A. CUTLER, P.E.
Director of Public Works & Utilities
This addendum must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Bid Form in the
Project Manual when it is submitted to the City with your bid. Failure to do so may result
in the bid being rejected as being non-responsive.
END OF ADDENDUM
Addendum No.1
Page 4 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROJECT MANUAL
for
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
WASHINGTON
JUNE 2007
GLENN A. CUTLER, P.E., DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES
STEPHEN SPERR, P.E., DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES
R~~
Deputy ;rector fiy.lJ1l
~Jz' ~ 'f' t'df
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
PART I
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS:
Paqe No(s).
Advertisements for Bids ................................................................................. .......... ..... .1-1
I nformation for Bidders.................................................................................................. 1-2
Bidder's Checklist.......................................................................................... ....... ........ .1-3
Non-Collusion Affidavit... .............................................................................................. .1-4
Bidder's Construction Experience..................... ........................................................... ..1-5
List of Proposed Subcontractors................................................................................... .1-6
Bid Form............................................................................................................. 1-7 to 1-8
Bid Security Transmittal form....................................................................................... 1-9
PART II CONTRACT FORMS SUBMITTED FOLLOWING AWARD OF CONTRACT
Contract............................................................................................................. .11-1 to 11-8
Performance and Payment Bond................................................................................. 11- 9
Escrow Agreement for Retained Percentage............................................................. 11- 10
Certificate of I nsu ranee..................................................................... [provided by bidder]
PART III SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND SUBMITTALS ......111-1-16
Order of Precedence......................................................... ......................................... .111-1
Standard Specifications........................................................................................ ...... .111-1
Special Provisions................ ................................. ............................................ .111-1 to 13
Standard Plans.............. ........................................................................................... .11 1-13
Submittal Requirements ................................................................................... 11-14 to 16
PART IV
ATTACHMENTS
A. Technical Specifications, Divisions 02-16
B. Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts, Clallam
Cou nty
C. Request For Information (RFI) and Construction Change Order (CCO) Forms
D. Contractor's Application for Payment Form
E. Permits .
F. Project Plans
A-1.0, A-1.1, A-2.0, A-2.1, A-2.2, A-3.0, A-4.0, A-5.0, A-6.0,
S-1, S-2, S-3, S-4,
M-1.0, M-1.1, M-1.2, M-1.3,
E-1.0, E-1.1, E-1.2, E-2.1, E-3.1
( i )
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID FORM
Page 2 of 2
Base Bid
Bidder proposes to provide all work defined in the contract documents, except
the remodeling of the women's toilet room, for the Lump Sum of:
$
Allowance for Finish Hardware and Carpet:
$
11.500.00
Base Bid Subtotal $
Sales Tax (8.4%) $
Base Bid Total $
Additive Alternate 1 Toilet Room Remodeling
Remodel women's toilet room to create a new private toilet room for the Lump
Sum of:
$
Sales Tax (8.4%) $
Additive Alternate1 Bid Total $
Total Bid $
ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The bidder hereby acknowledges that it has received Addenda No(s).
to this Project Manual. The name of the bidder submitting this bid and its business
phone number and address, to which address all communications concerned with this
bid and with the Contract shall be sent, are listed below.
Bidder's firm name
Complete address
(Street address)
(State)
(Zip)
Telephone No.
Signed by
Title
Printed Name:
Notes: (1) If the bidder is a partnership, so state, giving firm name under which business is transacted.
(2) If the bidder is a corporation, this bid must be executed by its duly authorized officials.
I-8r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 1-12 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard Specifications
and Special Provisions and other Division 1 specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing
allowances.
1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.
Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer
selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional
information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will
be issued by Change Order.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Owner of the date
when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an
allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Owner's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final
selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Owner from the designated supplier.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the
form specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the
site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other
portions of the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as
required to coordinate installation.
ALLOWANCES
Section 1-12 Page 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials under
allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.
B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation,
overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by
Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of
the allowance.
1.7 UNUSED MATERIALS
A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for
credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Owner, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is
not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Owner,
deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of
unused material is Contractor's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Finish Hardware
1. Provide an allowance of $1 ,500.00 for finish hardware. Installation to be included
in base bid.
B. Carpet:
1. Provide an allowance of $4.50/sq. ft. for carpet including installation and
accessories. Allowance does not include underlayment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or
defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials
and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and
interfaced with related work.
END OF SECTION 1-12
ALLOWANCES
Section 1-12 Page 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Commumty Center AddItion
08510 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Includes but not limIted to-
1. FurnIshing metal window frames complete with glazing.
B. Related work specIfied elsewhere-
1. Caulking specIfied in sectIOn 07920.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Windows shall bear AAMA "Quality Certified" label for type of window specified
above.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
1.1 WINDOWS
A. Style-
1. Thermally broken alummum wmdow.
2. Frame members shall be 2 V4 "depth.
3. Profiles and components to match eXIsting building windows.
B. Materials-
1. All frame and sash members shall be aluminum extrusions of6063-T5 alloy and
temper WIth a minimum wall thickness of 0.062".
2. Frame and sash members shall have a rigid polyurethane thermal barrier as an
integral part of extruSIOn.
3. Glazing stops to be extruded aluminum with minimum wall thickness of 0.050".
4. Provide screens at operable windows
C. Finish-
1. Provide Architectural Class 1 anodIC pamted finish.
a. Color to match eXIstmg bUlldmg wmdow color. PrOVIde color chips for
selection by owner.
D. Manufacturer-
1. Fixed and casement wmdows by Marhn Wmdows, Series #1505.
2. Equal approved by owner pnor to bIdding.
END OF SECTION 08510
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor Services and Commumty Center
I
12-19-2006
SECTION 13851 - FIRE ALARM
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
A.
1.1 SUMMARY
I
B.
C.
I
I
D.
I
I
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
I
ThIS Section mcludes fire alann systems.
Extend the existing fire alann system as reqUIred. Provide new fire alann devices as mdIcated.
DefinitIOns:
1.
2.
3.
F ACP: Fire alann control panel.
LED: Light-emtttmg diode.
Definitions m NFP A 72 apply to fire alann terms used in tills SectIon.
System DescnptIon:
1.
Noncoded, addressable system; multIplexed signal transmissIOn dedIcated to fire alann
service only wIth mterface to eXIsting fire alann system.
2. All work to fire alann system shall be by a local (within 50 miles) contractor.
Performance Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with NFP A 72.
Prellllses protectIon
Fire alann signal initmtion shall be by one or more of the following devices:
a.
b.
Manual stations.
Smoke detectors.
Verified automatic alann operation of smoke detectors.
c.
4.
Fire alann signal shall InitIate the following actions:
a. Maintam the eXIstmg sequence of actIons.
b. Add the new bUIldmg as a new zone, modIfy existing graphic ammcIator or replace
as reqUIred.Alann notification appliances shall operate continuously.
c. Identify alann at the F ACP and remote annunciators.
d. De-energtze electromagnetIc door holders.
e. TransmIt an alann sIgnal to the remote alann receIvmg station.
f. Unlock electnc door locks m desigttated egress paths.
g. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
h. Switch heatmg, ventilating, and aIr-conditiomng equipment controls to fire alarm
mode.
1. Close smoke dampers in atr ducts of system servmg zone where alarm was
imtIated.
J. Record events m the system memory.
5.
SupervISOry signal initIatIon shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
13851-1
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Senior ServIces and CommunIty Center
I
I
I
I
I
I
12-19-2006
a. OperatIon of a fire-protectIon system valve tamper.
6.
System trouble signal imtIatIon shall be by one or more of the followmg deVIces or
actIOns:
a. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of WIring for initiating deVIce, signaling lme, and
notIfication-appltance CIrcuits.
b. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiatmg and supervISOry sIgnal-
initiating devices.
c. Loss ofpnmary power at the FACP.
d. Ground or a single break in F ACP mternal circuits.
e. Abnormal ac voltage at the F ACP.
f. A break m standby battery cIrcUItry.
g. Fatlure of battery charging.
h. Abnormal pOSItIon of any switch at the F ACP or annunciator.
7.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Rmg trouble bell and annunCIate at the
F ACP and remote annunciators. Record event.
I
A.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product mdIcated.
B. Shop Drawings:
I
I
I
I
C.
I
D.
I
E.
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
I
1.
System Operation DescriptIon: Detailed descnption for this ProJect, mcludmg method of
operatIon and supervIsion of each type of CIrcuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatIcally mitIated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descnptions for genenc systems are not acceptable.
DeVIce Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
System nser diagram WIth deVIce addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and WIre types and
SIzes.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, SIgnal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment
and for system WIth all termmals and mterconnectIons identified. Show wiring color
code.
Battenes: Size calculatIOns.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field qualtty-contro1 test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
Submittals to AuthoritIes Having JurisdictIon: In addition to dIstribution requirements for
submittals speCIfied m DivIsion 1 SectIOn "Submittals," make an IdentIcal submittal to
authontIes having jurisdIctIon. To factlitate reVIew, include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit If reqUIred to make clarificatIons
or reVISIons to obtain approval. On receIpt of comments from authoritIes having jurisdIctIon,
subrmt them to ArchItect for review.
13851-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItIon to Senior ServIces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer QualificatIons: Personnel shall be tramed and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units reqUlred for tills Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessones: Listed and labeled as defined m NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authontIes having junsdlCtIon, and marked for
mtended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacmrers: Subject to compliance with reqUlrements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. F ACP and EqUlpment:
a. Match eXIsting panel, field venfy existing condItions pnor to bId.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Wife and Cable:
a. Comtran Corporation.
b. Hehx/HITemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable CorporatIon; a Marmon Group Company.
d. West Penn Wrre/CDT; a divIslOn of Cable DesIgn TechnolOgIes.
3. AudIble and VIsual Signals:
a. Amseco; a mviSlOn of Koblsm America, Inc.
b. Commercial Products Group.
c. Gentex Corporation.
d. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
2.2
EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A.
CompatIbihty Wlth EXIsting Equipment: Fue alarm system and components shall operate as an
extenslOn of an existmg system.
2.3
FACP
A.
General Descnption:
1. Existing, maintain 100% of existing functIonahty with new extenslOn of system.
2. Modular, power-limited design Wlth electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical eqUlpment.
I
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
13851-3
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Senior Services and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
2.4 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
2.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
I
I
I
A.
Description: UL 38 listed; firushed m red with molded, raIsed-letter operatmg instructtOns m
contrasting color. StattOn shall show visIble mdIcattOn of operatIon. Mounted on recessed
outlet box; If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-action mechanism reqmring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type.
WIth integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-stattOn status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated sWltch.
SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1.
2.
Sensor: LED or Infrared hght source with matching sIhcon-cell receiver.
Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0011 percent/mm)
smoke obscuration when tested accordmg to UL 268A.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
DescnptIon: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1.
Combination DeVIces: Factory-mtegrated audIble and VIsible devices m a smgle-
mounting assembly.
B.
Bells: Electnc-vIbrating, 24- V dc, under-dome type; with prOVISIon for housing the operating
mechanIsm behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 1 0
feet (3 111) from the bell. lO-inch (254-mm) SIze, unless otherwise mdicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
C.
VISIble Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, WIth clear or nommal willte
polycarbonate lens mounted on an alummum faceplate. The word "FIRE" IS engraved m
rmnimum I-mch- (25-mm-) illgh letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terrmnals.
D.
Connect to spnnkler system Flow and Tamper SWItches, also connect to PIV with IS remote
from bmldmg. See civil and electncal site plan.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complymg with
NFP A 70, Article 760.
B.
Signahng Line CIrcuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.
FIRE ALARM
13851-4
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
1.
CIrCUIt Integrity Cable: Twisted sluelded pair, NFP A 70 ArtIcle 760, Classification CI,
for power-limited fire alann SIgnal servIce. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying wIth
requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
I
I
C.
Non-Power-Limited CirCUItS: SolId-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded
insulatIon.
I
1.
2.
Low- Voltage Circuits: No. 16 A WG, minimum.
Lme-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, mimmum.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
I
A.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Venfy that eXIsting fire alann system is operational before
makmg changes or connections.
I
1.
2.
3.
Connect new eqUIpment to the eXIsting control panel in the existing part of the bUIldmg.
Connect new eqUIpment to the existmg momtoring eqUIpment at the Supervising StatIon.
Expand, modify, and supplement the existing monitonng eqUIpment as necessary to
extend the existmg monitoring functIons to the new pomts. New components shall be
capable of merging WIth the existmg configuration without degradmg the performance of
eIther system.
I
I
B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:
1. Locate m general areas mdicated on the plans.
I
C. HV AC: Locate detectors not closer than .3 feet (l 111) from air-supply dIffuser or return-aIr
opemng.
I
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install samplmg tubes so they
extend the full width of the duct.
I
E. AudIble Alann-Indicating DeVIces: Install not less than 6 inchc~ \150 mm) below the ceiling.
Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes WIth the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
I
F. VIsible Alann-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alann bell or alann horn and at least
6 mchcs \1 50 111m) below the ceIlmg.
I
G. Device Location-Indicating LIghts: Locate in publIc space near the deVIce they momtor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
I
A.
Install wiring according to the followmg:
I
1. NECA 1.
2. TWEIA 568-A.
I
FIRE ALARM 13851-5
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AddItion to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
B.
WIring Method: Install wmng in metal raceway according to DIvision 16 SectIOn "Raceways
and Boxes."
I
1.
Fire alarm circUits and equipment control winng associated With the fire alarm system
shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any
other wrre or cable.
I
I
C. Wiring wIthin Enclosures: Separate power-limIted and non-power-linnted conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel WIth or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to termmal points With no excess.
Connect conductors that are tenrunated, spliced, or mterrupted m any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to tenrunal blocks. Mark each tenrunal according to the system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
termmal blocks, or plug connectors.
I
I
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in Junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabmets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
I
E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors dIfferently from the normal bUIldmg power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit Wiring and a different color-code for supervISOry
cirCUits. Color-code audIble alarm-mdIcating CIrcuits differently from alarm-irutiatmg circuits.
Use different colors for VISIble alarm-indicating devices. Pamt fire alarm system junctIon boxes
and covers red.
I
I
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
I
A. IdentIfy system components, wiring, cabling, and termmals accordmg to DIVISIOn 16 SectIon "
Electrical IdentIfication."
B. Install mstructIons frame m a location viSIble from the FACP.
I
C. Pamt power-supply dIsconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
I
3.4
GROUNDING
A.
Ground the FACP and assOCIated CIrcuits; comply WIth IEEE 1100. Install a ground wrre from
roam service ground to the FACP.
I
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
I
1. Before requestmg final approval of the mstallation, submit a written statement using the
form for Record of CompletIon shown in NFP A 72.
2. Perform each electncal test and visual and mechanical inspectIon listed in NFP A 72.
Certify complIance with test parameters.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspectIon before any testmg. Use as-built drawings
and system documentation for the inspectIon. IdentIfy Improperly located, damaged, or
nonfunctIonal eqUipment, and correct before beginning tests.
I
I
FIRE ALARM 13851-6
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Cornmumty Center
12-19-2006
I
4. Testmg: Follow procedure and record results complying with reqUlrements m NFPA 72.
a.
Detectors that are outsIde their marked sensltIvtty range shall be replaced.
I
5.
Test and Inspection Records: Prepare accordmg to NFP A 72, mcludmg demonstratIon of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form m AppendIx A m NFPA 70.
I
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authonzed servIce representative to tram Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and mamtam the fire alarm system, appliances, and deVIces. Refer to DIVIsion 1
I
END OF SECTION 13851
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
13851-7
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
A. This Section Includes the following fITe-suppressIon pipIng inside the buIlding:
1. Wet-pipe spnnk1er systems.
B. See DlVlsion 10 SectIOn "Fire-ProtectIon SpecIalties" for cabinets and fire extInguishers.
I
I
I
I
I
C. See DIVISIOn 13 Section "FIre Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
D. Provide a new feeder to the existing fire nser in the kItchen area. ModIfy eXIStIng riser as
reqUIred.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-PIpe Sprinkler System: AutomatIc sprinklers are attached to pipIng containing water and
that IS connected to water supply. Water discharges Immediately from sprinklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fuSIble hnk or destroys frangible device. Hose
connectIons are Included if indIcated.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard PIping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig (1200 kPa).
I
I
I
I
B.
Fire-suppression spnnkler system desIgn shall be approved by authontIes having jurisdIctIon.
1. MargIn of Safety for AvaIlable Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-servIce piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Spnnkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Building ServIce Areas: OrdInary Hazard, Group 1
b. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
d. Office and Pubhc Areas: Light Hazard
3. Mmimum Density for Automatic-Spnnkler PipIng Design:
a.
Light-Hazard Occupancy: [0.10 gpm/"iq.n. over 1500 sq. ft. (4.1 L/min. per ~q.
mover 139 sq. m or 4.1 mm/min. over 139 !>q. m)] .
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq. ft. (6.1
over Umin. per sq. mover 139 s.q. m or 6.1 mm/min. over 139 sq. m)] .
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm/sq. fl. over 1500 sq. it. (8.1
L/min. per sq. mover 139 s<l. m)] .
I
b.
I
c.
I
I
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-1
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Seruar ServIces and Community Center
I
I
I
I
12-19-2006
4. MaxImum ProtectIon Area per Sprinkler:
a. Office Spaces: 120 Silo ft. (11.1 sq. m)]
b. Storage Areas: [130 ~q. ft. (12.1 silo m)]
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: [DO sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)]
d. Electrical EqUlpment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)]
e. Other Areas: According to NFP A 13 recommendations, unless otherwise
indIcated.
C.
SeIsmIc Performance: FIre-suppressIOn piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motIOns detennmed according to NFP A 13 .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product mdicated.
I
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Approved Spnnkler PIpmg Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authonties having JurisdIctIon, includmg hydraulIc calculatIOns, if
applIcable.
C.
Field test reports and certificates.
D.
FIeld quality-control test reports.
E.
OperatIon and mamtenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer QualIficatIOns: Installer's responsIbIlities include designing, fabricating, and installing
fire-suppression systems and providmg professional engineering servIces needed to assume
engmeenng responsIbility. Base calculatIons on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
1. Engmeenng ResponsIbility: PreparatIon of workmg plans, calculations, and field test
reports by a qualified professional engmeer.
B.
NFP A Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, speCIaltIes, accessories, installatIon, and
testmg shall comply WIth the following:
1.
2.
NFPA 13, "Installation ofSpnnkler Systems."
NFP A 13R, "Installation of Spnnkler Systems in ResidentIal Occupancies up to and
Includmg Four Stones m HeIght."
NFPA 14, "Installation of StandpIpe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
NFP A 24, "InstallatIon of Private Fire ServIce Mams and TheIr Appurtenances."
NFPA 230, "Fire Protection of Storage."
3.
4.
5.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-2
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AdditIOn to Seruor Services and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
I
I
I
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below mtroduce lists, the followmg requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to complIance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specIfied.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITIINGS
A. Mecharucal-Jomt, Duchle-lron Pipe: A WW A C151, with mechamcal-joint bell end and plam
end.
1. Mecharucal-Jomt, Ductde-Iron Fittings: A WW A ClIO, ductile- or graY-Iron standard
pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: A WW A Cl11, duchle- or graY-Iron gland, rubber gasket,
and steel bolts and nuts.
I
I
I
B.
Push-on-Jomt, Ductde-lron Pipe: A WW A C151, with push-on-Jomt bell end and plain end.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductde-Iron Fittings: AWWA ClIO, duchle- or gray-iron standard
pattern.
C.
Grooved-End, Ductde-Iron PIpe: AWWACI51, with factory- or field-formed, radius-cut-
grooved ends according to A WW A C606.
1. Grooved-Jomt Pipmg Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
I
I
I
I
I
I
1) Victauhc Co. of Amenca.
b. Grooved-End FIttmgs: ASTM A 536, ductde-iron casting with OD matchmg
ductile-iron-plpe 00
c. Grooved-End-Plpe Couplings: A WW A C606, gasketed fittmg matchmg duchle-
iron-pIpe 00. Include ductile-Iron housmg Wlth keys matching duchle-iron-plpe
and fittmg grooves, rubber gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts.
d. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fittmg wIth key for ductile-
iron-pIpe dimensIOns. Include flange-type, duchle-iron housing with rubber gasket
lIsted for use with housing and steel bolts and nuts.
2.3
STEEL PIPE AND FITIINGS
A.
Threaded-End, Standard-WeIght Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795. Wlth factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittmgs: ASME Bl6.3.
I
I
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addibon to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME BI6.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe NIpples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe Include ends matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
B. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795, WIth factory- or field-formed, square-cut-grooved ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Pipmg Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Central Spnnkler Corp.
3) Ouctilic, Inc.
4) JOH Pacific, Inc.
5) National Fittings, Inc.
6) ShulJomt Piping Products, Inc.
7) Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
8) Star PIpe Products; Star FIttings OIV.
9) Victaulic Co. of Amenca.
10) Ward Manufactunng.
b. Grooved-End FIttings: UL-hsted, ASTM A 536, ductIle-iron casting WIth 00
matcrung steel-pIpe 00.
c. Grooved-End-PIpe Couplings: UL 213 and A WW A C606, rigid pattern, unless
otherwtse mdicated; gasketed fittmg matching steel-pipe 00. Include ductIle-Iron
housing with keys matcrung steel-pIpe and fittmg grooves,[ prelubricated] rubber
gasket listed for use WIth housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Spnnkler specIalty fittings shall be UL hsted or FMG approved, with 175-pSlg (1200-kPa)
minimum working-pressure ratmg, and made of materials compatible WIth piping.
B. Outlet SpecIalty Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
I
I
I
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Central Spnnkler Corp.
c. OuctIlic, Inc.
d. JDH Pacific, Inc.
e. NatIonal FIttmgs, Inc.
f. Shmjomt Piping Products, Inc.
g. Southwestern PIpe, Inc.
h. Star Pipe Products; Star FIttings Oiv.
1. VIctauhc Co. of Amenca.
J. Ward Manufactunng.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Senior ServIces and Connnumty Center
12-19-2006
2. Mechamcal-T and -Cross Flttmgs: UL 213, ductIle-iron housmg with gaskets, bolts and
nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.
3. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittmgs: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or castmg With
gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductlle-lron body; with threaded or lockmg-
lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and SIght glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Spnnkler Corp.
b. FIre-End and Croker Corp.
c. Vikmg Corp.
d. Vlctaulic Co. of Amenca.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Flttmgs: Brass body With threaded Inlet, capped drain outlet, and
threaded outlet for sprinkler.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Potter-Roemer; Fire-ProtectIon DIV.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittmg: Cast- or ductIle-Iron housing With threaded inlet and dram
outlet and SIght glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. G/J Innovations, Inc.
d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
F. Drop-NIpple FIttingS: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded Inlet and outlet, and seals.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CECA, LLC.
b. Merit.
2.5 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VAL YES
I
I
I
I
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200 kPa) mmimum pressure
rating.
B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-5
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Senior Services and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-Iron body, bronze mounted, With solId dISC, nonrismg stem,
operatmg nut, and flanged ends.
2. Manufacturers:
I
a. Gnnnell Fire ProtectIon.
b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
c. NIBCO.
d. Stockham.
I
I
C.
Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
1. '\JPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body WIth threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
I
1)
2)
Global Safety Products, Inc.
MIlwaukee Valve Company.
I
2.
~PS 2-1 2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-Iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or
With grooved ends.
I
a.
]Manufacturers:
I
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Global Safety Products, Inc.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kelmedy Valve DIV.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Pratt, Henry Company.
7) Victaulic Co. of America.
I
I
I
D. Check Valves \IPS 2 (Dl\ 50) and Larger: UL 312, swmg type, cast-iron body wIth flanged or
grooved ends.
1. Manufacturers:
I
I
a. AF AC Inc.
b. American Cast Iron PIpe Co.; Waterous Co.
c. Central Sprinkler Corp.
d. Clow Valve Co.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkms Valves.
g. FlrematIc Sprinkler DeVIces, Inc.
h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
1. Grinnell Flre ProtectIon.
J. Hammond Valve.
k. Matco-Norca, Inc.
1. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
ill. Mueller Company.
n. NIBCO.
o. Potter-Roemer; Fire ProtectIon DIV.
I
I
I
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-6
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
p. RelIable Automatic Spnnkler Co., Inc.
q. Star Sprinkler Inc.
r. Stockham.
s. Uruted Brass Works, Inc.
1. Venus FIfe ProtectIon, Ltd.
u. Victaulic Co. of America.
v. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products DIV.
I
I
E.
Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
1. :'\IPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with tlrreaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
I
I
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
3) NIBCO.
4) Uruted Brass Works, Inc.
2.
~PS 2-1 '2 (D:'\I 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
I
a. Manufacturers:
I
I
1) Clow Valve Co.
2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkms Valves.
4) Hammond Valve.
5) Milwaukee Valve Company.
6) Mueller Company.
7) NIBCO.
8) Red-WhIte Valve Corp.
9) United Brass Works, Inc.
I
I
2.6
UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VAL YES
A.
Check Valves :-JPS 2 (D~ 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 rmnimum, swing
type WIth bronze body, nonmetallIc disc, and threaded ends.
I
I
B.
Gate Valves I\PS 2 (D::\ 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minImum, WIth
bronze body, solid wedge, and threaded ends.
c.
Globe Valves !\PS:2 (D~ 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 rmmmum, with
bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and tlrreaded ends.
I
2.7
SPECIALTY VAL YES
I
I
A. Spnnkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-Iron body with
flanged or grooved ends, and 175-p~lg (1:200-kl'a) mInimum pressure ratmg.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-7
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
1. Manufacturers:
I
a. AF AC Inc.
b. Central Spnnkler Corp.
c. FIrematic Spnnkler DevIces, Inc.
d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e. Grinnell FIre Protection.
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
g. Star Spnnkler Inc.
h. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
1. VIctauhc Co. of Amenca.
J. Vikmg Corp.
I
I
2.
Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, WIth
bronze grooved seat with O-nng seals, single-hmge pin, and latch design. Include tnm
sets for bypass, dram, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages and fill-Ime
attachment with strainer.
I
I
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain
pIpmg.
b. Dnp Cup Assembly: PIpe drain with check valve to mam drain pIping.
I
I
I
B.
Automattc Dram Valves: UL 1726, :\1'5 3/4 (1);\ 20), ball-check device wIth threaded ends.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AF AC Inc.
b. Gnnnell Fire Protection.
2.8
SPRINKLERS
I
I
A. Spnnklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, WIth 175-pSlg (l200-kPa) mimmum pressure
rating.
B. Manufacturers:
I
1. AFAC Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Firemattc Spnnkler Devices, Inc.
4. Globe FIre Spnnkler Corporation.
5. Gnnnell FIre Protection.
6. Rehable Automatic Spnnkler Co., Inc.
7. Star Spnnkler Inc.
8. Venus Frre Protection, Ltd.
9. VIctauhc Co. of America.
10. VIkmg Corp.
I
I
C. Automattc Sprinklers: With heat-responsIve element complymg with the followmg:
I
1.
UL 199, for nomesldential apphcations.
I
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-8
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. UL 1626, for residentIal applications.
3. UL 1767, for early-suppressIOn, fast-response applIcations.
D.
Spnnkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-mch (12.7-mm) onfice for "Ordmary"
temperature classification ratmg, unless otherwise indIcated or required by applicatIon.
I
E.
Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
I
I
I
1. Concealed ceiling spnnklers, including cover plate.
2. Flush ceIling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
3. Pendent sprinklers.
4. QUIck-response sprinklers.
5. Recessed spnnklers, mcludmg escutcheon.
6. SIdewall spnnklers.
7. Upright sprinklers.
F.
Sprinkler Fmishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and pamted.
I
G.
Special Coatmgs: Wax, lead, and corrosIOn-resistant paint.
I
I
I
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and flll1shes for the followmg sprinkler mountIng
applIcatIOns. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type spnnklers are specified WIth
spnnklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one pIece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mountmg: Chrome-plated steel, one pIece, flat.
1. Spnnkler Guards: WIre-cage type, mcludmg fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and specIal fittmgs WIth fimsh and
pressure ratmgs same as or hIgher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise mdIcated.
I
I
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. ~PS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Threaded-end, black standard-weIght steel pIpe; cast- or
malleable-Iron threaded fittmgs; and threaded joints.
B.
~PS 1- L2 (D~ 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, black standard-weIght steel pipe; lockmg-Iug
fittings; and twist-Iockedjomts.
I
I
C.
?\PS 2 (D?\; 50) and Larger: Threaded-end, black, standard-weIght steel pIpe; cast- or
malleable- iron threaded fittmgs; and threaded Joints.
I
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-9
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Seruor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
:\'PS 2 (f)'\I 50) and Larger: Grooved-end, black, standard-weIght steel pipe; grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved jomts.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Where specIfic valve types are not indIcated, the following requirements apply:
1.
Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL lIsted and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFP A 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
2.
UnlIsted General-Duty Valves: For applicatIOns where UL-listed and FMG-approved
valves are not required by NFP A 13 .
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
b. Throttlmg Duty: Use globe valves.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to DIvIsIOn 15 SectIon "BasIc Mechamcal Materials and Methods" for basic pipmg jomt
constructIon.
B.
Threaded Joints: Comply with NFP A 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pIpe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) wIth wall thIckness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authontIes having junsdIctIOn and threads are checked by a nng gage and comply wIth
ASME B1.20.1.
C.
Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain-end piping mto locking-lug fitting and rotate retamer lug one-
quarter turn.
D.
Pressure-Sealed Jomts: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific eqUIpment,
pressure-sealing tool, and accessones.
E.
Grooved Joints: Assemble Jomts with hsted couplmg and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1.
DuctIle-Iron PIpe: Radms-cut-groove ends of pIpmg. Use grooved-end fittmgs and
grooved-end-pIpe couplings.
Steel PIpe: Square-cut or roll-groove PIping as mdicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
ngid, grooved-end-pipe couplIngs, unless otherwIse indicated.
Dry-PIpe Systems: Use fittmgs and gaskets listed for dry-pIpe servIce.
2.
3.
3.5 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
I
I
I
A.
Connect fire-suppressIOn pIpmg to buildmg's mtenor water distnbutIOn pIpmg. Refer to
DivisIOn 15 SectIOn "Domestic Water Pipmg" for mtenor pIpmg.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-10
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessones mdicated
at connectIon to water dIstributIon pIping. Refer to DIvision 15 Section "Plumbmg Specialties"
for backflow preventers.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to DIVisIOn 15 Section "BasIc Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic pipmg
installatIOn.
B.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and dIagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of pIpmg. Install pipmg as indIcated, as far as practIcal.
1. DeviatIons from approved workmg plans for pipmg require wntten approval from
authorities havmg jurisdiction. Flle written approval With Arcmtect before deviatmg
from approved workmg plans.
C.
Use approved fittings to make changes m dIrectIon, branch takeoffs from mams, and reductIons
m pIpe SIzes.
D.
Install unions adjacent to each valve m pIpes ~PS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged deVIces or m pIpmg mstallations usmg grooved Joints.
E.
Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having '\PS 2-1/2
(DN (5) and larger connections.
F.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" m sprinkler system piping, complete WIth shutoff valve,
SIzed and located accordmg to NFP A 13.
G.
Install spnnkler pIpmg with drams for complete system dramage.
H.
Install spnnkler zone control valves, test assembhes, and dram nsers adjacent to standpIpes
when spnnkler piping is connected to standpIpes.
I. Install dram valves on standpIpes.
J.
Install ball dnp valves to dram pIping between fire department connectIOns and check valves.
Dram to floor dram or outSIde buildmg.
K.
Install alarm deVIces m pIpmg systems.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFP A 13 for hanger matenals.
1.
2.
Install standpIpe system piping according to NFPA 14.
Install sprinkler system pIping according to NFPA 13.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping accordmg to NFP A 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
N.
Install pressure gages on nser or feed mam, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than ::"JPS 1/4 (DK 8) and WIth soft
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-11
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Commumty Center
I
I
I
3.7
I
I
I
I
12-19-2006
metal seated globe valve, arranged for drairung pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
O.
FIll wet-pIpe sprinkler system pIping WIth water.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and tnm,
controls, and specialtIes according to NFP A 13 and authontIes having jurisdictIon.
B.
Install hsted fITe-protectIOn shutoff valves supervIsed-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connectIons. Install permanent IdentIfication signs
mdIcatmg porhon of system controlled by each valve.
C.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
D.
Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical posItion for proper dIrectIon of flow, mcluding bypass
check valve and retardmg chamber drain-Ime connection.
3.8 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.9
I
I
I
A.
Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not mdIcated, use the
followmg spnnkler types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rooms wIthout CeIlmgs: Upright spnnklers
Rooms WIth Suspended Ceilings: Recessed spnnklers.
Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
Spnnkler Fmishes:
a.
Upnght, Pendent, and SIdewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax
coated where exposed to acids, chermcals, or other corrOSIve fumes.
Concealed Spnnklers: Rough brass, WIth factory-painted whIte cover plate.
Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted whIte escutcheon.
Recessed Sprinklers: Bnght chrome, with bnght chrome escutcheon.
ResidentIal Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
b.
c.
d.
e.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
Install sprinklers in suspended ceihngs in center of narrow dimenSIOn of acoustical ceIling
panels and tIles.
B.
Do not install pendent or SIdewall, wet-type sprinklers m areas subject to freezing. Use dry-
type spnnklers with water supply from heated space.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-12
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Seruor ServIces and Corrununity Center
12-19-2006
I
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. DrawIngs Indicate general arrangement of pipIng, fittIngs, and specIalties.
I
B. Install pIpIng adjacent to eqUIpment to allow service and maIntenance.
I
C. Connect pipIng to speCIalty valves, hose valves, speCIaltIes, fire department connectIons, and
accessones.
D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring IS speCified in DlVlsIOn 16.
I
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
F. Ground eqUIpment accordIng to DIvisIOn 16 SectIon "Grounding and BondIng."
I
G. Connect wIring according to DIvisIOn 16 SectIon "Conductors and Cables."
I
3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
I
A. Install labelIng and pIpe markers on eqUIpment and pipIng accordIng to requirements In
NFPA 13 and In DivIsion 15 SectIon "Mechanical IdentIficatIOn."
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Perform the follOWIng field tests and InspectIons and prepare test reports:
I
1.
Leak Test: After installatIon, charge system and test for leaks. RepaIr leaks and retest
untIl no leaks eXIst.
Flush, test, and Inspect sprinkler systems according to NFP A 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
Venfy that eqUIpment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
2.
I
3.
4.
I
B.
Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authoritIes having jurisdIction.
END OF SECTION 13915
I
I
I
I
I
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-13
I
,../) ~. ,.
........ StEET ICE . '5HOH \.K.IfRUrIYl'1fNT. /
EXTWD HIH 20' HletER mAN
LL^IlIN6 Ef)6f OF ROOf PANEL
tft ~ VAU.EY-.-/
PAtEL TERMlAAnOH
I
:} - uU _.!~f.l'0'1I&'_O~~9-~q'_ -4-:'-~
~ ______ -GRJGKET~
_ - . ~---- 00 IIOT FASTEN [0
Il
I
:1-
,.
N
"
-~t -:
lxO 1ilAFIER&
f!:R FMlING f'LJ/l
NEUllx
OIIER.FMlING
IlICGE 60JM
_ &TRJC1lRAL
I
I
I
--+---------
CD ~~J.,~~~O~
-{--- -5_1{2:---t
I
EXI&TING WAU.
I'lEMOYE EXTEIlIOR &IDN!;
I'ROV1DE NEUI COI8 MR
EXTCi &lEATIIING
--2)(TRiM
I
NEW euef'eoDED
ACc:IU&TIC Cl!ILIll:io
TO MATCH El<I&TING
--.2)(12 BE\.LY 6NV W V'" Pl..rrv ON:;.KIHe
I
NEUlCGt<<:.1ll.A8
FUJ&II oJ EXTCi
I
DIlILL I EFOXY eET
'4 OOILELL& NTO
EXTCi &TEI'1I1lALL
SECTION A-A
ecALE: 14" . 1'-0"
I
I
9
i:I
IlKYLICiW
DID
I
--T. -
-- - [)()HH5P(XJf DfYONO
---.--- --- 2X GORHER TRIM BEYOW
{'
"
~ _:'
I --- --- SltlIIl6
€ _ _ --- DRIP FlA51<'''';. 2. (JI, PPa'IH'5IEP STI..
TYP . DRIP R..ASHIN6
__ --- - - 2.XI2 6El.LY 6ANO
- -- - --- V4' PI. YW EW;K1N6
~ _ DOH6'OIJf 5TRH' eEYOlV
1.--.__
I
;: I
'.I
I
:, !
,
, '
:'
I
.- --.... ROOF ~r}.S IIt:'IGA.$. EA'Y1!
-- - - GlIPS . 2'-0. OJ:,
- -. - - GONT'S BLOGKIN&
-~ 24 6A. F'REFINI~ 5Tl 8.A8lf
F~IOO. TY'P. ATTACH TO GOHT'S
GLEAl. eeND OVER RCGlf RIB. Gl.1P
[-- --- IlAmIl 15 0W0l<5
RJI5H llVIT TO llLoGo:lN6
1112:'
CD ~~~F OF FULL SIZE
- -JETAl. ROOf PHE!.
-- 6AeLE END FlJ6HIHG
--.-
-- - RNET R.A5H'Ne TO
24 eA. PPa'IHlSlm S~
_ EKl PAAB.
I'E"""
OVTTER ClVnET
-2)(b TRIM
DOHl5P<1lIf
5Il>IHe
8) ~~~~,,;ND
----t'l~:
. I,
',I
\ . .j
"
I
;! '.'
II, \
I! ...,
I'
"\ "
,j , \
I:: \ \
.I' " I
:'
~'Ir
--~ '~. BArreN "'-'l.---
"----.....
---- -_ - CONTOS SOFFIT VENT
__---- 2Xl2 BELLY BAND
(0 ~~:. '~0.50FFIT
(8 ~~~.. 1'-0'
-- --- GOIIT'5 ClEAT EXTOO 4' LIVER ROOF
~ PER SMAGAA MTE 121.PETAlL S
~- PIlOVlPE V-HOTGllINe tllLOGl:U16, 3 PER AAFIER SPIoGIll6
~ - -- - PIlOVlDE FI.A5H1Ne FIlOH SIPINe TO _
o >W.L TERHlHATlOH
.-------6Al.V STl allIER,
GLEAT. "..0" OC PER 5tVrGAA Pl..ATE 22
... FIElD PAINT TOP . FAa '
---=1- 'r-::"~ \
........ ,\
I ..~, - ----- -------~~~~~~MRMEM5RNJEb.1
f~t' .1... - _LI _4:_ _ _ '. ~__ PIlOVlPE 0PEHlH6 FOR OVTTER OVO-ET 0 SIM.,
" - ____ eurr_TO<lVT\.El'
t t ..----- - -. e' LOUIS 2b SA. Eml'ER GVn.ET . SlH..
c-:::',--::-~-1t'Io- RlVETlsotPERTOwmR,
~Ikj !l.'i< 'Ir PI/'ENSIOII5 I INSTALLATION PER 5MAGAA PlATE 33. DErAIL 2
--~---- "r \~----:p~..... -=-~~---------- 5/4 TIOH
13'''')' 2' )- __
- -- - -; '-_":- ------- GONT'S 6~V Sn.. SOfFIT VENT
f1\--E~!:.(~~TTER. ---- -----. - ~~~~P~~:~,~,-<lVT\.El'
~ 00lV TOP OF DOHEf7OIIr J.8t'JVE eon-OM OF FASCIA
I
~
'"
__~TE _
I
I
,\NEUl4'CGt<<:.1ll.A8
\ FUJ&II1lITIl EXI&TING
- MQR.
: i-'
.1_1...,
I
SECTION B-B
ecALE: 14" . 1'-0"
--- -------STl FASCI....
GOHT'5 ClEAT ollOlTOH EP6E
----- ---2)(
~
lZl
C!l
~
!i:
~
r..
o
0::
t:c:l
E-o
Z
t:c:l
C)
:>-<
E-<
I-l en
Z ~
o w
~ 0
~ ~
o
u ~
~ ~
rn
ri1
C) ~
;> ~
0:: ~
ri1 E-<
rn rn
..d
0:: r:.
o
Z w
ri1 CO
rn ~
~
u
~
l>:
~
...:l
lZl
t:l
~
~
z
E
t:l
~
~
i!S
~
III
[l!tlti ~
c;:: f'i'\
(i@ ,~
~< c~
l"
U"W
L.--
~
6
';'
!:!
~
~
!a
~ ~
~ ~
~
o
u
N
~ ~ ~
(7) ~~
I I
NN
~~
....
fIl
....
""
.8 ~
~ al .
p., .5 II
:9 :3 N"
::IfIl
o
fIl
Ol 1::
... 0
'" p.,
cO'
!!
" >l
~~
p.,
i:
~~
i~
i~
~~
~
00",
6LDc.eECI
ffi\~.(o)~
..
I
I
t ,SEE ~_T'(J'6, Nl', t
. _ - --4/4x5 HoOO TRIM
--
~ ~ PROVIDE FlA5l!IJIf)
- - - -.'SEE </"'.2 FOR m>
I 6fWO\IE pll'ENSlOHS
-... H:ADER. SEE S, TR.lG 11.RAl
I
,~ , ~~~~r EXT W OOM
l=-~ '
- - tH DOOR . fR.N'1E. MCVT SOUD
~Ed ~Ea~,
HOLLOW-METAL DOOR HEAD
I
(t-n
~
I
5GALC. :3- .. 1'-0.
PASOC1210
I
-r Sf:E~,lYl'ES,m> 'j
.' - ~ OROP 510100, TYP
I
, ~-b14 )( 6 HOOD TRJH
- SEE SmlJGlUW. FOR PEanRB>
tlHl6< Of S1W5
I
~
<:t=- ,
_.-:~
--'1-U----4/4)(.. ~ TRIM
--'--It< DOOR' DOOR FIW1!
JE~d
I
J~J
-DROPSlDtHe, TY'P
--------- m> 6R00YE' All. lN1l3lIoR
DOOR. HltCXJH . RELllE tEICS
- PROVIDe Fl.A5H1N<>
-2 x 6 HOOD TRIM
tE/Il>ER, SEE SmlJGlUW.
4'4 l( 5 HOOD 1RIM
5/4 x l't')()O TRIM
~
"AU.01IN>< FIW1! H11VOW, m>
lRAtlSOH lEAD SIMILAR
CD J!~~. ~~DOW HEAD
PASD'1204
-. 5/-4 x HOOD lRIH
GAlA.K
-~2l( 6 HOOD 1RrH
sa: SlRlGnRAL FOR REaIIRftl
WHBER OF S1\.QS
, ____ DIlOP SIOIN<>, m>
-L",,]' '!^l~ !!f'ES~ f!P - t,
CD ~~~+?,~.-METAL DOO~A~~BFtNl0 ~~~,~~~DO~ JAMB ~A5oq2oq
I
t SE!' W.~L f!!'I? Tl!' t
....-
. - '''"4l4x5HOODlRIH
I
m> 6R00YE. SEE DEI ~/AA2
IVDEI', SEE SlR1JGlUW.
I
~
- 'L_-F-.~~~!E16Ill
. HOOD FRAlE
, 000R - ~ DOOR SGlEOIA.f
__ ,. 1__ __ 'RaI11: - SEE DOOR oR HIIDOH SGlm.tE
I
o ~~', :~~?R/RELITE HE~~q201
I
t ,SEE HALL f!PE~. m> 'l'-
I
,-FAGE Of F6'l'l'W1ClI.AR FINISH
.J" WAll. H1N1H.tt GONOITlOH
SEE 5TFlJGTlRAL FOR ~a.KRfP
tU16ER OF SlVDS
I
4/4 x 4 HOOD TRIM
/
/
I
'C__:,_~~
.'
-...
~
~----r--r
_ .HOOO FR.fY1f
. DOOR - SEE UOOR saEVIA.E
.. RailE, SEE VOOR
OR HlVOH 5Gt6ll.lE
I
RailE SILL SIMILAR
CD ~~.., ~~,~R/RELITE JA~~~
I
I
5/4 x HOOt> SILL
GAIA.K
PROVIDE R.ASlillI&
4/4 x" HOOV TRIM
DROP 51DIN&. TYP.
(0 ~~~,~.~DO~ SILL
PA~214
~TER L4
r~~~ ~
PIlOVIDE HE ElUM
I'ER&TRlC
-BE>>1 -€~-l
16'-0' r- .f'-o'
102'.6'
EXI&llNG - VEIlIFY
DECK
~J
~~
~
ART& . CRAFT&
CARD&
CONFERENCE
LOBBY
QQO
BILLIARD&
PIlOVIDE ALAAl1 eon
CGl'IECTED TO flfCEPlIGtl
C(lI.NTER AT FIIl&T FLOOR
PIlOVIDE 'LE-e&Il' etJe&TATlGtl
BY Alf'I.lGtlE ~ICATlGtl &Y&
&TAIR
DiLl
DECK
MUL TI-FURFO&E
11
II
II
l'
L____
'['---
'1
'1
~ I
,I
Je---:
~~lgT:t~
. FRAME.IN OI"ENING&
PATCIlt flfPAIR . FIN18l-1
r~~ EX1&TING @-
006
006 006 006
12'-3'
26'-0'
12'-3'
EXT6
1&'.0'
NEUI
~
ADDITION
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
5CALE 1/8". 1'-0' '38& OF NEW
NORTH
~
ALL TOILET ROOM f<EMODEL UIOf<K THI& FLOOR
1& ADDITIYE ALTEF<NATE IJ
HEALTH
COMFUTER LAB
ADDITION
~
,
~'.O' 1
33'-0'
NEUI
I
I
1
I
1
---'
~
~
@@
1&'.0'
NEUI
I
I
I
I
~
WALL LEUEND
,,///// '/' ,,//,/
9
~
9
ill
a
o
ill
a
. i
9 '
ill~
a
:r.
;;,
9
is>
:r.
;;.~
9
is>
9
;-
EX16TING WALL&
TO BE I<EMO'fEP
EX16TING WALL6
NEUI WALL&
MARWALL&
a
a
9~
ClJ::>::!
~E--<
s:Z
OJ::>::!
~ U<
~ :>-< ~
>< it:: rJi
8 Z~
E:l ::::> \ill
e:: ~~
PI ~ ~
~ u~
~ ~~
o
::2lU)
~ J::>::!~
U\iIl
oll >~
~ ~E-o
E J::>::! Cf)
~ U),Q
~ ~~
~ 8 rJ
9ZlX)
:3 J::>::! C\l
l%l U) CO?
[I[~ - -;i(
~~ ,~\
~g 'il \
e;< ....
3~
~ /..... i~r'
. J
1-..'-' --
a
~ ~ ~
o ~ ~
N
o
~
~ ~
~ ~ 8
N
Iii ~
.... Cl)
'8 ..:
~ ~
"m _
~ .s ~
'<::'13 "
goo i
Ul
~ ~
on ~
CO-t
~co
~O
COI"-
I I
NN
0000
.,..,.
cO'
!!
Q) "
tl~
.8
~
i:
~~
i~
i~
~~
oo~c
2FLRFLAN
~O~D 11 ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT 06-11
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
NOTICE TO PLANHOLDERS
ADDENDUM NO.2
TO THE PROJECT MANUAL FOR
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
(July 13, 2007)
The following changes, additions, and/or deletions are hereby made a part of the Project
Manual for the construction of Port Angeles Senior Services and Community Center Addition
dated June 2007 as fully and completely as if the same were fully set forth therein:
A. PART III. SPECIFICATIONS. SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND SUBMITTALS
1. Section 1-12, ALLOWANCES, a new section issued in Addendum 1, clarify
the first sentence of paragraph 28.1 to read:
Provide an allowance of $4.50/sq. ft. for carpet including installation
and accessories.
B. PART IV - F. PROJECT PLANS
1. SHEET M-1.1 FLRPLN, New heat pumps shall be provided as shown, near
the southwest corner of the building. The plan does not show the existing heat
pumps and associated refrigerant lines. Reference the attached Figure A,
which is an excerpt from the 1993 As-Built drawings, for the location of the
existing piping and the concrete pad.
G~gg.LER~
Director of Public Works & Utilities
There is no change to the Performance Period or the Engineer's Estimate as a result of this
Addendum. The Bid Opening date and location remain the same, at 10:00 am Tuesday July
17, 2007, in the Port Angeles City Council Chambers at 321 East Fifth Street, Port Angeles,
W A 98362.
This addendum must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Bid Form in the Project
Manual when it is submitted to the City with your bid. Failure to do so may result in the bid
being rejected as being non-responsive.
END OF ADDENDUM
Addendum No. 1
Page 1 of 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.J!.c-;;\\r,.(
\1\:" \
2~...z'h&r
14R-l&
14x6 UP
TO FLR GR.
HAl.L HUN~ !,):;'j"1(;'5>11c:
P.f Hq~.lr; L)>. f10l-J
c:.CIJP~IJS=F<t:;. -
"
-' DNUI
~r~~~~r'~n
MASTER
I
I
I
lis rq!"_...~E
Lil~J
I [3.[ill
I
I '2x20
~ LHe, OPEN
TO 5TORAeE ROOM
Zb>< IO\JP
IElx3b LWF
R-15(
,J',:"t'
I"~J
>r'l '
K
-I------J tioLD l1bt-l-r To
!'"'""-] Bonol/! of STRUCTURE
I 39XEI HNS
Kl50
W
t8,'iX 1&
-~HNS
I R:"~50
~
~ IZ"ZO
~ i'--~LH6. OPEN ;1
I i TO MEGH. RMIlJi I : I
b~ --- II
l/\jlL'__'_T ._;~-------
J~L[A
II
16xl4 Hr
(T)-
I~
DUCTWoRK J>..t-JD PIPI!Jq
~)(f'D';:>W IN lr-lIS ARE A
I lil_ll -PlJRt:>(....'>l: ROOH
C5'l
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,,'
,-<
~~ /..
I
I
J
Inn
,IIun
I HP-II
~ 6^LVANltED 0iNJ}.JE.L. C;Ei
/ IIJ CO~RG-re. (TiP)
I HP-2 I
MAIN FLOOR PLAN - HVAG
5CALE: II!}" = P.o"
I HP-3 I
F[~URf A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
PART I
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS:
Paqe No( s ).
Advertisements for Bids ................. ....................................... ...................................... ...1-1
Information for Bidders............................... ................ ............ ...................... ...... .......... .1-2
Bidder's Checklist........... .................................. .................... ...................................... ...1-3
Non-Collusion Affidavit................................................................................................. .1-4
Bidder's Construction Experience............ ....... .............. ........................... ..................... .1-5
List of Proposed Subcontractors.. ............... ..... ......... .... ...................................... .......... .1-6
Bid Form..................... ........ .............. .............. .......... ................................. .... ..... 1-7 to 1-8
Bid Security Transmittal form....................................................... .................. .............. 1-9
PART II CONTRACT FORMS SUBMITTED FOllOWING AWARD OF CONTRACT
Contract..................... ............................................................... ......................... .11-1 to 11-8
Performance and Payment Bond..................................................... ............................11- 9
Escrow Agreement for Retained Percentage. ........................................ ................ ....11- 10
Certificate of Insurance................................ ............................... ...... [provided by bidder]
PART III SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND SUBMITTALS ......111-1-16
Order of Precedence......................... ............................................................ ............. .111-1
Standard Specifications................... ........................................................................... .111-1
Special Provisions..... ............................................... ......................................... .111-1 to 13
Standard Plans...................................................................................................... ....111-13
Submittal Requirements .................. ................................ .................................11-14 to 16
PART IV
ATTACHMENTS
A. Technical Specifications, Divisions 02-16
B. Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts, Clallam
County
C. Request For Information (RFI) and Construction Change Order (CCO) Forms
D. Contractor's Application for Payment Form
E. Permits .
F. Project Plans
A-1.0, A-1.1, A-2.0, A-2.1, A-2.2, A-3.0, A-4.0, A-5.0, A-6.0,
S-1, S-2, S-3, S-4,
M-1.0, M-1.1, M-1.2, M-1.3,
E-1.0, E-1.1, E-1.2, E-2.1, E-3.1
( i )
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART I
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
City of Port Angeles
Sealed bids will be received by the Director of Public Works & Utilities at 321 East Fifth Street, P.O. Box
1150, Port Angeles, Washington 98362, until 2 pm July 10, 10 am, Tuesday, July 17, 2007, and not later,
and will then and there be opened and publicly read at that time in the Port Angeles City Council Chambers
for the construction of the following improvements:
A two-story, 1,970 square foot addition to the existing bUilding, located at 328 E. ]'h Street in
Port Angeles. Wood frame construction on a concrete foundation, with metal roofing. All
finishes to match existing. Extend existing mechanical and electrical systems into the new
addition.
A prebid walk-through for this work is recommended and will be led by the project engineer at the Senior
Services and Community Center at 9:30 am on Wednesday, June 27,2007.
The engineer's estimate for this Project is $300,000 to $400,000. The time of completion (performance
period) for this Project is 180 calendar days.
Plans, specifications, addenda, and plan holders list for this project are available on-line through Builders
Exchange of Washington, Inc. at http://www.bxwa.com.Click on: "Posted Projects", Public Works", "City of
Port Angeles". Bidders are encouraged to "Register as a Bidder", in order to receive automatic email
notification of future addenda and to be placed on the "Bidders List". Contact Builders Exchange of
Washington at (425-258-1303) should you require further assistance. Informational copies of any available
maps, plans and specifications are on file for Inspection in the office of the Port Angeles Public Works &
Utilities, Engineering Services (360-417-4700).
All bids shall be submitted on the prescribed Bid Forms and in the manner as stated in this advertisement
and in the Project Manual and said bids shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of a cashier's
check, postal money order, or surety bond to the City of Port Angeles in the amount of five percent (5%) of
the total amount of the bid. If a surety bond is used, said bond shall be issued by a surety authorized and
registered to issue said bonds in the State of Washington. The bond shall specify the surety's name,
address, contact and phone number, and shall include a power of attorney appointing the signatory of the
bond as the person authorized to execute it. Should the successful bidder fail to enter into the Contract and
furnish satisfactory performance bond within the time stated In the Information for Bidders, the bid deposit
shall be forfeited to the City of Port Angeles. Faxed bids and/or surety bonds will not be accepted.
Minority and women owned businesses shall be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this
invitation, shall not be discriminated against on the grounds of gender, race, color, age, national origin or
handicap in consideration of an award of any contract or subcontract, and shall be actively solicited for
participation in thiS project by direct mailing of the invitation to bid to such businesses as have contacted the
City for such notification. Further, all bidders are directed to solicit and consider minority and women owned
businesses as potential subcontractors and material suppliers for this project.
The City of Port Angeles reserves the right to accept the bid that is in the best interest of the City, to
postpone the acceptance of bids and the award of the Contract for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days, or
to reject any and all bids received. Subject to the foregoing, the bid may be awarded to the lowest
responsible bidder. When awarded the Contract, the successful bidder shall promptly execute the Contract
and shall furnish a bond of faithful performance of the Contract in the full amount of the Contract price.
Bids must be submitted in a sealed envelope With the outside clearly marked with the bid opening date and
time, the project name and number as it appears in this advertisement and the name and address of the
bidder. Bids shall be addressed to the Director of Public Works & Utilities, City of Port Angeles, 321 East
Fifth Street, P. O. Box 1150, Port Angeles, Washington 98362.
Glenn A. Cutler, P.E.
Director of Public Works & Utilities
I
I
I
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
I
Sealed bids will be received by the City of Port Angeles (herein called "Owner"), at 321 East Fifth Street, Port Angeles,
Washington 98362, until the time and date as stated In the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS or as amended through
addendum, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud.
I
Each bid shall be received by the Owner In the manner set forth In the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Each bid must be
submitted In a sealed envelope, so marked as to Indicate Its contents without being opened, and addressed In
conformance with the Instructions of the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS.
I
Each bid shall be submitted on the required bid form contained In Part I of the Project Manual All blank spaces for bd
prices must be filled In, In ink or typewritten, and the Bid Form must be fully completed and executed when submitted.
Only one copy of the Bid Form IS required In addition, all other forms Included in Part I shall be filled out and completed,
Including any addendum(s), and enclosed In a sealed envelope endorsed with the name of the work Each bid shall be
accompanied by a bid deposit In the form of a cashier's check, postal money order, or surety bond to the City of Port
Angeles for a sum of not less than 5% of the amount of the bid, and no bid will be considered unless accompanied by
such bid deposIt.
The Owner may waive any informalities or minor defects or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the
scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date
speCified shall not be conSidered. No bidder Will be permitted to withdraw its bid between the Closing time for receipt of
bids and execution of the Contract, unless the award is delayed for a period exceeding sixty (60) calendar days. A
conditional or qualified bid will not be accepted.
I
I
I
I
The City of Port Angeles reserves the right to accept the bid that is in the best Interest of the City, to postpone the
acceptance of bids and the award of the Contract for a period not to exceed Sixty (60) days, or to reject any and all bids.
If all bids are rejected, the City may elect to re-advertlse for bids. Subject to the foregoing, the contract will be awarded
to the lowest responsible bidder Bids will be evaluated on the basis of the Base Bid price. Work Included in any Additive
Alternates Will be activated at the sole discretion of the City.
I
The work Will begin within ten (10) calendar days after notice to proceed from the Director of Public Works & Utilities and
shall be completed within the time as stated In the Advertisement for bids.
I
The Owner may make such investigations as It deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the
work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such Information and data for thiS purpose as the Owner may request
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid, If the evidence submitted by, or Investigation of, such bidder falls to
satisfy the Owner that such bidder IS properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the
work contemplated therein. Subject to the foregoing, the bid award may be made to the lowest responsible bidder
I
The party to whom the Contract IS awarded Will be reqUired to execute the Contract and obtain the Performance and
Payment Bond within ten (10) calendar days from the date the notice of award IS delivered to the bidder Such bond(s)
shall be on the form proVided by the Owner, specify the name, contact phone, and address of the surety, and shall
Include a power of attorney appointing the signatory of the bond(s) as the person authorized to execute It (them).
I
The notice of award will be accompanied by the necessary Contract and bond forms In case of failure of the bidder to
execute the Contract, the Owner may, at ItS option, consider the bidder In default, In which case the bid deposit
accompanYing the bid shall become the property of the Owner.
I
The Owner, within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of the acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and the Contract
signed by the party to whom the Contract was awarded, will sign the Contract and return to such party an executed
duplicate of the Contract Should the Owner not execute the Contract within such period, the bidder may, by written
notice, Withdraw ItS Signed Contract. Such notice of Withdrawal Will be effective upon receipt of the notice by the Owner.
I
The notice to proceed will be Issued within ten (10) calendar days of the execution of the Contract by the Owner Should
there be reasons why the notice to proceed cannot be Issued within such period, the time may be extended by mutual
agreement between the Owner and Contractor If the notice to proceed has not been issued Within the ten (10) calendar
day period or Within the period mutually agreed upon, the Contractor may terminate the Contract Without further liability
on the part of either party All applicable laws, ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authOrities having
jUrisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout.
I
I
1-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BIDDER'S CHECKLIST
1. Has the Bid Security Transmittal form been completed, either by (1) attaching a bid
deposit in the form of a postal money order, cashier's check or other security and
filling out the part of the form above the words "Bid Bond" or (2) a surety bond in the
proper form and filling out the section of the form below the words "Bid Bond"?
2. Is the amount of the bid deposit at least five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
bid?
3. Have the bid forms been properly signed?
4. Do the written amounts of the bid forms agree with the amounts shown in figures?
5. Have you bid on all items?
6. If Addendum(a) have been issued, have it/they been acknowledged on the Bid
Form?
7. Has the non-collusion affidavit been properly executed?
8. Have you shown your contractor's state license number on the Bid Form?
9. Have you listed ill.!. proposed subcontractors that you will use for the project on the
listing of Proposed Subcontractors form?
10. Have you filled out the Bidder's Construction Experience form?
The following forms are to be executed after the Contract is awarded:
A. Contract - To be executed by the successful bidder and the City.
B. Performance and Payment Bond - To be executed on the form provided by
Owner, by the successful bidder and its surety company. To include name,
contact and phone number, and address of surety and power of attorney of
signatory.
C. Insurance certificate(s).
1-3
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STATE OF WASHINGTON
COUNTY OF (LC>LL.AM
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, says that the bid herewith
submitted is a genuine and not a sham or collusive bid, or made in the interest or on behalf
of any person not therein named; and (s)he further says that the said bidder has not
directly or indirectly induced or solicited any bidder on the above work or supplies to put in
a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that said bidder
has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to him/her self an advantage over any
other bidder or bidders.
WAL-
Signature of Bidder/Contractor
Subscribed and sworn to before me this /7 day of
JO 1'1
v
, 2067
-
Notary Public in and for the r1IAlA;',rI /J1AAA'L
State of Washington. /~/'IU'(/-lJ'n J'V~
ResidIng at PClQ.:r A.lJc;.E.~ .. lA),4-
My Comm. Exp.:-1t>/'29/08
1-4
E
o
u
ro
~
~
Q)
Q)
lJ)
c
Q)
E
Q)
~
0)
~
lJ)
c
B
i5
c
o
o
Q)
0)
ro
lJ)
::l
o
LL
u
c
~-
s
'0
~Q)
>0)
ro c
"Qro
~.s:::
~u
c ><
oW
- lJ)
<f) '-
::l Q)
=CJ
0-
0'5
em
o 0
z-
CJ
COW
CJ
W -
0)>
ro 2
D-D-
I.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BIDDER'S CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE
1 .
2
3
4
5.
6
-s ~ A 11 A-c. tt€r?
7 * General character of work performed by your company: (?&J..e~Pi... C(,)~AcroL-
8 * Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? 1'10
If so, where and why?
9. * Have you ever defaulted on a contract? 1--10
10 * List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating approximate cost
for each, the month and year completed, contact name and phone number
S€ €. ATJACH'eC>
E
o
o
ro
~
.0
~
12. * Expenence of bidder In construction similar to this project In work and Importance:
<~(; mrA<:H~O
ill
ill
(f)
C
ill
E
ill
~
:t
(f)
c
o
-e
-0
c
o
U
ill
0)
ro
(f)
:J
o
LL
ill 0
oE
c _
ill 4.:
~s
0.......
x 0
W ill
cO)
o c
~ro
o-c
:J (J
~ X
wW
6 [12
U ill
(f)32
O:i 5
-0 OJ
-00
co:;
mill
ill"Q
0)>
ro 2
0...0...
11. * List your major equipment available for this contract: ~~c. f}rrftcijED
13. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnIsh any other information that
may be required by the City? y~s
* Add separate sheets If necessary
The underSigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporati
requested by the City of Port Angeles.
Date' '/ ~6JOI
,
Bidder's Signature'
Pnnt Name WA~~1t- L. \)p)..{l..'fMPLE
Title ft.€$\ ~
1-5
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
Schedule of Work In Progress as of 7/1/2007
1. Name of Project
Owner
Contact
Arch Itect
Contract Amount
Scheduled Completion
Percent Complete:
Riggins Residence Remodel
Randy Riggins
Randy Riggins
Lindberg Smith Architects
$222,000.00
9/2007
50%
2. Name of ProJect: Peninsula College New Cultural Arts Building
Owner. Peninsula College
Contact Sandra Wall
Architect Tormod Hellwig
Contract Amount $736,576 00
Scheduled Completion' 10/2007
Percent Complete' 50%
3. Name of ProJect.
Owner.
Contact
Architect
Contract Amount
Scheduled Completion
Percent Complete
Peninsula College Little Theater Renovation
Peninsula College
Sandra Wall
Schact-Aslanl
$157,324.00
10/2007
0%
4. Name of Project HACC Mt Angeles View Upgrades
Owner Housing Authority of Clallam County
Contact. Vern Solberg
Architect' HACC
Contract Amount. $98,000.00
Scheduled Completion, 10/2007
Percent Complete %15
5. Name of Project.
Owner
Contact
Architect'
Contract Amount $
Scheduled Completion'
Percent Complete %
6. Name of Project
Owner:
Contact.
Architect:
Contract Amount $
Scheduled Completion
Percent Complete, %
Phone 360457-8596
Phone 360 683-5887
Phone' 360 417-6202
Phone 360582-1060
Phone 360 417-6202
Phone 206 443-3448
Phone 360452-7631
Phone' 360452-4631
I", Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
1 Schedule of Completed Projects 2001 to Present
1. Name of Project Coastal Patrol Boat Moonng BUilding
Owner United States Coast Guard
I Contact Lt Paul Rendon Phone 206220-7437
Arch itect FD & CC Pacific Phone 206220-7425
Contract Amount' $788,108.00
I Date of Completion. 3/2001
2. Name of Project. United Rentals Wash BUilding
Owner United Rentals
I Contact. Greg Vaslet Phone' 508336-1412
ArchItect Zenovic & Associates, Inc Phone: 360417-0501
Contract Amount $62,40500
I Date Of Completion 11/2001
3. Name of Project' OMC Medical Office Space Addition
Owner OlympIC Medical Center
I Contact Jim Paapke Phone 360417-7148
Architect Lindberg & Smith architects Phone 360452-6116
Contract Amount. $639,851 00
I Date Of Completion 7/2002
4. Name of Project USCG Station Port Angeles, Hanger Renovation
Owner US Coast Guard, FD & CC Pacific
I Contact. LCDR John Metcalf Phone. 206220-7324
Architect AKS, Inc. Phone. 206 623-6832
Contract Amount' $3,403,628 00
I Date of Completion. 9/2002
5. Name of Project Elwha Place Water Supply System Replacement
Owner Dept of the Interior, Bureau of Reclamation
I Contact David Adkins Phone. 360565-1635
Architect Bureau of Reclamation
Contract Amount' $255,46300
Date of Completion 3/2003
1
6. Name of Project' Pump Station Retrofits
Owner City of Port Angeles
I Contact Steve Sperr Phone. 360417-4821
Architect City of Port Angeles
Contract Amount $64,020.00
Date of Completion 3/2003
I
I 7. Name of Project Clallam County Veterans Center Remodel
Owner Clallam County Parks & Maintenance
Contact. Joel Winborn Phone 360417-2429
Arch Itect Olympic Design Works, Inc PS Phone. 360417-2777
I Contract Amount $78,246.00
Date of Completion 1/2003
I 8. Name of Project: "I" Street & Laundsen Blvd. Sidewalk Construction
Owner City of Port Angeles
Contact Jim Mahlum Phone 360417-4701
Arch Itect City of Port Angeles
I Contract Amount $290,264.00
Date of Completion 6/2003
I Page 1 of 4
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9. Name of Project
Owner:
Contact
Architect.
Contract Amount'
Date of Completion
10. Name of Project.
Owner,
Contact
Architect'
Contract Amount.
Date of Completion'
11. Name of Project.
Owner
Contact
Architect
Contract Amount'
Date of Completion,
12. Name of Project
Owner'
Contact
Architect
Contract Amount
Date of Completion'
13. Name of Project
Owner
Contact.
Architect
Contract Amount
Date of Completion
14. Name of Project'
Owner
Contact
Arch Itect
Contract Amount.
Date of Completion.
15. Name of ProJect.
Owner.
Contact:
Arch itect.
Contract Amount:
Date of Completion
16. Name of Project
Owner
Contact'
Architect
Contract Amount
Date of Completion
Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
Schedule of Completed Projects 2001 to Present
Dry Creek Water In-Line Booster Pump Station
Dry Creek Water ASSOCiation
Cindy Kelly Phone 360 452-2780
Gray & Osborne, Inc. Phone: 360 754-4266
$99,562.13
6/2003
Clallam County Fairgrounds Central & Horse Barn Restroom Remodel
Clallam County Parks & Maintenance
Joel Winborn Phone' 360417-2429
Olympic Design Works, Inc. PS Phone. 360417-2777
$55,132.00
6/2003
YMCA Remodel
Port Angeles YMCA
Dan McGuire
Olympic Design Works, Inc, PS
$406,674.00
9/2003
Phone 360 452-9244
Phone 360 417-2777
Pavement and Fuel Farm Rehab at Air Station Port Angeles
USCG CIvil Engineering Unit, Oakland, CA
Almer Adams Phone. 510535-7243
USCG
$425,570.00
10/2003
New Coastal Patrol Boat Mooring Building
USCG, Civil Engineering Unit, Oakland, CA
Teresa Leong
USCG
$391,570 00
01/2004
Phone. 510535-7284
Sequim Medical CT Installation/Remodel
Olympic Medical Center
Jim Paapke
Collins Woerman
$104,720.00
1/2004
Phone 360417-7148
Phone 425 889-3333
Firehall Roof Replacement and Deck Repairs
City of Port Angeles
Tern Partch
Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Inc
$381,94200
8/2004
Phone' 360417-4811
Phone' 206622-1441
Stevens Middle School New Music Room
Port Angeles School District No. 121
Roger Easling
Lindberg & Smith Architects
$784,410.00
9/2004
Phone. 360417-7148
Phone 360452-6116
Page 2 of 4
I. '.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
17. Name of ProJect'
Owner.
Contact
Architect.
Contract Amount
Date of Completion
18. Name of Project
Owner
Contact
Architect
Contract Amount
Date of Completion'
19. Name of ProJect'
Owner
Contact.
Architect'
Contract Amount
Date of Completion'
20. Name of Project
Owner:
Contact
Architect
Contract Amount
Date of CompletIon
21. Name of Project
Owner
Contact.
Architect.
Contract Amount
Completion Date
22. Name of Project'
Owner.
Contact.
Architect
Contract Amount
Completion Date
23. Name of Project
Owner'
Contact
Arch Itect
Contract Amount
Completion Date
24. Name of Project.
Owner:
Contact'
Arch Itect
Contract Amount.
Completion Date
Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
Schedule of Completed Projects 2001 to Present
Convert Elect Heat to Oil Heat at Station Neah Bay
USCG, Civil Engineering Unit, Oakland, CA
Teresa Leong Phone 510535-7284
USCG
$208,577.00
8/2004
Faith Baptist Church
Faith Baptist Church
Lonnie Jacobson
The Drawing Board
$1,100,000.00
8/2005
Phone 360 683-7303
Phone 360417-1527
North Olympic Peninsula Skill Center Phase IV
Port Angeles School District No. 121
Roger Easling
Kenneth Hays Architects
$1,339,586.00
8/2005
Phone. 360460-7810
Phone: 360 683-5887
USCG Replace Fueling Station
US Coast Guard, Civil Engineenng Unit, Oakland
Teresa Leong
USCG
$291,728.00
4/2005
Phone. 510535-7284
HACC Sidewalk/Parking Lot
Housing Authority of Clallam County
Vern Solberg
Zenovlc & Associates, Inc.
$255,399 00
1/2005
Phone 360452-7631
Phone: 360417-0501
Oliver Residence
Gerald Oliver
Gerald Oliver
Lindberg & Smith Architects
$323,000.00
3/2006
Phone' 360 683-7078
Phone 360452-6112
Salt Creek PavIlion Renovation
Clallam County Parks
Joel Winborn
Olympic Design Works
$35,65300
4/2006
Phone 360417-2429
Phone 360 417-2777
POint Hudson Hospital Remodel
Port of Port Townsend
Jim Pivarnik
Richard Berg Architects, P.C.
$1,005,518.00
6/2006
Phone' 360 385-0410
Phone 360 379-8090
Page 3 of 4
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25. Name of Project
Owner.
Contact'
Architect.
Contract Amount
Completion Date
26. Name of Project.
Owner.
Contact.
Architect'
Contract Amount'
Completion Date
~ Name of Project
Owner
Contact
Architect
Contract Amount'
Completion Date
~ Name of Project
Owner
Contact.
Architect.
Contract Amount
Completion Date
Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
Schedule of Completed Projects 2001 to Present
CC Lower Salt Creek Bridge
Clallam County
Don Davison
Phone' 360 417-2389
$248,914.00
10/2006
CC Dungeness Rec. Area Bathroom
Clallam County
Joel Winborn
Olympic Design Works
$126,451.00
3/2007
Phone. 360 417-2429
Phone 360 417-2777
Dungeness Rec Area Bathroom
Clalla unty
Joel Wmborn
Olympic Design Works
$126,451.00
3/2
Phone 360 417-2429
Phone. 360 417-2777
Phone 360 417-2429
Phone 360 417-2777
Page 4 of 4
I"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
Aldergrove Construction, Inc.
Equipment Available
Cat 436 backhoe
2 MltsublShl BD2G Dozer
3 John Deere 80 Excavator
4 Kubota U35 Excavator
5 10 yd dump truck and pup trailer
6. 5 yd dump truck
7 8 ton boom truck
8. Gradall 524 38 extended reach forklift
9 Bobcat 2000 articulated loader
10 Case 1840 skid steer
11. IR 165 compressor
12 IR MP6 generator
13 Compactors and misc.
14 2) 20' sCissor lifts, 1) 28' scissor 11ft
I.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Subcontractor List
Prepared in compliance with RCW 39.30.060 as amended
Project Name
To Be Submitted with the Bid Proposal
Al.-D('(2.(; e...c\l6 GI'IST~uC'nur1 Jt-tc..
,
Failure to list subcontractors who are proposed to perform the work of heating, ventilation
and air conditioning, plumbing, as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical as
described in Chapter 19.28 RCW will result in your bid being non-responsive and therefore
void.
Subcontractor(s) that are proposed to perform the work of heating, ventilation and air
conditioning, plumbing, as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical as described
in Chapter 19.28 RCW must be listed below. The work to be performed is to be listed
below the subcontractor(s) name.
If no subcontractor is listed below, the bidder acknowledges that it does not intend to use
any subcontractor to perform those items of work.
Subcontractor Name
Work to be Performed
MEll..G'" GL..EC\~\C-
1E'L.. E"c..""l't. \ c.. A L-
Subcontractor Name
Work to be Performed
-:;: C H M. ~ c;:::; t'4 e e-;- M E'1- A '-
-HVAc:.-
Subcontractor Name
Work to be Performed
-~~~C~~~:N
Subcontractor Name
Work to be Performed
N() ~.:nl ~ 6BT G A-.s.
t=t VM,6 ).LC~
Subcontractor Name
Work to be Performed
1-6
E
o
()
ro
~
..0
~
OJ
OJ
If)
C
OJ
E
OJ
~
0)
<(
If)
C
o
-E
-0
C
o
U
OJ
0)
ro
If)
:J
o
LL
()
C
<(-
s
o
OJ
0)
+-- C
~ ro
--l ..c
~ ()
o x
oW
ro If)
~ ~
+--OJ
C-o
0=
() :J
.gco
(f)B
0-0
..-- OJ
-0
OJ -
0)>
ro 2
0..0..
I,'
.-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
~ .
BID FORM
Page 1 of 2
Honorable Mayor and City Council
Port Angeles City Hall
321 East Fifth Street
Port Angeles, W A 98362
BIDDER: ~ LOE-f<.C?t..D"~
7}o!Ol
DATE:
Co/'l~I(luC7J()~ REGISTRATION NO.: AL1)E62CIOY~c:Lo
UBI NUMBER: 6:0 I-[ddo "'93~
The undersigned, hereinafter called the bidder, declares that the only person(s) interested
in this bid are those named herein; that the bid is in all respects fair and without fraud; and
that it is made without any connection or collusion with any other person making a bid on
this project.
The bidder further declares that it has carefully examined the plan, specifications, and
contract documents, hereinafter referred to as the Project Manual, for the construction of
the proposed project improvement(s); that it has personally inspected the site(s); that It has
satisfied itself as to the types and quantities of materials, the types of equipment, the
conditions of the work involved, including the fact that the description of and the quantIties
of work and materials, the types of equipment, the conditions of and the work involved as
included herein, are brief and are intended only to indicate the general nature of the work
and to identify the said quantities with the corresponding requirements of the Project
Manual; and that this bid is made in accordance with the provisions and the terms of the
Contract included in the Project Manual.
The bidder further agrees that it has exercised its own judgment regarding the
interpretation of surface information and has utilized all data which it believes is pertinent
from the City Engineer, hereinafter also referred to as the City or Owner, and such other
source of information as it determined necessary in arriving at its conclusion.
The bidder further certifies that the subcontracting firms or businesses submitted on the
LISTING OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS will be awarded subcontracts for the
described portions of the work:
If the bidder is awarded a construction contract on this bid, the name and address of the
surety who will provide the performance bond is:
~fNGL.EIlS
Surety
\50\ ';~ A\JL:.jll~SO S'Ei11TlE. 'U110J
Surety address
\'-'<lE. SH l n+ 2.Cb ~ ..32-'a .. '12. ~ g
Surety Contact and Phone Number
L$ ~' M6
Agent
p.O. ~t))( 757LS SfAfll.f ~i /7.5
Agent Address
"-I \ CK. F' \ I' (800')-''''';2 - eBI ~
Agent Contact and Phone Number
1-7
E
o
u
ro
~
.0
I
(J)
(J)
Cf)
c
(J)
E
(J)
~
OJ
<(
Cf)
c
o
-e
-0
c
o
U
(J)
OJ
ro
Cf)
:::J
~
o
LL
U
c
<(-
s
'0
(J)
OJ
c
ro
s=
u
x
W
Cf)
E Qi
~-o
0-
LLS
-00)
coB
.,..--0
.,..- (J)
-0
(J) -
OJ>
ro 2
0...0...
I ~.
I
I
IL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
BID FORM
Page 2 of 2
Base Bid
Bidder proposes to provide all work defined in the contract documents, except
the remodeling of the w men's toilet room, for the Lump Sum of:
'2 ...., - 00
$ ::>~~J &,<-t:>Y -
Allowance for Finish H rdwa an~ Car~et: J
~0A>.eA>. 1&""'AJ ~~ $ 11.500.00
Base Bid Subtotal $ 333 15Y~
)
Sales Tax (8.4%) $ ~BI03;~
$ 3(P\JI8~~
Base Bid Total
Additive Alternate 1 Toilet Room Remodeling
Remodel women's toilet room to create a new private toilet room for the Lump
SU'"L
~ ~)p"5liJ~)JjllZ-
$ \~I~CO~
Sales Tax ~8.4%) $ \} a,S~
\~ _::J.~
Additive Altemate1 Bid Total $ ~) e It) -
Total Bid
$ .316:lo<oL.\~
,
ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The bidder hereby acknowledges that it has received Addenda No(s). Jt;;l.-
to this Project Manual. The name of the bidder submitting this bid and its business
phone number and address. to which address all communications concerned with this
bid and with the Contract shall be sent, are listed below.
Bidder's firm name --.At. OC~(-,l..ol/r3 ('..oNS"~U:::.'T'C,J . }NC.
.
~Af) ~~ tJrI('~l~ JJfJ 98seo3
( ale) (Zip)
Telephone No.
Title
r/Z~'OE)i\
Complete address
Signed by
Printed Name: -.JJ ~L\€ ~ L. DAL{l'YMfl C
Notes: (1) If the bidder is a partnership, so state, giving firm name under which business is transacted.
(2) If the bidder is a corporation, this bid must be executed by its duly authonzed officials.
1-8r
I ·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bond No. T-174
BID SECURITY TRANSMITTAL FORM
SIGN HERE
riel cwitll fmd all executed Bid Bond or a deposit ill the ~~ rn pf a caslli
011 lor security in Iiew of a bid bond In the amount of $ 0 0 total
__.~ whlC!l amount IS not loss tllan five (5%) percent of the t t
stal money order or
~::-:-:-
~~.
~ ~
BID BOND
~
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
Aldergrove Travelers Casualty and
Tllat WO, __~.~:mstruction~.~. _!~~ as Principal a.ld Surety ~__of America as Surety, al e held and
f1nnly bound Ulito trlO CITY OF PORT ANGE:LES as Obligee, 111 the penal sum of *Five per:s-_~E.!= (5%)
~:L~,,~!al amount ..bid* ___,_~ _ Dollars, for tile payment of whlcll the PI Illcipal and
t110 Surety bind themselves, their heirs. executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jomtly and
severally, by these presents.
Tho condition of ttlis obligation is such tllat if the Obligee shall make any award to till;! Principal for:
Port Angeles Senior Services & Community Center Addition
PROJECT 06-11
accordlllO to the terms of the bid made by the Principal, and the Principal shall duly make and entor into a
contract will) tile ObligeE) In accordance with the term,s of said bid and ~ward and s!lall give bond for tho
faltllful porformance thereof, wltl, Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee, or if the Plinclpal shall, in case
of failLII C so to do, pay and forfeit to tt10 Obligee tile penal amount of the depOSit specified in the
~ldveltlsenlenllor bids, tllell tllis obligation shall be null and void; othGlwlse It shall be and I'emaln III full !Olce
and effect and the SUi'0ty sl1all forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and Iiquldaten damages,
the arrlOl...11t of i~ bond.
July
07
,20_.
D, SEN._ED AND DATED THIS 10 _ day of
e C _ uction, Inc.
~I:'C :, WAL-1~~ l. DAC'~5rM.PLE 7tE~\D&lf.l
By: .;P. ~ CB&MS OF WA., INC.
SLir'cty nN:~_~...~ji?[;.~ Attorney :fu'''Fact Agent
Travelers Casualty and Surety
Company of America PO Box 75715
1501. 4th Ave. - #1650 Seattle. WA 98101
Suretyacldress
Kyle Smith 206-326-4248
.-"'...-.-------..-----
Surety Contact and Phono Number
Seattle, WA 98175
Agent Addless
Nicholas B. Fix 206-361-9693
--~.. ..
Agent Contact and Phone Number
~
~:
;::
Dated:
Recsived raturn of deposit In tile sum of $
1-9
E
o
CJ
tI2
(
.LJ
~
~
:;.
<lJ
<lJ
III
-0--"
C
'1'
~
0,)
QJ
en
.-(
IfJ
C
o
'5
h
o
(J
Q)
CJ)
rn
,n
~
...
o
u..
()
c:
~ ".
cD .:(
lJL ~
m-
:cO
E ~l
&IJ l~
C. ru
XOJ::
~':: ~
.;:. Ul
~ r.
0'\)
I('Ll :g
CI) :3
<('IaJ
roQ
C"') l)
\r nJ
<UJ~
~e
l;!., CL
1-. '.
e TRAVELERS
POWER OF ATTORNEY
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Seaboard Surety Company IS a corporatIOn duly orgalllzed under the laws of the State of New York, that St Paul
Fire and Manne Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporatIOns duly orgalllzed under the laws
of the State of Mmnesota, that Farmmgton Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of Amenca are
corporatIOns duly orgalllzed under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Ulllted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company IS a corporatIOn duly orgalllzed under the
laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company IS a corporatIOn duly orgalllzed under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Underwnters, Inc IS a corporation duly orgalllzed under the laws of the State of Wlsconsm (herem collectively called the "Compallles"), and that
the Compallles do hereby make, constitute and appomt
of the City of Seattle , State of Washmgton , theJr true and lawful Attorney(s)-m-Fact,
each 10 their separate capacity If more than one IS named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recoglllzances, conditional undertakmgs and
other wntmgs obligatory 10 the nature thereof on behalf of the Compallles 10 their busmess o(guaranteemg the fidelity of persons, guaranteemg the performance of
contracts and executmg or guaranteemg bonds and undertakmgs reqUIred or permitted 10 any'a~tlOns or-proceedmgs allowed by law
\'- \ ~~, '" t ~ , Ii!
J~'" ~ "'" '* ~ \",
1-,
:\ ~ '-> \.
_~ ~: \" /J
IN WITN~t~HEREOF, the Compa~lJ6fave caused thiS ms~~m~?'t, to be ~Ign~d'.an~ therr:<;,orporate seals to be hereto affixed, thiS
day of , " ',,, - " . ' .
, "
Farmington Casualty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
I
I
I
Attorney-In Fact No.
214858
I
I
Christine V. Fehcetty, N. B. FIX, R. A. FIX, and Myung S. FIX
I
I
I
I
I
Farmington Casualty CoWPaIlY; ,-.,). '
Fidelity and Guaranty'Insurance'Company, .
Fidelity and Guaranty Insur~!Ice Underwriters, Inc.
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
I
~~~
~~~~;;.~;~::~
::II ..'('t
U)' - .mS
i~..SEAL.~gj
O'Js'.'i~~Y
"""---
I
I
State of Connecticut
City of Hartford ss
I
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Certificate No. n 0 14 9 4 9 6 3
8th
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
'~"~"~~"'''''''
I~~q.. 'i'1-;'o:,
f~ coRPOR.qre- f'\\
iZ _#- g::
\~.SE;;!JL ~
\.t, . ,4b
~s . ,..~
........
By
8th March 2007
On thiS the day of . before me personally appeared George W Thompson, who acknowledged
himself to be the Selllor Vice PreSident of Farmmgton Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, FidelIty and Guaranty Insurance Underwnters.
Inc , Seaboard Surety Company, St Paul Fire and Marme Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers
Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of Amenca, and Ulllted States FIdelIty and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, bemg
authonzed so to do, executed the foregomg mstrument for the purposes therem contamed by slglllng on behalf of the corporatIOns by himself as a duly authonzed officer
I
I
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and offiCial seal
My CommiSSIOn expires the 30th day of June, 2011
I
I
58440-8-06 Pnnted In USA
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
'\f\w c. j~
'- Mane C Telreaul1, Notary Pubhc
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
I
This Power of Attorney IS granted under and by the authonty of the followmg resolutIOns adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmmgton Casualty Company, Fidelity
and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwnters, Inc, Seaboard Surety Company, St Paul Fire and Manne Insurance Company,
St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of
Amenca, and UnIted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutIOns are now m full force and effect, readmg as follows
I
RESOLVED, that the Chamnan, the President, any Vice Chamnan, any Executive Vice President, any SenIor Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice
President, the Treasurer, any ASSistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appomt Attorneys-m-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf
of the Company and may give such appomtee such authonty as hiS or her certIficate of authonty may prescnbe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the
Company's seal bonds, recognIzances, contracts of mdemnIty, and other wntmgs obligatory m the nature of a bond, recognIzance, or condItional undertakmg, and any
of smd officers or the Board of DIrectors at any time may remove any such appomtee and revoke the power gIven him or her; and It IS
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chamnan, the PresIdent, any VIce Chmrman, any Executive Vice President, any SenIor VIce PresIdent or any VIce PresIdent may
delegate all or any part of the foregomg authonty to one or more officers or employees of thiS Company, provided that each such delegation IS m wntmg and a copy
thereof IS filed m the office of the Secretary, and It IS
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognIzance, contract of mdemmty, or wntmg obligatory m the nature of a bond, recognIzance, or condItIOnal undertakmg
shall be valid and bmdmg upon the Company when (a) sIgned by the PresIdent, any Vice Chmrman,_any Executive VIce PresIdent, any SenIor VIce PresIdent or any VIce
PresIdent, any Second VIce President, the Treasurer, any ASSIstant Treasurer, the Corporate Secre,tary or any ASSistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed WIth the
Company's seal by a Secretary or ASSistant Secretary, or (b) duly executed (under seal, If reqUIred) ,by one or more Attorneys-m-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power
prescnbed m hIS or her certificate or theIr certIficates of authonty or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a wntten delegatIOn of authonty, and It IS
I
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the sIgnature of each of the followmg officers PresIdent, any Executive VIce President, any SenIor VIce PresIdent, any VIce President,
any ASSistant Vice PresIdent, any Secretary, any ASSIstant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsImIle to any power of attorney or to any
certificate relatmg thereto appomtmg ResIdent Vice Presidents, ResIdent ASSistant Secretanes or Attorneys-m-Fact for purposes only of executmg and attestmg bonds
and undertakmgs and other wntmgs obligatory m the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate beanng such facsimIle signature or faCSimIle seal shall
be valid and bmdmg upon the Company and any such power so executed and certIfied by such facslllule signature and facslffi1le seal shall be valid and bmdmg on the
Company m the future With respect to any bond or understanding to whIch It IS attached
I
I, Kon M Johanson, the underSIgned, ASSIstant Secretary, of Farmmgton Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwnters, Inc, Seaboard Surety Company, St Paul Fire and Marme Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance
Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Suq:ty <:;~mpany_o'f;).menca,and UnIted States FIdelity and Guaranty Company do hereby
certify that the above and foregomg IS a true and correct copy of the Power 0('Att6~y(exdc~ied by s;id':eompanIes, which IS m full force and effect and has not been
~o,"d . .;~\ ~:ir~> ^')' ,t. rf~
-',,' ,~~y ,', tJ'f'Vl-
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I h,~ h=""'o ,,' my h~d'~~'~""':0Y~Y ot~;?,""m:' Iill'~f
I
I
20 07
I
Kon M Johans
I
I
o
~
@~~';l~
..' -' - ...?~
'i.
~ .. mj
<j.~
~V1;^NC~ c;
lIlJ/ljI"I\\
I
To venfy the authentiCity of thiS Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at wwwsrpaultravelersbond com Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number,
the above-named mdtvlduals and the detaIls of the bond to which the power IS attached " ,
I
I
I
I
I
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART II
CONTRACT FORMS SUBMITTED FOllOWING AWARD
OF CONTRACT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PUBLIC WORKS
CONTRACT ~~
This Contract is made and entered into in duplicate this~ day of AowSl
by and between the City of Port Angeles, a non-charter code city of the State of
Washington, hereinafter referred to as "the City", and A \.CEl) GRoJE- ('~'ituc..'il trn 1):)L
a Cb~fbe.A\lb,J , hereinafterreferred to as "the Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
Whereas, the City desires to have certain public work performed as hereinafter set forth,
requiring specialized skills and other supportive capabilities; and
Whereas, the Contractor represents that it is qualified and possesses sufficient skills and the
necessary capabilities to perform the services set forth in this Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the terms, conditions, and agreements contained
herein, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. Scope of Work
The Contractor shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, and equipment in orner to
accomplish the following project:
Port Angeles Senior Services & Community Center Addition, PROJECT 06-11
in accordance with and as described in
A. this Contract and
B. the Project Manual, which include the attached plans, Specifications, Special Provisions,
submittal requirements, attachments, addenda (if any), Bid Form, Performance and
Payment bond, and
C. the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction prepared by
the Washington State Department of Transportation, as may be specifically modified in
the attached Specifications and/or Special Provisions, hereinafter referred to as "the
standard specifications",
and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this Contract and every
part thereof.
The Contractor shall provide and bear the expense of all equipment, work, and labor of any
sort whatsoever that may be required for the transfer of materials and for constructing and
completing the work provided for in this Contract, except as may otherwise be provided in the
Project Manual.
2. Time for Performance and Liquidated Damages.
A. Time is of the essence in the performance of this Contract and in adhering to the time
frames specified herein. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10)
calendar days after notice to proceed from the City, and said work shall be physically
II-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
completed within 180 calendar days after said notice to proceed, unless a different
time frame is expressly provided in writing by the City.
B.
If said work is not completed within the time for physical completion, the Contractor
may be required at the City's sole discretion to pay to the City liquidated damages as
set forth in the Project Manual, for each and every day said work remains
uncompleted after the expiration of the specified time.
Compensation and Method of Payment
A. The City shall pay the Contractor for work performed under this Contract as detailed
in the bid, as incorporated in the Project Manual.
B. Payments for work provided hereunder shall be made following the performance of
such work, unless otherwise permitted by law and approved in writing by the City.
No payment shall be made for any work rendered by the Contractor except as
identified and set forth in this Contract.
C. Progress payments shall be based on the timely submittal by the Contractor of the
City's standard payment request form.
D.
Payments for any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this Contract
shall be in accordance with the Request For Information (RFI) and/or Construction
Change Order (CCO) process as set forth in the Project Manual. Following approval
of the RFI and/or CCO, the Contractor shall submit the standard payment request
formes).
E.
The Contractor shall submit payment requests with a completed Application for
Payment form, an example of which is included in the Attachments to this Contract.
This form includes a lien waiver certification and shall be notarized before
submission. Applications for payment not signed or notarized shall be considered
incomplete and ineligible for payment consideration. The City shall initiate
authorization for payment after receipt of a satisfactorily completed payment request
form and shall make payment to the Contractor within approximately thirty (30) days
thereafter.
4. Independent Contractor Relationship.
The relationship created by this Contract is that of independent contracting entities. No
agent, employee, servant, or representative of the Contractor shall be deemed to be an employee,
agent, servant, or representative of the City, and the employees of the Contractor are not entitled to
any of the benefits the City provides for its employees. The Contractor shall be solely and entirely
responsible for its acts and the acts of its agents, employees, servants, subcontractors, or
representatives during the performance of this Contract. The Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for payment of all wages and salaries and all federal, state, and local taxes or
contributions imposed or required, including, but not limited to, unemployment insurance, workers
compensation insurance, social security, and income tax withholding.
I
I
I
I
I
I
II-2
I
I
I
5. Prevailing Wage Requirements.
I
The Contractor shall comply with applicable prevailing wage requirements of the
Washington State Department of Labor & Industries, as set forth in Chapter 39.12 RCW and
Chapter 296-127 WAC. The Contractor shall document compliance with said requirements and
shall file with the City appropriate affidavits, certificates, and/or statements of compliance with the
State prevailing wage requirements. The Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public
Works Contracts, Clallam County, incorporated in this Contract have been established by the
Department of Labor & Industries and are included as an Attachment to this Contract. The
Contractor shall also ensure that any subcontractors or agents of the Contractor shall comply with
the prevailing wage and documentation requirements as set forth herein.
I
I
6. Indemnification and Hold Harmless.
A. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the City, its officers,
officials, employees, and volunteers against and from any and all claims, injuries,
damages, losses, or suits, including attorney fees, arising out of or in connection with
the performance of this Contract, except for injuries and damages caused by the sole
negligence of the City.
I
I
B. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this Contract is subject to
RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event ofliability for damages arising out of bodily injury
to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent
negligence of the Contractor and the City, its officers, officials, employees, and
volunteers, the Contractor's liability hereunder shall be only to the extent of the
Contractor's negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the
indemnification provided herein constitutes the Contractor's waiver of immunity
under Industrial Insurance, Title 51 RCW, solely for the purposes of this
indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by the parties. The
provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Contract.
I
I
I
7. Insurance.
The Contractor shall procure, and maintain for the duration of the Contract, insurance
against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection
with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, their agents, representatives,
employees or subcontractors. Failure by the Contractor to maintain the insurance as required shall
constitute a material breach of contract upon which the City may, after giving five working days
notice to the Contractor to correct the breach, immediately terminate the Contract or at its
discretion, procure or renew such insurance and pay any and all premiums in connection therewith,
with any sums so expended to be repaid to the City on demand, or at the sole discretion of the City,
off set against funds due the Contractor from the City.
I
I
I
I
A. Minimum Scope of Insurance
I
The Contractor shall obtain insurance ofthe types described below:
1.
Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, non-owned, hired and
leased vehicles. Coverage shall be written on Insurance Services Office
(ISO) form CA 00 01 or a substitute form providing equivalent liability
coverage. If necessary, the policy shall be endorsed to provide contractual
liability coverage.
I
I
II-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11.
Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on ISO occurrence
form CG 00 01 and shall cover liability arising from premises, operations,
stop gap liability, independent contractors, products-completed operations,
personal injury and advertising injury, and liability assumed under an insured
contract. The Commercial General Liability insurance shall be endorsed to
provide the Aggregate Per Project Endorsement ISO form CG 25 03 11 85.
There shall be no endorsement or modification of the Commercial General
Liability insurance for liability arising from explosion, collapse or
underground property damage. The City shall be named as an insured under
the Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance policy with respect
to the work performed for the City using ISO Additional Insured
endorsement CG 20 10 10 Oland Additional Insured- Completed Operations
endorsement CG 20 37 10 01 or substitute endorsements providing
equivalent coverage.
111.
Workers' Compensation coverage as required by the Industrial Insurance
laws of the State of Washington.
IV.
Builders Risk insurance covering interests of the City, the Contractor,
Subcontractors, and Sub-contractors in the work. Builders Risk insurance
shall be on a all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and
extended coverage and physical loss or damage including flood and
earthquake, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, temporary
buildings and debris removal. This Builders Risk insurance covering the
work will have a deductible of $5,000 for each occurrence, which will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Higher deductibles for floor and earthquake
perils may be accepted by the City upon written request by the Contractor
and written acceptance by the City. Any increased deductibles accepted by
the City will remain the responsibility of the Contractor. The Builders Risk
insurance shall be maintained until final acceptance of the work by the City.
B. Minimum Amounts ofInsurance
The Contractor shall maintain the following insurance limits:
I
I
I
I
1. Automobile Liability insurance with a minimum combined single limit for
bodily injury and property damage of$l,OOO,OOO per accident.
11. Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written with limits no less
than $3,000,000 each occurrence, $3,000,000 general aggregate and a
$3,000,000 products-completed operations aggregate limit.
111. Builders Risk insurance shall be written in the amount of the completed value
of the project with no coinsurance provisions.
C. Other Insurance Provisions
I
The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions for
Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance.
I
I
I
1.
The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance with respect
to the City. Any insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage
maintained by the City shall be in excess of the Contractor's insurance and
shall not contribute with it.
II-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11. The Contractor's insurance shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not
be cancelled or reduced as to coverage by either party, except after forty-five
(45) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has
been given to the City.
D. Acceptability ofInsurers
Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best rating of not less than
A: VII.
E. Verification of Coverage
The Contractor shall furnish the City with original certificates and a copy of the amendatory
endorsements, including but not necessarily limited to the additional insured endorsement,
evidencing the Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance of the
Contractor before commencement of the work. Before any exposure to loss may occur, the
Contractor shall file with the City a copy of the Builders Risk insurance policy that includes
all applicable conditions, exclusions, definitions, terms and endorsements related to this
project.
F. Contractor's Insurance For Other Losses
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause
whatsoever to any tools, Contractor's employee owned tools, machinery, equipment, or
motor vehicles owned or rented by the Contractor, or the Contractor's agents, suppliers or
subcontractors as well as to any temporary structures, scaffolding and protective fences.
G . Waiver of Subrogation
The Contractor and the City waive all rights against each other, any of their subcontractors,
lower tier subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, for damages caused by
fire or other perils to the extent covered by Builders Risk insurance or other property
insurance obtained pursuant to the Insurance Requirements Section of this Contract or other
property insurance applicable to the work. The policies shall provide such waivers by
endorsement or otherwise.
8.
Compliance with Laws.
A. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws,
including regulations for licensing, certification, and operation of facilities and
programs, and accreditation and licensing of individuals, and any other standards or
criteria as set forth in the Project Manual.
B. The Contractor shall pay any applicable business and permit fees and taxes which
may be required for the performance ofthe work.
C.
The ContIactor shall comply with all legal and permitting requirements as set forth in
the Project Manual.
11-5
I
I
I
9. Non-discrimination.
The parties shall conduct their business in a manner which assures fair, equal and
nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons, without respect to race, creed, color, sex, Vietnam era
veteran status, disabled veteran condition, physical or mental handicap, or national origin, and, in
particular:
I
I
I
I
I
10.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. The parties will maintain open hiring and employment practices and will welcome
applications for employment in all positions from qualified individuals who are
members of the above-stated minorities.
B. The parties will comply strictly with all requirements of applicable federal, state or
local laws or regulations issued pursuant thereto, relating to the establishment of
nondiscriminatory requirements in hiring and employment practices and assuring the
service of all patrons and customers without discrimination with respect to the
above-stated minority status.
Assignment and Subcontractors.
A. The Contractor shall not assign this Contract or any interest herein, nor any money
due to or to become due hereunder, without first obtaining the written consent of the
City.
B.
The Contractor shall not subcontract any part of the services to be performed
hereunder without first obtaining the consent of the City and complying with the
provisions of this section.
c.
In the event the Contractor does assign this contract or employ any subcontractor, the
Contractor agrees to bind in writing every assignee and subcontractor to the
applicable terms and conditions of the contract documents.
D.
The Contractor shall, before commencing any work, notify the Owner in writing of
the names of any proposed subcontractors. The Contractor shall not employ any
subcontractor or other person or organization (including those who are to furnish the
principal items or materials or equipment), whether initially or as a substitute,
against whom the Owner may have reasonable objection. Each subcontractor or
other person or organization shall be identified in writing to the Owner by the
Contractor prior to the date this Contract is signed by the Contractor. Acceptance of
any subcontractor or assignee by the Owner shall not constitute a waiver of any right
of the Owner to reject defective work or work not in conformance with the contract
documents. If the Owner, at any time, has reasonable objection to a subcontractor or
assignee, the Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute.
E.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all acts and omissions of its assignees,
subcontractors and of persons and organization directly or indirectly employed by it
and of persons and organizations for whose acts any of them may be liable to the
same extent that it is responsible for the acts and omissions of person directly
employed by it.
11-6
I
I
I
F. The divisions and sections of the specifications and the identifications of any
drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the work among subcontractors
or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade.
I
G. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create or be construed to create
any relationship, contractual or otherwise, between the Owner and any subcontractor
or assignee. Nothing in the contract documents shall create any obligation on the
part of the Owner to payor to assure payment of any monies due any subcontractor
or assIgnee.
I
I
I
I
H. The Contractor hereby assigns to the City any and all claims for overcharges
resulting from antitrust violations as to goods and materials purchased in connection
with this Contract, except as to overcharges resulting from antitrust violations
commencing after the date of the bid or other event establishing the price of this
Contract. In addition, the Contractor warrants and represents that each of its
suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims for overcharges to
the City in accordance with the terms of this provision. The Contractor further
agrees to give the City immediate notice of the existence of any such claim.
I
I. In addition to all other obligations of the contractor, if the contractor does employ
any approved subcontractor, the contractor shall supply to every ap,proved
subcontractor a copy of the form, provided in the project manual, to establish written
proof that each subcontract and lower-tier subcontract is a written document and
contains, as a part, the current prevailing wage rates. The contractor, each approved
subcontractor and each approved lower-tier subcontractor shall complete and deliver
the form directly to the City.
I
I
I 1. Contract Administration.
This Contract shall be administered b~(.'ita L. ~Lt'/Ml'...c on behalf of the Contractor and by
William Sterling, Director of Recreation, on behalf of the City. Any written notices required by the
terms of this Contract shall be served or mailed to the following addresses:
I
I
I
I
Contractor:
At..O'E~(,R.()v{~S1'~l.ICT1/)IJ J 1,..( c..
6~<O ~,JSO,J {<oAt>
20'fC\ AJ-l(,~L€5} WAo
I B3'G:.3
City:
City of Port Angeles
P.O. Box 1150
321 East Fifth Street
Port Angeles, W A 98362-0217
12. Interpretation and Venue.
I
This Contract shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Washington. The venue of any litigation between the parties regarding this Contract shall be
Clallam County, Washington.
I
I
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed the
day and year first set forth above.
II-7
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR:
Title: fll6s1 C>E.N\
I f.lc..
CITY OF PORT ANGELES:
Mayor
i!~to~
City Attorney
ATTEST:
~~ ..U.prnA
City k
11-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
: '"
PERFORMANCE and PAYMENT BOND
Bond to the City of ~;tort Angeles Bond 11 104 926~
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, tile undersigned, Ald~rgro~.~~nst., Inc. as Principal, and_Travelers__ Casualty
_and Surety Company of America _8 corporation, organized and existing under the
Inws of Ule State of CT. as a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State
of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations as surety,
l\!.O iOintl~an~ se'ierallv held (log firm Iv bounddcto tho City of Port Angelos in the penal sum of
"lht".ee un rec;1 se"{renty flVe J:;nousan $37 664 4) f .
SlX hun re Slxty tour & 54/l00th'~ 5, .5 or the payment of wluch sum on
demond we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, aamlnlstrators or personal representatives,
f1S the cose may be.
This obligation is entered into pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington and the
ordlmmccs of the City of Port Angeles.
Daled at
Seattle
_, 2007 .'
, Washington, this ~ day of August
TI1e condlllons of the above obligation are such that:
WHEREAS, th8 City of Port Angeles has fet or is about to let to the said Aldergrove
_Constructi2.n. Inc. . the above bounded
Principal, a certain contrnct, the said contract being numbered ~06.11 .' and providing for Port
Angf!les Senior SeryjQes & Community CAoter A!Jdition (which contract is referred to herein and is
mnde a p~rt heroof as though attached hereto), and
WHEREAS, tlte said Principal has accepted. or is about to accept, the said contract, and
undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the- manner and within the time set forth; now,
therefore,
If the said Princip\.ll, Alderg.rove Construction, Inc. _, shall faithfully
porrorm all of the provisions of said contract in ltle manner 811d within the time therein set forth, or
within such oxtensions of time as may be granted under said contract, and shall pay alllabarers,
mechanics, subcontmctors and materialmen, and all persons who shall supply said Principal or
subcontractors With proviSions and supphes for the c1'lrrying on of said work, and shall indemnify
and hold tho City of Port Angeles harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of
pCrfOfnlOnCe as specified in said contract or from deroc:ts appoarino Or developing in the material
or ~Orl(r.nflnship rrovided or performed under s8id contract wilhin a period or one year after its
acceptance ttlereof by the City of Port Angeles, t11en And in that event, this obllg13tion shall be void;
bl'! otI,0'wisA, it shall bo and rornain in rut! ferce and effect.
Signed this ~ day of August
Travelers Casualty and Surety
__ ~omp'?!!Y......Q1::." AmeLt.~__..
fJ..(2 d.urfY I/".
y--,-~"---
R.A. Fix, Attorney in Fact
----. ---............_,----~
Tido
1501 4th Ave.
~.__Se<!Hlg..L_}:lA 98101
Surety Addn;lss
Inc.
, 2022."
By
TItle
CB&MS OF WA., INC.
]0 Box 75715 - Seatt,le, HA 98175
AgElnt Address
Kyle ..smith~:326-~.2~__
Surety Conltlct ilnd Phone Number
N.B. Fix 206-361-9693
-....--....-..-..
Agent Contact and Phone Number
11-9
I
. .....
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
_ TRAVELERS
POWER OF ATTORNEY
I
Farmington Casualty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
I
I
Attorney-In Fact No.
214858
Certificate No. 0 0 16 8 213 0
I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Seaboard Surety Company IS a corporatIOn duly organIzed under the laws of the State of New York, that St Paul
Fire and Manne Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporatIOns duly organIzed under the laws
of the State of Mmnesota, that Farmmgton Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of Amenca are
corporatIOns duly organIzed under the laws of the State of ConnectIcut, that UnIted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company IS a corporatIOn duly organIZed under the
laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company IS a corporatIOn duly organIzed under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that FIdelity and
Guaranty Insurance Underwnters, Inc IS a corporatIOn duly organIzed under the laws of the State of Wlsconsm (herem collectIVely called the "Compames"), and that
the Compames do hereby make, constItute and appomt
I
Christine V Fehcetty, N B FIX, R A FIX, and Myung S FIX
I
I
of the City of Seattle , State of Washmgton , theIr true and lawful Attorney(s)-m-Fact,
each m theIr separate capacIty If more than one IS named above, to sIgn, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recogmzances, condItIOnal undertakmgs and
other wntmgs obligatory m the nature thereof on behalf of the CompanIes m theu, busmess of~guaranteemg the fidelity of persons, guaranteemg the performance of
contracts and executmg or guaranteemg bonds and undertakmgs reqUIred or p~np,itted m anya~tions or wo~eedmgs allowed by law
-<I, ", 0'
I
I
," ~ ~ ."
IN WITNE~J~EREOF, the Compa~~ve caused thIS ms~~el1,t ,to' b,e sJg,neCl and th~~~ :~orPorate seals to be hereto affixed, thIS
day of , ,""" " ',:, "1",, ,
, ,
,..{;" \
)
8th
I; ,~
I
Farmington Casualty Comp'apy ," : , " "
Fidelity and Guaranty Ins'ur~pce\Gpmp'any/,~'_, /'\ ~,
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
I
I
o
~
~~~;--"""
/v~ -11-('1"'10
I: (.o"POR.q,.~ ,.. \
l~ -.- Oi
V..,SE;:tJL. l'
~s . ''t-~~
-
I
State of ConnectIcut
CIty of Hartford ss
By'
I
6th
June
2007
I
On thIS the day of , before me personally appeared George W, Thompson, who acknowledged
hImself to be the SenIor VIce PreSIdent of Fanmngton\Casualty Company, FIdelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwnters,
Inc , Seaboard Surety Company, St Paul Fire and Marme Insurance Company, St Paul GuardIan Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers
Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of Amenca, and UnIted States FIdelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, bemg
authonzed so to do, executed the foregomg mstrument for the purposes therem contamed by sIgnIng on behalf of the corporatIOns by hImself as a duly authonzed officer
I
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and offiCIal seal
My CommIssIOn expIres the 30th day of June, 2011
'\f\w c. j~
'- Mane C Tetreault, Notary PublIc
I
I
58440-8-06 Pnnted In U.S A
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
,.. .
This Power of Attorney IS granted under and by the authonty of the followmg resolutIOns adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmmgton Casualty Company, Fidelity
and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwnters, Inc , Seaboard Surety Company, St Paul Fire and Manne Insurance Company,
St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of
Amenca, and Umted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutIOns are now in full force and effect, readmg as follows
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
RESOLVED, that the ChaIrman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Semor Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice
President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any ASSistant Secretary may appomt Attorneys-m-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf
of the Company and may give such appomtee such authonty as hiS or her cert1f'icate of authonty may prescnbe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the
Company's seal bonds, recogmzances, contracts of mdemmty, and other wntmgs obligatory m the nature of a bond, recogmzance, or conditional undertakmg, and any
of saId officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appomtee and revoke the power given him or her, and It IS
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the ChaIrman, the President, any Vice ChaIrman, any Executive Vice President, any Semor Vice President or any Vice President may
delegate all or any part of the foregomg authonty to one or more officers or employees of thiS Company, provided that each such delegatIOn IS m wntmg and a copy
thereof IS filed m the office of the Secretary, and It IS
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recogmzance, contract of mdemmty, or wntmg obligatory m the nature of a bond, recogmzance, or conditIOnal undertakmg
shall be valid and bmdmg upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Semor Vice President or any Vice
President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any ASSistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any ASSistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed With the
Company's seal by a Secretary or ASSistant Secretary, or (b) duly executed (under seal, IfreqUlred) by one or more Attorneys-m-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power
prescnbed m hiS or her certificate or theIr certificates of authonty or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a wntten delegatIOn of authonty, and It IS
I
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the followmg officers President, any Executive Vice President, any Semor Vice President, any Vice President,
any AS<;lstant Vice President, any Secretary, any ASSistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by faCSimile to any power of attorney or to any
certificate relatmg thereto appomtmg Resident Vice Presidents, Resident ASSistant Secretanes or Attorneys-m-Fact for purposes only of executmg and attestmg bonds
and undertakmgs and other wntmgs obligatory m the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate beanng such faCSimile signature or faCSimile seal shall
be valid and bmdmg upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsllllile signature and faCSimile seal shall be valid and bmdmg on the
Company m the future With respect to any bond or understandmg to which It IS attached
I
I, Kon M Johanson, the underSigned, ASSistant Secretary, of Fannmgton Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwnters, Inc, Seaboard Surety Company, St Paul Fire and Manne Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance
Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Suryty,Cqm~any_pfAmenc_ac-and Umted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby
-<-~-'-,-,.,. h ,I'\..- "~'\,}
certify that the above and foregomg IS a true and correct copy of the Powe{ Qf Attorne)(~executed by sais!,eompames, which IS m full force and effect and has not been
"',....\, ''''-..';,,'''' .< ~~ 'f:"'.Y ~ 1"-, ,,\ J
revoked \~":,,~ "'_ \~,)\~~\"" 1 '~~~i""\I"
,;f~'-~- '-,'~" <f.<" -
cl., '- " ...... \\......
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affi~~(J'~~e~~eais ~;~~I~:Co~~ames thiS 16th day of AUGUST ,20 07
~ "",~~\ 1"'-'> ~ \~~':,it "' ~ :\\ 't. v'
I
I
I
Kon M Johans
I
I
...~;-.....
/v~q; .q1-~.
I: e01'POR,q1"l' ~ \
i~ -.- Oi
~"....SdAL ~.
0" ..~
"s";" ~~
I
To venfy the authenticity of thiS Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at wwwstpaultravelersbond com Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number,
the above-named mdlVlduals and the detaIls of the bond to which the power IS attached
I
I
I
I
I
WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 2 of 9
ACORD. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP 10 1~ DATE (MMlDDIYYYY)
ALDEC01 08/20/07
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
Ralston & Ralston ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
An EHL Insurance Company HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
P.O. Box 1405 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Port Angeles w.A 98362
Phone: 360-452-8415 Fax:866-697-4598 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A United National Ins. CO.
INSURER B Amer1can states Ins Co 19704
Aldergrove Construction, Inc. INSURER C &urich Insurance Se1:vices, me
336 Benson Rd. INSURER D
Port Angeles w.A 98363
INSURER E
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS
LTR NSR[ TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER D'1..W(~~I8D'rm~ DATE' (MMIDDIYY) LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000
-
A X ~ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 1.7205204 01/23/07 01/23/08 LJ~:"N"j~ v Kcl" CU $ 50,000
::=J CLAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR PREMISES (Ea occur.nce)
MED EXP (Anyone person) $ 5,000
f--
PERSONAL & i'DV INJURY $1,000,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000
!xl POLICY n j~2T n LOC
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
f-- $1,000,000
B X ~ ANY AlJTO 24CC165338 01/23/07 01/23/08 (Ea aCCIdent)
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODIL Y INJURY
f-- $
SCHEDULED AlJTOS (Per person)
f--
HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
f-- $
NON-OWNED AUTOS (per aCCident)
f--
f-- PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per aCCident)
GARAGE LIABILITY AlJTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
~ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AlJTO ONLY AGG $
EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $
~ OCCUR o CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $
$
~ DEDUCTIBLE $
RETENTION $ $
WORKERS COMPENSATlON AND IT~R\ t:~,~'ii T IVEFi
A EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 1.7205204 01/23/07 01/23/08 $1,000,000
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNERlEXEClJTIVE E L EACH ACCIDENT
OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? E L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000
If yes, descnbe under E L DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below
OTHER
C Builder's Risk BR66191992 08/20/07 08/20/08 Addition $375,665
Ded. $1,000
DESCRlPTlDN OF OPERATlONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PROJECT 06-11, Port Angeles Senior Services & Community Center Addition
city of Port Angeles is named as additional insured on builder's risk
coverage, auto insurance, per policy form CA7110(0905), and general
liab1lity insurance, per policy form SL-46 (1096) . Coverage for general
liability is primary & non-contributory within the policy form CGOO01(0196)
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
CITYPAl SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATlON
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 45 DAYS WRITTEN
-
NOTlCE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHAlLL
City of Port Angeles IMPOSE NO OBLIGATlON OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS DR
P.O. Box 1350
Port Angeles w.A 98362 REPRESENTATIVES
~ENTATIVE ~
m.
ACORD 25 (2001108)
@ ACORD CORPORATION 1988
From Deana Mc:lntyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
Date 812012007 0235 PM Page 3 of 9
I
I
I
IMPORTANT
I
If the certificate holder IS an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the pollcY(les) must be endorsed A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s)
I
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the POliCY, certain policies may
require an endorsement A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder In lieu of such endorsement(s)
I
DISCLAIMER
I
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the IssUIng Insurer(s), authOrized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does It
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ACORD 25 (2001/08)
I
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 4 of 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..~~ ~
A
POUCY.t:~ '. COMMERClAL.,
:lilll aALUA8IUt'Y
\ . 8L.-4I (1WII)
nIIt 1I~.u 0Hn.Hf-. THE POLICY. pt..IE RUD_.lLlehLLV.
BUJIKET ADDI110HAL INSURED. 0WNERe" ,...&. CON .kACTORS
FORM 8
1hII........1I1~ Ii1Ie.nnoI p'1NIcIMt undIrthefdlowlnsF
COMUEROIAL GEMEiRM. UABlLITV COWAAGe'PART
8C1fJ1D1U.
.....ac P!InIan <<0tpJ....~ BLANKET ,;,
r.
"'" Pw1lGR or OfQ8ntadlcln.ThIt. By Yfrtue Of An ........ Corttradf. "'.,... The Named
Inand Th Nllme1'hem Aa An ~ fn8UrIId. I .
(It no entIy ...... aboVe. It10tmdan ...... to oampIItt WI ~. .., be shown In the
0ectIuIItI0ne _ ~ to this elldotlem8nt.) ;-
WHO IS /1M NURED ~ It) ~ ...~to __. art '1nIIncf' .~ 01 ~
.... In, tbe ---. .. .., .. ...,.. II>> ...., .,.,.. out 01 1IIt:..,..- ct OF' omIukJn at
'}owIt. . 1 .
}.'. .
'.' '.
~
&-46 (lC)l91)
P..,1 of f
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 5 of 9
.... REPRINTED FROM THE FORMS LIBRARY''''
_Insurance
e
COMMERCIAL AUTO
CA 71 10 09 05
THIS ENDORSEMENT
CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.
ULTRA AUTO PLUS ENDORSEMENT
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:
BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM
With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless
modified by the endorsement.
EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION
Paragraph 2.b. of the CANCELLATION Common
Policy Condition is replaced by the following:
b. 60 days before the effective date of cancellation
if we cancel for any other reason.
TEMPORARY SUBSTITUTE AUTO - PHYSICAL
DAMAGE COVERAGE
Under paragraph C. - CERTAIN TRAILERS, MO-
BILE EQUIPMENT AND TEMPORARY SUBSTITUTE
AUTOS of SECTION 1 - COVERED AUTOS, the
following is added:
If Physical Damage coverage is provided by this Cov-
erage Form, then you have coverage for:
Any "auto" you do not own while used with the per-
mission of its owner as a temporary substitute for a
covered "auto" you own that is out of service be-
cause of its breakdown, repair, servicing, "loss" or
destruction.
BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED
BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED
SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE - A.1. WHO
IS AN INSURED provision is amended by the addition
of the following:
e. Any person or organization for whom you are re-
quired by an "insured contract" to provide insur-
ance is an "insured", subject to the following
additional provisions:
(1) The "insured contract" must be in effect
during the policy period shown in the Decla-
rations, and must have been executed prior
to the "bodily injury" or "property damage".
(2) This person or organization is an "insured"
only to the extent you are liable due to your
ongoing operations for that insured, whether
the work is performed by you or for you, and
only to the extent you are held liable for an
"accident" occurring while a covered "auto"
IS being driven by you or one of your em-
ployees.
(3) There is no coverage provided to this person
or organization for "bodily injury" to its em-
ployees, nor for "property damage" to its
property.
(4) Coverage for this person or organization
shall be limited to the extent of your negli-
gence or fault according to the applicable
principles of comparative negligence or fault.
(5) The defense of any claim or "suit" must be
tendered by this person or organization as
soon as practicable to all other insurers
which potentially provide insurance for such
claim or "suit".
SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE - A.1. WHO
IS AN INSURED provision is amended by the addition
of the following:
d. Any business entity newly acquired or formed by
you during the policy period provided you own
50% or more of the business entity and the
business entity is not separately insured for
Business Auto Coverage. Coverage is extended
up to a maximum of 180 days following acquisi-
tion or formation of the business entity. Coverage
under thiS provision is afforded only until the end
of the policy period.
Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission.
Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1997
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 6 of 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.,,. REPRINTED FROM THE FORMS LIBRARY''''
(6) The coverage provided will not exceed the
lesser of:
(a) The coverage and/or limits of this policy;
or
(b) The coverage and/or limits required by
the binsured contract ".
(7) A person's or organization's status as an
"insured" under this subparagraph d ends
when your operations for that "Insured" are
completed.
FELLOW EMPLOYEE COVERAGE - EXECUTIVE
OFFICERS
Exclusion 5. FELLOW EMPLOYEE of SECTION 11-
LIABILITY COVERAGE - B. EXCLUSIONS is
amended by the addition of the following:
This exclUSion does not apply to liability incurred by
your employees that are executive officers.
PHYSICAL DAMAGE - ADDITIONAL TRANS-
PORTATION EXPENSE COVERAGE
The first sentence of paragraph A.4. of SECTION III
- PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended as
follows:
We Will pay up to $50 per day to a maximum of
$1,500 for temporary transportation expense incurred
by you because of the total theft of a covered "auto"
of the private passenger type.
EXTRA EXPENSE - BROADENED COVERAGE
Paragraph A. - COVERAGE of SECTION III
PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended to
add:
5. We will pay for the expense of returning a stolen
covered "auto" to you.
AIRBAG COVERAGE
Under paragraph B. - EXCLUSIONS of SECTION III
- PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the following is
added:
The exclusion relating to mechanical breakdown does
not apply to the accidental discharge of an airbag.
LEASE GAP COVERAGE
Under paragraph C - LIMIT OF INSURANCE of
SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE,
the following is added:
4. The most we will pay for a total "loss" in anyone
"accident" is the greater of the following, subject
to a $1,500 maximum limit:
a. Actual cash value of the damaged or stolen
property as of the time of the bloss", less an
adjustment for depreciation and physical
condition; or
b. Balance due under the terms of the loan or
lease that the damaged covered "auto" is
subject to at the time of the "loss", less any
one or all of the following adjustments:
(1) Overdue payment and financial
penalties associated with those
payments as of the date of the
"loss".
(2) Financial penalties imposed under a
lease due to high mileage, exces-
sive use or abnormal wear and tear.
(3) Costs for extended warranties, Cre-
dit Life Insurance, Health, Accident
or Disability Insurance purchased
with the loan or lease.
(4) Transfer or rollover balances from
previous loans or leases.
(5) Final payment due under a "Balloon
Loan".
(6) The dollar amount of any
un-repaired damage that occurred
prior to the "total loss" of a covered
"auto" .
(7) Security deposits not refunded by a
lessor.
(8) All refunds payable or paid to you
as a result of the early termination
of a lease agreement or any war-
ranty or extended service agree-
ment on a covered "auto".
(9) Any amount representing taxes.
(10) Loan or lease termination fees
GLASS REPAIR - WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE
Under paragraph D. - DEDUCTIBLE of SECTION III
- PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, the following is
added:
No deductible applies to glass damage if the glass is
repaired rather than replaced.
AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCI-
DENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS
The requirement in LOSS CONDITION
DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT,
2.a. -
CLAIM,
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
I
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 7 of g
.... REPRINTED FROM THE FORMS LIBRARy....
I
SUIT OR LOSS - of SECTION IV - BUSINESS
AUTO CONDITIONS that you must notify us of an
"accident" applies only when the "accident" is known
to:
I
(1) You, if you are an individual;
(2) A partner, If you are a partnership; or
(3) An executive officer or insurance manager, if you
are a corporation.
I
I
UNINTENTIONAL
HAZARDS
FAILURE TO DISCLOSE
I
SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS
8.2. IS amended by the addition of the following:
I
If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards ex-
Isting at the inception date of your policy, we will not
deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of
such failure. However, thiS provision does not affect
our right to collect additional premium or exercise our
right of cancellation or non-renewal.
I
RESULTANT MENTAL ANGUISH COVERAGE
I
SECTION V - DEFINITIONS - C. is replaced by the
following:
I
"Bodily inJUry" means bodily inJury, Sickness or diS-
ease sustained by a person including mental anguish
or death resulting from any of these.
I
HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE
I
If hired "autos" are covered "autos" for Liability cov-
erage and if Comprehensive, Specified Causes of
Loss or ColliSion coverages are provided under this
Coverage Form for any "auto" you own, then the
Physical Damage Coverages provided are extended
to "autos" you hire or borrow of the pnvate passenger
or light truck (10,000 Ibs. or less gross vehicle weight)
type, subject to the follOWing limit.
I
I
The most we will pay for loss to any hired "auto" is
$50,000 or Actual Cash Value or Cost of Repair,
whichever IS smallest, minus a deductible. The de-
ductible Will be equal to the largest deductible appli-
cable to any owned "auto" of the private passenger
or light truck type for that coverage. Hired Auto
PhYSical Damage coverage is excess over any other
collectible insurance. Subject to the above limit, de-
ductible and excess prOVIsions, we will provide cov-
erage equal to the broadest coverage applicable to
any covered "auto" you own of the private passenger
or light truck type.
I
I
I
I
CA 71 10 09 05
I
HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE -
LOSS OF USE
SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE A.4.b. Form
does not apply.
Subject to a maximum of $1,000 per accident, we will
cover loss of use of a hired "auto" If It results from
an aCCident, you are legally liable and the lessor In.
curs an actual financial loss.
RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT COVERAGE
A. This coverage applies only to a covered "auto"
of the private passenger or light truck (10,000
Ibs. or less gross vehicle weight) type.
B. We will pay for rental reimbursement expenses
Incurred by you for the rental of an "auto" be-
cause of a covered "loss" to a covered "auto."
Payment applies in addition to the otherwise ap-
plicable amount of each coverage you have on a
covered "auto." No deductibles apply to this
coverage.
C. We will pay only for those expenses incurred
dunng the policy period beginning 24 hours after
the "loss" and ending, regardless of the policy's
expiration, with the lesser of the follOWing number
of days:
1. The number of days reasonably required to
repair or replace the covered "auto." If
"loss" is caused by theft, this number of
days IS added to the number of days It takes
to locate the covered "auto" and return it to
you.
2. 30 days.
D. Our payment is limited to the lesser of the fol-
10wI ng amounts:
1. Necessary and actual expenses incurred.
2. $50 per day.
E. ThiS coverage does not apply while there are
spare or reserve "autos" availableto you for your
operations.
F. If "loss" results from the total theft of a covered
"auto" of the private passenger type, we will pay
under this coverage only that amount of your
rental reimbursement expenses which is not al-
ready provided for under the PHYSICAL DAM-
AGE COVERAGE Coverage ExtenSion.
G. The Rental Reimbursement Coverage described
above does not apply to a covered "auto" that is
descnbed or designated as a covered "auto" on
Page 3 of 5
EP
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
I
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 8 of 9
.... REPRINTED FROM THE FORMS LIBRARY''''
I
Rental Reimbursement Coverage Form CA 99
23.
I
AUDIO, VISUAL AND DATA ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT COVERAGE
I
A. Coverage
1. We will pay with respect to a covered "auto"
for "loss" to any electronic equipment that
receives or transmits audio, visual or data
signals and that is not designed solely for the
reproduction of sound. This coverage applies
only if the equipment IS permanently installed
In the covered "auto" at the time of the
"loss" or the equipment is removable from a
housing unit which IS permanently installed
in the covered "auto" at the time of the
"loss", and such equipment is designed to
be solely operated by use of the power from
the "auto's" electrical system, in or upon the
covered "auto."
I
I
I
I
2. We will pay with respect to a covered "auto"
for "loss" to any accessories used with the
electronic equipment described In paragraph
A.1. above. However, this does not include
tapes, records or discs.
3. If AudiO, Visual and Data Electronic EquIp-
ment Coverage form CA 99 60 or CA 99 94
is attached to thiS policy, then the AudiO, VI-
sual and Data Electronic Equipment Cover-
age described above does not apply.
B. Exclusions
The exclusions that apply to PHYSICAL DAM-
AGE COVERAGE, except for the exclusion relat-
Ing to Audio, Visual and Data Electronic
Equipment, also apply to this coverage. In addi-
tion, the following exclusions apply:
We will not pay for either any electronic equip-
ment or accessories used with such electronic
equipment that is'
1. Necessary for the normal operation of the
covered "auto" for the monitoring of the
covered "auto's" operating system; or
2. Both'
a. an Integral part of the same Unit housing
any sound reproducing equipment de-
signed solely for the reproduction of
sound if the sound reproducing equip-
ment is permanently installed in the
covered "auto"; and
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. permanently installed in the opening of
the dash or console normally used by
I
I
the manufacturer for the installation of a
radio.
C. Limit of Insurance
With respect to this coverage, the LIMIT OF IN-
SURANCE provision of PHYSICAL DAMAGE
COVERAGE is replaced by the following:
1. The most we will pay for "loss" to audio, VI-
sual or data electronic equipment and any
accessories used with this equipment as a
result of anyone "accident" is the lesser of:
a. The actual cash value of the damaged
or stolen property as of the time of the
"loss"; or
b. The cost of repairing or replacing the
damaged or stolen property with other
property of like kind and quality.
c. $1,000.
2. An adjustment for depreciation and physical
condition will be made in determining actual
cash value at the time of the "loss."
3. If a repair or replacement results in better
than like kind or quality, we will not pay for
the amount of the betterment.
D. Deductible
1. If "loss" to the audiO, visual or data elec-
tronic equipment or accessories used with
thiS equipment is the result of a "loss" to the
covered "auto" under the BUSiness Auto
Coverage Form's ComprehenSive or Colli-
sion Coverage, then for each covered "auto"
our obligation to pay for, repair, return or re-
place damaged or stolen property Will be re-
duced by the applicable deductible shown in
the Declarations. Any ComprehenSive Cov-
erage deductible shown in the Declarations
does not apply to "loss" to audio, visual or
data electronic equipment caused by fire or
lightning
2. If "loss" to the audio, visual or data elec-
tronic equipment or accessories used with
this equipment IS the result of a "loss" to the
covered "auto" under the BUSiness Auto
Coverage Form's Specified Causes of Loss
Coverage, then for each covered "auto" our
obligation to pay for, repair, return or replace
damaged or stolen property will be reduced
by a $100 deductible.
3. If "loss" occurs solely to the audiO, Visual or
data electronic equipment or accessories
used with this equipment, then for each cov-
ered "auto" our obligation to pay for, repair,
Page 4 of 5
From Deana Mcintyre At Ralston & Ralston, Inc FaxlD 360-697-4598 To Walt Dalrymple
Date 812012007 02 35 PM Page 9 of 9
I
.
.... REPRINTED fROM THE fORMS LIBRARy....
I
return or replace damaged or stolen property
will be reduced by a $100 deductible.
4. In the event that there IS more than one ap-
plicable deductible, only the highest deduct-
Ible will apply. In no event will more than one
deductible apply.
I
I
BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION
I
We waive the right of recovery we may have for pay-
ments made for "bodily injury" or "property damage"
on behalf of the persons or organizations added as
"Insureds" under Section " - LIABILITY COVERAGE
- A.1.D. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED and
A.1.e. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CA 71 10 09 05
I
PERSONAL EFFECTS COVERAGE
A. SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVER-
AGE, A 4. COVERAGE EXTENSIONS, IS
amended by adding the following:
c. Personal Effects Coverage
For any Owned "auto" that is involved in a
covered "loss", we Will pay up to $500 for
"personal effects" that are lost or damaged
as a result of the covered '1oss", without
applying a deductible.
B. SECTION V - DEFINITIONS is amended by ad-
ding the following:
Q. "Personal effects" means your tangible
property that is worn or carried by you, ex-
cept for tools, jewelry, money, or seCUrities.
Page 5 of 5
EP
I
I
ESCROW AGREEMENT for RETAINED PERCENTAGE
Port Angeles Senior Services & Community Center Addition, Project 06-11
I
I
TO
I
I
THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT IS for the investment of the
retained percentage of the above contract, In accordance with
chapter 60 28 of the Revised Code of Washington It IS limited
to FDIC Insured Washington State Chartered Banks who are
covered by the State of Washington Public Deposit Protection
Act
I
The undersigned, . (as
"Contractor"), has directed the CITY OF PORT ANGELES (as
"City"), to deliver to you its warrants which shall be payable to
you and/or the contractor The warrants are to be held and
disposed of by you In accordance with the follOWing instruction.
I
INSTRUCTIONS
I
1 . Upon delivery the warrants shall be endorsed by you
and forwarded to the City for collection You shall use
the momes to purchase Investments selected by the
Contractor and approved by the City You may follow
the last wntten direction received by you from the
Contractor, for each purchase, provided the direction
otherwise conforms WIth this agreement Acceptable
investments are
A Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the Umted
States,
B Other obligations of the Umted States or ItS
agencies,
C ObligatIons of any corporation wholly owned by
the Govemment of the United States,
D Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage
Assoclalion,
E Time depOSits In commercial banks,
F Other investments, except stocks, selected by the
Contractor, subject to express pnor wntten
consent of the City
2 The Investments shall be In a form which allows you
alone to reconvert them Into money If you are required to
do so by the City
3 The Investments must mature on or prior to the date set
for the completion of the contract, Including extension
there of or thirty (30) days follOWing the final acceptance
of the work
4 When Interest on the Investments accrues and IS paid,
you shall collect the Interest and forward It to the
Contractor unless otherwise directed by the Contractor
5 You are not authonzed to deliver to the Contractor all or
any part of the Investments held by you pursuant to this
agreement (or any momes denved from the sale of such
Investments, or the negotiation of the City'S warrants)
except In accordance with the wntten Instructions from
the City Compliance with such Instruclions shall relieve
you of any further liability related thereto
6 In the event the City orders you, In writing, to reconvert
the Investments and retum all momes, you shall do so
within thirty (30) days of receipt of the order
7 The Contractor agrees to compensate you for your
services In accordance with your current published
schedule of applicable escrow fees Payment of all fees
shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Escrow No.:
City of Port Angeles Contract No. ....QQ..:11
Completion Date:
not be deducted from any monies placed with you
pursuant to this agreement until and unless the City
directs the release to the Contractor of the Investments
and monies held hereunder, whereupon you shall be
entitled to relmbu rse yourself from such momes for the
entire amount of your fee
8 This agreement shall not be binding until signed by both
parties and accepted by you
9 This document contains the entire agreement between
you, the Contractor, and the City, with respect to this
Escrow, and you are not a party to, nor bound by any
Instrument or agreement other than this You shall not be
reqUired to take notice of any default or any other matter,
nor be bound by nor required to give notice or demand,
nor required to take any action whatever except as herein
expressly provided. You shall not be liable for any loss or
damage not caused by your own negligence or WIllful
misconduct
CONTRACTOR
Federal Tax I D No.
By
TItle
Address
DATE
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
By
TItle
DATE
THE ABOVE ESCROW AGREEMENT RECEIVED AND
ACCEPTED on the _ day of 20_
BANK
By
TItle
Address
DISTRIBUTION
City Clerk
Financial Institution
Contractor
File Copy
II-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART III
SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AND SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
See Section 1-04.2 of the Standard Specifications for the general order of precedence
for inconsistency in the parts of the Contract. Replace the numbered list in Section 1-
04.2 with the following: The order of precedence in the case of conflicting specifications,
special provisions, submittal requirements, plans, drawings, or other technical
requirements of this Project Manual is as follows:
1. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those with earlier
dates.
2. Bidding and Contract forms - Parts I and II of this Project Manual.
3. Special Provisions as set forth in Part III of this Project Manual, pages 111-1
through 111-13.
4. Technical Specifications, Divisions 2-16, as set forth Part IV, Attachment A of this
Project Manual.
5. Submittal Requirements, as listed on pages 111- 14 through 111- 16.
6. Project Plans, as set forth in Part IV, Attachment F of this Project Manual.
7. 2003 International Building Code and other Professional Codes.
8. Washington State Department of Transportation's 2006 Standard Specifications
for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction (English Units), referred to herein
as the Standard Specifications.
9. Washington State Department of Transportation's Standard Plans
10.Attachments (exclusive of the above-mentioned) as set forth in Part IV of the
Project Manual.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
This Contract incorporates the Washington State Department of Transportation's 2006
Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction (English Units),
referred to herein as the Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise superseded as
detailed above, the Standard Specifications describe the general requirements,
description, materials, construction requirements, measurement and payment of work to
be completed under this Contract.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The following Special Provisions supersede any conflicting provisions of the Standard
Specifications and are made a part of this contract. The Sections referenced in these
Special Provisions refer to Sections of the Standard Specifications.
1-01.3 DEFINITIONS
The term "Contract Bond" is understood to be equal to "Performance and Payment
Bond" for this project.
III -1
1II-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The term "State" and "Owner" are redefined to mean the City of Port Angeles for this
project.
The term "Commission" is redefined for this project to mean the City Council of the City
of Port Angeles.
The term "Secretary" is redefined for this project to mean the Director of Public Works
for the City of Port Angeles.
The term "Department" is redefined to mean the City of Port Angeles Department of
Public Works & Utilities for this project.
The terms "Architect", "Engineer", "Project Engineer", and "Owner's Representative" are
redefined for this project to mean the City Engineer for the City of Port Angeles or any
party designated by him to act on behalf of the City of Port Angeles.
The terms "Contract" and "Project Manual" are interchangeable.
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by the Contractor allocating portions of the
Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing the
Contractor's Application for Payment.
REFERENCE STANDARDS:
Section 1-01.2 is supplemented with the following:
The following list of abbreviations, which may be used in the construction specifications,
refer to the organizations and specifications of the organizations listed below:
AAMA
Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association
2700 River Road, Suite 118
Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
ACI
American Concrete Institute
Box 19150, Redford Station
Detroit, Michigan 48219
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
400 North Michigan Avenue, 8th floor
Chicago, Illinois 60611
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
1430 Broadway
New York, New York 10018
I
I
APA American Plywood Association
I P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, Washington 98411
I ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Drive
P.O. Box C700
I West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428
FM Factory Mutual Research Corporation
I 1151 Boston Providence Turnpike
Norwood, Massachusetts 02062
I NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers
600 South Federal Street, Suite 400
I Chicago, Illinois 60605
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
I Batterymarch Park
Quincy, Massachusetts 02269
I NLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc.
4 Fundy Road
Falmouth, Maine 04105
I NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
O'Hare International Center
I 10255 W. Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, Illinois 60018-5607
I OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
I PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
I Skokie, Illinois 60077
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
I Association, Inc.
P.O. Box 70
Merrifield, Virginia 22116
I UBC Uniform Building Code
5360 South Workman Mill Road
I Whittier, California 90601
III - 3
I
III - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, Illinois 60062
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
Yeon Building
Portland, Oregon 97204
1-02.2 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Section 1-02.2 of the Standard Specifications is deleted and replaced with the following:
Information as to where plans and specifications can be obtained or reviewed will be
found in the advertisement for the work placed in the Owner's official newspaper.
1-02.5 PROPOSAL FORMS
The term "prequalified" is deleted from Section 1-02.5 of the Standard Specifications for
this project.
1-02.9 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL
Section 1-02.9 of the Standard Specifications is modified in its entirety for this project to
now read as follows:
Each proposal shall be submitted in accordance with the instructions outlined in the
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS and the INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS AND BIDDER'S
CHECK LIST. I
1-03.4 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
In accordance with Section 1-03.4 of the Standard Specifications the Contractor shall .
execute a Performance and Payment Bond as provided in the Contract. The bond shall
specify the surety's name and address and shall include a power-of-attorney appointing
the signatory of the bond as the person authorized to execute it.
1-04.4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 1-04.4, Changes, of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to add the
following:
All revisions, clarifications, field requests and field authorizations for construction
contracts shall be documented using the "REQUEST FOR INFORMATION" form. A
construction contract change order may be initiated by the Contractor, City inspector, or
Architect/Engineer by using the RFI form, PW-404_02.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Definitions:
a. RFI: Request for Information (City of Port Angeles' Document PW 404_02)
b. CCO: Construction Change Order (City of Port Angeles' Document PW 404_04)
PROTECTION, RESTORATION AND CLEAN-UP
Section 1-04.11, Final Cleanup, and Section 1-07.16, Protection and Restoration of
Property, of the Standard Specifications shall be supplemented with the following:
The work done under this item consists of restoring, cleaning and repairing property
impacted by the work, and restoration of other existing features of the landscape which
are deemed necessary by the Engineer.
Progress cleaning: Clean project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has
worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. Maintain project
site free of waste materials and debris. Clean areas where work is in progress to the
level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
a. Remove liquid spills promptly
b. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or
vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning
materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
Concealed spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Cutting and patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are
performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition,
Waste disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted.
Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure
protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
III - 5
III - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components toensure operability without damaging effects.
Limiting exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
Protection of installed construction: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that
ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and
relative humidity.
Correction of the work: Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore
damaged substrates and finishes. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,
refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to
their specified condition. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to
view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. Repair
components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or
reflective surfaces.
Final Cleaning: Clean each surface or unit to condition expected inan average
commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
A. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,
and other foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from the project site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess
nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass indoors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-
obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged
transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch
surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent. Do not remove or paint over "UL"
and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator
equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and
mortar droppings and other foreign substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
q. Clean light fitures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, andthose noticeably dimmed by
hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury
vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
B. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials, Do not
bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile,
harmful, or dangerous materials in to drainage systems. Remove waste materials
from project site and dispose of lawfully.
The lump sum contract price shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools,
and equipment necessary to complete this item as specified or as directed by the
Engineer.
PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS
Unless otherwise required by the Submittal Requirements, Section 1-05.3 of the
Standard Specifications shall apply.
1-05.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Section 1-05.5 is supplemented with the following:
As-built drawings are required to be maintained by the Contractor. The as-built
drawings shall be a record of the construction as installed and completed by the
Contractor. They shall include all the information shown on the contract set of drawings
III - 7
1II-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
and a record of all construction deviations, modifications or changes from those
drawings which were incorporated in the work; all additional work not appearing on the
contract drawings; all design submittals, including electrical schematics; and all changes
which are made after final inspection of the contract work.
The Contractor shall mark up a set of full size plans using red ink to show the as-built
conditions. These as-built marked prints shall be kept current and available on the job
site at all times, and be made available to the City Engineer upon request. The
changes from the contract plans which are made in the work or additional information
which might be uncovered in the course of construction shall be accurately and neatly
recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. No construction work shall be
concealed until it has been inspected, approved, and recorded. The drawings shall
show at least the following:
a. The location and description of any utilities or other installations known to
exist and or encountered within the construction area. The location of
these utilities shall include an accurate description, dimensions, and at
least 2 ties to permanent features for all utilities encountered.
b. The location and description of all facilities and appurtenances installed by the
Contractor. The location of facilities and appurtenances shall include accurate
dimensions and at least 2 ties to permanent features for all major components,
including gate valves.
The City of Port Angeles has the right to deny progress payments for completed
work if as-built records, as required by this section, are not available on the job
site for the work that has been completed by the date of the payment request.
Final as-builts shall be delivered to the City Engineer at the time of final inspection for
review and approval. As-built drawings must be approved by the City Engineer before
final payment will be made. See Submittal Requirements for additional information.
1-05.10 GUARANTEES
Section 1-05 is supplemented with the following:
The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment furnished and work
performed for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The
Contractor shall warrant and guarantee for a period of one (1) year from the date of
substantial completion of the system that the completed system is free from all defects
due to faulty materials or workmanship, and the Contractor shall promptly make such
corrections as may be necessary by reason of such defects including the repairs of any
damage to other parts of the system resulting from such defects. The City will give
notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. In the event that the
Contractor should fail to make such repairs, adjustments, or other work that may be
made necessary by such defects, the City may do so and charge the Contractor the
cost thereby incurred. The Performance and Payment Bond shall remain in full force
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
and effect through the guarantee period.
Cracks or imperfections that may occur, for any reason, within the one year guarantee
period in gypsum wallboard surfaces, shall be repaired and the surfaces repainted at no
cost to the Owner.
All corrective work performed by the Contractor in remedying defective work shall be
subject to the same guarantee requirements of the original Work for a period of no less
than one year from the date of completion of the corrective work.
As directed by the Engineer, replace entirely, at no additional cost to the Owner, any
work requiring repeated service during correction period.
Contractor and his roofing and exterior sheet metal subcontractors, jointly and severally,
shall warrant roofing of all types installed, built-up base flashing, exterior sheet metal
work, preformed metal roofing, plus all other work which is a component part of or
penetrating or projecting through the roofing, to be watertight and weather tight against
ordinary wear and usage for period of (2) two years from and after the date of Final
Completion. This warranty shall be in addition to any other Manufacturer and/or
installation warranty available to the Owner and shall be in addition to the duty
otherwise required for correcting defective work.
Measurement and Payment
All costs associated with this item shall be incidental to the lump sum bid price.
STATE SALES TAX
The work on this Contract is to be performed upon lands whose ownership obligates the
Contractor to collect State sales tax from the Contracting Agency. The provisions of
Section 1-07.2(2) apply.
1-07.6 PERMITS AND LICENSES
All requirements of any permits included in this Project Manual shall be adhered to by
the Contractor. Refer to Part IV, Attachment E. All costs related to adhering to these
permit(s) shall be included in the overall cost of the contract - no additional payment will
be made to the Contractor for work required to meet the requirements of the permits.
All permits will be provided to the Contractor at the City's expense.
1-07.17 UTILITIES AND SIMILAR FACILITIES
Section 1-07.17 is supplemented by the following:
Locations and dimensions shown in the plans for existing facilities are in accordance
with available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification.
Public and private utilities, or their contractors, will furnish all work necessary to adjust,
III-9
III-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
relocate, replace, or construct their facilities unless otherwise provided for in the Plans
or these Special Provisions. Such adjustment, relocation, replacement, or construction
will be done during the prosecution of the work for this project.
The Contractor shall call the Utility Location Request Center (One Call Center), for field
location not less than two nor more than ten business days before the scheduled date
for commencement of excavation which may affect underground utility facilities, unless
otherwise agreed upon by the parties involved. A business day is defined as any day
other than Saturday, Sunday, or a legal local, state or federal holiday. The telephone
number for the One Call Center for this project is 1-800-424-5555.
The Contractor is alerted to the existence of Chapter 19.22 RCW, a law relating to
underground utilities. Any cost to the Contractor incurred as a result of this law shall be
at the Contractor's expense.
No excavation shall begin until all known facilities in the vicinity of the excavation area
have been located and marked.
PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE
Section 1-07.18 of the Standard Specifications is deleted in its entirety and replaced
with Sections 6 and 7 of the City's standard Public Works Contract in Part II of the
Project Manual.
1-08.3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Section 1-08.3 is supplemented with the following:
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a Critical Path Method (CPM)
schedule, in both electronic and hard copy format. The CPM shall include all aspects of
the contract, including procurement of materials, construction, testing, submittals, and
inspection.
The Contractor shall develop the CPM using the most current version of SureTrak
software by Primavera Systems, Inc., which shall be capable of operating in a Windows
NT environment.
The Contractor shall submit, within 21 calendar days of award of the contract, 3 sets of
complete CPM time-scaled logic diagram on 22" x 34" sheets with accompanying
schedule reports. An electronic copy shall also be submitted. The schedule diagrams
shall show activity numbers, descriptions, early-start dates, float, and all relationships.
The diagrams shall also show the sequence, order, and interdependence of activities in
which the work is to be accomplished.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer updates to the CPM schedule monthly with
each Payment Request. The CPM schedule shall be accompanied by a written
narrative report describing current status and identifying potential delays. This report
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall, at a minimum, state whether the contract is on schedule, note any milestones that
will not be met, and comment on the project's current critical path as it relates to
previously submitted critical path.
The CPM deliverables shall be incidental to the contract, and the City will provide no
additional payment for work related to developing and maintaining the CPM schedule as
required in this contract.
The City may withhold payment as a result of incomplete CPM updates, as well as
assess liquidated damages per Section 1-08.9 if the schedule shows that work will not
be completed in a timely manner to meet the performance period of the contract.
1-08.5 TIME FOR COMPLETION
Section 1-08.5 is supplemented with the following:
Time is of the essence in the performance of this Contract and in adhering to the time
frames specified herein. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) calendar
days after notice to proceed from the City, and said work shall be physically completed
within _180 calendar days after said notice to proceed, unless a different time frame is
expressly provided in writing by the City.
If said work is not completed within the time for physical completion, the Contractor may
be required at the City's sole discretion to pay to the City liquidated damages as set
forth in the Project Manual, for each and every day said work remains uncompleted
after the expiration of the specified time.
1-09.9 PAYMENTS
Section 1-09.9 is supplemented with the following:
The Contractor shall submit payment requests with a completed Application for
Payment form, an example of which is included in the Attachments in Part 4 of the
Project Manual. This form includes a lien waiver certification, and shall be notarized
before submission. Applications for payment not signed or notarized shall be
considered incomplete and ineligible for payment consideration.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
'A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Progress Schedule. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other
required administrative forms and schedules including the Application for
Payment forms and the Submittals Schedule. Submit the Schedule of Values to
the Engineer at the earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the
date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment.
B. Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification section.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate
III-11
III - 12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section
b. Name of subcontractor
c. Name of supplier.
d. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
e. Dollar value
f. Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest tenth of a percent, adjusted to
total 100%
C. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the
Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal
subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
D. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored
on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insureance or bonded
warehousing if required.
E. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials,
for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part
of the Work.
F. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not
direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in
the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option.
G. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the
next Applications for Payment when Change Orders result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
TRAFFIC CONTROL MANAGEMENT
The third sentence of the first paragraph of Section 1-10.2(1) is revised to read:
The Contractor may designate the project superintendent as the TCS.
CONSTRUCTION SIGNS
Section 1-10.3(3) is revised to read:
All signs required by the approved traffic control plan(s) as well as any other appropriate
signs prescribed by the Engineer, except for the project sign, shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the posts or supports and erect and maintain
the signs in a clean, neat, and presentable condition until the necessity for them has
ceased. All nonapplicable signs shall be removed or completely covered with metal,
plywood, or an Engineer approved product specifically manufactured for sign covering
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
during periods when they are not needed. When the need for these signs has ceased,
the Contractor, upon approval of the Engineer, shall remove all signs, posts, and
supports from the project and they shall remain the property of the Contractor, except
for the project sign.
All signs lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed shall be replaced at the Contractor's
expense. All signs shall utilize materials, and be fabricated in accordance with, Section
9-28. All signs shall be constructed of Type I or " reflective background sheeting unless
otherwise noted in the Plans.
Construction signs will be divided into two classes. Class A construction signs are
those signs that remain in service throughout the construction or during a major phase
of the work. They are mounted on posts, existing fixed structures, or substantial
supports of a semi-permanent nature. Sign and support installation for Class A signs
shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans or the Standard Plans. The following
Class A signs shall be installed by the Contractor at locations designated at the pre-
construction conference:
"Project Sign" - provided by the City
1-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Add a new Section 1-11 as follows:
PREPARATORY WORK:
Before starting each section of Work, the Contractor shall ensure that the responsible
Subcontractor has carefully examined all preparatory work that has been executed to
receive his work. He shall check carefully, by whatever means are required, to ensure
that his work and adjacent related work will finish to proper contours, planes, and levels.
He shall promptly notify the Contractor who shall n09tify the Engineer in writing of any
defects or imperfections in preparatory work that will, in any way, affect satisfactory
completion of the Work. Absence of such notification will be construed as an
acceptance of preparatory work and later claims of defects therein will not be
recognized..
Under no conditions shall a section of Work proceed prior to preparatory work having
been completed, cured, dried, and otherwise made satisfactory to receive such related
work. Responsibility for timely installation of all materials and equipment included within
the Work rests solely with the contractor, who shall maintain coordination control at all
times.
III-13
ALLOWANCES
Section 1-12 Page 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 1-12 - ALLOWANCES (new section per Addendum 1)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard Specifications
and Special Provisions and other Division 1 specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing
allowances.
1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.
Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer
selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional
information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will
be issued by Change Order.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Owner of the date
when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an
allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Owner's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final
selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Owner from the designated supplier.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the
form specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the
site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other
portions of the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as
required to coordinate installation.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials under
allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.
B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation,
overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by
Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of
the allowance.
1.7 UNUSED MATERIALS
A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for
credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Owner, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is
not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Owner,
deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of
unused material is Contractor's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Finish Hardware
1. Provide an allowance of $1,500.00 for finish hardware. Installation to be included
in base bid.
B. Carpet:
1. Provide an allowance of $4.50/sq. ft. for carpet including installation and
accessories. Allowance does not include underlayment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or
defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials
and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and
interfaced with related work.
END OF SECTION 1-12
ALLOWANCES
Section 1-12 Page 2
SR-OO Contract Administration Submittals
SR-01 Progress Schedule
SR-02 Material Submittals
SR-03 Design Submittals (not used)
SR-04 As-Built Drawings
SR-05 Other Post-Construction Submittals
SR-06 Itemized List Of Submittals
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STANDARD PLANS
The Washington State Department of Transportation's Standard Plans for Road, Bridge
and Municipal Construction, up to and including any official changes to these Plans
issued through June 1, 2007 are hereby made a part of this contract. Any conflicts
between the Standard Plans and other parts of this contract will be resolved as stated in
the Order of Precedence at the beginning of Part III.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
The following is an index of the section contained under Submittal Requirements:
SR-OO CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION SUBMITTALS
All forms and bid documents required to execute the contract and process payments
are contract administration submittals, including forms provided in the Project Manual.
Not all contract administration submittals are listed separately on SR-06.
SR-OO.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES FOR PAYMENT
See Section 1-09.9 as modified in the Special Provisions for a description of the
Schedule of Values and for submittal requirements and regular updates.
SR~1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
See Section 1-08.3, as modified in the Special Provisions, for the submittal
requirements for a Progress Schedule and regular updates.
SR-02 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall furnish to the City Engineer 3 copies of all material submittals listed
in SR-06, "Itemized List Of Submittals". All material submittals or resubmittals shall be
accompanied by SR-07, "Submittals Review Form". The location of the specification for
each of these items in the Standard Specifications or Special Provisions is indicated in
SR-06. If the item description for the material submittal is not the exact brand or model
specified in the Contract, then 3 copies of the manufacturer's descriptive literature,
catalog cut-sheets, etc., must also be included with the submittal package.
The Contractor shall clearly indicate on all material submittals and copies, the submittal
review package number (starting with "1" for the first submittal review package),
submittal item number (from SR-06) and the exact item selected. In all cases, the
Contractor shall enter the exact brand and model on the "Submittal Review Form" for
III - 14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
that particular item.
All material submittals shall be submitted within 28 days after award of the Contract.
The Contractor should allow 14 calendar days from receipt by the City Engineer for
review and approval or rejection. For each material resubmittal required, the Contractor
should allow an additional 7 calendar days from date of receipt by the City Engineer for
review and approval or rejection. Except as provided herein, all requirements of Section
1-05.3, "Plans and Working Drawings", of the Standard Specifications shall apply.
NOTE: NO CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PERFORMED ON ANY
PORTION OF THE CONTRACT THAT DOES NOT HAVE APPROVED
SUBMITTALS. NO PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR DESIGNS
INSTALLED WITHOUT APPROVAL AS REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION.
SR-03 DESIGN SUBMITTALS (not used)
Three copies of all design submittals and related shop drawings are required. Shop
drawings and electrical schematic details shall be of the size 22" x 34". Each design
submittal or resubmittal and related shop drawings shall be listed on the "Submittal
Review Form" by the Contractor with an appropriate reference to the attachments
submitted. All design submittals shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer
registered in the State of Washington.
All design submittals are required within 28 days after award of the Contract. The
Contractor should allow 14 calendar days from receipt by the City Engineer for review
and approval or rejection. For each design resubmittal required, the Contractor should
allow an additional 14 calendar days from date of receipt by the City Engineer for review
and approval or rejection.
There are no required Design Submittals for this Contract:
SR-04 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Requirements for maintaining As-Builts for the work completed under this Contract are
specified in Section 1-05.5 of the Special Provisions above. Final As-Builts shall be
submitted to the City Engineer at or before the final inspection for review and approval.
As-built drawings must be approved by the City Engineer before final payment will be
made.
SR-05 OTHER POST-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall furnish the City Engineer with all other post-construction submittals
required by the specifications, whether or not listed on the submittal review form. All
results of tests the Contractor performs as required by the Contract for quality
assurance such as compaction tests, pressure tests, or bacteriological analyses shall
be submitted to the Project Engineer whether or not the test meets the performance
standards as required by the specifications.
III - 1 5
III-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SR-06 ITEMIZED LIST OF SUBMITTALS
Below is a summarized list of the submittals required under this contract.
Item Applicable
No. Submittal Description Section
Contract Administration Submittals
1 Schedule of Values for Payment 1-09.9 SP
2 Proaress Schedule (Critical Path Method) 1-08.3 SP
Material Submittals
3 Perforated Drain Pioe - oroduct data 02620
4 Geotextile Fabric - oroduct data 02620
5 Concrete Pavement - desian mixes & material certificates 02751
6 Cast-In-Place Concrete - design mixes 03300
7 Steel Reinforcement - shoo drawinQs 03300
8 Factorv Fabricated Lumber - product data & certificates 06100
9 Treated Lumber - material certificates 06100
10 Bituminous DampproofinQ - product data 07115
11 BuildinQ Insulation - oroduct data 07210
12 Metal Roofina - oroduct data, sample, warranty 07400
13 Steel Doors - oroduct data 08110
14 Wood Doors - oroduct data 08211
15 GlazinQ - product data & warranty 08800
16 Gvosum Board Assemblies - product data 09260
17 Acoustic Panel Ceilina - oroduct data & samples 09511
18 Carpet - sample & maintenance data 09680
19 Paint - product data 09912
20 Fire Alarm Svstem - shoo drawinQs, operation & maintenance info 13851
21 Fire Suppression Svstem - shop drawinQs, O&M data 13915
22 HanQers & Supports - shop drawings & certificates 15060
23 Vibration & Seismic Controls - product data, shop drawinas 15071
24 Mechanical Insulation - oroduct data 15080
25 Split-System Air-Conditioning Unit - product data, shop drawings, 15738
ooeration & maintenance data, warranty
26 Metal Ducts & Accessories -product data, shop drawings 15815
15820
27 HVAC Controls - oroduct data, shop drawinQs 15900
28 Testina, Adiustina, BalancinQ - certified TAB report, warranty 15950
29 Raceways & Boxes - product data & shop drawings 16130
30 WirinQ Devices - product data 16140
31 Panel Boards - product data, wiring diagram 16442
32 Interior LiQhtinQ - oroduct data, certificates 16511
33 Voice & Data Cablina - oroduct data, shop drawinQs 16715
Post-Construction Submittals
34 As-Built Drawinas 1-05.5 SP
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART IV
ATTACHMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Attachment A: Technical Specifications, Divisions 02-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. DIVISIONS 02 -16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
02230
02300
02620
02751
03300
06100
06200
07115
07210
07400
07920
08110
08211
08800
09260
09511
09680
09912
Section Title................................................... Pages
DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SITE CLEARING............................................. 3
EARTHWORK................................................. 8
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS... .............. 7
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT..................... 11
DMSION 03 -
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE............................ 14
DMSION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
ROUGH CARPENTRy...................................... 10
FINISH CARPENTRY. .. . . . .. . .... .. . .. .. ... . ... ... .. . . . .... 5
DMSION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE
PROTECTION
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING........................ 3
BUILDING INSULATION................................. 4
METAL ROOFING.......................................... 5
JOINT SEALANTS.......................................... 6
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
STEEL DOORS............................................... 4
FLUSH WOOD DOORS.................................... 5
GLAZING...................................................... 12
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES......................... 7
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS....................... 6
CARPET.. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5
PAINTING (pROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS).... 12
(continued on next page)
!DivIsIon ...... SectIon Title ........................ ...... ................. ......... ..................... .. ...... ............................... ....Page~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Table of Contents
12-20-06
MEP Specs
Senior Center Port Angeles
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13851 .......... FIRE ALARM.. ............................................................. ........... ........................................... 7
13915 ....... ... FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING. ................................................ ........ ........................... ..... ... 13
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050.......... BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ....... ........................................... 8
15055 .......... MOTORS........................................................ ......................... ............................... ............ 4
15060 .......... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.................................................. ........................................... 9
15071 .......... MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS... ........................................... 6
15075.......... MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION........................................ ........................................... 5
15080 .......... MECHANICAL INSULATION ............................................... ........................................... 13
15738 .......... SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ..................... ........................................... 4
15815 ........ .. METAL DUCTS. ................................ ..................................... ................... ........................ 9
15820 .......... DUCT ACCESSORIES ..................... ................... .................... ............................... ............ 8
15900.......... HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS .................. ........................................... 8
15940.......... SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ................................................ ........................................... 3
15950.......... TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ........................ ........................................... 9
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050.......... BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.......... ........................................... 6
16075 .......... ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. .................. ....................... ..... ................ ............ .......... 3
16120.......... CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .............................................. ........................................... 3
16130 .......... RACEWAYS AND BOXES .................................................... ........................................... 6
16140 .......... WIRING DEVICES ....... ........ ...... ......... ............ ....................... ... .................. ...................... 3
16410.......... ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......... ........................................... 3
16442 ..... ..... P ANELBOARDS ..................... ..... .............. ...... .......... ............. ........................................... 4
16511 .......... INTERIOR LIGHTING..... ............ ....... ....... .................. ........... ................. ............. ............. 5
16715.......... VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING ............ .. ........................................ 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center Addition
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Remove existing concrete paving.
2. Removing existing concrete planters.
3. Removing above-grade site improvements.
4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for
temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary
security and protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures during
site operations.
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and
site grading.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Record drawings according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 1
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
I
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
I
I
I
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
I
B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing and
coordinate with City.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
I
I
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Provide erosion-control measures as needed to prevent soil erosion and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
I
C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
Owner.
I
I
D.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
3.2
UTILITIES
I
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
I
I
B.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
SITE CLEARING
I
02230 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center Addition
1. Notify Architect not less than two days III advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Schedule interruptions with Owner.
C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.3 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing ~bove- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary
to facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
3.4 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished
materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them
off Owner's property.
B. Excavated spoils, free of construction debris, paving, gravel, stumps and roots may be
transported to low spot on site, approximately '14 mile north of project location. All
deposited spoils are to be bladed to level appearance. All other excavated spoils to be
removed from site.
END OF SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 3
EARTHWORK
02300 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing sub grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
2. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage of footings~
slabs-on- grade, and walls.
3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor
retarder.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including
haunches to support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course. Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated sub grade in a trench before laying
pIpe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-an-grade used to minimize capillary flow of
pore water.
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above sub grade elevations.
I
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation elevations other than noted on plans.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30
feet in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below sub grade elevations or beyond
indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as
well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional
compensation.
I
I
I
I
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
1. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt
paving, or layer placed between the sub grade and a concrete pavement or walk.
I
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface
of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as
underground services within buildings.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
I
I
I
I
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are
not available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and
SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3
inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other
deleterious matter.
c.
Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL,
CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
I
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent
of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D.
Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 2
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; WSDOT 9-03.10, gravel base.
F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; WSDOT 9.03.10. gravel base.
G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; WSDOT 9.03.10. gravel base.
H. Bedding: WSDOT 9-03.16 for flexible pipe. WSDOT 9-03.15 for rigid pipe.
I. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent
passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 sieve.
J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone
and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent
passing a I-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.4 sieve.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense
state.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
B. Protect sub grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect sub grades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Senior ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIon
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep sub grades dry and convey ground water away
from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
I
3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
I
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to sub grade elevations regardless of the character
of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and
obstructions.
I
1.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil
materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
I
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
I
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus I
inch Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
I
1.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Excavate by hand to final grade just
before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades
to leave solid base to receive other work.
I
I
3.5
APPROVAL OF SUB GRADE
A.
Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Soils Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and
replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
I
I
I
I
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
c.
Proof roll sub grade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, ram, accumulated
water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect.
3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
I
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4
I
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed
by Architect.
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center AdditIOn
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom
elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
3.7 BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the
following:
I
I
I
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported
walls.
I
3.8
FILL
I
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal
so fill material will bond with existing material.
I
I
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
3.9
MOISTURE CONTROL
I
I
A.
Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material
that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to
specified dry unit weight.
I
I
2.
3.10
COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
I
I
EARTHWORK
02300 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Community Center AddItIOn
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,
and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below sub grade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
3.11 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface
changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and
elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required
surface tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested
with a 10- foot straightedge.
3.12 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pIpe IS specified m Division 2 Section "Foundation
Drainage Systems."
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width
indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one
layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 6
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At sub grade and at each compacted fill and
backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or
building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for
each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
C. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared sub grade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place
materials in a single layer.
5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick when compacted.
D. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared sub grade and as follows:
1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than
95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials
in a single layer.
3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials
in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick
when compacted.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering
testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test sub grades and each fill or backfill layer.
Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed
work comply with requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing sub grades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be
performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of
other footing sub grades may be based on a visual comparison of sub grade with tested
subgrade when approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTMD2167, ASTMD2922, and ASTMD2937, as applicable. Tests will be
performed at the following locations and frequencies:
EARTHWORK 02300 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Servlces & Commumty Center AddltlOn
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree
of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due
to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect;
reshape and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil, waste material, trash, and debris, and
legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
02300 - 8
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 02620 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sub drainage systems for the following:
1. Foundations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
B. PS: Polystyrene plastic.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
D. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.
2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
P ART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,
and joining materials.
2.2 PERFORA TED- WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
A. Provide perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, ASTM D 2729, complete with
fittings, couplings, and accessories required for a complete installation.
2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling,
for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be
joined and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
1. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible
with pipe materials being joined.
2. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring
and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
3. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with
full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant metal tension
band and tightening mechanism on each end.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub.
2.5 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
2.6 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate
range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.
1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven,
monofilament or multifilament.
2. Style(s): Flat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FOUNDA nON DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 2
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
A.
Examine surfaces and areas for sUltable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be
installed.
I
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIon
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Underground Subdrainage Piping:
1. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings.
B. Underslab Subdrainage Piping:
1. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings.
C. Header Piping:
1. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
3.4 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS
A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping:
1. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts.
3.5 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Place impervious fill material on sub grade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete
footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions
indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted sub grade and geotextile filter
fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation
subdrainage.
E. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 4
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItion
F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side
away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.
G. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter
fabric.
H. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping
edges at least 4 inches.
1. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-
depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to
finish elevations and slope away from building.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated,
with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material.
Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written
instructions and other requirements indicated.
1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a
minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a
minimum slope of 0.5 percent.
3. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install PYC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
3.7 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join PYC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets
according to ASTMD 2321.
B. Join perforated PYC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell-and-
spigot joints.
C. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with
special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and
fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Cleanouts for Subdrainage:
1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate c1eanouts at beginning of piping
run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so c1eanouts open in direction of
flow in piping.
2. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) [PVC] pipe and fittings for
piping branch fittings and riser extensions to c1eanout. Set c1eanout frames and
covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches in depth. Set top
of c1eanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade.
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 6
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIOn
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to
ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged
components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as
work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is
completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work
stops.
END OF SECTION 02620
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Walkways.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for sub grade preparation, grading, and subbase
course.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-P1ace Concrete" for general building applications of
concrete.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans,
ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following
materials complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Fiber reinforcement.
3. Admixtures.
4. Curing compounds.
5. Applied finish materials.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-1
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 -2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
6. Bonding agent or adhesive.
7. Joint fillers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI301, "Specification for Structural Concrete,"
unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: CommerCIally formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same
manufacturer throughout the Project.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
C. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag
cement.
D. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IP portland pozzolan cement.
E. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (PM) pozzolan-modified portland
cement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor Services & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
F. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (SM) slag-modified portland
cement.
G. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate
as follows:
1. Class: 4S.
2. Class: 4M.
3. Class: IN.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
7. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 3
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 -4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
2.3 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other
admixtures.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTMC 494, Type F.
E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover:
polyethylene sheet.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
c. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
E. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,
Type 1, Class B.
F. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B.
G. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2,
Class B.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips:
cellulosic fiber.
ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
B. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self~xpanding
cork.
C. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated
cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements,
and as follows:
1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete
to hardened concrete.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type
and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or
field experience.
B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
4. Slump Limit: 3 inches.
a. Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing
Admixture: Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to plant- or site-
verified, 2- to 3 -inch slump.
C. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other
than portland cement according to ACI301 requirements for concrete exposed to
deicing chemicals.
D. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having an air content of 2.5 to 4.5 percent.
E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus
1.5 percent:
1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Provide 5-sack mix conforming to City of Port Angeles specifications for sidewalks.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 5
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Senior ServIces & Community Center AddItIOn
I
2.8
CONCRETE MIXING
I
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mix type, quality, and amount of water added.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 PREPARATION
I
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for
additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions
have been corrected and sub grade is ready to receive pavement.
I
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
I
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
I
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for
pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous
progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete
placement.
I
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
I
I
3.3 JOINTS
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously
placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
I
I
A.
General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true
to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints
at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement
and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour,
unless pavement terminates at isolation joints.
1. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
I
I
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 6
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where
indicated.
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
3.4
A.
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface
if joint sealant is indicated.
Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
Fumishjoint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip joint-filler sections together.
Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or
other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been
placed on both sides of joint.
4.
5.
6.
Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or
asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of
the concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat
grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover
marks on concrete surfaces.
a. Radius: 3/8 inch.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before developing random contraction cracks.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial
floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
1. Radius: 3/8 inch.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
I
02751 -7
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
c.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is
placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the
required finish elevation and alignment.
I
D.
Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI304R for measuring,
mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
I
I
E.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do
not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
F.
Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-
spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete
according to recommendations in ACI 309R.
I
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or
side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint
devices.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating
using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before
excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete
surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface
treatments.
H.
Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit
revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required
for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent
displacement of paver machine during operations.
1.
When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment
on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
J.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing
actions, or low temperatures.
I
I
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F,
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of
placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
I
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center Addition
K. Hot- Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R
and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to
control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount
of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms and subgrades just before placing concrete. Keep sub grade
moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing
operations is prohibited.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has
disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations.
Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and
fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished
concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2. Medium-to-Fine- Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-
finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform,
fine-line texture.
3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating
float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom,
perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing,
curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 -9
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive
covers.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddJtJon
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with the following materials:
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot-Iong, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2
inch.
7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge:
Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does
not meet requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of
cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with
portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center AdditIOn
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign
material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for
Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 02751
!/
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 11
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smlth Archltects
Semar Services & Cammumty Center AdditIOn
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,
concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and
walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement,
prepared according to ACI3l5, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement,
and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for
openings through concrete structures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Community Center Addition
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329
to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-l or an equivalent certification
program.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each
admixture from the same manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural
Welding Code--Reinforcing Stee1."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are
indicated:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACII17, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials. "
1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,
true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Archltects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with
DOC PS 1, and as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better.
b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and
edge sealed.
c. Structural 1, B- B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to
prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of
the exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in
diameter in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 (Sl), Grade 40, deformed and ASTM A 706, Grade
60.
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and
as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact
forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:
1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.
2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 1/2 inch
3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not
more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve,
except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50
sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50.
c. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with
other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover:
polyethylene sheet.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
c. Water: Potable.
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752,
cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Shore A hardness of80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
D. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements,
and as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIon
1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete
to hardened concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either
laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500 psi.
2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
D. Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500 psi.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd..
3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
E. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low
water permeability.
F. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.9 F ABRICA TING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.10 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-112 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AddItIon
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until concrete structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as
follows:
1.
Class A, 1/8 inch.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1
vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy
removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and
securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms
at inconspicuous locations.
H.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing
such items.
1.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
J.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I
03300 - 6
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work,
that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at
not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard
enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and
protection operations are maintained.
B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that
supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
I
I
1. 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative
fie1d- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms
without loosening or disturbing shores.
I
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated,
or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-release agent.
D.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
A
Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations In ACI 347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate
and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or
deflection.
I
I
3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing
reinforcement.
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 7
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Community Center AddItion
I
B. Clean reinforcement ofloose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
I
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do
not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to A WS D 1.4, where indicated.
I
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
I
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing.
Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
Lace overlaps with wire.
I
I
3.6 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
I
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
I
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead
forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches
into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-
girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams,
and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with
walls, near comers, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
I
I
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips
at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 8
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
1.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than I inch
below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
I
2.
I
I
3.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
I
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement,
unless approved by Architect.
I
I
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will
be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
I
D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner
to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still
plastic, to avoid cold joints.
E.
I
1.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use
equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by
ACI 309R.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and
at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of
vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to
segregate.
I
I
2.
I
I
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
I
1.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or
I
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 9
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
I
I
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing
actions, or low temperatures.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F,
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of
placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen sub grade or on sub grade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
G . Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI305R
and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F
at time of placement.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8
inch in height.
I. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating
or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that
created by the rubbing process.
I
I
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces
uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 10
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.lR for screeding, restraightening,
and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten
until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind
smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor
covenngs.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed
to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set
over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according
to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-
on-grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for
suspended slabs.
d Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled freestanding 10- foot-long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 1/8 inch.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise
indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as
specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete
filling indicated or required to complete Work.
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.12
I
I
I
I
3.13
I
I
I
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions
after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float
finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist
cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue
curing by one or a combination of the following methods:
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one
or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during
curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
E.
Slab protection: Following curing above, maintain waterproof sheeting covering over
slab until roof structure is in place to prevent slab saturation due to inclement weather.
JOINT FILLING
A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints
until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
CONCRETE SURF ACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement
to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough
water for handling and placing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 12
I
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen
with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact
with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with
patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match
surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture
and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and
strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the
surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for
finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high
areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped
template.
E.
1.
Repair finished surfaces contammg defects. Surface defects include spalls,
popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced
sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar.
Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective
areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete
and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as
original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to
blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off
dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply
bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact
patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
I
I
2.
3.
4.
I
I
I
5.
I
I
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, usmg epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 13
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
I
I
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
END OF SECTION 03300
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 14
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & SmIth Architects
Semor SelVlces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with engineered wood products.
2. Wood blocking and nailers.
3 . Wood furring
4. Sheathing.
5. Subflooring and underlayment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for non structural carpentry items exposed
to view and not specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
2. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWP A - Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Semor Services & Community Center Addition
retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated material.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type
of treatment.
I
I
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with mInImUm
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design
values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered
wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
I
I
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide
air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
I
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
I
I
I
1.
2.
Factory mark each piece oflumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are
minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.
4.
I
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation
reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
I
1.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable
design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those
I
I
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor SelVlces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical
data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
c. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Oriented Strand Board: ,DOC PS 2.
3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than
thickness indicated.
4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: A WP A C2 (lumber) and A WP A C9
(plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously
protected from liquid water may be treated according to A WP A C31 with inorganic
boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals:
a. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not
comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency
approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members
in contact with masonry or concrete.
3 . Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with
earth.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor SeJVlces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American
Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency
indicated.
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No.2 grade and the
following species:
1. Douglas Fir
C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: See structural drawings for requirements.
2.4 TIMBER
A. For timber of 5-inch nominal size and thicker, provide material complying with the
requirements listed in the structural drawings.
I. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
I. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Blocking.
3. Cants.
4. Nailers.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No.2 grade lumber
with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
I. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Northern species; NLGA.
3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no
knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Open Web Joists: Prefabricated units complying with NER-14B-148; depths and
performance ratings not less than those indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Senior SelVlces & Community Center AdditIOn
1. Web Material: 1" or 1 118" diameter tubular steel members varying in gauge and
diameter according to requirements. 45,000 PSI minimum yield.
2. Top and bottom chords: 1.5"x4.75" machine stress rated lumber.
B. Rim Boards: Performance-rated product complying with AP A PRR -401.
1. Material: all-veneer panels or structural composite lumber.
2. Thickness and Grade: I-1I8-inch rim board.
3. Trademark: Factory mark with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and
compliance with AP A standard.
2.7 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24.
2. Thickness: Not less than 112 inch.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: 16 inches.
2. Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch.
C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24.
2. Thickness: Not less than 112 inch.
D. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20
2. Thickness: Not less than 19/32 inch.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws. ASMEBI8.6.1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Senior SeIVlces & Community Center AddItIOn
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material
being fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME BI8.2.1..
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when
installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated.
B. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films,
woven strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations;
and complying with ASTM E 1677, Type 1.
1. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils.
2. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms.
3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
4. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
C. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
D. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in
sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing
required.
E. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a
sill sealer; I-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
F. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 6
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Servlces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for
accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that
are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Apply field treatment complying with A WP A M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber and plywood.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code.
E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood; predrill as required.
F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail
heads and fill holes with wood filler.
3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for scree ding or attaching other work. Form
to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during
installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before
concrete placement.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor SelVices & Commumty Center AdditIOn
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood
blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: InstaIl2-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically
at 16 inches o.c.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction,"
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- dimension lumber on edge are
required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches o.c.
Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge.
1. For continuous members, locate end joints over supports.
3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INST ALLA TION
A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or
partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates
using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except
single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to
supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construct comers and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and
framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty
items, and trim.
1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96
inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as
wall or partitions.
C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and
at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used,
provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- thick lumber of same width as
framing members.
D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of
thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 8
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor SelVlces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less
than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch
nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for
openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than to-inch nominal depth for
openings 10 to 12 feet in width.
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less
in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth
indicated.
3.6 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on
supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over
supports if not continuous.
B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls,
provide 1/2-inch air space at sides and ends of wood members.
C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated.
D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent
preservative for 15 minutes.
3.7 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in AP A Form No. E30K,
"AP A Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-
use panels and applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
3.8 BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION
A. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-
inch overlap.
3.9 BUILDING WRAP APPLICATION
A. Cover wall sheathing with building wrap as indicated.
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.
3. Seal seams, edges, and penetrations with tape.
4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal comers with tape.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center AdditIOn
3.10 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION
A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating
sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 10
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
ConditiOns and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Exterior fiber-cement lap siding.
3. Interior standing and running trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for framing, furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
2. WWP A - Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and
under temporary coverings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally
dry, and HV AC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be
applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Siding: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer,
Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that
fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,
but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration beyond normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by
the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency
indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece[, or omit
grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection
agency].
2.2 EXTERIOR SIDING AND SOFFIT
A. Siding: Primed, fiber-cement lap siding with 8" exposure. (Match existing).
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 2
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Community Center Addition
I
I
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Trim for Painted Applications: Pre-Primed S.P.F. lumber with surfaced (smooth) face.
I
I
I
2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Grade A finish, kiln-dried,
Hemlock finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color.
1. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches.
2. Interior standing and running trim.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F ABRICA TION
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies
and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish
carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in
installation areas.
C. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
D. Ease edges of lumber less than I inch in nominal thickness to 1I16-inch radius and
edges oflumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory condItions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
I
B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is
recommended by manufacturer.
I
C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges.
Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9
Section "Painting."
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center Addlt10n
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is
unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-
inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from
maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long,
except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running
trim. Cope at returns and miter at comers to produce tight-fitting joints with full-
surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane
backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for
alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to
prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry
work and fill holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side
exposed to weather.
3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. Horizontal Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install
first course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch below starter strip and subsequent
courses lapped 1 inch over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to
penetrate more than one thickness of siding.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 4
B. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by
siding manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center Addmon
C. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
D. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish
carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows
no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06200
I
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Senior Services & Community Center AddItion
SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hot-applied asphalt dampproofing applied to the following
surfaces:
1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete foundation walls.
2. Steel Door Frames
B. Related Sections include:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast in Place Concrete".
2. Division 8 "Steel Doors and Frames".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for
method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection
course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one
source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07115 - 1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07115-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AddItIon
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing m
enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses, provide dampproofing
material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24
hours under normal conditions.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers meeting the requirements of this Section are approved.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with
water as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials
from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal
joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material
manufacturer.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommUnIty Center AddItion
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent
requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory
performance of dampproofing.
I
1.
Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve
coverages indicated.
Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent
coats.
2.
I
B.
Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces
building interior whether indicated or not.
I
I
I
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and
down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto
surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and comer protection stripping at internal and external comers,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by
embedding an 8-inch- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of
dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to
other coats required.
I
4.
Continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar
joints at intersection temporarily open or by delaying construction of intersecting
walls until dampproofing is applied.
I
I
3.4 CLEANING
I
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07115
I
I
I
I
I
I
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07115 -3
I
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall for framed wall, partition and ceiling
assemblies.
2. Division 15 for Pipe and Duct Insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products
per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Srmth ArchItects
Seruor Services & Community Center AddItIOn
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
the following:
1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
CertainTeed Corp., Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., approved equal.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with
referenced standards.
1. Provide R-values or thicknesses as indicated in the Specifications or on Drawings
(R-value shall govern over thickness shown).
a. Concrete Slab Insulation: R-I0 Rigid.
b. Rigid Insulation at exterior concrete walls 1 WI thick, R-I0.
c. Mineral Fiber Blanket/Bats: R-21 Walls, R-3-8- R-30 Roof.
B. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by
combining mineral fibers of types described below with thermosetting resins to comply
with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing): and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136 test.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values
of25 and 50, respectively.
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Polyethelene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397 6 mils with laboratory-tested vapor
transmission rating of .03 perms.
BUILDING INSULA nON
07210 - 2
BUILDING INSULA nON
07210 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Seruor Services & Commuruty Center AddItIon
B. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, of not indicated, as recommended by
insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate.
C. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints
between units and filling voids in work.
D. Protection Board: Premolded, semi-rigid asphalt/fiber composition board, W' thick,
formed under heat and pressure, standard sizes.
E. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheet designed and
sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between
insulated attic spaced and vented eaves.
F. Insulation Holder Assemblies and vapor barrier for ceiling insulation: Provide holder
assemblies as manufactured by T - foil Enterprises, Auburn, W A or approved equal.
Provide Type TC 8125. Holder assemblies shall be oflength to allow 4" min.-6" max.
distance between top of insulation ad underside of roof sheathing. Assembly shall meet
the following requirements.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less, Class 1.
2. Permeance (ASTM E 96): To comply with UBC and local codes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed at any time to ice and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and
fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that
interfere with placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior
walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation
and insulation encapsulates piping.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to
substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement
and support of units.
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItion
B. Set vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
I
1.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
I
I
3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
I
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor
transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including
those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
I
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall
studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
I
C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
I
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarder.
I
E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by
other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
I
I
3.4 PROTECTION
I
I
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
I
I
I
I
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 -4
I
METAL ROOFING
07400-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Snuth Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center Addition
Section 07400 - Metal Roofing
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preformed metal roof panels.
2. Accessories, including underlayment materials, fasteners, sealant, sealant
tape, closures and flashing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information and installation
instructions which demonstrate that materials to be installed with Contract
Documents.
B. Product Samples: Submit samples for color selection.
1. Submit manufacturer's standard profile sample, color chips and published
information as applies.
C. Submit letter of compliance and conformance from the manufacturer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Must be a nationally recognized manufacturer in good standing
with the National Roofing Contractor's Association.
B. Installer: Must be a certified applicator of the approved product and system
with a minimum often (10) years of experience installing the products
specified.
C. Regulatory agency Requirements: Comply with Building Code requirements if
more restrictive than those specified herein.
D. Testing and Certification: Wind Up-Lift - UL580, Class 90; Construction
#130, UL Building Materials Directory.
E. Reference Standard: Flashing and gutters per recommendations of Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual, latest edition.
1.4 WARRANTY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty guaranteeing to correct failures in
product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or
otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have
under the Contract Documents.
1. Warrant the finish performance against crack, check, peel or flake,
changing color or chalking for twenty (20) years from date of substantial
completion.
B. Contractor's Guarantee: The General Contractor and Metal Panel Sub-
Contractor shall jointly and unconditionally guarantee in writing the water-
tightness of the total assembly for a period of three (3) years from the date of
substantial completion. This warranty constitutes a guarantee that the
Contractor will furnish all labor and materials which may be necessary for
repairs during this period. The only exceptions to this guarantee are damages
caused by the Owner or others, and by fire, smoke, lightning and hail.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store the products to prevent excessive exposure and damage by
other trades. Protect from direct element exposure during storage. Elevate
one end of panels to drain any accumulated moisture.
B. Product shall be shipped with factory applied strippable plastic.
C. Handle products carefully so as to minimize damage from hoisting, handling
and installation. Metal product and cartons/crafting shall not be used as a
storage or work platform.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Examine the conditions and substrates in which metal roofing is to be installed.
Substrate shall be installed level, flat and true to avoid panel stresses.
B. Field measurements shall be taken prior to fabrication of panels.
C. Proceed with roofing installation only after satisfactory conditions are met.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
METAL ROOFING
07400-2
METAL ROOFING
07400-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Cornrnumty Center AdditIOn
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Metal roofing as manufactured by Champion Metal of Washington, Inc.
2. Approved equal.
B. Roofpanel designation: (specifications are based on Champion's Steel Snap-
Loc)
1. Base Metal:
a. Material: Steel
b. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-653-94, Grade D or E.
c. Thickness: 26 gauge.
d. Minimum Yield Strength: Min. 50,000 psi for Grade E.
e. Protective Coating: Galvanized G90 coating: Min. 1.25 oz. Of pure
zinc per square foot.
2. Configuration:
a. Coverage of 12 inches with I" standing seam.
b. Panel Length: Full length, from ridge to eaves and from wall to eaves.
c. Panels shall not include accent ribs.
3. Exterior Finish:
a. Paint System: Two coat baked-on Polyester. Exterior finish includes
1 mil. total finish thickness.
b. Color: To match existing, review with Architect.
c. Salt Spray resistance - ASTM B - 117; humidity Resistance - ASTM
. I
D-2247 and ASTM D-714; AbrasIOn Resistance - ASTM D - 968"
Formability Test- ASTM D -1737.
4. Interior Finish: Shall consist of a 0.5 mil. total finish thickness.
C. Fasteners:
1. As per manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Sealant:
1. Use sealant wIth primer or sealant per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Profile Closures:
1. Use material to match gauge and finish of roofing panel.
2. Use neoprene or polyethylene foam, die-cast or formed to panel
configuration.
F. Flashing: Provide all Rake, Comer, Ridge, Valley and all other miscellaneous
trims and flashings required for a complete installation.
1. Use material of same gauge and finish.
2. Dissimilar materials will not be allowed.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor SeTVIces & Commumty Center AddItion
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
A.
Review substrate to receive metal panels for obstructions, loose sheathing, or
voids in sheathing. Repair or replace unacceptable work which may affect
proper roofing material installation.
B. Install roofing panels per manufacturer recommendations.
I
I
C. Caulk, seal and fasten so as to provide a complete weather-tight installation.
3.2
PREPARATION
I
A.
General:
1. Remove projections and debris from substrate before starting installation.
Lay sheet metal over minor voids and attach to substrate.
2. Secure all vent stacks, curbs and other penetrations to substrate before
starting panel installation.
I
I
I
3.3
INST ALLA TION
A. General:
1. Install roofing panels per manufacturer's specifications and NRCA' s "The
NRCA Steep Roofing Manual".
2. Layout work with horizontal and vertical chalk lines.
I
B. Flashing: Materials and fabrication specified in 07600.
1. Install flashing and edge protection, to conform with installation details
and instructions of 'The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and to provide a
weathertight installation:
2. Step Flashing at Vertical Walls: Install for entire length of intersection of
roof surface and vertical wall.
I
I
I
3.4
CLEANING
A. Remove construction debris from roof surfaces and surrounding areas on a
daily basis.
I
B.
Touch-up areas as required or directed with manufacturer's standard touch-up
paint. Follow instructions for application.
I
METAL ROOFING
07400-4
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
C.
Clean out gutters and downspouts of ALL debris whether organic or
construction related.
I
D.
At completion, leave project free from stains, scraps, scrapes and scratches.
I
E.
Final inspection will be at the discretion of the Owner's representative.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 07400
I
I
METAL ROOFING
07400-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal
surfaces:
a. Perimeter joints between siding materials and frames of doors and windows.
b. Joints between siding materials and trims.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
and windows.
c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
d. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of
gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
3. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at
perimeters of acoustical ceilings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and
water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 1
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multi component materials.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
I
I
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
I
I
I
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B.
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
I
c.
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
I
I
I
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
expenence.
I
I
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range for this characteristic.
I
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-
Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified
in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when
tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719,
to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of
installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses
indicated.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstammg; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 3
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
I
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint-sealant performance.
a. Concrete.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove
loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the
following:
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine
primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center Addition
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent s~alant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where
indicated.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess
depth and at locations indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3.4 CLEANING
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 5
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
3.5 PROTECTION
B. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
3.6
ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
I
a. 756 H.P.; Dow Coming.
b. Silglaze II; GE Silicones.
c. 895; Pecora Corporation.
I
I
I
c.
Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-#: Where joint sealants of this
type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
2.
3.
4.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50
percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
Users] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M and o.
a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: [Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite,
limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood.]
I
I
I
I
5.
6.
END OF SECTION 07920
I
I
I
I
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center Addition
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in glazed openings in doors and frames.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in
ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both
uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated, include door designation, type, level and
model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance,
sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
3. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
4. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing
schedule for doors and frames.
STEEL DOORS
08110 -1
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AddItIon
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Door Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish.
B. Inspect doors on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is
found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and
are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired
as directed.
C. Store doors at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood
blocking. A void using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity
chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1011AlIOllM, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A l008/AI008M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A l008/AI008M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness.
C. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-
leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets.
2.2 DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250A for physical-endurance
level:
STEEL DOORS 08110 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmJth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
C. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to
accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in
appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Fit and assemble units in
manufacturer's plant.
B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate
doors, panels, and frames from ASTM A525, G60 electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet.
Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by
addition ofO.053-inch- thick, electrolytic zinc-coated steel channels with channel webs
placed even with top and bottom edges.
C. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials that
produce a door complying with SDI standards:
1. Rigid mineral-fiber board.
D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads,
except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at
bottom.
E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFP A 80.
F. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge, unless square edge is indicated.
G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings
from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads
for exposed screws and bolts.
J. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown
or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door assemblies and tested
according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U -value of
0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better.
K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier.
STEEL DOORS
08 I 10 - 3
STEEL DOORS
08110 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI Al15 Series
specifications for door preparation for hardware.
L. Reinforce doors to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
M. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to
ANSI A2S0.8.
N. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- thick steel sheet.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of
interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and
other panels in doors.
O. Astragals: As required by NFP A 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, and accessones according to Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's data, and as specified.
B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A2S0.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in
frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with
SDI 122 and ANSVDHI AI1S.1G.
3.2 ADmSTING AND CLEANING
A. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings
from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
Sent or Services & Communtty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer, faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and
trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of
hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. fudicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small
sections for the following:
I. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for
stained finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
I. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10
inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 1
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
1.4
1.5
1.6
finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be
expected in the finished work.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and
edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer
and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for
factory- finished doors.
3. Frames for lite openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish
required.
I
I
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
I
I
I
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.l-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
c.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
I
I
I
I
I
B
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons] [cardboard cartons and
wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
c.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HV AC system is operating and will maintain temperature
and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is
enclosed, wet work is complete, and HV AC system is operating and maintaining
temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent
during the remainder of the construction period.
I
I
1. 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
I
I
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a42-
by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding
0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to
repair or replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of
Substantial Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A and A faces.
2. Species and Cut: Birch, plain sliced.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each
separate room or area of building.
5. Transom Match: End match.
6. Stiles: Same species as faces
2.2 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
1. Core: Particleboard.
2. Construction: Seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering. .
3. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.3 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors:
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces
2. Profile: Lipped tapered beads.
2.4 F ABRICA TION
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIon
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform
clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting.
Comply with requirements in NFP A 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to
comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop
Drawings, DHI Al15-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable
requirements of referenced standards for kind( s) of door( s) required.
1. Lite Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
B. Finish doors at factory.
C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
D. Transparent Finish:
1. Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
2. Staining: None required.
3. Effect: Semifilled finish.
4. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb
jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
I
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
I
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
I
I
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is
required at Project site.
3.3 ADmSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
I
I
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center AddItion
08510 ALUMINUM WINDOWS (new Section per Addendum 1)
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Includes but not limited to-
1. Furnishing metal WIndow frames complete wIth glazing.
B. Related work specified elsewhere-
1. Caulking specified in section 07920.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
above.
A. Windows shall bear AAMA "Quality Certified" label for type of window specified
PART 2-PRODUCTS
1.1 WINDOWS
A. Style-
1. Thermally broken aluminum window.
2. Frame members shall be 2 ~ "depth.
3. Profiles and components to match existing bUIlding windows.
B. Materials-
1. All frame and sash members shall be aluminum extrusions of 6063- T5 alloy and
temper with a minimum wall thickness of 0.062".
2. Frame and sash members shall have a rigId polyurethane thermal barrier as an
integral part of extrusion.
3. Glazing stops to be extruded alumInum with minimum wall thickness of 0.050".
4. Provide screens at operable windows
C. Finish-
1. Provide ArchItectural Class 1 anodic painted finish.
a. Color to match existing building window color. Provide color ChIpS for
selection by owner.
D. Manufacturer-
1. Fixed and casement windows by Marlin Windows, Series #1505.
2. Equal approved by owner prior to biddIng.
END OF SECTION 08510
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including
those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference
to this Section:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Windows.
Doors.
Glazed entrances.
Interior borrowed lites.
I
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
I
B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air
or a specified gas.
I
I
I
I
C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic
coatmg.
D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and
practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture,
or film on interior surfaces of glass.
I
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
GLAZING
08800 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIOn
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement
and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and
installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration
of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not
less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or
exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select mlmmum glass thicknesses to comply with
ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to
Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above
grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof
heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated, but not less than snow loads
applicable to Project, required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures": Section 7, "Snow Loads."
c. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
d. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set
more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action.
1) Load Duration: 30 days.
e. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported
on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at
design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch,
whichever is less.
1) F or insulating glass.
f. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
g. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness
for each tint color indicated throughout Project.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures
acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
GLAZING 08800 - 2
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance
properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined
according to procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and
a nomina11/2-inch- wide interspace.
3. Center-of-G1ass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298
WINDO W 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F.
4. Center-of-G1ass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using
LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program.
5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings
in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
E. Preconstruction Adhesion and CompatIbility Test Report: From glazing sealant
manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing
channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following
products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current
products:
1. Tinted float glass.
2. Coated float glass.
3. Insulating glass.
4. Glazing sealants.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
GLAZING 08800 - 3
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center Addition
I
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GLAZING
I
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in
glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs
glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association
Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
c.
Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary- glass
manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations for Tinted Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing
float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated.
E.
Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for
each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated.
F.
Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one
manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit
indicated.
G.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessones from one
source for each product and installation method indicated.
H.
Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
1.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test
reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current
sealant formulations within a 36-month period.
1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. .
08800 - 4
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
I
J.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements III
16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Councilor another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I
I
K.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
I
I
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design
Guide. "
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and
SIGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
I
L.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following
inspecting and testing agency:
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Insulating Glass Certification Council.
Associated Laboratories, Inc.
National Accreditation and Management Institute.
I
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed
to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature
changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
I
I
I
I
I
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply
with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to
avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers
and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
I
GLAZING 08800 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIOn
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below
40 deg F.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner
of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made
out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements
for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the
nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to
Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for
insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the
nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select);
class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.2 WIRED GLASS
A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear),
Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:
a. Mesh m1 (diamond).
b. Mesh m2 (square).
2.3 INSULATING GLASS
GLAZING 08800 - 6
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated
by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and
with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItion
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual
glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where
safety glass is indicated.
I
I
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the
Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of
units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
I
I
C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturer's standard sealants.
Polyisobutylene and polysulfide.
Polyisobutylene and silicone.
Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl.
Polyisobutylene and polyurethane.
I
I
D.
Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
I
I
I
I
I
E.
Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction
complying with the following requirements:
1. Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized finish.
2. Aluminum with black color-anodized finish.
3. Aluminum with bronze color-anodized finish.
4. Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish in color selected by Architect.
5. Galvanized steel.
6. Stainless steel.
7. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
8. Comer Construction: Manufacturer's standard comer construction.
2.4
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following
requirements:
I
1.
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
I
I
I
GLAZING
08800 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Match Architect's samples.
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's
designations.
5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other
requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing
Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted
in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of
size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
2.6 F ABRICA nON OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated
for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite
complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat- grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that
produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
GLAZING 08800 - 8
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
I
I
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
I
1.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
and offsets at comers.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
I
2.
3.
4.
I
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
I
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
I
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
I
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
I
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
I
I
I
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
I
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
I
I
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
GLAZING 08800 - 9
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
I
G. Provide spacers for glass lItes where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as
follows:
1.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless
gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide lI8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
I
I
2.
I
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I
I
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
I
I
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants
cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth
of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
I
I
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
I
I
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
I
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended
by glass manufacturer.
I
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
I
I
GLAZING
08800 -10
I
a. Class 1 (clear).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIon
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any
way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide
Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following:
1. Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass FG-[#]: Annealed or Kind HS (heat
strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) where heat strengthening is
required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual
glass lites and to comply with performance requirements.
3.7 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Insulating Glass IG-[#]: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide uncoated
insulating-glass units complying with the following:
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated.
2. Interspace Content: Argon.
3. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
4. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass.
B. Low-E Insulating Glass IG-[#]: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide
low-emissivity insulating-glass units complying with the following:
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated.
2. Interspace Content: Argon.
3. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
4. Outdoor Lite' Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass
a. Class 1 (clear).
5. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
6. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3.8 GLAZING SEALANT SCHEDULE
GLAZING 08800 - I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AddItIOn
A. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant GS-[#]: Where glazing
sealants of this designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
2. Class: 25.
3. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 12
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section Rough Carpentry for wood framing and furring, and gypsum
sheathing applied over wood framing.
2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders
installed in gypsum board assemblies.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting ofGWB walls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum
board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and
other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints
in each area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Regular Type:
a. Thickness: As indicated.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
c. Location: As indicated.
2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Comerbead: Use at outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where
indicated.
d. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Senior Servlces & Community Center AddltlOn
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2.4 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. G.P. Gypsum Corp., Gyp Roc Ceiling TexturelPolystyrene
2. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Perfect Spray
3. United States Gypsum Co.; Sheetrock ceiling spray texture, QT Polystyrene
4. United States Gypsum Co.; Sheetrock wall and ceiling spray texture (aggregated).
B. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
C. Aggregate Finish: Level 5 finish, Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type
texture finish.
1. Texture: Smooth wall finish for all painted surfaces.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining,
latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured
from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AdditIOn
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspenSIOn systems with
installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for
anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at
spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.
3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
B. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
C. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
D. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at
edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not
force into place.
F. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of
framed openings.
G. Attach gypsum panels to studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud first.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 4
H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
1. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including
floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient
channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
K. Cover both faces of partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers,
joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install
sealant.
I
I
L. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments,
except floors. Provide 1/4- to l/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges
with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
I
M. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by
manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal comer
construction.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion
joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant.
Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations
for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum
board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
O. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application
and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1.
Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
I
3.3 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
I
A. Application:
I
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Community Center AddItIOn
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels as indicated or required by fire-
resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
c. Stagger joints at least 16" in double-layer assemblies, unless otherwise
indicated or required by code.
B. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.
2. Provide LevelS finish. Smooth finish.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 6
E. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings,
Architect and Contractor will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report
deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to
ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.
I
I
I
I
LIndberg & Smith Architects
SenIor Services & CommunIty Center AdditIOn
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
1.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of
Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum
board ceilings:
I
I
2.
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water
systems.
c. Installation of air-duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
pIpmg
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 09260
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical ceiling panels and suspension systems for ceilings in
areas as indicated in drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
0951 I -2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
1. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with
the following requirements:
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following
surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class C
materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. SeIsmic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand
the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: '
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply
with ASTM E 580.
2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--
Seismic Zones 0-2."
3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling
Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4."
4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-
in Panel Ceilings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIon
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.8 COORDINA nON
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HV AC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing
pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-3
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 -4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's
full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.2 MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING:
APC-l
A. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and
pattern as follows:
1. Pattern: D - fine fissured for all rooms as shown on drawings unless noted
otherwise.
B. Color: White
C. LR: Not less than 0.84.
D. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
E. CAC: Not less than 35.
F. AC: Not less than 170.
G. Edge Detail: Square.
H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
1. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard. Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system
indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity
finishes are indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indIcated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIOn
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide WIres complying with the following
requirements:
I
1.
Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 ZInC coating,
soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than O.135-inch- diameter wire.
2.
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
I
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
3.2
PREPARATION
I
I
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half:.width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
I
I
I
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with UBC Standard 25-2 and
seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISeA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
I
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
I
I
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 -5
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I
4.
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
from ends of each member.
I
I
5.
6.
I
I
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
I
I
D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension
system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to
provide a neat, precise fit.
I
1.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by
flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.
I
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components
that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of
damage.
I
END OF SECTION 09511
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth Architects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Tufted carpet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data
on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation
recommendations for each type of substrate required.
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required.
Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and
designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.
C. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include III maintenance manuals specified III
Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products
and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
carpet.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements
for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other
CARPET 09680 - 1
manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with
requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIon
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
I
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7
1.8
CARPET
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and
Humidity. "
I
I
I
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete
and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry
to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
I
I
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of
carpet, install carpet before installing these items.
WARRANTY
I
I
I
I
I
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to
replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified
warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to
unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not
limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and
delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
I
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
I
I
I
09680 - 2
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Commercial grade, waterproof, heavy duty, tight looped, rubber backed carpet
suitable for direct
glue down application.
2.2 INST ALLA TION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-
based formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet and that is recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams
and to prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height
required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize
running joints.
3.1 EXAMINATION
E. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are
satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified.
F. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTMF 710 and the
following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and
other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and
CARPET
09680 - 3
dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by
the following:
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
a. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
I
G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
3.2
PREPARATION
I
I
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor
Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
I
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following:
I
1 . Carpet manufacturer.
I
I
B. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation. "
I
I
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways,
center seams under the door in closed position.
1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears.
2. Level adjoining border edges.
I
I
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
CARPET
09680 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or
seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
I
1.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
I
K.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
I
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
I
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
I
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
I
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRr 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor
Installations. "
I
I
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09680
I
I
I
I
I
I
CARPET
09680 - 5
I
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 -1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 09912 - PAINTING PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and
interior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not
specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials
or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final
finish.
C. Do not paint pre finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating
parts, and labels
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings III the following generally
inaccessible spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Utility tunnels.
d. Pipe spaces.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Senior ServIces & CommUnity Center AddItIOn
e. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
Anodized aluminum.
Bronze and brass.
Stainless Steel
Chromium Plate.
I
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
I
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
I
I
5.
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and
frames.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of
gypsum board.
I
I
I
I
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when
measured at an 85-degree meter.
I
I
2. Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
I
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system indicated.
I
1.
Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
I
I
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 2
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AdditIOn
1.5
1.6
2.
Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including
label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating
material.
I
'-
B.
I
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
I
C.
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and
coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
I
I
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
I
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
I
I
I
I
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste daily.
I
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.
I
I
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIOn
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and
in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and
identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below:
a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal. of each color applied.
b. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal. of each color applied.
c. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal. of each color applied.
2. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 1 gal., as appropriate, of each
material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: In order to conform to existing colors and finishes, all products
incorporated into the job will be those manufactured by Parker Paints. No substitutions
will be allowed.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various
coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer
for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 4
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate
colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be
used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish
manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed
substitutions.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Exterior Siding and Trim Primer: Parker Stainguard.
B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for
exterior application.
1. Parker, 1640, overlay white flat alkyd primer.
2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior
application.
1. Parker, 1845 Perm Gard, flat latex. Vapor barrier primer/sealer.
2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Siding Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior
application.
1. Parker Paint: 1950 overall satin acrylic latex, color # 55-04-490.
B. Exterior Trim Paint: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for
exterior application.
1. Parker Paints; 1900 overall, medium, satin acrylic latex, color # 55-05-724.
2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Walls Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex
enamel for interior application.
1. Parker Paints; 4850 Satin Glow. Satin Acrylic Latex Enamel. Color # 55-04-752.
2.7 INTERIOR WOOD CLEAR FINISH
A. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer
applied at spreading
Rate recommended by manufacture.
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Community Center AdditIOn
1. McCloskey; SSS 2000 super sanding sealer.
I
B. Interior waterborne clear satin varnish: Factory formulated clear satin acrylic-based
polyurethane
Varnish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1. Parker; Dry-fast, transparent clear varnish satin.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
EXAMINA nON
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information
on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified
over substrates primed by others.
PREP ARA TION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items
removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of
substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
099 I 2 - 6
I
I
C.
Surface Preparation:
manufacturer's written
specified.
Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
I
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIon
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster,
and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove
efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as
required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve
curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
I
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint
manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
I
I
3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based
solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment
from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat
when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of
the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish
each separate coat.
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators
and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
I
I
3.3 APPLICATION
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 -7
I
I
I
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
I
I
Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor Services & Commumty Center AdditIOn
I
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain
system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible
through registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to
match exterior.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
I
I
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured
as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth,
even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between
applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat
of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended
by manufacturer for material and texture required.
I
I
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 8
I
I
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry
film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
Senior Services & Community Center AddItIOn
3.4
E.
I
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited
to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
I
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Uninsulated metal piping.
2. Uninsulated plastic piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable
jacket material.
7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
I
I
I
I
G.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through
or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
I
I
I
I
I
H.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
1.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface
film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity,
brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
J.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
I
K.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
I
CLEANING
I
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lindberg & SmIth ArchItects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItion
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from Project site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent
finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from
pamtmg. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCAP1.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels and lap siding: Provide the following finish
systems over exterior, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
2. Products:: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Paint P-4:
1) Manufacturer: Parker Paints
2) Color: 55-04-490
B. Exterior Fascia & Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior, factory
prime fascia and trim:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over factory primer.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Paint P-5:
1) Manufacturer: Parker Paints
2) Color: 55-05-724
C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated
metal surfaces:
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 10
I
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal
pnmer.
I
I
Lmdberg & SmIth ArchItects
SenIor ServIces & CommunIty Center AddItIon
2.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
a. Paint P-5:
1) Manufacturer: Parker Paints
2) Color: 55-06-405
I
I
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior satin acrylic enamel.
I
I
I
I
3.7
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board
surfaces:
1. Satin Finish Acrylic-Enamel: Two finish coats over a primer.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Paint P-l:
1) Manufacturer: Parker Paints
2) Color: 55-04-752
I
a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
I
I
I
I
B.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated
metal surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
2. Paint P-2:
a.
b.
Manufacturer:
Color:
I
C. Interior Wood and Hardboard Trim (clear finish): Provide the following paint systems
over new interior wood surfaces:
1. Semi-gloss acrylic-enamel finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Finish coats:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Manufacturer:
b. Color:
I
I
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912-11
I
I
I
I Lmdberg & Smith Architects
Semor ServIces & Commumty Center AddItIOn
I END OF SECTION 09912
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 12
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItIon to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
SECTION 13851 - FIRE ALARM
PART I-GENERAL
I
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
FIRE ALARM
SUMMARY
I
ThIS Section includes fire alarm systems.
I
I
I
I
Extend the eXIsting fire alarm system as required. ProvIde new fire alarm devices as mdicated.
Defimtions:
1. F ACP: Fire alarm control panel.
2. LED: Light-emitting diode.
3. Defimtions in NFPA 72 apply to frre alarm terms used in this SectIon.
System Description:
1.
Noncoded, addressable system; multiplexed signal transmISSIon dedIcated to fire alarm
service only with mterface to eXIstmg frre alarm system.
I
2. All work to frre alarm system shall be by a local (wIthm 50 mtles) contractor.
Performance Requirements:
I
1.
2.
3.
Comply with NFP A 72.
Premises protection
Fire alarm signal imttatIon shall be by one or more of the following devices:
I
a. Manual statlOns.
b. Smoke detectors.
c. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
I
I
4.
Frre alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
a. Mamtain the eXIstmg sequence of actIons.
b. Add the new buildmg as a new zone, modify existing graphIc annuctator or replace
as required. Alarm notIfication appliances shall operate continuously.
c. Identify alarm at the F ACP and remote annunciators.
d. De-energize electromagnetIc door holders.
e. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving statton.
f. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
g. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
h. Switch heatmg, ventIlatmg, and air-condlttoning eqUlpment controls to fire alarm
mode.
1. Close smoke dampers m aIr ducts of system servmg zone where alarm was
mitIated.
J. Record events m the system memory.
I
I
I
I
5.
SupervIsory slgnallmtlatIon shall be by one or more of the following devices or actIons:
I
13851-1
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
A.
a. OperatIOn of a fire-protection system valve tamper.
6.
System trouble signal mitlatIOn shall be by one or more of the following devices or
actions:
a. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating devIce, signaling line, and
notification-appliance circuits.
b. Opemng, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiatmg and supervisory signal-
mitiatmg devIces.
c. Loss of primary power at the F ACP.
d. Ground or a single break m F ACP internal circuits.
e. Abnormal ac voltage at the F ACP.
f. A break in standby battery crrcuitry.
g. Failure of battery charging.
h. Abnormal position of any switch at the F ACP or annunciator.
7.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
F ACP and remote annunciators. Record event.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
I
B. Shop Drawings:
I
I
I
I
I
C.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
1.
System Operation Descnption: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
Device Address List: Coordinate with fmal system programmmg.
System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit SIzes, and cable and wire types and
SIzes.
WIring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for eqUIpment
and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color
code.
Battenes: SIze calculations.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and mamtenance data.
Submittals to Authorities Havmg Jurisdiction: In addition to distnbutIOn reqUIrements for
submittals specified in Division 1 SectIOn "Submittals," make an identtcal submittal to
authorities having jurisdiction. To facilItate reVIew, include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations. ResubmIt if required to make clarifications
or reVISIons to obtain approval. On receIpt of comments from authontIes having jurisdictIOn,
submit them to ArchItect for review.
13851-2
FIRE ALARM
13851-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer QualificatIons: Personnel shall be trained and certIfied by manufacturer for mstallatIOn
of units required for thIS Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessones: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authoritIes having jurisdiction, and marked for
mtended use.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. F ACP and Equipment:
a. Match existing panel, field venfy existing conditions prior to bid.
2. Wire and Cable:
a. Comtran Corporation.
b. Heltx/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.
d. West Penn Wrre/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologtes.
3. AudIble and Visual Signals:
a. Amseco; a diviSIon of KobishI America, Inc.
b. CommerCIal Products Group.
c. Gentex CorporatIOn.
d. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
2.2 EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Compatibility with Existing EqUIpment: FIre alarm system and components shall operate as an
extenSIOn of an existmg system.
2.3 FACP
A. General DescriptIOn:
1. Existmg, maintain 100% of eXIsting functionality WIth new extenSIOn of system.
2. Modular, power-lImited deSIgn WIth electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
3. Addressable control cirCUIts for operatIOn ofmechamcal equipment.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
2.4 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. DescnptIOn: UL 38 listed; fimshed in red with molded, raised-letter operating mstructions in
contrastmg color. Station shall show VIsible mdicatIOn of operation. Mounted on recessed
outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-actIOn mechanism requiring two actIOns to imtiate an alarm, pull-lever type.
With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2. StatIon Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. -Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector SensItivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percentlfoot (0.008 and 0.011 percentlmm)
smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indIcated and with screw terminals for system
connectIons.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices m a smgle-
mounting assembly.
B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24- V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 10
feet (3 m) from the bell. IO-mch (254-mm) size, unless otherwise mdicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe hghts listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minImum l-inch- (25-mm-) hIgh letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
D. Connect to spnnkler system Flow and Tamper switches, also connect to PIV with is remote
from buildmg. See clVll and electrical SIte plan.
2.7 WIRE AND CABLE
A. WIre and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complymg with
NFP A 70, ArtIcle 760.
B. Signalmg Lme Circuits: TWIsted, shIelded pair, SIze as recommended by system manufacturer.
FIRE ALARM
13851-4
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. CIrCUIt Integnty Cable: TWIsted shielded paIr, NFP A 70 ArtIcle 760, Classification CI,
for power-limIted fire alarm sIgnal servIce. UL lIsted as Type FPL, and complying WIth
reqUIrements m UL 1424 and m UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
C. Non-Power-LimIted Circuits: SolId-copper conductors WIth 600- V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded
insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, mImmum.
2. Lme-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to the existing control panel in the exisnng part of the building.
2. Connect new equipment to the existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement the existmg momtonng eqUIpment as necessary to
extend the existing monitoring funcnons to the new points. New components shall be
capable of mergmg WIth the existmg configuration without degradmg the performance of
eIther system.
B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:
1. Locate in general areas indIcated on the plans.
C. HV AC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opemng.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFP A 72 and NFP A 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of the duct.
E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 mches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes WIth the devIce-operatmg mechamsm
concealed behind a grille.
F. VIsible Alarm-Indicatmg DeVIces: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
6 inches (150 mm) below the ceIlmg.
G. DeVIce Location-IndIcatmg Lights: Locate m publIc space near the deVIce they monitor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wlTIng accordmg to the followmg:
1. NECA 1.
2. TIAlEIA 568-A.
FIRE ALARM 13851-5
I
Hunt EngIneering
AddItion to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
3.4
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
B.
WIring Method: Install wmng In metal raceway accordIng to Division 16 Section "Raceways
and Boxes."
1. Fire alarm cIrcuits and equipment control winng associated WIth the fire alarm system
shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any
other wire or cable.
C.
WIring within Enclosures: Separate power-hmIted and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and traIn conductors to terminal pOInts WIth no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated WIth
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wirmg
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
eqUIpment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audIble alarm-indicatIng circuits differently from alarm-initiatIng circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes
and covers red.
IDENTIFICA nON
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "
Electrical Identlfication."
B. Install Instructions frame in a location viSIble from the FACP.
c.
PaInt power-supply disconnect SWItch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
GROUNDING
A.
Ground the FACP and assocIated circUIts; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from
main service ground to the FACP.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the follOWIng field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the Installation, submit a wntten statement using the
form for Record of Completion shown in NFP A 72.
2. Perform each electncal test and visual and mechanical inspectlon hsted In NFP A 72.
CertIfy comphance with test parameters.
3. VIsual Inspection: Conduct a visual Inspectlon before any testing. Use as-built drawings
and system documentatIOn for the InSpectIOn. Identlfy improperly located, damaged, or
nonfunctional eqUIpment, and correct before beginnIng tests.
I
FIRE ALARM 13851-6
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
4. Testmg: Follow procedure and record results complying wIth requirements m NFP A 72.
I
a.
Detectors that are outside their marked sensitIVIty range shall be replaced.
I
5.
Test and Inspection Records: Prepare accordmg to NFPA 72, mcludmg demonstratIOn of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form m AppendIX A in NFP A 70.
I
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representatIve to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and mamtain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to DivIsion 1
I
I
END OF SECTION 13851
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIRE ALARM
13851-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. ThIS Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
B. See DiVIsion 10 Section "Fire-Protection SpecIalties" for cabinets and fire extinguishers.
C. See DIvision 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not specIfied in this Section.
D. Provide a new feeder to the eXIsting fire riser in the kitchen area. Modify existing riser as
reqUIred.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to pipmg containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from spnnklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible lmk or destroys frangible device. Hose
connectIOns are included if indicated.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard PIping System Component Workmg Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Fire-suppression spnnkler system design shall be approved by authorittes having Jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for AvaIlable Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-servIce pIping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Spnnkler Occupancy Hazard Classificattons:
a. BUIlding Service Areas' Ordmary Hazard, Group 1
b. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c. Mechamcal EqUIpment Rooms: Ordmary Hazard, Group 1
d. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard
3. Minimum DenSIty for Automattc-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: [0.10 gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq. ft. (4.1 L/min. per sq.
mover 139 sq. mol' 4.1 mmlmin. over 139 sq. m)] .
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpm/!.q.ft. over 1500 sq. ft. (6.1
over Llmin. per sq. mover 139 silo mol' 6.1 mm/min. over 139 sq. m)] .
c. Ordmary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm/sq. ft. over 1500 sq. ft. (8.1
L/min. per sq. III over 139 sq. m)] .
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-1
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItIon to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
4. MaXImum ProtectIon Area per Spnnkler:
a. Office Spaces: 120 sq. ft. (11.1 sq. m)]
b. Storage Areas: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)]
c. Mechanical EqUIpment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)]
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)]
e. Other Areas: Accordmg to NFP A 13 recommendatIOns, unless otherwIse
indicated.
C. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to NFP A 13 .
1.4 SUBMITI ALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculatIOns, if
applicable.
C. Field test reports and certificates.
D. FIeld quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilitIes include desigmng, fabricatmg, and installing
fIre-suppression systems and providing professional engineenng services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fIre-hydrant flow test.
1. Engineenng Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test
reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. NFP A Standards: Flre-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and
testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFP A 13R, "Installation of Spnnkler Systems in ResidentIal Occupancies up to and
Including F our Stories m Height."
3. NFP A 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
4. NFPA 24, "InstallatIOn of Private FIre ServIce Mains and TheIr Appurtenances."
5. NFPA 230, "FIre Protection of Storage."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt EngIneering
AdditIOn to Senior Services and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where tItles below introduce hsts, the follOWIng requirements apply to
product selection:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance WIth requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specIfied.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, DuctIle-Iron PIpe: A WW A C151, with mechanical-jOInt bell end and plain
end.
1. Mechamcal-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A Cll 0, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: A WW A CIII, ductile- or gray-iron gland, rubber gasket,
and steel bolts and nuts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WW A C151, WIth push-on-joint bell end and plain end.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern.
C. Grooved-End, DuctIle-Iron Pipe: A WW A C151, WIth factory- or field-formed, radius-cut-
grooved ends according to A WW A C606.
I. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
I) Victaulic Co. of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with aD matching
ductile-iron-pIpe aD
c. Grooved-End-PIpe Couplings: A WW A C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-
iron-pipe aD. Include ductile-iron housing WIth keys matchIng ductIle-iron-pIpe
and fittIng grooves, rubber gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts.
d. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting WIth key for ductIle-
iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type, ductIle-Iron hOUSIng with rubber gasket
listed for use WIth hOUSIng and steel bolts and nuts.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight -Steel PIpe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795. with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME BI6.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded FittIngs: ASME BI6.3.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-3
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AddItIon to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
3. Gray-Iron Threaded FIttmgs: ASME B16.4.
4. Steel Threaded PIpe NIpples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pIpe Include ends matchmg joming method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
B. Grooved-End, Standard-WeIght Steel PIpe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795, with factory- or field-formed, square-cut-grooved ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Central Sprinkler Corp.
3) Ductilic, Inc.
4) JDH Pacific, Inc.
5) National Fittings, Inc.
6) Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
7) Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
8) Star Pipe Products; Star FIttmgs Div.
9) Victaulic Co. of AmerIca.
10) Ward Manufacturing.
b. Grooved-End FittIngs: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD
matching steel-pipe OD.
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and A WW A C606, rigid pattern, unless
otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron
housmg with keys matchmg steel-pipe and fitting grooves,[ prelubricated] rubber
gasket hsted for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, WIth 175-pSlg (1200-kPa)
mimmum workmg-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with pIping.
B. Outlet SpeCIalty Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Anvil InternatIOnal, Inc.
b. Central Spnnkler Corp.
c. Ductihc, Inc.
d. JDH Pacific, Inc.
e. National Fittmgs, Inc.
r. Shurjoint PIping Products, Inc.
g. Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
h. Star PIpe Products; Star Fittings DIV.
1. VIctauhc Co. of AmerIca.
J. Ward Manufacturing.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Mechamcal-T and -Cross FIttmgs: UL 213, ductIle-iron housing WIth gaskets, boIts and
nuts, and threaded, lockmg-lug, or grooved outlets.
3. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet FIttmgs: UL 213, ductile-iron housmg or castmg wIth
gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprmkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or lockIng-
lug mlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Viking Corp.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and
threaded outlet for sprinkler.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductIle-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain
outlet and sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. G/J Innovations, Inc.
d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
F. Drop-Nipple FIttings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CECA, LLC.
b. Ment.
2.5 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-pslg (1200 kPa) mimmum pressure
rating.
B. Gate Valves WIth Wall Indicator Posts:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-5
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIon to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-Iron body, bronze mounted, wIth solid dISC, nonrising stem,
operating nut, and flanged ends.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Gnnnell FIre ProtectIon.
b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
c. NIBCO.
d. Stockham.
C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Global Safety Products, Inc.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or
with grooved ends.
a. ]Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Global Safety Products, Inc.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Pratt, Henry Company.
7) Victauhc Co. of Amenca.
D. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body wIth flanged or
grooved ends.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AF AC Inc.
b. American Cast Iron PIpe Co.; Waterous Co.
c. Central Sprinkler Corp.
d. Clow Valve Co.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkms Valves.
g. FIrematic Sprinkler DevIces, Inc.
h. Globe FIfe Sprinkler CorporatIon.
1. Gnnnell FIre Protection.
J. Hammond Valve.
k. Matco-Norca, Inc.
1. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve DIY.
m. Mueller Company.
n. NIBCO.
o. Potter-Roemer; FIre Protection Div.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor SefV1ces and Community Center
12-19-2006
p. Reliable Automatic Sprmkler Co., Inc.
q. Star Spnnkler Inc.
r. Stockham.
s. Umted Brass Works, Inc.
t. Venus FIre Protection, Ltd.
u. VIctauhc Co. of Amenca.
v. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS& Y type.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
3) NIBCO.
4) United Brass Works, Inc.
2. NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Clow Valve Co.
2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkms Valves.
4) Hammond Valve.
5) Mtlwaukee Valve Company.
6) Mueller Company.
7) NIBCO.
8) Red-Whtte Valve Corp.
9) United Brass Works, Inc.
2.6 UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing
type wIth bronze body, nonmetalhc dISC, and threaded ends.
B. Gate Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, wIth
bronze body, solid wedge, and threaded ends.
C. Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, WIth
bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Spnnkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-Iron body WIth
flanged or grooved ends, and 175-ps1g (1200-kPa) mimmum pressure ratIng.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-7
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. FIremattc Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d. Globe Fire Spnnkler Corporatton.
e. Grinnell Fire Protection.
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
g. Star Sprinkler Inc.
h. Venus FIfe Protection, Ltd.
1. Victaulic Co. of America.
J. Viking Corp.
2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical mstallation, with
bronze grooved seat WIth a-ring seals, smgle-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim
sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages and fill-line
attachment with stramer.
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain
pIpmg.
b. Drip Cup Assembly: PIpe dram with check valve to mam dram piping.
B. Automattc Drain Valves: UL 1726, N"PS 3/4 (DN 20), ball-check deVIce WIth threaded ends.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AF AC Inc.
b. Grinnell FIre Protection.
2.8 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-pslg (1200-kPa) mmimum pressure
ratmg.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AFAC Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Firemattc Sprinkler DeVIces, Inc.
4. Globe Fire Spnnkler Corporatton.
5. Grinnell FIfe ProtectIOn.
6. Rehable Automatic Spnnkler Co., Inc.
7. Star Spnnkler Inc.
8. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
9. Victauhc Co. of America.
10. VIkmg Corp.
C. Automattc Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the followmg:
1. UL 199, for nonresIdenttal apphcations.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. UL 1626, for residentIal applIcatIOns.
3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categones: Nominal I/2-mch (12.7-mm) orifice for "OrdInary"
temperature classIfication ratIng, unless otherwise Indicated or reqUIred by apphcatIon.
E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1. Concealed ceilIng sprinklers, including cover plate.
2. Flush ceiling sprinklers, includIng escutcheon.
3. Pendent spnnklers.
4. Quick-response sprinklers.
5. Recessed spnnklers, IncludIng escutcheon.
6. Sidewall spnnklers.
7. Upright sprinklers.
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.
G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosIon-resistant paint.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified wIth
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling MountIng: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
2. SIdewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
I. Spnnkler Guards: Wire-cage type, Including fastemng deVIce for attachIng to sprinkler.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or hIgher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise Indicated.
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Threaded-end, black standard-weight steel pIpe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittmgs; and threaded JOInts.
B. NPS 1-112 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, black standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug
fittings; and twist-locked JOInts.
C. NPS 2 (ON 50) and Larger: Threaded-end, black, standard-weIght steel pIpe; cast- or
malleable-Iron threaded fittmgs; and threaded JOInts.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-9
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
D. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Grooved-end, black, standard-weIght steel pIpe; grooved-end
fittmgs; grooved-end-pIpe couphngs; and grooved Joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Where specIfic valve types are not indicated, the followmg requirements apply:
1. Listed FIre-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applicatlOns where
required by NFP A 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
2. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-hsted and FMG-approved
valves are not required by NFP A 13 .
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
b. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to DIvision 15 Section "Basic Mechamcal Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Threaded Jomts: Comply with NFP A 13 for pipe thIckness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thIckness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authontIes having Jurisdictton and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME Bl.20.l.
C. Twist-Locked Jomts: Insert plain-end piping into lockmg-lug fitting and rotate retainer lug one-
quarter turn.
D. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific equipment,
pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
E. Grooved Jomts: Assemble Jomts WIth listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. DuctIle-Iron PIpe: RadlUs-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittmgs and
grooved-end-pIpe couplmgs.
2. Steel PIpe: Square-cut or roll-groove pIping as mdIcated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigId, grooved-end-pipe couplIngs, unless otherwise indIcated.
3. Dry-PIpe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
3.5 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Connect fire-suppression pIping to bUIldmg's interior water distnbutIon pIpmg. Refer to
DiVISIon 15 Section "DomestIc Water PIpmg" for mterior pipmg.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIon to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, dram, and other accessones mdicated
at connectIOn to water dIstributIOn pipmg. Refer to DIvisIOn 15 Section "Plumbmg SpecialtIes"
for backflow preventers.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to DivIsIon 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved jomts.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1;2
(DN 65) and larger connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFP A 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblIes, and drain risers adjacent to standpIpes
when sprinkler pipmg is connected to standpipes.
1. Install drain valves on standpipes.
1. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire departInent connectIons and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside bUIlding.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
1. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFP A 13 for hanger materials.
1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
2. Install spnnkler system piping accordmg to NFP A 13.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping accordmg to NFP A 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
N. Install pressure gages on nser or feed mam, at each sprinkler test connectIOn, and at top of each
standpIpe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1;4 (DN 8) and with soft
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-11
,..,.,.,.,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ~_~__""""'~ ""_~.......~ ~ ~"..'"...." "'~"""'''''''''''''' ~""""o""",,"'" ,W"~^""'--.,."" ,> '"""'" ,~...~~< ..~'" ",it' '"'" -~:4~""'t"~~"""""'-~"''''''''''''''''''%> M'1".""'~A '~'__''''''''''-~l'o:.- t~"~_l
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permIt removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezmg.
O. Fill wet-pipe spnnkler system pipmg with water.
3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authoritIes having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fITe-protectIOn shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
D. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical positIOn for proper direction of flow, including bypass
check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connectIon.
3.8 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not mdlcated, use Ithe
following sprinkler types: !
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed spnnklers.
3. Wall Mountmg: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Sprinkler Finishes:
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in fimshed spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfmlshed spaces not exposed to VIew; wax
coated where exposed to aCIds, chemicals, or other corrOSIve fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, WIth factory-painted white cover plate.
c. Flush Spnnklers: Bright chrome, WIth painted whIte escutcheon.
d. Recessed Spnnklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
e. ResidentIal Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dImenSIOn of acoustical ceIlmg
panels and tiles.
B. Do not mstall pendent or sidewall, wet-type spnnklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-
type spnnklers WIth water supply from heated space.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indIcate general arrangement of pIping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install pIping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect pIpIng to specialty valves, hose valves, specIalties, fire department connections, and
accessones.
D. Electncal Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and BondIng."
G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements In
NFP A 13 and in DIvision 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and Inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems accordIng to NFP A 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
3. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
4. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writIng to Architect and authorities having Jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 13915
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-13
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the followmg:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilIngs,
unexcavated spaces, craw1spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Intenor Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples mclude fimshed occupied
spaces and mechanIcal eqUIpment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambIent
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Intenor Installations: Concealed from view and protected from phYSIcal contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by bUIlding occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations WIthin unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Weldmg certIficates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: QualIfy processes and operators accordmg to A WS D 1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
I
I
I
I
I
I
12-19-2006
B. Steel PIpe Welding: QualIfY processes and operators accordmg to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: SectIon IX, "Weldmg and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
Comply with prOVISIOns in ASME B31 Senes, "Code for Pressure Piping."
CerttfY that each welder has passed A WS qualificatIOn tests for welding processes
mvolved and that certIfication IS current.
C. Electrical Charactenstics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of hIgher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment IS approved in writmg and
connectmg electncal servIces, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropnately modified. If
mirumum energy ratmgs or efficiencies are specIfied, equipment shall comply WIth
reqUIrements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A
B.
2.2
A
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
A
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
Refer to individual Division 15 pIping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
Refer to individual Division 15 pIpmg Sections for special joining matena1s not lIsted below.
PIpe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, lI8-inch (3.2-
mm) maxImum thIckness unless thtckness or specific material IS indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
Brazmg Filler Metals: A WS AS.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding FIller Metals: Comply with A WS DlO.12.
Solvent Cements for Joirung PlastIc PIping:
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Description: CombinatIon fitting of copper alloy and ferrous matenals WIth threaded, solder-
Joint, plam, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
Insulatmg Matenal: Suitable for system flUId, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Umons: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-p<;ig (1725-kPa) mirumum
workmg pressure at 180 dcg F (82 deg C).
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-2
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
D. DIelectnc Flanges: Factory-fabncated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-pSlg
(J 035- or 2070-kPa) mimmum working pressure as reqUired to suit system pressures.
I
I
E. DIelectnc Couplings: Galvaruzed-steel coupling WIth inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lIning; threaded ends; and 300-pslg (2070-kPa) rmrumum workmg pressure at 225 deg F
(107 deg C).
F. DIelectnc NIpples: Electroplated steel nipple WIth mert and noncorrOSIve, thermoplastIc lining;
plam, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-pSlg (2070-kPa) rmrumum workmg pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg C).
I
I
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Descnption: Modular sealmg element urnt, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
I
I
I
I
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking lmks shaped to fit surface of pIpe. Include type and
number reqUired for pipe material and SIze of pIpe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvaruzed-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-mch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed WIth
welded longitudinal joint.
I
I
I
I
B. Steel PIpe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galVanIzed, plam ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabncated "wall pipe" equivalent to duchle-Iron pressure pipe, With plain
ends and mtegral waterstop, unless otherwIse mdicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve WIth mtegral clamping flange. Include
clampmg ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashmg.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
B.
One-PIece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass WIth polIshed chrome-plated
firush.
I
I
A.
Descnphon: Manufactured wall and ceIlmg escutcheons and floor plates, With an ID to closely
fit around pIpe, tube, and insulation of insulated pipmg and an OD that completely covers
openmg.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-3
I
I
I
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: WIth set screw.
1. Flrush: Polished chrome-plated.
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
D.
Sp1it-Castmg, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed lunge and set screw.
1. Fmish: Polished chrome-plated.
I
2.7
GROUT
I
A.
DescriptIOn: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshnnk and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
I
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjustmg, nonstaming, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for intenor and extenor applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.S-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packagmg: Premixed and factory packaged.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
I
A. Install pipmg according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
I
B. Drawmg plans, schematics, and dIagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate frictIOn
loss, expansIOn, pump sizmg, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviatIOns to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
I
I
C. Install pIping in concealed locations, unless otherwise mdicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and pipmg m equipment rooms and servIce areas at nght
angles or parallel to buildmg walls. DIagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
I
E. Install pIping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceihng panel removal.
F. Install pIpmg to permIt valve servicmg.
I
G. Install pIpmg at indicated slopes.
H. Install pIpmg free of sags and bends.
I
L Install fittings for changes m directIOn and branch connectIons.
I
J. Install piping to allow apphcation of insulatIOn.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
I
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceIlings, and floors.
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-4
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditlOn to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
3.2
M. Install sleeves for pIpes passmg through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
I
N. Aboveground, Extenor-Wall PIpe Penetrations: Seal penetrations usmg sleeves and mechanIcal
sleeve seals. Select sleeve SIze to allow for 1-lllch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for mstallmg mechanical sleeve seals.
I
1.
2.
Install steel pIpe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) m dIameter.
Mecharncal Sleeve Seal InstallatlOn: Select type and number of sealmg elements
reqUlred for pIpe matenal and SIze. PositlOn pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and mstall in annular space between pIpe and sleeve. TIghten
bolts agamst pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertIght
seal.
I
I
O.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe PenetratIons: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetratIons using mecharncal sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for l-l11ch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
I
1.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and SIze. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pIpe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause seahng elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
I
I
P.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintam mdIcated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pIpe penetrations. Seal pipe penetratIons with firestop matenals. Refer to DIvision 7 SectIon
"Through-Penetration FIrestop Systems" for materials.
I
Q.
Venfy final equipment locatIons for roughing-in.
I
R.
Refer to eqUlpment specificatIOns m other Sections of these SpecificatIOns for roughing-in
requirements.
I
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Jom pIpe and fittmgs accordmg to the following reqUlrements and DIVISlOn 15 SectIons
specifying piping systems.
I
B.
Ream ends of pIpes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plam ends of steel pIpe.
I
c.
Remove scale, slag, dIrt, and debns from mside and outSIde of pIpe and fittmgs before
assembly.
I
D.
Soldered Jomts: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwIse indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints accordmg to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complymg WIth ASTM B 32.
I
E.
Brazed Jomts: Construct Jomts accordmg to A WS's "Brazmg Handbook," "PIpe and Tube"
Chapter, usmg copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with A WS A5.8.
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-5
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engtneering
AdditIOn to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
F.
Threaded Jomts: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean usmg sharp dIes. Ream threaded pIpe ends to remove burrs and restore
full 10. Join pipe fittmgs and valves as follows:
I
I
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specIfied.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pIpe or pipe fittings wIth threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe secttons that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints accordmg to AWS DlO.12, usmg qualified processes and
welding operators accordmg to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
I
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thtckness for servIce
applIcation. Install gasket concentncally positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I
3.3
PIPING CONNECTIONS
I
A
Make connectIOns according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping ~PS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each pIece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping -:\PS 2- 1,'2 (D"!\ 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect pipmg materials of
dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittmgs to connect pipmg
materials of dIssimIlar metals.
I
2.
I
3.
4.
I
I
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A Install eqUIpment to allow maximum pOSSIble headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
I
I
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendIcular to other buildmg systems and
components in exposed mterior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical eqUIpment to facilitate servIce, mamtenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnectmg, With rmnimum mterference to other
installatIOns. Extend grease fittmgs to accessible locatIOns.
I
I
D. Install eqUIpment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base accordmg to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and accordmg to seismic codes at ProJect.
I
I
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-6
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditlOn to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
3.6
3.7
3.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.
2.
Construct concrete bases of dimensIOns mdicated, but not less than 4- mches (100 mm)
larger m both directions than supported unit.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise mdicated,
mstall dowel rods on 18-mch (450-111111) centers around the full penmeter of the base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage deVIces. Use supported eqUipment manufacturer's settmg
drawmgs, templates, diagrams, instructions, and dIrectIOns furmshed WIth items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations reqUired for proper attachment to supported eqUipment.
Install anchor bolts accordmg to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructlOns.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa ), 28-day compressIve-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specIfied in DIViSIOn 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete].
I
I
3.
I
4.
I
5.
6.
7.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
I
A.
Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
I
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
I
c.
Field Welding: Comply with A WS D1.1.
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
I
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, naIlers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
mechamcal matenals and eqUipment.
I
B.
Select fastener SIzes that wIll not penetrate members if OpposIte side will be exposed to VIew or
WIll receive fimsh matenals. TIghten connections between members. Install fasteners WIthout
sphttmg wood members.
I
c.
Attach to substrates as reqUired to support apphed loads.
I
GROUTING
MIX and mstall grout for mechanical eqUipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
eqUipment base plates, and anchors.
I
Clean surfaces that WIll come mto contact With grout.
I
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
Avoid air entrapment dunng placement of grout.
I
Place grout, completely fillIng eqUipment bases.
I
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth beanng surface for eqUipment.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Adchhon to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
3.9 Record Drawings and O&M Manuals
A. Keep record drawings on site and update dally. Record location w/demenslOns of all
underground or concealed work.
B. Subrmt record drawmgs and O&M Manual (3 copIes mimmum) at the end of the project.
1. Include all special warranty information
2. Include copy of permits.
END OF SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-8
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addltton to Seruor Services and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
1.2
1.3
MOTORS
SUMMARY
I
A.
Tills SectIOn includes basic reqUIrements for factory-mstalled motors.
B.
I
See DivisIOn 15 Section "Mechanical VibratIOn and Seismic Controls" for mountmg motors and
Vibration isolatton and seisrmc-control devices.
c.
See indiVidual Sections for applIcatton of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor-driven eqUIpment.
I
SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate
data and ratings; shippmg, installed, and operatmg weights; enclosure type and mounting
arrangements; size, type, and locatIOn of windmg terminations; conduit entry and ground lug
locations; and information on coatings or firushes.
I
B.
Shop Drawmgs for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sectIOns, and
details, including required clearances and service space around eqUIpment. Include the
followmg:
I
1. Each installed urut's type and details.
2. Nameplate legends.
3. Diagrams of power, signal, and control winng. Provide schematic winng magram for
each type ot motor and for each control scheme.
I
I
C.
QualIfication Data: For testmg agency.
I
D.
Field qualIty-control test reports.
E.
OperatIOn and Mamtenance Data.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electncal Components, Devices, and Accessones: Listed and labeled as defined m NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authoritIes havmg jurisdictIOn, and marked for
intended use.
I
B.
Comply With NFPA 70.
I
I
15055-1
I
~
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, InStalled umts, and accessory devIces and features that comply
WIth the folloWIng:
I
1.
CompatIble WIth the following:
I
I
a. MagnetIc controllers.
2. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply CirCUIt and required control sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
I
A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:
1.
Different ratmgs, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another
Section.
Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or charactenstics,
other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
I
2.
I
2.2
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
I
B. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
I
C. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nommal circuit voltage to
which motor is connected.
D. ServIce Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
I
I
I
E. Duty: Continuous duty at ambIent temperature of 105 dcg F (40 dcg C) and at altItude of3JOO
feet (1005 m) above sea level.
F. Capacity and Torque CharactenstIcs: SuffiCIent to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altItude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and WIthout exceedmg nameplate ratings or consIdenng servIce factor.
G. Enclosure: Open dnpproof.
I
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium mduction motor.
I
B.
EffiCIency: Premium, as defmed m NEMA MG 1.
I
I
MOTORS
15055-2
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
c.
Stator: Copper windmgs, unless otherwIse indIcated.
I
1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D.
Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwIse mdIcated.
I
E. Bearings: Double-shIelded, prelubncated ball bearings sUltable for radial and thrust loadmg.
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulatlOn ratmg, unless otherwIse mdicated.
I
G.
InsulatlOn: Class F, unless otherwIse mdIcated.
I
H.
Code Letter DesignatIon:
1. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristIc.
I.
Enclosure: rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
I
1.
Fmish: Gray enamel.
I
2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
MOTORS
A.
Type: One of the followmg, to SUlt starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
I
1.
2.
3.
Permanent-split capacItor.
Split-phase start, capacItor run.
CapacItor start, capacItor run.
I
B.
Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
I
C.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatIcally open power supply circUlt to motor
when wmdmg temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulatlOn. Thermal-protectIon deVIce shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
I
I
D.
Beanngs: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft; sealed, prelubncated-sleeve type for other smgle-phase motors.
E.
Source QualIty Control for FIeld-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor
accordmg to NEMA MG 1:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Measure wmdmg reSIstance.
Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform mgh-potentIal test.
I
I
I
15055-3
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION
I
I
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable ralls, or other support, arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructlOns. Attach by bolting. Level and align WIth load
transfer hnk.
I
B. Comply with mountIng and anchoring requirements specIfied In DivISIon 15 Section
"Mechamcal Vibration and SeIsmic Controls."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS
I
I
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests.
I
1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructlOns.
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at
motor design load.
4. Test interlocks and control and safety features for proper operation.
5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase comply with nameplate rating and
NEMA MG 1 tolerances.
I
B.
Perform the follOWIng field tests and Inspections and prepare test reports:
I
1.
2.
Perform electrIcal tests and visual and mechanical inspections.
Correct malfunctionIng umts on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 15055
I
I
I
MOTORS
15055-4
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
SUMMARY
I
A. ThIS Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Steel pIpe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pIpe hangers.
Metal frammg systems.
Thermal-hanger shIeld mserts.
Fastener systems.
Equipment supports.
I
I
B. See DIvisIOn 5 SectIon "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapez~
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
I
I
C. See DiVIsion 13 Section "FIre-Suppression Piping" for fire protection pIping.
D. See Division 15 SectIon "Mechanical Vibration and SeIsmIC Controls" for VIbration isolatIon
deVIces.
E. See DIviSIOn 15 Section(s) Metal Ducts for duct hangers and supports.
I
1.2 DEFINITIONS
I
A. Termmology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "GUIdelmes on Terminology for PIpe Hangers and
Supports. "
I
I
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. DeSIgn supports for multIple pIpes capable of supportmg combmed weIght of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
B. DeSIgn eqUIpment supports capable of supporting combmed operatmg weight of supported
eqUIpment and connected systems and components.
I
C. DeSIgn selSIDlc-restramt hangers and supports for plpmg and eqUIpment and obtam approval
from authontIes having JunsdICtIon.
I
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
A. Product Data: For the followmg:
I
1. Steel pIpe hangers and supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIOn to Seruor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabricatIon and installatIon details and mclude calculations for the
following:
I
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framIng systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Eqmpment supports.
C. Weldmg certIficates.
I
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: SectIOn IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance WIth requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
I
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
A. Descnption: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support ApplicatIOns" ArtIcle for where to use specific hanger and support types.
I
I
I
B. ]Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a dIvisIOn of Cooper Industnes.
2. ERICO/MIcmgan Hanger Co.
3. Globe PIpe Hanger Products, Inc.
4. Gnnnell Corp.
5. GS Metals Corp.
6. NatIOnal PIpe Hanger Corporatron.
C. Galvanized, MetallIC Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatmgs: Plastic coatmg, jacket, or liner.
I
E.
Padded Hangers: Hanger WIth fiberglass or other pipe insulatIon pad or cusruon for support of
beanng surface of pIpmg.
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-2
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Senior ServIces and Conununity Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabncated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
DescnptIOn: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabncated pIpe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
I
I
B.
Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a dIvisIOn of Cooper Industnes.
2. ERICO/Micmgan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut DIV.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
I
I
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard firush, unless bare metal surfaces are indIcated.
I
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
I
A.
DescriptIon: 100-pSlg- (690-kPa-) mirumum, compressIve-strength insulation insert encased in
sheet metal shIeld.
I
B. Manufacturers:
C.
InsulatIOn-Insert Material for Cold PIpmg:
calcium sIlicate WIth vapor barner.
Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
I
I
I
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Micmgan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. PIpe ShIelds, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufactunng Company, Inc.
D.
Insulation-Insert Matenal for Hot PIping:
calcIum SIlicate.
Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
I
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shIeld shall cover entIre circumference of pIpe.
I
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shIeld shall cover lower 180 degrees of pIpe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 Inches (50 lllm) beyond sheet metal smeld for pIpmg operating below
ambIent aIr temperature.
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Seruor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacitIes appropnate for supported loads and budding
matenals where used.
1. Manufacturers:
I
I
I
a. HiltI, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fasterung, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B.
Mecharucal-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zmc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropnate for supported
loads and buildIng materials where used.
I
1.
Manufacturers:
I
I
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. DescriptIon: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulIc-cement, nonshnnk and
nonmetallIc grout; smtable for intenor and extenor applIcations.
1. Properties: Nonstairung, noncorrOSIve, and nongaseous.
2. Design MIX: 5000-p:,( (34.S-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
I
A.
SpecIfic hanger and support reqmrements are specIfied in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-4
I
Hunt EngIneering
Addition to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
B Comply wIth MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selectIons and applicatIons that are not specIfied in
pIping system SectIOns.
C. Use hangers and supports wIth galvarnzed, metallic coatmgs for pIping and equipment that will
not have field-apphed fimsh.
D. Use nonmetallIc coatings on attachments for electrolytIC protectIon where attachments are m
dIrect contact WIth copper tubmg.
I
I
E. Use padded hangers for pIping that is subject to scratchmg.
F. Horizontal-PIpmg Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwIse mdicated and except as specified m
pIpmg system Sections, Install the followmg types:
G.
H.
I.
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspensIOn of noninsulated or
msulated statIOnary pipes, NPS li2 to NPS 30 (DK 15 to DK 750).
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pIpes, NPS 3/4 to 1\PS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of nomnsulated
stationary pipes, ~PS lf2 to NPS 8 (DK 15 to DN 200).
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, 1\PS 1:2 to NPS 30 (DK 15 to
OK 750).
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pIpes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DK 900), with steel pIpe base stanchion support and cast-Iron floor flange.
Complete PIpe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pIpes, T\:PS 2 to NPS 42 (D1\ 50 to
DN 1050), If longItudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertIcal adjustment IS not necessary.
I
2.
I
3.
I
4.
I
5.
6.
VertIcal-Pipmg Clamps: Unless otherwise IndIcated and except as specIfied m piping system
SectIons, install the follOWIng types:
I
I
I
I
1. ExtensIOn PIpe or RIser Clamp~ (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe nsers, XPS 3!4 to
~PS 20 (D~ 2() tl) D:\ SOU).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pIpe nsers,
'NPS 3,'4 to NPS 20 (D:\ 20 to Dt'\ 500), If10nger ends are reqUIred for nser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwIse mdIcated and except as specified in pipIng system
SectIons, install the followmg types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 mchcs (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel CleVIses (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 dcg f' (49 to 232 deg C) piping
InstallatIOns.
I
Building Attachments: Unless otherwIse indicated and except as specified m pIpIng system
SectIOns, install the followmg types:
I
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceIlIng.
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-5
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
I
I
K.
I
I
I
I
I
L.
M.
N.
I
I
I
2.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attachmg to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams If loads
are consIderable and rod SIzes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by usmg chp and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 Ib (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 Ib (1360 kg).
8.
9.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam IS reqUITed.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pIping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended m writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushIng InsulatIon.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting msulated pipe.
2.
3.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwIse indIcated and except as specified in pIping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring CushIOns (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 mcht's (32 mm).
2. Spnng-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equippmg Type 41 roll hanger with
spnngs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
vanabihty factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contractIon of pIpmg system from
base support.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selectIOns and applicatIOns that are not
specified in pIping system SectIons.
Comply WIth MFMA-I02 for metal frammg system selectIons and applications that are not
specified m piping system Sections.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors mstead of buildmg
attachments where reqmred in concrete construction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-6
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Seruor Services and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
A.
Steel PIpe Hanger InstallatIOn: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as reqUIred to properly support piping from building
structure.
I
B.
Trapeze PIpe Hanger InstallatIOn: Comply With MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
groupmg of parallel runs of honzontal pipIng and support together on field-fabncated trapeze
pipe hangers.
I
1.
2.
PIpes of Vanous SIzes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pIpe size or
mstall intermedIate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for indIvidual
pIpe hangers.
FIeld fabncate from ASTM A 36/ A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to A WS D 1.1.
I
I
C. Thermal-Hanger Smeld InstallatIon: Install in pipe hanger or shield for Insulated pipIng.
D.
Fastener System Installation:
I
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete IS placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
I
E.
Install hangers and supports complete WIth necessary Inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessones.
I
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seisIDIc movement of pipmg
systems, to permIt freedom of movement between pIpe anchors, and to facIlitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I
I
G. Install lateral bracing with pIpe hangers and supports to prevent swaYIng.
H.
Install bUIldIng attachments Within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additIOnal
attachments at concentrated loads, Includmg valves, flanges, and strainers, '\PS 2-1,2 (D0J 65)
and larger and at changes in direction of pIpIng. Install concrete Inserts before concrete IS
placed; fasten inserts to forms and Install reInforcing bars through operungs at top of Inserts.
I
I
I.
Load DIstnbutIOn: Install hangers and supports so pIpIng hve and dead loads and stresses from
movement WIll not be transmitted to connected eqUIpment.
I
J.
PIpe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pIpe slopes and so maXImum
pIpe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power pIpIng) and ASME B31.9 (for bUIldIng
services piping) are not exceeded.
I
K. Insulated PIping: Comply WIth the followmg:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to pIpIng.
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-7
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Senior ServIces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
a.
Pipmg Operatmg above AmbIent AIr Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
PIping Operatmg below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pIpe stress limits accordmg to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for bmldmg services pIping.
b.
c.
3.
Install MSS SP-S8, Type 39, protectIon saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill mtenor vOIds with Insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Install MSS SP-S8, Type 40, protectIve shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
Srueld Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
I
2.
I
4.
I
I
I
a. NPS J/4 to NPS 3-1(~ (D1\i 8 to DN 90): 12 Il1ches (305 mm) long and O.04R mch
(1.22 mm) thIck.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping Insulation.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
I
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaymg, for equipment supports.
I
I
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, 0011, and fit miscellaneous metal fabncations for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
FIt exposed connectIons together to form haIrline Joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shippmg SIze lllmtations.
I
I
C.
FIeld Welding: Comply WIth A WS D1.1 procedures for shIelded metal arc welding, appearance
and qualIty of welds, and methods used in correctmg weldmg work, and with the followmg:
I
1. Use materials and methods that mInImize distortion and develop strength and corrOSIon
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove weldmg flux immediately.
4. FInish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finIshing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
I
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-8
I
Hunt Engmeering
AddItIon to Seruor ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
3.5
ADJUSTING
I
I
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achIeve
indicated slope of pIpe.
3.6 PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Pamt exposed areas ImmedIately
after erectmg hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop pamtmg. Comply
WIth SSPC-P A 1 requirements for touchmg up field-painted surfaces.
I
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provIde mllllmum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm) .
I
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galVanizing-repaIr pamt to comply with ASTM A 780.
I
END OF SECTION 15060
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-9:
!
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I
A.
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
B.
I
I
Tlus Section mcludes the following:
1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.
2. Restrained elastomenc isolation mounts.
3. Freestandmg and restramed spring isolators.
4. Elastomenc hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
7. Thrust limits.
8. Pipe riser resilient supports.
9. Resilient pipe guides.
10. Seismic snubbers.
11. Restraining cables.
DefinitiOns:
1.
2.
Av: Effective peak: velocIty related acceleration coefficient.
OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California.
OSHPD assigns a umque anchorage preapproval "R" number to each seIsmic restramt it
tests. The number describes a specific device applIed as tested.
I
A.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Zone 3.
I
1.3
A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each VIbration isolation device indicated.
SUBMITTALS
I
B.
I
I
I
I
Shop Drawmgs: Include the followmg:
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibratIon Isolators and seismic
restraints and for desIgmng vibration isolation bases.
RIser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showmg anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, mItial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflectIon changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for exceSSIve stress and that none will exist.
VibratiOn Isolation Base DetaIls: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, base weIghts, equipment statIc loads, power transrmssiOn, component mIsalIgnment,
and cantilever loads.
2.
3.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-1
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to SenIor Services and CommunIty Center
1.4
12-19-2006
I
4.
SeIsmIc-Restramt DetaIls: Detail fabncation and attachment of seismIC restraints and
snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of
penetratIon of anchors.
Details for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1 '2-inch (13-mm)
deflection in x, y, and z planes.
I
I
5.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Seismic-restramt devices shall have horizontal and vertIcal load testing and analysIs performed
according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage pre approval "R" number, from OSHPD or
another agency acceptable to authoritIes having junsdIctIOn, showing maXimum seIsmIC-
restraint ratings. Ratmgs based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculatIOns. If preapproved ratmgs are not aVailable, submittals based on independent testmg
are preferred. CalculatIons (mcludmg combming shear and tensIle loads) to support seIsnuc-
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a registered professIOnal engmeer. Testing and
calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 deg rees to the
weakest mode.
I
I
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel accordmg to A WS DU, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel. "
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the followmg
reqUIrements apply for product selectIOn:
I
1.
AvaIlable Manufacturers: Subject to complIance with reqUIrements, manufacturers
offenng products that may be incorporated mto the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specIfied.
I
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
I
A.
AvaIlable Manufacturers:
1. B-Lme Systems, Inc.
2. Mason Industnes, Inc.
I
B.
Elastomenc Isolator Pads: 011- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
smgle or multiple layers, molded WIth a nonslIp pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of
sufficient stIffuess for UnIform loadmg over pad area, and factory cut to SIzes that match
reqUIrements of supported equipment.
I
I
1. Material: Standard neoprene.
2. Durometer Ratmg: 30.
3. Number of Layers: 1
I
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-2
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AdditlOn to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
C.
I
Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflectlOn type, with molded, OIl-resistant rubber or neoprene
isolator elements with factory-dnlled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with
baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indIcate capacIty range.
1.
Durometer Ratmg: 30.
D. Restramed Elastomenc Mounts All-directional elastomeric mountings WIth seismic restraint.
I
I
E.
I
I
I
I
F.
I
I
I
I
G.
I
H.
I
I
I
1. Matenals: Cast-ductIle-Iron housing containing two separate and opposing, molded,
bridge-beanng neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve and attachment
bolt from contactmg the casting during normal operation.
Spnng Isolators Freestandmg, laterally stable, open-spnng Isolators.
1. Outside Spnng Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spnng at rated load.
2. Mimmum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflectlOn at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffuess: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffuess.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to li4-inch- (6-mm-)
thIck, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 100 psig (690 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
Restrained Spring Isolators Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seIsmic restraint.
1.
Housing: Steel WIth resilIent vertIcal-lImit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or if weight is removed; factory-dnlled baseplate bonded to li4-mch- (6-111111-)
thIck, elastomenc isolator pad attached to baseplate undersIde; and adjustable equipment
mountmg and levelIng bolt that acts as blocking dunng installatlOn.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Mmimum Addttional Travel: 50 percent of the reqUIred deflection at rated load.
Lateral StIffuess: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stIffuess.
Overload CapaCIty: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or faIlure.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Elastomenc Hangers Double-deflectIon type, with molded, oil-reSIstant rubber or neoprene
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-
code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
Spnng Hangers CombinatIon coil-spring and elastomeric-msert hanger With spring and insert in
compresslOn.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabncated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 deg rees of angular hanger-rod misalignment WithOut bmding or
reducmg isolatIon effiCIency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-3
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Semor ServIces and Conunumty Center
12-19-2006
I
1.
J.
K.
L.
3.
4,
5.
Mlillmum AddItIonal Travel: 50 percent of the reqmred deflection at rated load.
Lateral StIffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertIcal stIffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformatIOn or faIlure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, OIl-reSIstant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
I
I
6.
Spring Hangers WIth VertIcal-Liilllt Stop CombmatIOn coll-spnng and elastomeric-msert hanger
WIth spnng and msert m compreSSIOn and WIth a vertIcal-hilllt stop.
I
1.
Frame: Steel, fabncated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 deg rees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without bindmg or
reducmg Isolation effiCIency.
OutSIde Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed heIght of the
spring at rated load.
Mimmum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral StIffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Adjustable VertIcal Stop: Steel washer With neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
I
I
2.
I
3.
4.
5.
I
6.
7.
Thrust LImitS CombinatIOn coIl spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression and WIth a load stop. Include rod and angle-rron brackets for attaching to
equipment.
I
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 deg rees of angular rod illlsahgnment without bmding or reducing isolatIon effiCIency.
2. OutsIde Spring DIameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spnng at rated load.
3. Mlillmum AddItIonal Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertIcal stIffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, WIthout
deformation or failure.
6 Elastomeric Element: Molded, OIl-reSIstant rubber or neoprene.
7. COlI Spnng: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1. 4-inch (6-mm)
movement at start and stop.
I
I
I
I
PIpe Riser ResIlient Support All-directional, acoustIcal pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a mimmum of 1:2-111Ch- (13-mm-) tmck, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel
and neoprene vertIcal-hilllt stops arranged to prevent vertIcal travel m both dIrectIons. DeSIgn
support for a maxImum load on the isolation matenal of 500 pSlg (3.45 :\1Pa) and for equal
resistance in all directIOns.
I
ResIlient PIpe Guides: TelescopIC arrangement of2 steel tubes separated by a mmimum of 1 '2-
lI1ch- (13-mm-) thIck, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guIde heIght WIth a shear pin to
allow vertIcal motIon due to pIpe expanSIOn and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and
remsertable to allow for selectIOn of pipe movement. Gmdes shall be capable of motIon to meet
locatIon requirements.
I
I
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-4
I
I
I
I
Hunt EngIneering
AddItIon to Senior Services and CommUlllty Center
12-19-2006
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
I
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. B-Lme Systems, Inc.
2. Mason Industnes, Inc.
3. Umstrut DIversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacmring Division.
I
I
B. Resihent IsolatIOn Washers and Bushings: I-pIece, molded, bndge-beanng neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and havmg a durometer of 40, plus or mmus 5, WIth a flat
washer face.
I
C. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabncated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resIlient isolation washers and bushmgs.
1.
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, dnll-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: I-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 40, plus or minus 5.
I
2.
I
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables WIth end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to fmal installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
I
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
INSTALLATION
I
A.
Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in DIviSIOn 7 SectIOn
"Roof Accessories ."
B. Install thrust limIts at centerlme of thrust, symmetncal on eIther side of equipment.
I
c.
Install SeISmIC snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as pOSSIble to
VIbration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
I
D.
Install restraimng cables at each trapeze and mdivIdual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle pipmg to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
I
E.
Install steel angles or channel, SIzed to prevent buckhng, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to
hanger rods for trapeze and indiVIdual pIpe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping
to trapeze. Requrrements apply equally to hangmg equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
I
F.
Install resilient bolt IsolatIon washers on equipment anchor bolts.
I
I
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-5
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3
A.
Tests and InspectIons:
I
1.
2.
3.
Inspect Isolator seisnuc-restramt clearance.
Test isolator deflectIon.
Inspect mimmum snubber clearances.
I
ADJUSTING
I
A.
Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and eqUipment is at operating weight.
I
B.
Adjust linut stops on restramed spnng isolators to mount eqUipment at normal operatmg height.
After equipment mstallatIon is complete, adjust hmit stops so they are out of contact dunng
normal operatIon.
I
c.
Attach thrust linuts at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maxImum of L'4-lllCh (6-mm)
movement during start and stop.
I
D.
Adjust arr spring leveling mechanism.
E.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
I
F. Adjust snubbers accordmg to manufacturer's wntten recommendatIons.
G.
I
Adjust seismic restraints to penrut free movement of eqUipment Within normal mode of
operatIOn.
H.
Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's wntten recommendatIOns to resist
seismIC forces.
I
END OF SECTION 15071
I
I
I
I
I
I
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-6
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIon to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
I
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This SectIOn includes the following mechanIcal identification materials and their mstallatlOn:
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Equipment nameplates.
Equipment markers.
Equipment SIgnS.
Access panel and door markers.
Pipe markers.
Valve tags.
I
I
1.2
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identIfication
devices for pIpmg.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
I
I
A.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1. Data:
I
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. CapacIty, operating and power characteristIcs, and essentIal data.
c. Labels of tested compliances.
I
2. Location: AcceSSIble and VISIble.
3. Fasteners: As reqUIred to mount on equipment.
B.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adheSIve.
I
1.
Termmology: Match schedules as closely as pOSSIble.
I
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-1
I
I
Hunt EngIneering
AdditIOn to SeruOf Services and Community Center
2.2
12-19-2006
I
2. Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
I
Name and plan number.
EqUlpment servIce.
DesIgn capacIty.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leavmg conditIOns,
and speed.
I
3.
I
Size: 2-1'2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 lllm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1.2
b) 6 mche's (] 15 by 150 mm) for eqUlpment.
C.
EqUlpment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resm-Iammate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, wIth whIte melamine subcore,
unless otherwIse indIcated. Fabricate m SIzes reqUlred for message. Provide holes for
mechanical fastenmg.
I
I
1. Data: InstructIOns for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and WIth terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1 16 Il1ch (1.6 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
I
D.
I
Access Panel and Door Markers: 11 l6-mch- (1.6-mm-) thlck, engraved larmnated plastic, with
abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to IdentificatIOn. ProvIde 1 '8-inch (3.2-mm)
center hole for attachment.
1.
I
Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
I
A.
Manufactured PIpe Markers, General: Prepnnted, color-coded, wIth lettenng indIcating service,
and showmg directIOn of flow.
I
1.
2.
Colors: Comply wIth ASME A13.1, unless otherwIse mdIcated.
PIpes WIth aD, Including Insulation, Less Than (i Inches (150 mm): Full-band pIpe
markers extendmg 360 deg rees around pipe at each location.
PIpes WIth aD, Including InsulatIon, 6 Inches (I50 nml) and Larger: Either full-band or
stnp-type pIpe markers at least three tImes letter heIght and of length reqmred for label.
Arrows: Integral WIth pipmg system servIce lettenng to accommodate both directions; or
as separate umt on each pIpe marker to indIcate dIrectIon of flow.
I
3.
I
4.
B.
Pretensioned PIpe Markers: Precoiled semirigId plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pIpe without adhesive.
I
C.
Shaped PIpe Markers: Preformed sermngId plastIc formed to partially cover cIrcumference of
pipe and to attach to pIpe WIth mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate msulatIOn vapor
barrier.
I
D.
Self-AdhesIve PIpe Markers: PlastIc WIth pressure-sensItIve, permanent-type, self-adhesIVe
back.
I
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICA nON
15075-2
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
E.
I
I
Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least _; mlls (0.08 mm) tlnck wIth pressure-
sensItlve, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1.
Width for Markers on PIpes with OD, Includmg InsulatIOn, Less Than 6 Inches (150
mm): 3/4 Jl1ch ( 19 mm) mllllmum.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Includmg InsulatIOn, 6 Inches (150 mm) or Larger:
1-1'2 lllches (3R mm) mllllmum.
2.
I
A.
2.3 VALVE TAGS
I
I
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1.'4-ll1ch (64-mm) letters for pIpmg system
abbreviation and L'2-mch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5 32-111Ch (4-
mm) hole for fastener.
1.
2.
Material: O.032-inch- (0.8-mlll-) truck brass.
Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
I
A. Products specified are for applicatIOns referenced in other DiVIsion 15 SectIOns. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
optIOn.
I
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not
easily VISIble. Locate nameplates where acceSSIble and VIsible. Include nameplates for the
following general categones of equipment:
1. Fans, blowers, primary balancmg dampers, and nuxing boxes.
2. Packaged HV AC central-station and zone-type units.
I
I
I
B. Install equipment markers WIth permanent adhesive on or near each major Item of mechanIcal
equipment. Data required for markers may be mcluded on signs, and markers may be omitted if
both are mdicated.
I
I
I
I
1.
Letter Size: Minimum 1.4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of umts If viewmg distance is less
than 24 Il1ches (600 mm), 1,2 ll1ch (13 mm) for VIewing distances up to 72 lllches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettenng for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the SIze ofpnncipallettering.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, mdicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautIOns, warn of hazards and Improper operatlons, and identlfy
units.
Locate markers where acceSSIble and visible. Include markers for the followmg general
categories of eqUIpment:
2.
3.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-3
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
3.3
a. Mam control and operatmg valves, including safety devIces and hazardous umts
such as gas outlets.
b. Fans, blowers, pnmary balancmg dampers, and mIxing boxes.
c. Packaged HV AC central-station and zone-type units.
I
I
c.
Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adheSIve on or near each major item of
mechanIcal eqUIpment. Locate SIgnS where accessIble and vIsIble.
I
1.
Identify mechamcal equipment with eqUIpment markers in the following color codes:
a. Black: For equipment and components.
I
2.
Letter SIze: Mimmum 1/4 mch (6.4 mm) for name of umts If VIewing dIstance is less
than 24 lIlches (600 mm), 1.12 inch (13 mm) for viewmg dIstances up to 72 lI1chc:, (1 XJO
mm), and proportionately larger lettermg for greater viewing dIstances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the SIze of principallettermg.
Data: DistinguIsh among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautIons, warn of hazards and Improper operations, and identify
units.
Include SIgns for the followmg general categones of equipment:
I
I
3.
4.
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units
such as gas outlets.
b. Heat exchangers, cOlIs, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
similar eqUIpment.
c. Fans, blowers, pnmary balancmg dampers, and mixing boxes.
d. Packaged HV AC central-station and zone-type units.
e. Tanks and pressure vessels.
I
I
D.
Install access panel markers WIth screws on eqUIpment access panels.
I
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
I
A.
Install manufactured pIpe markers indicatmg servIce on each pIping system. Install WIth flow
indIcation arrows showmg dIrection of flow.
1. Pipes WIth OD, Includmg InsulatIon, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive pIpe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adheSIve plastIc tape,at least 3.'4 mch (19 mm) wIde,
lapped at least 1-1::~ ll1ches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covenng full
CIrcumference of pIpe.
2. PIpes with OD, Includmg Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Self-adheSIVe pIpe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adheSIve plastic tape, at least 1-1 2 inches (38 mm) wide,
lapped at least 3 mches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covenng full
cIrcurnference of pipe.
I
I
I
B.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where pIping is exposed m fmIshed spaces; machme
rooms; acceSSIble maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and extenor
nonconcealed locations as follows:
I
1.
Near each valve and control deVIce.
I
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICA nON
15075-4
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
2.
Near each branch connectIOn, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern IS not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceIlmgs, and nonaccessIble enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and sImIlar access points that permIt view of concealed
pIpmg.
Near major eqUIpment ltems and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 teet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
teet (7.6 m) m areas of congested pIping and equipment.
On pIping above removable acoustical ceIlings. Ormt mtermedlately spaced markers.
I
3.
4.
I
5.
6.
I
7.
I
3.4
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devlces in plping systems, except check valves; valves Wlthm
factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;
convemence and lawn-watering hose connections; and HV AC terminal devIces and simIlar
roughmg-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
I
I
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the followmg:
1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1 Y2", square., brass tags
I
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
I
A.
Relocate mechanical Identification materials and devices that have become vIsually blocked by
other work.
I
B.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
I
END OF SECTION 15075
I
I
I
I
I
I
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-5
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
A Tlus SectIon mcludes mechanical msulatIOn for duct, equipment, and pipe, mcludmg the
followmg:
1. Insulation Matenals:
a. FlexIble elastomenc.
b. Mmeral fiber.
2. Fire-rated InSulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applIed jackets.
8. Field-applIed fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied jackets.
10. Tapes.
11. Securements.
12. Corner angles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: For each type of product mdicated.
B. Field quality-control inspection reports.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A
Fire-Test-Response CharactenstIcs: InsulatIOn and related matenals shall have fire-test-
response charactenstIcs mdIcated, as determmed by testmg identIcal products per ASTM E 84,
by a testmg and inspectmg agency acceptable to authorities havmg jUnSdIctIOn. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adheSive, mastIc, and cement matenal contamers, with
appropriate markmgs of applIcable testing and inspecting agency.
I
1. InsulatIon Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
mdex of 50 or less.
2. InsulatIon Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread mdex of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
mdex of 150 or less.
I
I
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-1
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIon to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce hsts, the following reqUIrements apply to
product selectIon:
1. Products: Subject to comphance with reqUIrements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacmrers: Subject to compliance with reqUIrements, provide products by one of the
manufacmrers specified.
I
I
I
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 schedule artIcles for requirements about where insulating matenals shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
I
I
I
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable cWoride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitIc stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. FleXIble Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for mbular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
I
I
1.
Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX CorporatIOn; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
I
G. Mmeral-FIber Blanket Insulation: MIneral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosettIng reSIn.
Comply WIth ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-apphed vinyl
jacket. Factory-apphed jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-ApplIed Jackets"
ArtIcle.
I
I
I
1.
Products:
a. CertaInTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microhte.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-ServIce Duct Wrap.
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-2
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
H. Mmeral-FIber, Preformed PIpe InsulatIon:
1. Products:
a. FIbrex InsulatIons Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns ManvIlle; MIcro-Lok.
c. Knauf InsulatIOn; 1000 PIpe InsulatIon.
d. Manson InsulatIon Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Cormng; FIberglas PIpe Insulation.
2.
Type I, 850 dug F (454 deg C) Matenals: Mmeral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosettmg resm. Comply WIth ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-apphed
ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specIfied m Part 2 "Factory-Apphed
Jackets" Article.
I
I
2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mmeral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Fimshmg Cement:
ASTM C 4491C 449M.
Comply with
I
I
I
I
I
1. Products:
a. Insulco, DIvIsion ofMFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and QUlk-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.4
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation matenals, jackets, and substrates and for bondmg
msulatIon to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indIcated.
B.
Mmeral-FIber AdhesIve: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
a. ChIlders Products, DIvision ofITW, CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, DIvIsion of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industnes, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
I
I
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, DIviSIOn ofITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products CorporatIon, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, DlVlsIOn of IllinOIs Tool Works; S-90/80.
I
I
I
C.
ASJ AdhesIve, and FSK and PVDC Jacket AdheSIVe: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bondmg msulatIon jacket lap seams and jomts.
1. Products:
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-3
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addihon to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
d. Marathon Industnes, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
D.
PVC Jacket AdheSIve: Compatible with PVC Jacket.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow SIlicone.
b. Johns-ManvIlle; Zeston Penna-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding AdhesIve.
c. P.LC. Plashcs, Inc.; Welding AdhesIve.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline CorporatIOn; Speedlme Vinyl Adhesive.
I
I
2.5 MASTICS
A Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates: Comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
servIces.
I
1.
Products:
I
a. Chtlders Products, Division ofITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Ilhnois Tool Works; CB-50.
d Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. VImasco Corporahon; 749.
I
I
2. Water-Vapor Penneance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0013 perm (0.009 metnc penn) at
43-11111 (1.09-m111) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Mmu:> 20 to plus 180 ucg F (:'v1mus 29 to plus 82 deg (').
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weIght.
5. Color: WhIte.
I
I
I
2.6
SEALANTS
A
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashmg Sealants:
1. Products:
I
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-76-8.
b. Foster Products Corporahon, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
c. Marathon Industnes, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industnes, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
I
2.
Materials shall be compahble with msulahon matenals, Jackets, and substrates.
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-4
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
3. FIre- and water-resIstant, flexIble, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Mtnu~ 40 to plus 250 dcg F (.\I[inus 40 to plus 121 dcg C).
5. Color: Alummum.
a. Childers Products, DlVlslOn ofITW; CP-76.
I
I
1
B.
ASJ Flashmg Sealants, and Vmyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
2. Matenals shall be compatIble WIth msulation matenals, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fue- and water-resIstant, flexible, elastomenc sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Mmus 40 to plus 250 deg r (:vlinus 40 to plus 121 deg C). I
5. Color: Wlute.
I
I
2.7
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-apphed jackets on various applications. Wherl.
I
factory-applied Jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
.1
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-remforced scrim with aluminum-fOil backmg;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealmg, pressure-sensitIve, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protectIve strip; complying wIth ASTM C 1136, Type I.
I
I
2.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied Jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type.!, unless otherwIse indIcated.
I
I
2.9
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: Wlute vapor-retarder tape matching factory-apphed jacket with acryhc adheSIve,
complymg with ASTM C 1136 and UL hsted.
I
I
1. Width: 3 tni.:hcs (75 mm).
2. ThIckness: 11.5 Huts (0.29 mm).
3. AdheslOn: 90 ounces torce'mch (1 0 :,J:mm) m WIdth.
4. ElongatlOn: 2 percent.
5. TensIle Strength: 40 Ihhnch (7.2 :-:/mm) in WIdth.
6. ASJ Tape DISks and Squares: Precut dIsks or squares of ASJ tape.
I
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matchmg factory-apphedjacket with acryhc adheSIve;
complymg WIth ASTM C 1136 and UL hsted.
I
1. Width: 3 lt1chcs (75 mm).
2. ThIckness: 6.5 mlb (0.16 mm).
3. Adhesion: 90 OWlCC~ force 'inch ( 1.0 01/111111) m WIdth.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-5
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
5. TensIle Strength: 40 1bfmch (7.2 ~:'mm) m width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.10
SECUREMENTS
A.
Alummum Bands: ,\STvl 13 209 (ASTVI B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 ll1ch (0.51 mm) thick, [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] wide WIth
wing seal.
I
I
I
B.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spmdle that IS capable of holdtng insulation, of thickness mdicated, securely in
positIOn indicated when self-Iockmg washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
I
1. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2
ll1ches (50 mm) square.
2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel fully annealed, 0.1 06-inch- (2.6-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging
insulation, hangers, and substrates.
I
C.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-mch- (0.41-111111-)
thick, galvanized-steel sheet, WIth beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1:2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
I
1.
Protect ends with capped self-Iockmg washers mcorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locatIOns.
I
I
D. Nonmetal InsulatIOn-Retaming Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-
ml11-) thick nylon sheet, WIth beveled edge SIzed as required to hold insulation securely m place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in dIameter.
I
I
E. Staples: Outward-clinchmg insulation staples, nominal3!4-mch- (19-111m-) WIde, stainless steel
or Monel.
F. Wire: O.062-mch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, staInless steel.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
I
A. PVC Comer Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thIck, rmmmum 1 by 1 H1ch (25 by 25 mm), PVC
according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. Whtte or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
I
I
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-6
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor Services and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
I
PREPARATION
I
A.
Surface PreparatIon: Clean and dry surfaces to receIve insulation. Remove matenals that wIll
adversely affect insulatIOn application.
B.
Coordinate msulatIon mstallatIon WIth the trade mstallmg heat tracmg. Comply wIt?
requirements for heat tracmg that apply to msulatIon.
I
c.
I
MIX msulating cements WIth clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact WIth
stamless-steel surfaces, use dermneralIzed water.
COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
Install msulation materials, accessones, and fimshes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of VOIds throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
I
B.
Install insulation with tIghtly butted joints free of VOIds and gaps. Vapor barriers shall be
continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.
I
C.
Install insulation matenals, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each Item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
I
D.
Install accessones compatIble WIth Insulation matenals and SUItable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack msulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
I
E.
InstalllUSulatIon WIth 10ngItudmal seams at top and bottom of honzontal runs.
I
F.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longItudinal and end seams staggered.
I
G.
Do not weld brackets, clIps, or other attachment deVIces to pipmg, fittmgs, and specIaltIes.
H.
Keep msulation materials dry dunng applIcatIon and fimshmg.
I
I.
Install msulatIon WIth tIght longItudinal seams and end jomts. Bond seams and jomts WIth
adheSIve recommended by msulatIon matenal manufacturer.
I
1.
Install InsulatIOn WIth least number of jomts practIcal.
K.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indIcated, seal joints, seams, and penetratIons m
msulatIOn at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections WIth vapor-bamer mastIc.
I
1.
2.
Install msulatIon contmuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For msulatIon applIcatIOn where vapor barriers are mdlcated, extend insulatIOn on anchor
legs from pomt of attachment to supported Item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastIC.
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080- 7
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Install insert matenals and mstall insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulatIOn to
insulatIon inserts wIth adhesIve or sealing compound recommended by msulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket matenal matching adjacent pipe insulatIOn. Install smelds over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shIeld.
4.
L. Apply adhesives, mastIcs, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thIcknesses.
M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
Draw jacket tIght and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints wIth 3-mch- (75-nU11-) wide strips, of same matenal as
insulation jacket. Secure strips Wlth adhesive and outward chnching staples along both
edges of strip, spaced 4 1l1ches (100 mm) o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudmal seams at least 1-1 12 mch~s (38 mm). Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
3.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation matenal manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indIcated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
N.
Cut insulation in a manner to aVOld compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
tmckness.
O.
Fimsh installation with systems at operatmg condItions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
P.
Repair damaged insulatIOn facmgs by applying same facmg matenal over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 mchcs (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches SImilar to butt joints.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
I
I
I
I
I
A
Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Extenor Wall PenetratIons: Termmate insulatIOn flush
with sleeve seal. Seal tenninations WIth flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and PartitIon PenetratIOns (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install msulation contmuously through walls and partitions.
c.
Insulation Installation at FIre-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulatIOn
continuously through penetratIons of fire-rated walls and partItions. Tenninate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partitIon penetratIOns. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulatIOn and overlap duct insulation at least 2 mchcs (50 111m).
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-8
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Seruer Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
3.4
1.
FirestoppIng and fire-resistIve JOInt sealers are specIfied in DIvIsIon 7 SectIon "1brough-
PenetratIOn Firestop Systems."
I
A.
DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION
I
Blanket Insulation InstallatIOn on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and Insulation
pIns.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
I
Apply adhesIves accordIng to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per umt area,
for 100percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entIre circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittIngs and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-dIscharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pms on sIdes and bottom of horizontal ducts and sIdes of vertical ducts as
follows:
I
I
a.
On duct sides with dimensIOns 18 Inches (450 111111) and smaller, place pms along:
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 mches (75 111111) maximum from Insulation
endjomts, and 16 Inches (400 mm) o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 lllches (450 mm), place pins 16
lI1chcs (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 mchc:-., (75 ffim) maximum from insulation
joints. Install additIOnal pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross
bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress msulation durmg installation.
Impale insulation over pIllS and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulatIOn surface. Cover exposed pms and washers with tape matching msulatIOn
faCIng.
I
I
b.
I
c.
d.
I
e.
f.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a contmuous
unbroken vapor bamer. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end jomts with
insulation by removmg 2 Inchcs (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulatIon segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation sectIOn WIth l'2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching
staples, 1 inG!1 (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor bamer consIstmg of factory- or field-applIed
jacket, adheSIve, vapor-bamer mastic, and sealant at jomts, seams, and protrusions.
I
I
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetratIons WIth tape or mastIc to mamtam vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg r (10 deg C)
at 18-too\ (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall conSIst of vapor-bamer mastic
applIed in a Z-shaped pattern over InsulatIon face, along butt end of Insulation, and
over the surface. Cover InsulatIon face and surface to be insulated a Width equal to
2 tnnes the insulation thickness but not less than 3 lllchcs (75 mm).
I
I
I
Overlap unfaced blankets a mmimum of2 inches (50 111m) on longitudinal seams and end.
joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of I/{ indIcs (50 ffim)
o c.
Install msulatIon on rectangular duct elbows and transitions WIth a full msulatIon sectIon .
for each surface.
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-9
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItIon to Senior Services and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
7.
Insulate duct stIffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface WIth
6-mch- (l50-mm-) wide strips of same matenal used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stIffener, hanger, and flange WIth pins spaced 6 illche~ (150 mm) o.c.
3.5 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
I
A. ReqUIrements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in vanous pipe msulation material installation articles.
I
B. Secure single-layer insulation WIth bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals and tighten bands
without deforming insulation matenals.
I
C. Install 2-layer insulation with Joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches (75 mm).
Secure inner layer WIth 0.062-111Ch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
Secure outer layer with bands at 12-111Ch (300-mm) intervals.
I
D. Install insulation over fittings, valves, stramers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
I
E. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of insulating cement and coat with a mastic.
Install vapor-barrier mastIc for below ambient services and a breather mastIc for above ambient
services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and
well-shaped contour.
I
F. For services not speCIfied to receive a field-applied Jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Tenmnate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulatIon facing using PVC
tape.
I
G. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size
and color of pIpe labels.
I
H. Insulation InstallatIon on StraIght PIpes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed insulatIon to pIpe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials. Orient longItudinal jomts between half sections
in 3 and 9 o'clock positIOns on the pipe.
Where vapor barriers are mdicated, seal 10ngItudmal seams, end JOlllts, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastIc and Joint sealant.
For insulation WIth factory-apphed Jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inch",> (150 mm) o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudmal
tabs but secure tabs with addItional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastIc.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambIent services, do not staple
longitudmal tabs but secure tabs WIth addItional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastIC and flashing sealant.
I
I
I
I
I
1.
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-10
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIOn to Seruor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
1.
2.
4.
Install preformed pipe msulatIon to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of msulatIOn sectIOn same as overall wIdth of flange and bolts, plus twIce the
thickness of pipe insulatIOn.
FIll vOIds between umer circumference of flange insulatIOn and outer cIrcumference of
adjacent straight pIpe segments WIth cut sectIOns of same insulatIOn material and
thickness as pipe msulatIOn.
Install Jacket matenal wIth manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 mch (25 11rm), and seal Jomts wIth flashing sealant.
Secure msulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in msulatIon that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
I
I
3.
I
5.
I
J. ' Insulation InstallatIon on Pipe FIttings and Elbows:
1.
Insulate pIpe elbows usmg preformed fittmg msulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pIpe Insulation. Each piece shall be butted tIghtly
against adjoining pIece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, vOIds, and irregular
surfaces with Insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulatIon.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe Insulation of same
material and tmckness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold m place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
I
I
2.
I
K. Insulation Installation on Valves and PIpe SpecialtIes:
L.
1.
I
3.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe msulatIon when
aVailable.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectIOnal pIpe Insulation of same
matenal, denSIty, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjOIning pipe
msulation by not less than two times the tmckness of pIpe msulation, or one pIpe
dIameter, whichever IS thicker. For valves, msulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. FIll Jomts, seams, and irregular surfaces with
msulating cement.
Arrange msulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation WIthout
dIsturbmg insulatIon.
Insulate stramers usmg preformed fittmg insulatIon or sectIOnal pIpe msulatIon of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjommg pIpe
msulation by not less than two tImes the thickness of pipe insulatIon, or one pipe
dIameter, whIchever IS tmcker. FIll Joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulatmg
cement. Insulate strainers so stramer basket flange or plug can be easIly removed and
replaced WIthout damagmg the insulatIon and Jacket. PrOVIde a removable reusable
msulatIon cover. For below ambIent servIces, prOVIde a deSIgn that maintains vapor
bamer.
Install msulatIOn to flanges as specified for flange msulatIon apphcatIOn.
I
2.
I
I
4.
I
I
5.
Insulate mstrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connectIOns, flow meters, sensors, SWItches, and transmItters on msulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulatIon at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connectIon WIth msulating cement and fimsh with finismng cement, mastIc, and flashmg'
sealant.
I
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-11
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
M. Install removable msulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
followmg:
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Make removable flange and unIOn insulation from sectional pIpe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjolmng pIpe. Install same Insulation jacket as adjOlmng pIpe
insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectIonal pipe insulatIon, extend insulatIon
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thtckness over adjacent pipe
msulatIon on each sIde of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulatIon and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers m same manner as for flanges except dIvide
the two-part sectIon on the vertical center lme of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulatIon, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this WIre frame, with Its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 l11ches (50 mm) over
adjacent pIpe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Fimsh cover assembly with insulatIng
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I
A
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
I
I
I
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-l/2-mch (38-mm) laps at longttudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)
WIde jomt strips at end joints.
Seal opemngs, punctures, and breaks m vapor-retarder jackets and exposed Insulation
with vapor-retarder mastIc.
5.
3.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
I
A Where fire-rated insulation system IS mdlcated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to mamtam a continuous UL- hsted fire rating.
I
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achIeve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestoppmg at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. FIre-stop systeIns are
speCIfied m Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
I
3.8 FINISHES
I
A Duct, EqUIpment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket
as specified in DIvision 9 paintmg Sections.
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-12
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
1.
Apply two > finish coats of mtenor, flat, latex-emulSIOn SIze over a primer that is
compatible wIth Jacket matenal and finish coat pamt. Add fungIcidal agent to render
fabric mildew proof.
I
B.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
mspection of the completed Work.
I
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Perform the following field tests and InSpections and prepare test reports:
I
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by ArchItect, by removmg field-applied jacket and
Insulation in layers in reverse order of their installatIOn. Extent of inspectIOn shall be
lImited to onelocation(s) for each duct system defined m the "Duct InsulatIon Schedule,
General" Article.
2. Inspect pIpe, fittmgs, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation m layers In reverse order of their Installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to three locatIons. for each pipe servIce defined in the
"PIping Insulation Schedule, General" ArtIcle.
I
I
B.
All Insulation applications will be considered defective Work If sample inspectIon reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.
I
c.
Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection.
Repeat inspection procedures after new matenals are installed.
I
END OF SECTION 15080
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt EngIneering
Addition to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
A. This Section includes split-system heat pump units cons1sting of separate evaporator-fan and
compressor-condenser components. Units are desIgned for exposed or concealed mounting, and
may be connected to ducts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I
I
A. Product Data: For each urnt indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Refrigerant piping and unit layout shop drawing.
I
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Electncal Components, Devices, and Accessones: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testIng agency acceptable to authonties having jurisdiction, and marked for
Intended use.
B. Energy-EfficIency Ratio: As scheduled or Per WSEC which ever 1S greater.
I
I
I
I
C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescnbed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise ReSIdential Buildings."
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in WhICh manufacturer agrees to repmr or
replace split-system air-conditIoning urnts that fall m materials and workmanship wtthm five
years from date of SubstantIal Complehon.
PART 2.- PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with reqUlrements, provide products by one of the
following:
I
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-1
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
2.2
1.
2.
Carrier Air CondItiomng; Div. ofCamer Corp.
Trane Co. (The); Umtary Products Group.
I
EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
I
A.
Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvamzed steel WIth flanged edges, removable panels for servIcmg,
and InSUlatIOn on back of panel.
I
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct lmer.
2. Drain Pans: Galvamzed steel, with connection for dram; insulated.
I
B.
Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel WIth removable panels on front and ends.
1.
2.
3.
DIscharge Grille: Steel WIth surface-mounted frame.
Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
Drain Pans: Galvamzed steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
I
C.
I
RefrIgerant Coil: Copper tube, WIth me cham cally bonded alwninum fins, complying WIth
ARI 210/240, and WIth thermal-expansIOn valve.
I
D.
Electric Coil: Hehcal, nickel-chrome, electric-resIstance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushmgs; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses In terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
I
I
E.
Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-wIdth wheel of galvanized steel; dIrectly connected to
motor.
F.
Fan Motor: Multispeed.
I
G.
Filters: Imch (25 mm) thIck, m fiberboard frames.
I
2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
A.
Casing steel, fimshed with baked enamel, WIth removable panels for access to controls, weep
holes for water dramage, and mounting holes in base. PrOVIde brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casmg.
I
I
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed reCIprocatIng type with crankcase heater and mounted on
VIbration Isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
I
1. Refngerant Charge: Puron.
C.
RefrIgerant COlI: Copper tube, WIth mechanically bonded alurmnum fins, complymg WIth
ARI 210/240, and with hqUId subcooler.
I
D.
Heat Pump Components: Reversmg valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
I
E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-2
I
I
I
I
Hunt EngIneering
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
Motor: Permanently lubncated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
Low AmbIent Kit: PermIts operation down to 45 deg r (7 deg C).
Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
ACCESSORIES
Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
Refngerant Line Klts: Soft-annealed copper suctIon and liquid lmes factory cleaned, dned,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-msulated suctlOn hne with flared fittmgs at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
A. Carfully review the notes on the drawing regarding installation, including brazing requirements.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (lOO-mm-) thick,
remforced concrete base; 4 l11chcs (100 mm) larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are speCIfied m Division 3 Section "Cast-m-Place Concrete."
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D.
Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a rmrumum statIc
deflectIon of 1 inch (25 mm). Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seisrmc
Controls. "
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect precharged refngerant tubmg to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.
B.
Connect supply and return water coil WIth shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply
connection and WIth throttling-duty valve and unlOn or flange on the return connectlOn.
C.
Connect supply and return condenser connections WIth shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and With throtthng-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
D.
Install pIping adjacent to unIt to allow service and mamtenance.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-3
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Sernor ServIces and Conununity Center
12-19-2006
I
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Manufacturer's Field ServIce: Engage a factory-authonzed servIce representative to
mspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installatIon, mc1uding
connectIons, and to assist m field testmg. Report results m wnting.
I
B.
Leak Test: After mstallatIon, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest untIl no
leaks eXISt.
I
c.
OperatIonal Test: After electncal circuitry has been energized, start umts to confirm proper
motor rotatIon and urnt operation. Remove malfunctlOrnng units, replace With new components,
and retest.
I
D.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctiornng controls and
equipment.
I
END OF SECTION 15738
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-4
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor Services and Cormnumty Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provIsIOns of the Contract, includmg General and Supplementary
ConditIOns and Division 1 SpecIfication SectIOns, apply to thIS SectIon.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to pIu,> 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2500 Pa).
Metal ducts mclude the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Duct liner.
a. Soundline the 30' of supply and return duct work closest to each ABU unit.
B.
Related Sections include the followmg:
1. DIvision 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turnmg vanes, and flexIble ducts.
DEFINITIONS
A.
FRP: FIberglass-reinforced plastic.
B. NUSIG: National Uniform SeIsmIc Installation Guidelines.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I
I
I
A. Duct system design, as mdicated, has been used to select size and type of aIr-moving and -
dIstnbutIOn equipment and other aIr system components. Changes to layout or configuratIOn of
duct system must be specifically approved m writing by ArchItect. Accompany requests for
layout modIfications with calculatIOns showmg that proposed layout wIll provIde original
desIgn results wIthout mcreasmg system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
A.
Shop Drawmgs: Drawn to I 4 meh equals 1 toot (1 :50) scale. Show fahncatIon and mstallatIon
details for metal ducts.
1.
ProvIde shop drawmgs for mechanIcal room, AHU-1 and AHU-2 connectIons, and BUllt-
up nuxing box.
METAL DUCTS
15815-1
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
1.6
B.
C.
D.
A.
B.
2.
Fabncation, assembly, and mstallation, includmg plans, elevatlOns, sectlOns, components,
and attachments to other work.
Flttmgs.
Remforcement and spacing.
Seam and Jomt constructlOn.
Duct accessories, mcluding access doors and panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and bmldmg attachment, VIbratIon
isolation, and seismIc restramts.
I
I
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I
Coordmation Drawmgs: Reflected ceihng plans, drawn to scale, on WhICh the following items
are shown and coordinated WIth each other, based on input from mstallers of the items mvolved:
I
1. CeIlmg suspensIon assembly members.
2. Other systems mstalled m same space as ducts.
3. CeIling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels reqmred to provide access to
dampers and other operating deVIces.
4. CeIling-mounting items, includmg lighting fixtures, dIffusers, grilles, speakers,
spnnklers, access panels, and special moldmgs.
I
I
Welding certificates.
Field quality-control test reports.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
NFP A Compliance:
1.
2.
NFP A 90A, "Installation of Air CondItionmg and VentIlating Systems."
NFP A 90B, "InstallatlOn of Warm AIr Heating and AIr CondItiomng Systems."
I
Comply WIth NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and FIre Protection of Commercial Cookmg
OperatIOns," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwIse mdIcated.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
A.
A.
MANUFACTURERS
I
In other Part 2 artIcles where titles below mtroduce hsts, the followmg reqmrements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to comphance WIth requirements, proVIde products by one of the
manufacturers speCIfied.
I
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
I
Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct ConstructlOn Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable matenals, matenal thIcknesses, and duct constructIon methods, unless otherwIse
I
METAL DUCTS
15815-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
Addition to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
mdicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discoloratiOns, and other imperfectlOns.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-formmg quality; complying Wlth ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G6{) (Z 180 l coating designation; ducts shall have rmll-phosphatized fimsh for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel remforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
I
I
I
D.
Tie Rods: Galvamzed steel, 1/4-mch (6-mm) mimmum diameter for lengths 36 1I1chcs (900
mm) or less; 3iB-mch (lO-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inchc:> (900 111m).
2.3
DUCT LINER
A.
Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAlMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manvllle International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d Owens Corning.
2.
Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: [1 inch (25111111.
b. Thermal ConductiVity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 dcg F (0.037 at 24 dcg C) mean
temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFP A 90A or NFP A 90B and Wlth ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechamcal attachment, or weldmg attachment to duct without damagmg liner
when apphed as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefimtely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile, dead-load
test perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pm Length: As reqmred for thickness of msulatlOn and Without
projecting more than 1 8 inch (3 mm) into airstream.
3) AdheSive for Attachmg Mechanical Fasteners: Comply With fire-hazard
classificatlOn of duct lmer system.
I
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
I
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastIC nature but mcludes tapes and combmatIons of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
I
METAL DUCTS
15815-3
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to SeDlor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.5
A.
B.
Jomt and Seam Tape: 2 ll1chc~ (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
I
c.
Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/sIlIcone activator to react exothenmcally with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
I
Water-Based Jomt and Seam Sealant: FlexIble, adhesive sealant, reSistant to UV lIght when
cured, UL 723 lIsted, and complying With NFP A requirements for Class 1 ducts.
I
Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-cunng, polymenzed
butyl sealant formulated With a rmnimum of 75 percent solids.
I
Flanged Jomt Mastic: One-part, aCId-curing, Silicone, elastomenc Joint sealant complying With
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polYlsobutylene plasticizer.
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
Buildmg Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-achlated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
I
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 lllches (l00 mm) thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lIghtweIght-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 lllches (100 mm) thick.
I
B.
Hanger Matenals: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
I
1.
Hangers Installed m Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads pamted with zinc-chromate primer after mstallation.
Strap and Rod SIzes: Comply With SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and fleXIble" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zmc-chromate pnmer.
I
2.
I
3.
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blmd nvets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
With duct matenals.
I
D.
Trapeze and RIser Supports: Steel shapes complying WIth ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
3.
I
Supports for GalvanIzed-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stamless-Steel Ducts: Stamless-steel support materials.
Supports for Alurmnum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
I
I
METAL DUCTS
15815-4
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
2.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connectlOns, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and FleXIble" and
complying wIth requirements for metal thtckness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1.
Lengths: Fabncate rectangular ducts In lengths appropriate to reinforcement and ngidlty
class required for pressure class.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflectlOn limits accordIng to SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
2.
B.
Transverse JOInts: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelInes for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a.
Duchnate Industries, Inc.
C.
Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using comer, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a.
Duchnate Industnes, Inc.
2.
Duct Size: Maximum 30 lIlches (750 mm) wide and up to 2-inch wg (500-Pa) pressure
class.
Longttudinal Seams: PIttsburgh lock sealed WIth noncuring polymer sealant.
3.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm)
and larger and 0.0359 lllch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of
nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
I
I
I
I
I
A. Adhere a single layer of IndIcated thtckness of duct lIner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at lIner contact surface area. Attaining Indicated thtckness with multiple layers of duct
liner IS prolubited.
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of lIner facing upstream that do not receive metal nOSIng.
C. Butt transverse Joints without gaps and coat Joint with adheSIve.
D.
Fold and compress lIner In comers of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with 10ngttudInal joints, except at comers of ducts,
unless duct sIze and standard lIner product dImensions make longitudinal JOInts necessary.
METAL DUCTS
15815-5
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Seruor Services and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Apply adhesIve coatmg on longttudinal seams in ducts WIth air VelOCIty of2500 fpm (12.7 m/s).
I
Secure liner WIth mechanical fasteners 4 l11ches (100 mm) from comers and at intervals not
exceedmg 12 mches (300 nun) transversely; at 3 inches (75 null) from transverse Joints and at
intervals not exceedmg 18 mches (450 111m) longItudinally.
I
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facmg the airstream with metal nosmgs that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are mtegrally formed from duct wall. Fabncate edge facings at the
followmg locatIons:
I
1.
2.
3.
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct precedmg unlIned duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocitIes are greater than 2500
[pm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
I
Secure msulation between perforated sheet metal 1l1l1er duct of same thickness as specified for
outer shell. Use mecharucal fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer
shell without compressing insulation.
I
I
1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-mch (2A-mm) diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
I
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turrung vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sectIons) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure bU1ldouts to duct walls WIth bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
I
2.8 ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL DUCT AND FITTING F ABRlCA TION
A.
B.
C.
DIameter as apphed to flat-oval ducts m tills ArtIcle is the dIameter of a round duct WIth a
circumference equal to the penmeter of a gIven size of flat-oval duct.
I
Round, SpIral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabncate supply ducts of galvanIzed steel according to
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct ConstructIon Standards--Metal and Flexible."
I
Duct Jomts:
I
1.
Ducts up to 20 luches (500 mm) m DIameter: Intenor, center-beaded slIp couplmg,
sealed before and after fastening, attached WIth sheet metal screws.
Ducts 21 to 72 Inches (535 to 1830 mm) m DIameter: Three-pIece, gasketed, flanged
Jomt consistmg of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with
gasket.
Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches (1830 mm) in DIameter: Companion angle flanged Jomts
per SMACNA "HV AC Duct ConstructIon Standards--Metal and Flexible," FIgure 3-2.
Round Ducts: Prefabncated connectIOn system consIsting of double-hpped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts accordmg to connectIOn system manufacturer's
tolerances.
I
2.
I
3.
I
4.
a.
Manufacturers:
I
1) Ductmate Industnes, Inc.
METAL DUCTS
15815-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt EngIneenng
AdditIOn to Sernar ServIces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
D. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Corncal Tees: Fabricate to comply wIth SMACNA's "HV AC
Duct Construchon Standards--Metal and FlexIble," wIth metal trucknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straIght ducts.
E. DIvergIng-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
matenal projectIng from fittIng onto branch tap entrance.
I
F.
Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mItered constructIOn. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 hmes duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type IS indIcated, fabricate elbows as follows:
I
I
I
I
1. MItered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and FlexIble," unless otherwIse
indIcated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction wIth the following metal truckness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa):
I
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches (75 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 Inch (0.85 mm).
b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in DIameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch (1.3 mrn).
d Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in DIameter: 0.064 inch (1.6 mrn).
3. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
4. Round Elbows 8 rnches (200 mm) and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows
for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only.
Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with
gored construction.
5. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm) in Diameter: Fabricate gored
or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions reqUlre mitered
elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard dIameter
elbows with gored construction.
6. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm) in DIameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows:
Fabricate gored elbows unless space restnctions reqUlre rmtered elbows.
7. Die-Formed Elbows for SIzes through 8 Inches (200 mm) in Diameter and All Pressures
0.040 1l1ch (1.0 rml1) truck Wlth 2-piece welded constructIOn.
8. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
9. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal ThIckness: Same as longttudinal-seam flat-oval duct speCIfied
above.
10. Pleated Elbows for SIzes through 14 Inches (355 mm) In DIameter and Pressures through
lO-lnch \\ g (2500 Pa): 0.022 lTlch (0.55 mm).
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
I
I
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts accordIng to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2-1l1ch \\g (500 Pa.
METAL DUCTS
15815-7
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItIon to Seruor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
2.
3.
Return Ducts (NegatIve Pressure): l-im:h \vg (250 Pa.
Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): [I-mch wg (~50 Pa.
I
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
I
A. Construct and mstall ducts accordmg to SMACNA's "HY AC Duct ConstructIOn Standards--
Metal and FlexIble," unless otherwise mdicated.
I
B. Install ducts wIth fewest pOSSIble Jomts.
C. Install fabncated fittmgs for changes m dIrectIons, sIze, and shape and for connectIons.
I
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface wIth a mirumum of projectIOns into duct. Secure
couplings WIth sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 mches (300 mm), with a
minimum of 3 screws m each coupling.
I
E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and honzontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
I
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements ofbUlldmg.
I
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thIckness.
H. Conceal ducts from view m firushed spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless speCIfically indicated.
I
I. Coordinate layout WIth suspended ceihng, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lightmg layouts,
and sirmlar firushed work.
I
1. Seal all Jomts and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before msertion, and afterward
to cover entIre Jomt and sheet metal screws.
I
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passmg through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
I
L. Non-FIre-Rated PartItIon Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partItIons and
exterior walls and are exposed to VIew, conceal spaces between constructIon openings and ducts
or duct msulatIon WIth sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap opemngs
on 4 SIdes by at least 1-1:2 l!1ches (38 n1m).
I
M. FIre-Rated PartitIOn PenetratIons: Where ducts pass through intenor partItions and extenor
walls, install appropnately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestoppmg sealant. FIre and smoke
dampers are speCIfied m DIVISIon 15 SectIOn "Duct Accessories." Firestopping matenals and
mstallatIon methods are specified in DIVISIon 7 SectIOn "Through-PenetratIon Flrestop
Systems. "
I
I
N. Install ducts with hangers and braces deSIgned to withstand, without damage to eqUIpment,
seismic force reqUlred by applIcable buIlding codes. Refer to SMACNA's "SeIsmic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems
I
METAL DUCTS
15815-8
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Senior Services and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
O.
Protect duct intenors from the elements and foreign materials until building IS enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
P.
Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 Inches (600 nun) upstream of
registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex firush coat over a compatible
galvanized-steel primer. Pamt matenals and applicatIon requirements are specified m DIVIsion
9 paintmg Sections.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
Seal duct seams and joints accordmg to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class mdicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg (500 Pa), seal transverse joints.
B.
Seal ducts before external insulatIon is applied.
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200
mm) of each branch mtersection.
B.
Support vertical ducts at maximum mtervals of 16 ft:~t (5 111) and at each floor.
C.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
D.
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete IS placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 ltlchcs (100 mm) thick.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connectlOns to equipment with flexible connectors accordmg to DIvision 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and mlet, and termmal urut connectIons.
END OF SECTION 15815
I
I
METAL DUCTS
15815-9
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
A
B.
C.
1.2
A
B.
SUMMARY
I
1111s SectiOn mcludes the followmg:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Backdraft dampers.
Volume dampers.
CombinatiOn fire and smoke dampers.
Turmng vanes.
Duct-mounting access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
I
I
I
See DivisiOn 13 Section "FIre Alarm" for duct-mountIng fire and smoke detectors.
I
See Division 15 SectiOn "HV AC Instrumentation and Controls" for electnc and pneumatic
damper actuators.
SUBMITTALS
I
Product Data: For the following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Backdraft dampers.
Volume dampers.
Combmation fire and smoke dampers.
Turmng vanes.
Duct-mountmg access doors.
Flexible connectors.
fleXIble ducts.
I
I
Shop Drawings: DetaIl eqUIpment assemblIes and mdIcate dlmensiOns, welghts, loads, reqUIred
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locatiOn and Slze of each field
connectiOn.
I
1.
2.
3.
SpeCIal fittmgs.
Manual-volume damper installations.
Flre-damper, smoke-damper, and combmatiOn fire- and smoke-damper installatiOns,
mcluding sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
Wlring DIagrams: Power, signal, and control wmng.
I
4.
I
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-1
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Seruar Services and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply With NFPA 90A, "InstallatIon of Air Conditioning and VentilatIng Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditiorung Systems."
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below Introduce lists, the folloWIng requirements apply to
product selection:
1
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.
I
I.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
1
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
I
I
B. Galvaruzed Sheet Steel: Lock-forrmng quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having (160 (Z 180) coating designation; ducts shall have mIll-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. StaInless Steel: ASTM A 480/ A 480M.
D. Aluminum Sheets: AST\11 B 209 (AS1':\I1 B 209:\11), alloy 3003, temper H14; WIth mIll finish
for concealed ducts and standard, I-sIde bright finish for exposed ducts.
I
I
E. Extruded AlUmIllum: ASTM B 221 (AST\ll:3 221~1), alloy 6063, temper T6.
F. ReInforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reInforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for alUmInum and stainless-steel ducts.
I
I
G. TIe Rods: Galvanized steel, 1,'4-mch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 I1lchc~ (900
nun) or less; 3 8-mch (lO-mm) mInimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 ll1ches (900 mIn).
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
I
A. Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck.
2. PelUl Ventilation Company, Inc.
3. Prefco Products, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-2
1
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Semor Services and Commumty Center
2.4
12-19-2006
I
5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
I
B.
DescnptIOn: MultIple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, WIth blades of maxImum 6-mch
(l50-nm1) wIdth, with sealed edges, assembled m rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel
ball beanngs, and axles; adjustInent devIce to permit settmg for varying differentIal statIc
pressure.
I
c.
Frame: 0.052-mch-1.3-mm- thIck, galvanized sheet steel, wIth welded comers and mountmg
flange.
I
D.
Blades: O.050-mcn- (1.2-mm-) thIck alummum sheet.
I
E.
Blade Seals: Felt.
F.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
I
G.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized-steel.
H.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
I
VOLUME DAMPERS
I
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Air Balance, Inc.
MET ALAIRE, Inc.
NaIlor Industries Inc.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
RuskIn Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
I
I
B.
General Descnption: Factory fabncated, wIth reqUIred hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stabilIty. Include lockmg devIce to hold smgle-blade dampers in a fixed
posItIon WIthout VIbratIOn. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consIstent WIth pressure class.
I
I
C.
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indIcated, standard leakage rating, WIth lInkage outside aIrstream, and sUItable for honzontal or
vertIcal applIcatIons.
I
1.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvamzed sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 lllch (1.62
mm) thIck, WIth nutered and welded comers; frames with flanges where indIcated for
attachIng to walls and flangeless frames where mdIcated for mstallIng m ducts.
Roll-F ormed Steel Blades: O.064-mch- (1.62-mm-) thIck, galvanIzed sheet steel.
Blade Axles: Galvamzed steel.
Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
I
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Jackshaft: I-mch- (25-nm1-) diameter, galvanIzed-steel pIpe rotating WIthIn pIpe-beanng
assembly mounted on supports at each mullIon and at each end of multiple-damper assemblIes.
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Length and Number of Mountmgs: Appropnate to connect linkage of each damper m
multiple-damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core wIth dml and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-
mm-) thick zmc-plated steel, and a 3,4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole
to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
I
F.
Retain one of three options below for temperature-rated links to suit applicatIOn requirements.
Second option is standard.
I
2.5 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
I
I
I
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. CESCO Products.
3. Greenheck.
4. Nailor Industries Inc.
5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
6. RuskIn Company.
B.
General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combmation fIre and smoke dampers
shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating.
I
I
C.
Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg .F (74 deg Crated.
D.
Frame and Blades: O.064-mch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanIzed sheet steel.
E.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-mstalled, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length
to suit wall or floor application.
I
I
F.
Damper Motors: Modulating and two-posItion action.
I
I
I
1. Comply WIth requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
2. Motors: WIth oil-Immersed and sealed gear trams.
3. Spnng-Return Motors: Equip WIth an mtegral spIral-spring mecharusm where indicated.
Enclose entrre spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for semce or
adjustments. Size for running torque ratmg of ] 50 1ll. 'C lhf ( 17 N l( 111) and breakaway
torque ratmg of 150 Ill. x Ibf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors m OutsIde-Air Intakes: EqUIp with O-rmg gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with mternal heaters to permit normal
operation at 1l1111US 4(} deg F (mmus 40 <leg C).
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. [1. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque ratmg of 150 in. A lbf (17 )oJ x m) and breakaway torque ratmg of 300 in. x
Ibf (34 N x m).
6. Electncal Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
I
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-4
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
2.6
2.7
TURNING VANES
I
A.
Fabncate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construcbon Standards--Metal and
Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
I
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-l/2-mch- (38-mm-) wide, [single] [double]-vane,
curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set -' '4 ll1ch (19 mm) O.C.; support With bars
perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners sUItable for duct
mountmg.
I
1.
Manufacturers:
I
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Duro Dyne Corp.
c. MET ALAIRE, Inc.
d. Ward Industnes, Inc.
I
C.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabncate airfoil-shaped alummum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous-glass fill.
I
DUCT -MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
I
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B.
Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvarnzed sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as mdIcated for duct pressure class. Include VIsion panel where
mdicated. Include l-oy-l-mch (25-oy-25-mm) butt or piano mnge and carn latches.
I
1.
Manufacturers:
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
American Warmmg and Venttlating.
CESCO Products.
Ductmate Industnes, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Greenheck.
McGill AIrFlow Corporation.
Nailor Industnes Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industnes, Inc.
I
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foarn gaskets.
PrOVide number ofhmges and locks as follows:
I
a. Less Than 1'2 Inches (300 111m) Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to l~ lnchc:s (450 mm) Square: Two hmges and two sash locks.
I
C.
Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabncated of galvamzed sheet metal with
insulatIOn fill and I-inch (25-mm) thickness. Include carn latches.
I
1. Manufacturers:
DUCT ACCESSORlES
15820-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt EngIneering
AdditIOn to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
a. Ductmate Industnes, Inc.
b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame WIth neoprene or foam rubber.
E. Insulation: l-mch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
I
I
A
Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.
I
I
I
B.
General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C.
Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz.!sq. yd. (880 glsq. m).
2. TensIle Strength: 480 Ihtimcb (84 :\/mm) in the warp and 360 IbDincb (63 );,mm) in the
fillmg.
3. Service Temperature: :Ylmus 40 to plus 200 deg F C'vlinlls 40 to pIllS 93 deg C).
I
2.9
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
I
I
I
I
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
3. McGIll AIrFlow Corporation.
B.
Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass Insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: lO-mch wg (2500 Pa) positIve and l.O-inch \\tg (250 Pa) negatIve.
2. MaxImum Air VelOCIty: 4000 fpm (20.3 mls).
3. Temperature Range: Mmus 10 to plLl~ 160 deg F (~linus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
II
c.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band WIth cadmIum-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear actIOn, In sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to SUIt duct SIze.
I
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-6
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItIon to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
2.10
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
I
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast Iron or cast aluminum to SUit duct matenal, mcludmg screw cap
and gasket. SIze to allow insertion of pItOt tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct msulation thIckness.
I
B.
Adhesives: High strength, qUick settmg, neoprene based, waterproof, and reSIstant to gasoline
and grease.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A.
I
Install duct accessories accordmg to applIcable detatls in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
I
B.
Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessones
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and alununum accessories in aluminum ducts.
I
C.
Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indIcated.
I
D.
Install volume dampers in ducts WIth liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E.
ProVIde balancmg dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancmg. Install at a mimmum of two duct WIdths
from branch takeoff.
I
F.
I
ProvIde test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers, with fuSIble lInks, accordmg to manufacturer's UL-approved
wntten mstructIons.
I
H.
Install duct access doors to allow for mspectmg, adJusting, and mamtaming accessones and
termmal unIts as follows:
I
1. On both SIdes of duct COlIs.
2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and eqUipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or remstall fuSIble hnks.
4. To mterior of ducts for cleamng; before and after each change in dIrectIOn, at maxImum
50-foot (15-111) spacmg.
5. On SIdes of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
I
I
I.
Install the following SIzes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1.
2.
One-Hand or InspectIon Access: ~ by 5 lnchC's (200 hy 125 mm).
Two-Hand Access: 12 b)- 6 mch~s (300 by 150 nun).
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Senior ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 hy 10 1I1chc'>(460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 1l1chct> (530 by 355 mm).
S. Body Access: 25 by 14 inchc:> (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 lI1ches (635 by 430 mm).
J. Label access doors accordmg to DlVislOn 15 Section "Mechanical IdentificatlOn."
I
K. Install flexIble connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated WIth fans and
motonzed equipment supported by vibration isolators.
I
I
L. For fans developing stahc pressures of 5-mch wg (1250 Pa) and htgher, cover flexIble
connectors WIth loaded vinyl sheet held m place with metal straps.
M. Connect termmal uruts to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-mch (3()()-mm) lengths of
flexible duct. Do not use fleXible ducts to change directions.
I
I
I
N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch
(1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
P. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 ADmSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
I
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
I
I
I
I
I
C. Fmal positlOning of manual-volume dampers is specified m Division 15 Section "Testing,
AdJustmg, and Balancmg."
END OF SECTION 15820
I
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-8
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIOn to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A.
DraWIngs and general provIsions of the Contract, includIng General and Supplementary
Conditions and DIvIsion 1 SpecIfication SectIOns, apply to thIs Section.
I
SUMMARY
I
A.
ThIs Section Includes control equipment for HV AC systems and components, including control
components for termInal heatIng and cooling umts not supplIed with factory-wIred controls.
I
B.
Related SectIons include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alann" for fire and smoke detectors mounted in HV AC
systems and equipment.
2. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for reqUIrements that relate to this Section.
I
DEFINITIONS
I
A.
DDC: Direct-digttal controls.
I
B.
PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I
A.
Control system conSIsts of sensors, indIcators, actuators, final control elements, interface
eqUIpment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
I
B. Control system Includes the follOWIng:
SUBMITTALS
I
A.
I
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technIcal lIterature for each control device. Indicate
dImensIOns, capacitIes, performance characteristIcs, electncal characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installatIon and startup Instructions for each type of product Indicated.
1.
Each control device labeled WIth setting or adjustable range of control.
I
B.
Shop DraWIngs: DetaIl eqUIpment assemblIes and indIcate dImensIOns, weIghts, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locatIon and SIze of each field
connectIOn.
I
1. Schematic flow dIagrams showing fans, pumps, COlIs, dampers, valves, and control
deVIces.
2. Wmng Diagrams: Power, SIgnal, and control wmng. DifferentIate between
manufacturer-installed and field-Installed wmng.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-1
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior SerYlces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
3.
4.
5.
Wntten descnption of sequence of operatlOn.
Schedule of dampers includmg size, leakage, and flow charactenstics.
Schedule of valves mcludmg leakage and flow characteristics.
I
c.
FIeld Test Reports: Indicate and mterpret test results for compliance WIth performance
requIrements.
I
D. Maintenance Data: For systems to mclude in maintenance manuals specified in DIvIslOn 1.
Include the following:
1. Interconnection wiring diagrams wIth identified and numbered system components and
deVIces.
2. Inspection period, cleanmg methods, cleamng materials recommended, and cahbratlOn
tolerances.
3. CalibratlOn records and list of set pomts.
I
I
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified m "Quality Assurance" Article.
I
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and
operating sequences.
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Installer Quahfications: An expenenced installer who is a certified installer of the automatic
control system manufacturer for both installatlOn and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
I
B. Manufacturer QuahficatlOns: A frrm experienced m manufacturing automatIc temperature-
control systems sinnlar to those mdIcated for tills Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
I
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testmg agency acceptable to authoritIes havmg jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
I
D. Comply WIth NFPA 90A, "InstallatIOn of Air ConditIOning and Ventilation Systems."
I
E. Year-2000 Comphant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately
processing, providmg, and receIvmg date data from, into, and between the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries, mcluding leap-year calculatIons.
I
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices speCIfied m thIS SectlOn are mdIcated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shippmg of control deVIces to unit manufacturer.
I
I
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-2
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Community Center
1.8
1.9
12-19-2006
I
COORDINATION
I
A.
Coordmate location of thermostats, , and other exposed control sensors With plans and room
detalls before mstallation.
B.
Coordmate eqmpment WIth DlvislOn 13 Section "FIre Alarm" to achieve compatIbility with
equipment that mterfaces with that system.
I
C.
Coordmate supply of condltlOned electrical Clrcmts for control units and operator workstatlOn.
I
D.
Coordmate eqmpment WIth DiVIsion 16 SectIon "Panelboards" to achIeve compatIblhty WIth
starter coIls and annunciatlOn deVIces.
I
E.
Coordmate size and 10catlOn of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
remforcement, and formwork requirements are specified m Division 3 SectIon "Cast-in-Place
Concrete. "
I
EXTRA MATERIALS
I
A.
Furnish extra matenals described below that match products installed and that are packaged
With protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I
B.
Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjustmg key.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
I
,
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance WIth reqmrements, provide products by one of th~
following:
I
1.
Electnc, Electromc, and DDC Systems:
a. CSI Control Systems IntematlOnal, Inc.
b. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control.
c. Alerton.
d. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
e. LandIS & Staefa, Inc.
f. SIebe EnVIronmental Controls; Barber-ColemanlRobertshaw Products.
g. Trane Co. (The); North Amencan CommercIal Group.
I
I
SENSORS
I
A.
Electronic Sensors: VibratIon and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mountmg as
reqmred.
I
B.
Electromc Valve/Damper Position IndlcatlOn: Visual scale mdlcating percent of travel and 2- to,
10-V dc, feedback signal.
I
HV AC INSTRUMENT A nON AND CONTROLS
15900-3,
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
2.3
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
THERMOSTATS
ElectrIc solid-state, nucrocomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.
1. AutomatIc sWItching from heating to cooling.
2. PreferentIal rate control to numnuze overshoot and deviatIon from set pomt.
3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.
4. Instant ovemde of set point for continuous or timed penod from 1 hour to 31 days.
5. Short-cycle protectIon.
6. Programming based on every day of week.
7. SelectIon features include deg For deg C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable,
remote sensor, fan on-auto.
8. Battery replacement WIthout program loss.
9. Thermostat dtsplay features include the following:
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d Programmed tIme.
e. Duration of timed ovemde.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heatmg," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
10. 100% fully modulating economizer operator and related damper control.
Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-sWItch
type, with adjustable or fixed antIcipation heater.
C. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.
Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
Thermometer: Exposed.
OrientatIOn: Vertical.
I
D. Room thermostat accessones include the following:
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastIc; mounted on separate base.
Adjusting Key: As reqUIred for calibratIon and cover screws.
Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-mch- dIameter, adjustment knob.
Override of tIme clock push button that proVIdes approxImately 2 hours of "occupied"
mode operatIOn.
I
A.
2.4 ACTUATORS
I
I
Electric Motors: SIze to operate WIth suffiCIent reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-posItion action.
1.
2.
Comply WIth reqUIrements in DIviSIon 15 Section "Motors."
Permanent SplIt-CapacItor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spnng-retum motors with integral spIral-spring mechanism in
HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-4
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Seruor ServIces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
housings designed for easy removal for servIce or adjustment of lImit sWItches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
B. Electroruc Damper Actuators: DIrect-coupled type designed for mIrumum 60,000 full-stroke
cycles at rated torque.
1. Dampers: SIze for runnmg torque calculated as follows:
c.
d.
e.
Parallel-Blade Damper WIth Edge Seals: 7 mch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper WIth Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
Parallel-Blade Damper wIthout Edge Seals: 4 mch-pounds/sq. ft of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper WIthout Edge Seals: 3 mch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
Dampers WIth 2 to 3 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to
2500 FPM: Multiply the mmimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5.
I
a.
b.
I
2. Coupling: V -bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
3. Overload ProtectIOn: Electroruc overload or digital rotation-sensing CIrcUItry.
4. FaIl-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on non-spnng-return actuators.
5. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10- V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10- V dc position feedback
signal.
6. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
7. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
I
2.5
DAMPERS
I
I
I
A.
Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade deSIgn; 0.1084-inch mimmum, galVanIzed-steel frames
WIth holes for duct mountmg; damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-mch galvanIzed steel
WIth maximum blade WIdth of 8 inches.
I
I
I
I
1. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-mch- dIameter, zmc-plated axles usmg zinc-plated
hardware, with nylon blade beanngs, blade-lInkage hardware of zmc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed agamst spring-stamless-steel blade beanngs, and thrust bearings at
each end of every blade. '
2. Operatmg Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3 For standard apphcations, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. For low-leakage applIcations, use parallel- or opposed-blade deSIgn WIth inflatable seal
blade edgmg, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft.
of damper area, at dIfferential pressure of 4 mches wg when damper IS bemg held by
torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested accordmg to AMCA 500D.
2.6
CONTROL CABLE
I
A. Electroruc and FIber-Optic Cable for Control Winng: As speCIfied m DIvision 16 Section
"ControVSignal TransmIssIOn Media."
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
A.
Venfy that conditIoned power supply IS available to control uruts and operator workstatIOn.
B.
Verify that duct-, pIpe-, and eqUlpment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatIc pipmg are
installed before proceeding WIth mstallation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install eqUlpment level and plumb.
B.
Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and
room details before installatIon. Locate all 60 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
C.
Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
D.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
E.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
F.
Install labels and nameplates to identIfy control components according to DiVIsion 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
G.
Install refrigerant mstrument wells, valves, and other accessones according to DiVISIon 15
Section "Refngerant Piping."
H.
Install duct volume-control dampers accordmg to DIvision 15 Sections specifying air ducts.
1.
Install electronic and fiber-optIc cables accordmg to DiVIsion 16 Section "ControVSIgnal
TransmiSSIOn Media."
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabmets accordmg to DIviSIOn 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
B.
Install building WIre and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
C.
Install SIgnal and communicatIon cable accordmg to DIvision 16 SectIOn "Control/SIgnal
Transmission Media."
1. Install exposed cable m raceway.
2. Install concealed cable in raceway.
3. Bundle and harness multIconductor instrument cable in place of smgle cables where
several cables follow a common path.
HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-6
I
I
Hunt EngIneenng
AdditIOn to Semar ServIces and CommUlllty Center
3.4
3.5
12-19-2006
I
4.
Fasten flexIble conductors, bridgIng cabinets and doors, along lunge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identIfication and servIce of control
system, except local IndIvidual room control cables.
I
5.
D.
Connect manual-reset hmit controls independent of manual-control switch pOSItions.
Automatic duct heater resets may be connected In Interlock circuit of power controllers.
I
E.
Connect hand-off-auto selector sWItches to override automatic interlock controls when switch IS
In hand pOSItion.
I
CONNECTIONS
I
A.
Ground equipment.
I
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized servIce representative to inspect
field-assembled components and eqUlpment installation, including pIping and electncal
connections. Report results in wnting.
1. Operational Test: After electrical crrcuitry has been energized, start Ulllts to confrrm
proper unIt operation. Remove malfunctioning UllltS, replace WIth new units, and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctIomng controls and
eqUlpment, and retest.
3. Cahbration test electronic controllers by dIsconnecting input sensors and stimulatIng
operation with compatible sIgnal generator.
I
I
I
B.
Engage a factory-authonzed servIce representative to perform startup service.
C.
Replace damaged or malfunctlOmng controls and eqmpment.
I
I
1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.
2. Demonstrate comphance WIth reqUlrements, includmg cahbratlOn and testIng, and control
sequences.
3. Adjust, cahbrate, and fine tune CIrcmts and eqUlpment to aclueve sequence of operation
specified.
3.6 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
I
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: Witlun one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to
three Project SIte VISItS, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to
aSSIst Owner's personnel m makIng program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to
SUIt actual condItIons. !
I
I
HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-7
I
I
I
I Hunt Engmeenng 12-19-2006
AddItion to Senior Services and Commumty Center
I END OF SECTION 15900
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I "
I
I
I
I
I
I
I HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-8
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AddIhon to Seruor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
I
A.
TIns Section includes control sequences for HV AC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
I
B.
See DIvision 15 Sectlon "HV AC Instrumentatlon and Controls" for control eqUIpment and
devices and for submIttal reqUIrements.
I
1.2
A.
AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES
I
Start and Stop Supply Fan(s):
I
1. Enable: High-Temperature Protection:
2.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat, located in supply arr.
Output Device: Hard WIfed through motor starter;.
ActIOn: Allow start If duct temperature is below 130 dcg F ( 150 deg C).
I
Imtiate: Occupied Time Schedule:
I
a.
b.
Input DeVIce: tIme clock functIOn of electroruc t-stat..
Output Device: Bmary output to motor starter. '
ActIon: Energtze fan(s).
OutsIde air damper stays closed unit set point temperature is reached.
I
c.
d.
Imtiate: Unoccupied TIme Schedule:
I
a. Input Device: Room electronic thermostat
b. Output DeVIce: Bmary output to motor starter.
c. ActIon: Energtze fan(s).
d. Outside air dampers stay close and buildmg warm up cycle is mitIated until set
back temperature is reached, then umt shuts back down.
I
I
DIsplay: Supply-fan on-off indicatIon.
MIxed-Air Control:
I
B.
1. MmImUIll POSItIon:
a.
b.
Input Device: T -Stat tIme schedule.
Output DeVIce: Receiver controller analog output to modulatmg damper
actuator( s ).
ActIOn: Open outdoor-air dampers to mmImUIll pOSItIon.
I
c.
I
2. Heating Reset:
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15940-1
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Senior Services and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
3.
I
I
a.
b.
c.
Input Device: Room thermostat.
Output Device: Receiver controller to modulatIng damper actuator(s).
Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
MIxed-Nr Temperature:
a.
b.
Input Device: Duct-mounted temperature sensor.
Output Device: ReceIver controller to modulating damper actuator(s).
Action: Modulate outdoor-, return-, and relief-air dampers to maintaIn aIr
temperature set point of 55 deg F (13 deg C).
Provide temperature reset to adjust set point In heatIng or cooling mode to
. ..
maXlffilze econonuzer savIngs.
c.
d.
4. Cooling Reset:
I
I
I
5.
I
I
6.
I
a.
Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted electronic temperature
sensors.
Output Device: Receiver controller to damper actuator(s).
Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position when outdoor-air
temperature exceeds return-air temperature.
b.
c.
Unoccupied Time Schedule:
a. Input Device: Time clock.
b. Output Device: Receiver controller or to modulating damper actuator(s).
c. Action: Position outdoor- and relief-air dampers closed and return-air dampers
open.
DIsplay:
a.
b.
Mixed-air-temperature indIcation.
Mixed-air-temperature set point.
Mixed-air damper position.
c.
I
1.
C. Filters: prOVIde analog gauges only
DIfferentIal Pressure:
I
I
a.
b.
Input DeVIce: DIfferentIal-pressure SWItches.
Output Device: [
Action: Signal alarm on low- and high-pressure condItIOns.
c.
D. Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that preheat, mIXed-aIr, heating-coil, and
cooling-cod controls have common inputs and do not overlap In ftmctIon.
I
1.3 VENTILATION SEQUENCES
I
A. Exhaust Fan: Room thermostat, for the AHU that is supplying air to specIfic exhaust fan shall
prOVIde SIgnal to the exhaust fan to run during the occupIed times.
I
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15940-2
I
I
Hunt Engmeering 12-19-2006 I
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
1.4 Urut and Cabmet heaters I
A. ProvIde local, line voltage thermostats.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not ApplIcable) I
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not ApplIcable) I
END OF SECTION 15940 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940-3 I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
A. 1bis Section mcludes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
I
1.
Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume aIr systems.
I
2.
3.
4.
HV AC equipment quantitative-performance settmgs.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
Reportmg results of activities and procedures specified m this Section.
I
1.2 SUBMlTT ALS
I
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2
copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"
Article. Include a complete set of report forms mtended for use on this Project.
I
B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified m this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
I
I
C. Warranties specified in this SectIOn.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB FIrm QualIfications: Engage a TAB firm certIfied by NEBB.
I
I
I
B.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certificatIon includes the
followmg:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certIfied TAB
reports.
2. CertIfy that TAB team complied WIth approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in tlus Specification.
C.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testmg,
Adjusting, and Balancing of EnVIronmental Systems
I
I
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-1
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Community Center
1.4
1.5
12-19-2006
I
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
PartIal Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of budding before SubstantIal
Completion. Cooperate With Owner during TAB operations to mimmize conflicts Wlth Owner's
operatlOns.
I
COORDINATION
I
A.
Coordmate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatIves for systems and equipment,
HV AC controls mstallers, and other mechanics to operate HV AC systems and eqUlpment to
support and assIst TAB actIvitIes.
I
B.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on aIr and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
I
1.6 WARRANTY
A.
I
National Project Performance Guarantee: ProvIde a guarantee on AABC's ''National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and AIr Conditioning Systems" forms statmg
that AABC wIll assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails
to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provlSlons:
I
B.
SpecIal Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB Wlll assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the followmg provIsions:
I
1.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabIlities wlthm design and mstallation
linuts.
I
2.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Apphcable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
EXAMINATION
I
A.
Examme the Contract Documents to become famIhar WIth Project requirements and to discover
conditIons m systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
I
1. Venfy that balancmg devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control deVIces, balancing valves and fittmgs, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantItIes and locations of these balancmg
deVices are accessible and appropnate for effectIve balancmg and for efficient system and
eqUlpment operation.
I
I
B.
Examine approved subnuttal data of HV AC systems and eqUlpment.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-2
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
Addition to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
C. Examme Project Record Documents described m Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents. "
I
D. Examine design data, including HV AC system descnptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of plulosophies and
assumptions about HV AC system and eqUIpment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project condItions and reqUIrements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditIOns that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HV AC equipment when mstalled under
condItions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found m AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HV AC Systems--Duct DesIgn,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data WIth the design data and Installed conditions.
I
I
I
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
I
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HV AC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficIent system and equipment
operation.
I
I
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adJustmg and
balancing.
I
1. Examine HV AC eqUIpment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I
K. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
I
L. Examine equipment for mstallation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Dampers, valves, and other controlled deVIces are operated by the intended controller.
Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operatIOn and for tIghtness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This mcludes dampers in multIzone umts, rmxmg boxes,
and vanable-air-volume terminals.
Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
Sensors are located to sense only the mtended condItions.
Sequence of operation for control modes is accordmg to the Contract Documents.
Controller set points are set at indicated values.
Interlocked systems are operating.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-3
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to SenIor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs accordmg to mdIcated values.
I
N.
Report deficiencies discovered before and dunng performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactIOns to changes m condItions. Record default set pomts If dIfferent from
indicated values.
I
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
I
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategIes and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
I
1. Permanent electrical power winng is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. EqUIpment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, _and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critIcal areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Wmdows and doors can be closed so indicated conditIons for system operations can be
met.
I
I
I
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
3.4
A.
Perform testmg and balancing procedures on each system accordmg to the procedures contamed
m NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, AdJustmg, and Balancmg of Environmental
Systems and this Section.
I
I
B.
Cut InsulatIon, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
mInImUm extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancmg, close probe holes and patch insulation with new matenals Identical to those removed.
Restore vapor bamer and finish accordmg to msulatIOn Specifications for thIS ProJect.
I
C.
Mark eqUIpment and balancmg deVIce settmgs WIth paint or other SUItable, permanent
IdentIficatIon material, mcludmg damper-control positIOns, valve pOSItion mdicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and sumlar controls and deVIces, to show final settmgs.
I
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
I
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtam manufacturer's outlet factors anp
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summatIOn of required outlet volumes witp
reqUIred fan volumes.
I
B.
Prepare schematIc diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
Determme the best locatIOns in mam and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. !
I
C.
D.
i
I
Check aIrflow patterns from the outSIde-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan dIscharge and mlXlng dampers.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
Adchtion to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
3.5
A
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
Venfy that motor starters are eqmpped with properly sized thermal protectIOn.
Check dampers for proper pOSition to achieve desired airflow path.
Check for airflow blockages.
Check condensate drains for proper connectlons and functIOning.
Check for proper sealing of air-handlIng unit components.
Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
Adjust fans to deliver total mdicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed lIsted by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of smgle-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connectIOn and downstream from duct
restrictIOns.
Measure inlet statlc pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other alr-handhng and -treatlng eqmpment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operatlon and record the point at wmch maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3.
Measure statlc pressures entering and leaving other deVices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced condltlons.
Compare design data With installed conditIOns to determme vanations m design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors With
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual condItions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley SIzes, motor Sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
4.
5.
6.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-5
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Sernor ServIces and CommunIty Center
3.6
3.7
12-19-2006
I
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indIcated
aIrflows withm specIfied tolerances.
I
1.
Measure statIc pressure at a pomt downstream from the balancmg damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure IS achieved.
I
a.
Where sufficient space in submam and branch ducts is unavaIlable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure mrflow at termmal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total aIrflow for that zone.
I
2.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Contmue to
adjust submmn and branch ducts to inmcated arrflows wIthm specified tolerances.
I
C. Measure termmal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
I
Measure tenninal outlets using a direct-readmg hood or outlet manufacturer's wntten
mstructions and calculating-factors.
D.
Adjust tenninal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air tenninals.
I
1.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of mdicated
quantities without generating nOIse levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution WIthout drafts.
I
2.
I
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
I
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at [mal balanced condItIons and record the followmg data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and senal numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. EffiCIency ratmg.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protectIOn-element ratmg.
I
I
I
B.
Motors Dnven by Van able-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varymg
from rmmmum to maXlIDum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operatIOn. Record observatIOns, includmg controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
I
PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
I
A.
Dunng TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulatIon within the automatIc
temperature-control system.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-6
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Additlon to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
3.8
A
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.9
A
I
I
I
I
I
3.10
I
I
I
B.
Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a penod of two successive
eIght-hour days, m each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the buildmg or zone is occupied.
c.
Measure outslde-aIr, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
Verify that controllers are cahbrated and COmmIssioned.
Check transmitter and controller 10catlOllS and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
Record controller settmgs and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
Check free travel and proper operatlOn of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
Check the interaction of electncally operated switch transducers.
Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determme whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
Note operatIon of electnc actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operahons.
TOLERANCES
Set HV AC system airflow and water flow rates within the followmg tolerances:
1.
2.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
Alr Outlets and Inlets: 0 to mmus 10 percent.
FINAL REPORT
A
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quahty font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring bmder, tabulated and dlvided into sectlOns by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include a cerhfication sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certlfied testing and
balancing engmeer.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-7
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
1. Include a list of mstruments used for procedures, along with proof of calIbration.
I
C.
Final Report Contents: In addItion to certIfied field report data, mclude the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pump curves.
Fan curves.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and eqUIpment mstallers.
Other mformatIon relatIve to eqUIpment performance, but do not include Shop Drawmgs
and Product Data.
I
I
D.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entnes, mclude the followmg 'data m the
fmal report, as applicable:
I
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. -Project name.
4. Project locatIOn.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certIfies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents includmg the followmg:
I
I
I
I
a.
b.
IndIcated versus final performance.
Notable charactenstIcs of systems.
DescnptIOn of system operatIOn sequence if it vanes from the Contract
Documents.
I
c.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of eqUIpment.
13. Data for terminal umts, mcludmg manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explam why certam final data in the body of reports vanes from indIcated
values.
15. Test condItIons for fans and pump performance forms mcluding the followmg:
I
I
a. Settmgs for outsIde-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. CondItIons of filters.
c. CoolIng cOlI, wet- and dry-bulb condItIons.
d. Face and bypass damper settmgs at coils.
e. Fan drive settmgs incIudmg settmgs and percentage of maxImum pItch dIameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for vanable-aIr-volume systems.
g. Settmgs for supply-air, statIc-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditIons that affect performance.
I
I
E.
System DIagrams: Include schematic layouts of aIr and hydromc dIstnbution systems. Present
each system WIth smgle-lIne dIagram and include the folIowmg:
I
1. QuantitIes of outSIde, supply, return, and exhaust aIrflows.
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-8
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Adchhon to Senior Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and mlet SIZes.
4. Pipe and valve SIzes and locatIOns.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancmg stattons.
7. PosItton of balancing devices.
I
3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS
I
A Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to venfy that
balanced condltlOns are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
I
B. Seasonal Penods: If Inittal TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter condItions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting dunng near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
I
END OF SECTION 15950
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-9
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItlon to Sent or ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provIsIOns of the Contract, mcluding General and Supplementary Condi-
tIons and DIvIsion 1 SpecIfication SectIons, apply to thIS Section.
I
A ThIs Section includes the followmg:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electrical identIfication.
3. Concrete equipment bases.
4. Electrical demolition.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.
I
I
1.2 SUMMARY
I
I
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A EMT: Electrical metalhc tubing.
I
B. FMC: FlexIble metal conduit.
I
I
C. IMC: IntermedIate metal condUIt.
D. LFMC: LIqUIdtIght flexible metal condUIt.
E. RNC: RIgid nonmetallIc conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
I
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Electncal Components, DevIces, and Accessones: LIsted and labeled as defined m NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authontIes havmg ]UnSdIctIon, and marked for in-
tended use.
I
B. Comply wIth NFP A 70.
I
1.6 COORDINATION
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-1
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Semor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Coordmate chases, slots, mserts, sleeves, and opemngs wIth general construction work and ar-
range m building structure during progress of constructIOn to facilitate the electncal installations
that follow.
1.
Set inserts and sleeves m poured-m-place concrete, masomy work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate mstallmg electrical materials and equipment for effiCIent
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positiomng before closmg in
the building.
c.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electncal Items that are concealed by fin-
ished surfaces. Access doors and panels are speCIfied in DiVIsion 8 Section "Access Doors."
D.
Where electrical identIficatIon devices are apphed to field-fmished surfaces, coordinate installa-
tion of identification devices with completIon of finished surface.
E.
Where electrical identification markings and devices wtll be concealed by acoustical ceilings
and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coatmg acceptable to authorities having
Jurisdiction.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp LocatIons: Hot-dIP galvanized steel.
C.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9! 16-lI1ch- (J 4-mm-) di-
ameter slotted holes at a maximum of2 inchc'l (50 111m) O.C., in webs.
D.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Comply with DiVIsion 5 SectIon "Metal Fabncations" for slot-
ted channel framing.
1. Channel ThIckness: Selected to suit structuralloadmg.
2. Fittmgs and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
E.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured cleVIS hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, cetlmg trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or chck-
type hangers.
F.
PIpe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
G.
Cable Supports for Vertical CondUIt: Factory-fabncated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in nser condUIts. Plugs have
number and SIze of conductor gnppmg holes as reqUIred to suit individual risers. Body con-
structed of malleable-Iron casting WIth hot-dtp galvamzed finish.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-2
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
H. ExpansIOn Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Toggle Bolts: All-steel spnnghead type.
J. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
2.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Remforcement Matenals: As specified m DivlSlon 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
2.3 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's pamt selected to match installed equipment fimsh. :
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-nch pront recommended by Item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
Headroom Maintenance: If mountmg heIghts or other locatIOn critena are not indicated, ar-
range and install components and eqUlpment to prOVIde the maximum pOSSIble headroom.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other budd-
ing systems and components, 11llless otherwIse mdicated.
EqUlpment: Install to facilitate servIce, mamtenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of dIsconnectmg, with mlmmum interference WIth other installahons.
Right of Way: GIve to raceways and pIpmg systems mstalled at a required slope.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
Damp LocatIOns and Outdoors: Hot-dIp galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
Dry LocatIOns: Steel matenals.
I
I
SelectIOn of Supports: Comply WIth manufacturer's wntten Instructions.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, hmes a safety factor of at
least four; IDImmum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-3
I
I
I
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Install support devIces to securely and permanently fasten and support electnca1 components.
B.
Install indIVidual and multtple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provlde
V-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for se-
cunng hanger rods and condUIts.
C.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D.
SIze supports for multIple raceway mstallations so capacIty can be increased by a 25 percent
mImmum in the future.
E.
Support mdividual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F.
Install 1I4-inch- (6-mm-) dIameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwIse indi-
cated.
G.
Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable-tron hangers for I-I/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving
lighting and receptacle branch CIrCUIts above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to
slotted channel and angle supports.
H.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Sup-
port sheet-metal boxes directly from the buildmg structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are
used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an ap-
proved fastener not more than 24 Inches (610 mm) from the box.
K.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control en-
closures, pull and junctIOn boxes, transformers, and other deVIces unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-dnlled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assembhes. Install sleeves dunng erec-
tIon of concrete and masonry walls.
M.
Securely fasten electncalItems and thelr supports to the buildmg structure, unless otherwise m-
dIcated. Perform fastening according to the followmg unless other fastening methods are indI-
cated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expanSIOn bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete mserts WIth machine screws and bolts.
4. EXIsting Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided WIth
lock washers may be used in eXIstmg concrete.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-4
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to Seruor Services and Community Center
3.4
3.5
12-19-2006
I
6.
Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tensIOn clamps on steel.
I
a. FIeld Weldmg: Comply WIth A WS D1.1.
7.
Weldmg to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for condUIts, pIpe
straps, or other Items.
LIght Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
Fasteners: Select so the load apphed to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
I
8.
9.
I
FIRESTOPPING
I
A.
Apply frrestoppmg to cable and raceway penetratIOns of fire-rated floor and wall assembhes to
achIeve fire-resIstance rating of the assembly. Fuestopping materials and installatIOn requrre-
ments are specified in DIvisIOn 7 Section "FIrestopping."
I
CONCRETE BASES
I
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions mdicated, but not less than 4 inches (J 00 mm) larger, in
both directions, than supported umt. Follow supported eqUIpment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Use 3000-p~1 (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
I
I
3.6 DEMOLITION
3.7
A.
Protect existmg electrical eqUIpment and installations indIcated to remain. If damaged or dIS-
turbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged pOrtIOns and Install new products of equal
capacity, quahty, and functionahty.
I
B.
Accessible Work: Remove exposed electncal eqUIpment and mstallatIOns, indicated to be de~
mohshed, m their entIrety. I
I
C.
Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wmng, indIcated to be abandoned m
place, 2 l11ches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent constructIon. Cap raceways and patch
surface to match existmg firush.
I
D.
Remove demohshed matenal from Project SIte.
I
E.
Remove, store, clean, remstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relo-
cation.
I
CUTTING AND PATCHING
I
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and 0011 floors, walls, partItions, ceIlmgs, and other surfaces required to
permIt electrIcal mstallatIOns. Perform cuttmg by skIlled mechamcs of trades mvolved.
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-5
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
3.8
I
I
I
I
3.9
I
I
I
I
3.10
I
I
B.
Repair and refinish disturbed fimsh materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where eXIsting firestopping has been dIsturbed. RepaIr and
refimsh materials and other surfaces by skIlled mechanics of trades involved.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, includIng the following:
1. Raceways.
2. BuIlding WIre and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electncal components.
4. E1ectnca1 identification.
5. Concrete bases.
6. Electrical demolition.
7. Cutting and patchIng for electncal construction.
8. Touchup painting.
REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A.
Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Divi-
sion 9 Section "Painting."
1.
Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermedIate, and frmsh coats to
suit the degree of damage at each location.
Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for tIming
and applIcation of successive coats.
Repair damage to galvanIzed finishes with ZInc-rich paint recommended by manufac-
turer.
2.
3.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
On completIon of installatIon, includIng outlets, fittIngs, and devices, Inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dIrt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B.
Protect eqUIpment and installations and maIntain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabInets are WithOut damage or detenoratlOn at time of SubstantIal CompletIon.
3.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
I
I
I
A. Record draWIngs shall be keep on SIte and updated daily.
B. Record draWings and 3 sets of O&M manuals shall be subnutted at the completion of the pro-
ject
1. Include all special warranties and copies of permits.
END OF SECTION 16050
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-6
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Senior ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Thts Section mcludes the followmg:
I
1.
2.
3.
IdentificatIon for conductors and communicatIon and control cable.
Warning labels and SIgns.
Eqmpment IdentIfication labels.
I
1.2
SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Product Data: For each electncal identification product indicated.
I
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
I
I
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identificatIOn names, abbreviations, colors, and other features Wlth reqmrements m
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawmgs, manufacturer's wmng dIagrams, and the OperatIon
and Maintenance Manual, and Wlth those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Use consistent designatIons throughout Project.
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION
MATERIALS
A. Marker Tape: VInyl or VInyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, WIth circmt identificatIon
legend machine pnnted by thermal transfer or eqmvalent process.
2.2
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
I
A.
Comply WIth NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
I
B. Self-AdhesIve WarnIng Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensItive adheSIve labels,
configured for dIsplay on front cover, door, or other access to eqmpment, unless otherwise
indIcated.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
I
I
12-19-2006
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum SIgnS, punched or drilled for fasteners,
With colors, legend, and SIze reqUired for application. 1:4-mch (6.4-mm) grommets in comers
for mountmg. Nominal SIze, 7 by 10 mches (180 by 250 mm).
D.
Wammg label and SIgn shall mclude, but are not linuted to, the follOWing legends:
1. Workspace Clearance Waming: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES
(915 mm)."
2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
I
I
A. Self-AdhesIve, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melarrune Label: Adhesive backed, with wmte
letters on a dark-gray background. MInimum letter height shall be 3/g inch (10 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPLICATION
A.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify
field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring
connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit deSIgnation.
2. Use system of designations that is unIform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
B.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabmets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lightmg: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warrung signs. Identify system voltage with
white letters on an black background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1. Equipment Requmng Workspace Clearance According to NFP A 70: Unless otherwise
indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and smular
eqUipment in finished spaces.
C.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each umt of eqUipment, install unIque designation label
that IS conSIstent with WIring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to dIsconnect SWitches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, tenmnal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, commumcation, signal, monitonng, and alarm systems unless eqUipment is
proVIded with its own Identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor EqUipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acryhc or melamine label.
Unless otherWIse indicated, provide a smgle lme of text With 1!2-l11ch- (l3-mm-)
high letters on 1-1. 2-mch- (38-mm-) mgh label; where 2 lines of text are required,
use labels 2 l11chcs (50 mm) hIgh.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-2
I
I
12-19-2006
I
/
Hunt Engmeering
AddItion to Senior ServIces and Conunuruty Center
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
b. Outdoor EqUIpment: Engraved, laminated acryhc or melamine label, dnlled for
screw attachment.
c. Elevated Components: Increase SIzes of labels and legend to those appropnate for
vieWing from the floor.
I
I
2.
EqUIpment to Be Labeled:
a.
b.
Panelboards, electncal cabmets, and enclosures.
Electncal sWItchgear and sWItchboards.
Transformers.
DIsconnect sWItches.
Enclosed CIrCUIt breakers.
Push-button stations.
Contactors.
I
I
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
INSTALLATION
I
Verify identlty of each Item before installing identlfication products.
I
Location: Install Identificatlon materials and devices at locations for most converuent VIewing
without mterference wIth operation and maintenance of equipment.
I
Apply identification devices to surfaces that reqUITe finish after completing finish work.
Self-Adhesive IdentlficatIOn Products: Clean surfaces before apphcatlon, using materials and
methods reconunended by manufacturer of Identlfication deVIce.
I
Attach nonadhesive signs and plastIC labels WIth screws and aillClhary hardware appropriate to
the locatIOn and substrate. I
I
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level IdentIfication, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed
below for ungrounded servIce, feeder, and branch-CIrCUIt conductors.
I
1.
2.
Color shall be factory apphed.
Colors for 208/120-V CIrCUIts:
I
a.
b.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
I
c.
END OF SECTION 16075
I
I
I
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-3
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor Services and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and assocIated connectors, splices, and
tenmnattons for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
I
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I
A. Field quality-control test reports.
I
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities havmg jurisdictiOn, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply WIth NFP A 70.
I
"
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
"
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
I
I
A.
In other Part 2 artIcles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requrrements apply for product selectiOn:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offermg products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
I
I
A. Avmlable Manufacturers:
1. Amencan Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2. General Cable Corporation.
3. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
I
B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and InsulatiOn Applications" Article for insulation type, cable
constructiOn, and ratings.
I
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-1
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIOn to Seruor ServIces and Comrmmity Center
12-19-2006
I
c.
Conductor Matenal: Copper complying wIth NEMA WC 5 solid conductor for No. 10 A WG
and smaller, stranded for No.8 A WG and larger.
I
D. Conductor InsulatIOn Types: Type THHN-THWN, complymg wIth NEMA WC 5.
E.
I
Multiconductor Cable: shall not be used on tlus project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
I
Service Entrance, feeders and branch CIrcUIts: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors m
raceway.
I
Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
I
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
INSTALLATION
I
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilmgs, and floors, unless otherwise mdicated.
I
Use manufacturer-approved pulhng compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulatIon. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maXimum pulhng tensIOns and sidewall pressure values.
I
c.
Use pullmg means, mcluding fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wIre/cable gnps, that will'
not damage cables or raceway. I
I
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendIcular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where pOSSIble. I
I
I
D.
E.
Support cables accordmg to DiVISIOn 16 Section "Basic Electncal Matenals and Methods."
F.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to DiViSIOn 7 SectIon "Through-
PenetratIOn Firestop Systems."
I
G.
,
i
,
IdentIfy and color-code conductors and cables accordmg to DlVlsIOn 16 SectIon "ElectricaIi
IdentIficatIOn. "
I
H.
Wmng at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 ll1chc~ (150 mm) of slack.
I
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testmg: Perform megger test electrical test and visual.
I
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-2:
i
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddIuon to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
I
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply wIth requirements and corrective action taken to achIeve
complIance with reqUIrements.
I
END OF SECTION 16120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-3
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
I
SUMMARY
I
A.
This SectIOn mcludes raceways, fittmgs, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical WIring.
B.
See DIvision 7 SectIOn "Through-PenetratIOn FIrestop Systems" for firestopping matenals and
installation at penetratIons through walls, ceIlmgs, and other fire-rated elements.
I
C.
See DivIsion 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and
Identification products.
I
D.
See DivIsion 16 Section "Wiring DevIces" for devIces installed m boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
I
SUBMITIALS
I
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wlfeways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabmets mdicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabncation and installation details of components for raceways, fittmgs,
boxes, enclosures, and cabmets.
I
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE I
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: LIsted and labeled as defined m NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testmg agency acceptable to authontles havmg JunsdIctIOn, and marked fot
mtended use.
I
I
B.
Comply wIth NFP A 70.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
In other Part 2 artIcles where subparagraph tItles below introduce hsts, the following
reqUIrements apply for product selectIon:
I
1. AvaIlable Manufacturers: Subject to comphance WIth reqUIrements, manufacturers
offenng products that may be mcorporated mto the Work mclude, but are not hrmted to,
the manufacturers specified.
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-1'
I
I
I
I Hunt Engmeenng 12-19-2006
AddItion to Semor Servtces and Community Center
2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
I A AvaIlable Manufacturers:
I 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
I 4. Electri-Flex Co.
5. Gnnnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and CondUIt Div.
6. L TV Steel Tubular Products Company.
7. Manhattan/CDT ICole-Flex.
I 8. O-Z Gedney; Umt of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Co.
I B. RIgid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
I D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Set-screw type.
I E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC Jacket.
I G. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing matenals.
I 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A Manufacturers:
I 1. American International.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
I 3. Arnco Corp.
4. Cantex Inc.
5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & PlastICS Group.
6. Condux International.
I 7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electncal Products.
I 10. Manhattan/CDT ICole-Flex.
11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
12. Spiralduct, Ine.! AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
I 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
14. Carlton
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
I C. RNC Fittmgs: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubmg type and material.
I RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-2
I
I
12-19-2006
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to SenIor ServIces and Commumty Center
I
D. LFNC: UL 1660.
I
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
2.5
A.
Manufacturers:
I
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; DIV. of Cooper Industnes, Inc.
2. Emerson/General SIgnal; Appleton Electric Company.
3. Enckson Electncal Equipment Co.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell, Inc.; KIllark ElectrIc Manufacturing Co.
6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General SIgnal.
7. RACO; DIVISIon of Hubbell, Inc.
8. Robroy IndustrIes, Inc.; Enclosure DiviSIOn.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Damel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
I
I
I
I
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and DeVIce Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I
c.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, WIth gasketed cover.
D.
Nonmetallic Outlet and DeVIce Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
I
E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
F.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and JunctIOn Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I
G.
Cast-Metal Pull and JunctIon Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast alummum with gasketed cover.
I
H.
Hmged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, WIth continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
1.
2.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
NonmetallIC Enclosures: PlastIc, finIshed mSIde WIth radIO-frequency-resistant pamt.
I
I.
Cabmets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanIzed steel box WIth removable intenor panel and
removable front, finIshed mSIde and out WIth manufacturer's standard enamel. Hmged door m
front cover WIth flush latch and concealed hmge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal bamers to separate wmng of dIfferent systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where reqUIred for freestanding equipment.
I
I
FACTORY FINISHES
I
A.
I
Fmish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, proVIde manufacturer's standard pnme-:
coat finish ready for field paintmg. I
Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard gra)
pamt applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabmets before shIppmg.
I
B.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-3
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
I
I
A.
Outdoors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Exposed: RIgid steel or IMC.
Concealed: RIgId steel or IMC.
Underground, Single Run: RNC.
Underground, Grouped: RNC.
ConnectIOn to VIbrating EqUIpment (Including Transformers and Hydrauhc, Pneumatic,
Electric SolenOId, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
6.
B.
Indoors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposed: EMT.
Concealed: EMT.
Embedded m masonary walls RNC schedule 40.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
5.
6.
a.
Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C. Minimum Raceway SIze: 3!4-1l1ch trade size (DN 21).
D. Raceway Fittmgs: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded ngId steel condUIt fittings, unless otherwise
mdIcated.
Do not install alummum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
INSTALLATION
Keep raceways at least 6 lIlches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pIpes. Install honzontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
Complete raceway mstallatIOn before starting conductor installation.
Support raceways as specified m DIvision 16 SectIOn "Basic Electncal Matenals and
MethodsElectncal Supports and SeismIC Restraints."
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entenng raceways.
Protect stub-ups from damage where condUIts nse through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portIOns of bends are not viSIble above fimshed slab.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-4
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItlOn to Senior ServIces and CommUlllty Center
12-19-2006
I
F.
Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends m same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwIse indicated.
I
G.
Conceal condUIt and EMT withm finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
mdIcated.
I
1. Install concealed raceways with a mmimum of bends m shortest practical distance,
considenng type of buildmg constructIon and obstructIons, unless otherwIse indIcated.
I
H.
Raceways shall not be Embedded in Slabs.
I.
Raceways routed under slabs shall have 2" clear from top of condUIt to bottom of slab.
I
J.
,
Install exposed raceways parallel or at nght angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible. .
I
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
2. Make parallel bends m parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provIde field bends for parallel raceways.
I
K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make Joints tight.
1.
Use insulating bushmgs to protect conductors.
I
L. TIghten set screws of threadless fittings with sUItable tools.
M. TermmatIOns:
I
1.
2.
Where raceways are termmated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and mstalllocknuts WIth dIshed part agamst box. Use two locknuts, one mSIde
and one outside box. i
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tIghtl~
into hub so end bears agamst wire protectIon shoulder. Where chase nipples are used)
alIgn raceways so couplIng is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads ard
I
exposed. I
I
I
N.
i
Install pull WIres in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastIc line WIth not
less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensIle strength. Leave at least 12 ll1chcs (300 111m) of slack at each end
of pull WIre. I
Telephone and SIgnal System Raceways, 2-1m:h Trad~ SlZC (DN 53) and Smaller: In additIOn
to above reqUIrements, mstall raceways in maxImum lengths of 150 ft'd (45 m) and with ~
maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or eqUIvalent. Separate lengths WIth pull or Junction boxes
where necessary to comply WIth these reqUIrements.
I
O.
I
I
P.
Stub-up ConnectIons: Extend condUIts through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
eqUIpment. Install WIth an adjustable top or couplIng threaded inSIde for plugs set flush with
fimshed floor. Extend conductors to eqUIpment WIth ngId steel condUIt; FMC may be used.
(} mchc'i (150 111m) above the floor. Install screwdnver-operated, threaded plugs flush with
floor for future eqUIpment connections.
I
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-5
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Semces and Community Center
12-19-2006
Q.
Flexible ConnectIons: Use maximum of 48 lllches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for eqUIpment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC ill damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connectIOns.
I
I
R.
Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junctIon box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground tenmnals.
I
S.
Set floor boxes level and flush with firushed floor surface.
T. Set floor boxes level. Trim after illstallatIOn to fit flush WIth firushed floor surface.
I
u.
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer.
I
3.3
PROTECTION
A
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
I
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
I
END OF SECTION 16130
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-6
I
Hunt Engmeenng
AddItion to Semor ServIces and Communlty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
I
A.
Tlu.s Section includes the followmg:
1.
2.
3.
Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault cIrcuit mterrupters.
Smgle- and double-pole snap sWItches and dimmer switches.
Device wall plates.
I
1.2
SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
I
B.
Shop Drawings: LISt of legends and descnptlOn of materials and process used for premarkmg
wall plates.
I
c.
FIeld quality-control test reports.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: LIsted and labeled as defined m NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authontIes havmg jurisdIction, and marked for
intended use.
I
I
I
I
B. Comply WIth NFP A 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to comphance with requirements, provide products by one of the
followmg:
1.
WIring DevIces:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wmng DevIce-Kellems.
b. LevIton Mfg. Company Inc.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; WIring DevIces Div.
I
I
I
WIRING DEVICES
16140-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Senior ServIces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498. Nylon face and Federal Spec Listed.
I
I
I
I
I
B. GFCI Receptacles: StraIght blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, WIth integral
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying With UL 498 and UL 943.
Design units for installation in a 2-3;4-ll1ch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter.
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Smgle- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. Federal Spec
listed.
B. DImmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state umts with integral, qUIet on/off switches and
audIble frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching to suit
connections.
2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable
slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate
interference; and 5-inch (130-mm) wire connecting leads.
I
2.4 WALL PLATES
I
A.
Single and combination types to match corresponding WIring devices.
I
I
I
I
1. Plate-Secunng Screws: Metal with head color to match plate fmish.
2. Material for Fimshed Spaces: O'{)35-mch- (l-mm-) thick, satm-fmished stainless steel.
3. Matenal for Unfmished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum WIth spring-loaded lift cover, and hsted and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
2.5
FINISHES
A.
Color:
1. WIring DeVIces Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless
otherWIse indicated or required by NFP A 70.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install devices and assembhes level, plumb, and square With building lines.
I
I
WIRING DEVICES
16140-2
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIon to SenIor ServIces and CommunIty Center
12-19-2006
I
B.
Arrangement of DevIces: Unless otherwIse indicated, mount flush, WIth long dimension
vertical, and WIth groundmg temunal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multIgang wall plates.
I
C.
Remove wall plates and protect devIces and assemblies during paintmg.
I
D.
Adjust locatIOns of floor service outlets and service poles to smt arrangement of partItIOns and
furmshings.
I
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.3
3.4
A.
Comply with DIVISIon 16 Section "Electrical IdentIficatIOn." I
1. Receptacles: IdentIfy panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot(
stamped or engraved machine printmg with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
I
I
CONNECTIONS
I
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
I
B.
Connect WIring accordmg to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Perform the followmg field tests and inspectIons and prepare test reports:
I
1. After mstallIng wmng devices and after electncal CIrCUItry has been energIzed, test for
proper polarIty, ground continUIty, and complIance WIth reqmrements. ,
2. Test GFCI operatlon wIth local fault SImulatIOns according to manufacturer's written
mstructIOns. I,
I
B.
Remove malfunctlonmg UnIts, replace WIth new UnIts, and retest as specIfied above.
I
END OF SECTION'16140
I
I
I
I
WIRING DEVICES
16140-3
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIon to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
I
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. ThIS Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed SWItches and circuit
breakers:
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Fusible switches.
Nonfusible switches.
Enclosures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I
I
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed SWItch, , accessory, and component indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wirmg.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
I
D. OperatIOn and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
I
I
A. Electrical Components, DeVIces, and Accessories: LIsted and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorittes havmg Jurisdiction, and marked for
mtended use.
B. Comply WIth NFP A 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 artIcles where tttles below introduce lists, the followmg requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with reqUIrements, provIde products by one of the
manufacturers specIfied.
I
2.2
FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
I
A.
Manufacturers:
1. General Electnc Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
I
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-1
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
AddItlon to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
2. SIemens Energy & AutomatIOn, Inc.
3. Square D/Group Schneider.
B.
Fusible SWItch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capabilIty to accept two padlocks, and
mterlocked with cover m closed posItlon.
I
I
C.
Nonfusible SWItch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with
capability to accept two padlocks, and mterlocked with cover m closed position.
D. Fuses
1. Provide Bussman Fuses.
2. Provide RK-5 Dual Element.
I
I
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditIOns of installed location.
1. Outdoor LocatIOns: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply WIth applicable portlons ofNECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installatlon
of enclosed switches and CIrcuit breakers.
B.
Mount indIVIdual wall-mountmg sWitches and cirCUIt breakers with tops at uniform height,
unless otherwIse mdIcated. Anchor floor-mountmg SWItches to concrete base. I
Comply WIth mounting and anchoring reqmrements specified in DiVISIOn 16 Section "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Work Electncal Supports and SeIsmic Restraints." I
Temporary Liftmg ProVIsions: Remove temporary hftmg eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of movmg parts from enclosures and components. I
Identlfy field-mstalled conductors, mterconnectmg wmng, and components; proVIde warmng
SIgnS as speCIfied m DIVISIon 16 Sectlon Electncal Identlficatlon." I
I
!
I
C.
I
I
I
D.
E.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance testmg as follows:
1.
2.
3.
I
Inspect mechanical and electncal connectlOns.
Venfy SWitch and relay type and labelmg venficatlOn.
Verify ratmg of installed fuses.
I
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Semor Services and Commumty Center
END OF SECTION 16410
12-19-2006
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-3
I
Hunt Engmeering
AdditIOn to Seruor ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes distributIon panelboards and lighting and applIance branch-circuit
panelboards.
I
1.2
SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protectIve devIce, accessory, and
component mdIcated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' techrucaI data on features,
performance, electrical characteristIcs, ratmgs, and fmishes.
I
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
I
1.
DImensioned plans, elevatIons, sections, and detaIls. Show tabulatIons of installed
I
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
I
a. Enclosure types and detaIls for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. .
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. I
c. Short-cIrcmt current ratmg of panelboards and overcurrent protectIve deVIces. I
d. Features, charactenstics, ratmgs, and factory settmgs of indIvidual overcurrent
protective devIces and auxIliary components.
I
2.
3.
4.
Winng Diagrams: Power, SIgnal, and control wmng.
FIeld qualIty-control test reports.
Operation and mamtenance data.
I
I
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
,
I
I
ElectncaI Components, DeVIces, and Accessones: Listed and labeled as defined m NFP A 70l
Article 100, by a testmg agency acceptable to authontIes havmg junsdiction, and marked fot
intended use. I
I
B. Comply wIth NEMA PB 1.
C.
Comply WIth NFP A 70.
I
I
I
PANELBOARDS
I
16442-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12~19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. AVallable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance WIth requIrements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to complIance with requirements, provide products by one of the
follOWIng:
I
I
1.
Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distnbution & Protection DIV.
b. Siemens Energy & AutomatIOn, Inc.
c. Square D.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
I
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
1. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door WIthin
hinged tnm cover.
I
B.
Phase and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity
I
I
c.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.
1. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
D.
ServIce EqUIpment Label: UL labeled for use as servIce equipment for panelboards WIth main
service disconnect switches.
I
I
E. Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating:
1. Fully rated to mterrupt symmetncal short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION P ANELBOARDS
I
I
A. Doors: Secured WIth vault-type latch WIth tumbler lock; keyed alike. Omit for fused-switch
panelboards.
B. Main Overcurrent ProtectIve DeVIces: Circuit breaker.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. For CirCUIt-Breaker Frame SIzes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
I
2.4
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
I
I
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective DeVIces: Bolt-on CirCUIt breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent umts.
P ANELBOARDS 16442-2
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Seruor ServIces and Community Center
2.5
12-19-2006
I
B.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; all metal constructIOn of
latch, keyed alIke.
I
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
I
A.
Molded-Case CIrCUIt Breaker: UL 489, with interruptmg capacIty to meet available fault
currents.
1.
Thermal-Magnetic CIrcUIt Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and mstantaneous magnetic trIp element for short CIrcUIts. Adjustable
magnetic trip settmg for cirCUIt-breaker frame SIzes 250 A and larger.
Molded-Case CIrcuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame SIzes, trip
ratings, and number of poles. :
a. Lugs: Mechamcal style, suitable for number, SIze, trip ratmgs, and conducto~
materials. !
b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switclung
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heatmg, air-conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
I
2.
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
INST ALLA TION
I
A. Install panelboards and accessones according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
I
Comply WIth mountmg and anchoring requirements speCIfied in DIVIsion 16 SectIOn "SeismIc
Controls for Electncal WorkElectrical Supports and SeIsmic Restraints."
c.
Mount top of trim 74 mchc:, (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwIse mdIcated.
I
D.
Mount plumb and ngid without distortIOn of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush WIth wall firush.
I
E.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.
1.
Set field-adjustable switches and CIrCUIt-breaker trIp ranges.
I
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G.
Stub four I-mcn (27 -GRC') empty conduits from panelboard into acceSSIble cellmg space or
space designated to be ceIhng space in the future I
Identify field-mstalled conductors, mterconnectmg wmng, and components; provide warning
SIgnS as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods I
I
H.
I
1.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard WIth engraved metal
nameplate mounted with corrosIon-resistant screws.
,
or larnmated-plasti~
I
I
I
,
I
PANELBOARDS
16442-3
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
J. Ground equipment according to DIVIsion 16
I
I
K. Connect winng accordmg to DivIsion 16 SectIOn "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
I
1.
Test insulatIOn resIstance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control CIrCUIt.
Test continuity of each cIrcuit.
I
2.
END OF SECTION 16442
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PANELBOARDS
16442-4
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Seruor ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16511- INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
1.3
A.
I
This SectIOn mcludes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Interior l1ghting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
Emergency hghtmg uruts.
Exit signs.
LIghting fixture supports.
Building mounted exterior lightmg fixtures
I
I
B. See details on drawings for control systems employmg low-voltage control.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
See details on drawing for control system for exterior lighting control. i
See Division 16 Section "Wiring DevIces" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
~~ !
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of hghting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessones, firushes.
B.
I
Shop Drawings: Show detaIls of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions!
weIghts, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessones. I
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bI-level and rummer-controlled fixtures,
signed by product manufacturer.
C.
D.
FIeld qual1ty-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Electncal Components, DevIces, and Accessones: LIsted and labeled as defined m NFP A 70,1
Article 100, by a testmg agency acceptable to authonties haVIng JunsdIction, and marked for
I
mtended use. :
I
I
B. Comply with NFP A 70.
I
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Semor ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
I
I
A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headmgs that
introduce lists, the followmg reqUIrements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with reqUIrements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specIfied. Prior to bId a request for prior approval of an equal fixture may
be submitted, If approved it will be listed in the addendum.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Recessed FIXtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compattbilIty for recessed fixtures.
B.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
C.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D.
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER IS specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
E.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp comers and edges.
F.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
G.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operatmg conditIOns, and desIgned to permit relamping WIthout use of tools. DeSIgned to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, dIffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
H.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwtse indicated:
1. Wlute Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metalltzed FIlm: 90 percent.
1.
PlastIC Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic LIghting Diffusers: 100 percent vIrgin acryltc plastic. High resistance to
yellowmg and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiatIon.
a. Lens Thickness: At least [0.125 inch (3.175 lllm)] minimum unless different
truckness IS mdlcated.
b. UV stabilized.
2.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indIcated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-2
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIOn to Senior ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
2.3 BALLASTS
A.
ElectronIc Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply wIth ANSI C82.11; rapId-start type,
unless otherwIse mdlcated, and desIgned for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall
be desIgned for full hght output unless dimmer or bi-level control IS mdicated.
I
1. Sound Ratmg: A.
2. Total HarmonIc DIstortion Ratmg: Less than 10 percent.
3. TransIent Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
4. Operatmg Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
6. BF: 0.85 or mgher.
7. Power Factor: 0.95 or hIgher.
I
I
I
B.
Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contamed, modular, battery-inverter
urut, factory mounted WIthm lIghtmg fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with
UL 924.
I
1.
Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100
lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to
fixture ballast.
Test Push Button and Indicator LIght: Visible and accessIble without opemng fixture or
entering ceiling space.
I
2.
I
a.
Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operabihty.
IndIcator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow mdicates trickle
charge; bright glow mdlcates charging at end of discharge cycle.
I
b.
3.
4.
I
C.
Battery: Sealed, mamtenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatIc, sohd-state, constant-current type wIth sealed power transfer
relay. I
HIgh-Pressure SodIUm Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state Igmter/starter. Igmte1-
starter shall have an average lIfe in pulsmg mode of 10,000 hours at an Igmter/starter-case
temperature of 90 deg C. I
1. Instant-Restnke DevIce: Integral with ballast, or sohd-state potted module, factory
mstalled withm fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to
I
150W. i
I
!
I
I
I
a.
b.
Restnke Range: 105- to 130-V ac.
MaxImum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
I
2. Mmlmum Startmg Temperature: Y!l11U~ 40 deg}' (Mmus 40 deg C).
3. Open-cIrcuit operatIon shall not reduce average lamp hfe.
I
INTERIOR LIGHTING
i
I
I
I
I
16511-3
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineering
AddItion to Seruor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
I
A. Internally LIghted Signs: Comply WIth UL 924; for SIgn colors, VISIbIlity, luminance, and
lettenng SIze, comply WIth authorities havmgJunsdlction.
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
I
2.5 LAMPS
I
A.
Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EP A's toxICIty characteristic leaching
procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per lIter when tested according to
NEMALL 1.
I
B.
T8 RapId-Start Fluorescent Lamps: GE or Sylvania 32w SPX 50..
I
I
C.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (mininmm), color temperature
3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise
mdicated.
I
1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (mimrnum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 Initial lumens (minimum).
5. 42 W: T4, tnple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
I
I
D. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (nnnimum), color temperature 1900 K,
and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
I
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and SeIsmic Restraints" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
I
I
I
I
B. Smgle-Stem Hangers: 1!2-mch (I3-mm) steel tubmg with SWIVel ball fittmgs and ceiling
canopy. Fmish same as fixture.
C. TWIn-Stem Hangers: Two, L/2-mch (I3-mm) steel tubes WIth single canopy designed to mount
a smgle fixture. Fimsh same as fixture.
D. Wrres: ASTM A 64I1A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zmc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 nun)
E. Rod Hangers: 3; 16-111Ch (5-nlln) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and hne voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and lockmg-type plug.
I
I
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-4
I
Hunt Engmeenng
Addition to Seruar ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Lightmg fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square WIth ceIlings and walls. Install lamps m each
fixture.
I
I
3.1 INSTALLATION
B.
Comply WIth NFP A 70 for mimmum fixture supports.
I
C. Suspended LIghting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 Inches (1200 rrnn), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Smgle-Umt FIxtures: Suspend with twm-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubmg or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture ChasSIS, includmg one at each end.
I
E.
Connect wiring according to DiVIsion 16 SectIOn "Conductors and Cables."
I
I
D.
Adjust arrnable lightmg fixtures to provide required light intensities.
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. VerifY
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. I
I
I
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observatIOns, and verifications md1catmg and
interpretmg results. If adjustments are made to hghtmg system, retest to demonstrate
comphance WIth standards.
I
I
END OF SECTION 16511
I
I
I
I
I
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-~
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Senior ServIces and Commuruty Center
12-19-2006
I
I
SECTION 16715 - VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
A This Section includes the following Items for wIring systems used as signal pathways for voice
and hIgh-speed data transmISSIOn:
I
1.
2.
Unshielded twisted-paIr cablmg.
Workstation outlets.
I
I
I
1.2
SUBMITI ALS
A
Product Data: For each component specified.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:
I
a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.
b. Patch cords.
c. Patch panels.
c.
QualIfication Data: For Installer.
I
D. Field quality-control test reports.
I
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Installer Qualifications: Cabling mstaller must have on staff personnel certIfied by BlCSI.
I
I
1.
Layout ResponsIbility: Preparation of Shop DraWings and Cabling AdmmIstration
Drawings by an RCDD.
InstallatIOn SupervIsIOn: InstallatIOn shall be under the dIrect supervisIOn of a Registered
Technician, who shall be present at all tImes when Work of thIS Section is performed at
Project site.
2.
B.
Source LImItations: Obtain all products except cables through one source from a smgle
manufacturer.
I
I
C. Electncal Components, Devices, and Accessories: LIsted and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
ArtIcle 100, by a testmg agency acceptable to authonties having junsdIctIOn, and marked for
mtended use.
I
D. Comply With NFPA 70, "National Electncal Code."
I
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-1
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItIOn to SenIor ServIces and CommunIty Center
1.4
A
12-19-2006
I
COORDINATION
I
Coordinate layout and InstallatIon of VOIce and data commUnIcatIon cablmg with Owner's
telecommUnICatIOns and LAN eqUIpment and service supplIers. Coordinate servIce entrance
arrangement WIth local exchange carrier.
I
1.
Meet jointly wIth telecommunIcatIons and LAN eqUIpment supplIers, local exchange
carner representatIves, and Owner to exchange mfonnation and agree on detaIls of
eqUIpment arrangements and InstallatIon mterfaces.
Record agreements reached m meetmgs and dIstribute to other participants.
Adjust arrangements and locations of distnbutIOn frames and cross-connect and patch
panels m eqUIpment rooms and winng closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement
and space requIrements of telephone switch and LAN eqUIpment.
I
2.
3.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
A
A
B.
A
A
MANUFACTURERS
I
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the followmg requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to complIance with requIrements, proVIde products by one of the
manufacturers specIfied.
I
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
I
Coordmate the features of matenals and eqUIpment so they form an mtegrated system. Match
components and mterconnections for optImum future performance.
I
ExpansIOn CapabIlIty: Unless otherwise mdIcated, proVide spare conductor paIrs m cables,
posItions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate 25 percent
future Increase in the number of workstations shown on Drawmgs. ThIs expansIOn reqUIrement
does not apply to horizontal cable from workstatIOn outlet to first termmal board.
I
MOUNTING ELEMENTS
I
Backboards: 3 '4-lIleh (19-mm), Intenor-grade, fire-retardant-treated plywood.
I
UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
I
Cable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
A vaya Inc.
Belden Inc.; ElectronICs DIVISIOn.
CommScope Properties, LLC.
Hehx/HITemp Cables, Inc.
I
,
,
16715-2
I
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
Addition to Senior ServIces and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Tenmnal and Connector Component and DistnbutIOn Rack Manufacturers:
1. A vaya Inc.
2. Lucent TechnologIes; Global Service ProvIder.
C. 100-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1. No. 24 A WG, 25 pair.
2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIAlEIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
3. NFPA 70, type CMR complying Wlth UL 1666.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair.
2. Comply wIth TIAlEIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
3. NFPA 70, type CMP.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
F. Cable ConnectIng Hardware: Comply with TIAlEIA-568-B.2, IDC type, using modules
designed for punch-down caps or tools.
1. IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral Wlth connector bodies, including plugs andjacks
where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
3. Cross-Connect Panel: connect to existing.
G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle umts with Integral IDC-
type termInals.
H. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch (12GO-mm) lengths; terminated wIth
RJ-45 plug at each end.
2.5 WORKSTATION OUTLETS
A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-paIr connector; four-pair, modular, RJ-45. Comply with
TIAlEIA-568-B.I.
B. Workstation Outlets: Multi Jack-connector assemblies mounted in single.
1. Faceplate: High-Impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwIse Indicated.
3. Legend: Machine-pnnted, adhesIve tape label identifying the cIrcuit.
2.6 BACKBOARDS
A. existIng
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-3
Hunt Engmeenng
AdditIOn to Seruor Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
I
I
2.7
GROUNDING AND BONDING
I
I
A.
Matenals: Comply with NFPA 70, TIAlEIA-607, and UL 467.
2.8
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Manufacturers :
1. Brady Worldwide, Inc.
2. HellermannTyton.
3. Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
I
I
B. Comply Wlth TIAlEIA-606-A and with applicable reqUIrements m DivISIOn 16 Section
"Electrical Identificatton."
I
I
I
C. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed
with alphanumeric cable designations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BICSI TCI, TIAlEIA-568-B.I, TIAlEIA-568-B.2, TIAlEIA-568-B.3, and
TIAlEIA-569-A.
I
1.
Venfy proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
comphance with space allocatIons, clearances, mstallatIOn tolerances, hazards to cable
InstallatlOn, and other condItIons affectIng mstallatlOn. VenfY that cabling can be
Installed complymg WIth EMI clearance reqUIrements.
Prepare wall penetratIons and venfY that penetratlOns of rated fire walls are made usmg
products labeled for type of wall penetrated.
Identify plan to support cables and raceways m suspended celhngs. VenfY weight of
IndlVldual types and SIzes of cables. VenfY that load capaCIty of cable support structures
IS adequate for each pathway.
Proceed WIth installatIon only after unsatIsfactory conditlOns have been corrected.
I
I
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. ExamIne pathway elements intended for cables.
2.
I
I
3.
4.
I
3.3
APPLICATION OF MEDIA
I
A.
Honzontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between winng closets
and workstatlOn outlets.
I
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-4
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engmeering
Addition to Semor ServIces and Commumty Center
12-19-2006
I
A.
3.4 INSTALLATION
I
B.
I
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
I
I
E. Conduit:
I
I
I
I
I
Comply WIth NECA 1.
WirIng Method: Install cables in raceway. Use UL-hsted plenum cable in environmental air
spaces, mcluding plenum ceIhngs. Conceal raceway and cables except m unfirushed spaces.
Cable trays are speCIfied m DivisIOn 16 Section "Cable Trays." Raceways and boxes are
specified m DIvision 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
Cable Installatton:
1.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural
members and follow surface contours where possible.
Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indIcated outlets, termmals, and cross-
connect and patch panels.
Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's written recommended pulling tensions. Do
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat
lamps shall not be used for heating.
Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 Inches (760 mm) and not more
than 6 inches (150 nun) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, frames, and terminals.
Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed
and linked signal paths, end to end.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a. Do not untwist more than 1 -2 mch (12 mm) of Category 6 cables at connector
terminations.
Wiring WIthin Winng Closets and Enclosures:
1. Mount patch panels, terminal stnps, and other connectmg hardware on existing IDF
2. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
3. Train conductors to termmal pomts with no excess.
4. Use lacing bars to restram cables, to prevent straining connectIOns, and to prevent
bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Comply with TIAlEIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull
pomts, and for pull-box slZlng.
Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever pOSSIble.
In telecommUnIcations rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a comer on backboard
(in case of a smgle pIece of plywood) or m the comer of room (where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room). Use cable trays to route cables If
conduits carmot be located m these positIOns. Secure conduits to backboard when
entering room from overhead. Extend conduits 1 to .3 lI1chcs (25 to 76 mm) in fimshed
floor.
2.
3.
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-5
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AddItion to Seruor Services and Conunuruty Center
3.5
12-19-2006
I
GROUNDING
I
A.
Comply wIth DlVlslOn 16 SectlOn "Groundmg and Bonding" and wIth TIAlEIA 607.
B.
Grounding Pomts:
I
1. Locate grounding termmals m each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabmet.
2. Teleconunurucations Groundmg Busbars: Mount on wall of teleconununications
entrance facIlIty, equipment room, and closet, wIth standoff insulators.
I
C.
Bonding Conductors:
1. Where a panelboard for teleconunurucatIons is located in same room or space as a
grounding busbar, bond to eqUIpment ground bus of electrical panelboard. I
2. Extend from teleconununications entrance facility to grounding busbars.
3. Extend from grounding busbars to ground termmals in equipment racks and cabinets.
I
I
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A.
In addition to requirements in thIs Article, comply with TIAlEIA-606-A and with applicablb
requirements in Division 16 SectIon "Electrical Identification." I
I
B.
I
Carefully review and match the existing facilIty numbering system.
C. Cable and Wire IdentIfication:
1.
I
3.
Label each cable withIn 4 lllches (100 mm) of each terminatIon and tap, where it IS
accessible m a cabmet or JunctIon or outlet box, and elsewhere as indIcated.
Each WIre connected to buIlding-mounted devIces IS not required to be numbered at
device if color of WIre IS consIstent with associated wire connected and numbered wIthIn
I
panel or cabinet.
Exposed Cables and Cables m Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
mtervals not exceedmg 15 feet (4.5 my. '
Label each termmal stnp and screw terrnmal m each cabmet, rack, or panel.
I
2.
I
4.
a.
All wIring conductors connected to terrnmal stnps shall be indIVIdually numbered,
and each cable or winng group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a
bUIldmg-mounted devIce shall be identified WIth name and number of particular
device as shown.
Label each urut and field withIn dIstnbutIon racks and frames.
I
I
b.
5. WIthin Connector FIelds m Equipment Rooms and Winng Closets: Label each connecto~
and each discrete unIt of cable-termmating and connectmg hardware. Where sirrnla~
jacks and plugs are used for both VOice and data conununicatIon cabling, use a dIfferent
color for jacks and plugs of each servIce.
6. At WorkstatIons: Label cables wIthm outlet boxes.
I
I
D.
I
Cable Schedule: Post in prorrnnent locatIon in each eqUIpment room and wmng closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and theIr designatIons, origins, and destmations. Protect With
ngid frame and clear plastIc cover. Furrnsh an electroruc copy of final comprehensiv~
schedules for Project. '
I
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hunt Engineenng
AdditIon to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
E. Cabling AdnllllIstratlOn Drawings: Show buIldmg floor plans with cable adrmnistration-pomt
labeling. IdentIfy labelmg convention and show labels for telecommunicatlOns closets,
backbone pathways and cables terminal hardware and pOSitIons, horizontal cables, work areas
and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment groundmg
conductors. Follow convention of TIAlEIA-606-A. Funush electronic record of all drawings,
in software and format selected by Owner.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field tests and inspectIOns according to TIAlEIA-568-B.2 and prepare test reports.
B. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
C. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with
specified requirements.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including
changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and
keeping records of cabling assIgnments and revisIOns when extendmg wiring to establish new
workstation outlets. Refer to DiVIsion 1 SectIon "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 16715
I
I
I
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Attachment B:
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works
Contracts, Clallam County
State of Washington
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
Prevalltng Wage Section - Telephone (360) 902-5335
PO Box 44540, Olympia. WA 98504-4540
Washmgton State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benelils.
On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief
description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key.
I
1
1
r '
I
, I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 03-03-07
***************************************************************************************************************~
1
1
Classification
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
BOILERMAKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP)
JOURNEY LEVEL
CARPENTERS
ACOUSTICALVVORKER
BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS
CARPENTER
CREOSOTED MATERIAL
DRYWALL APPLICATOR
FLOOR ANISHER
FLOOR LAYER
FLOOR SANDER
MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS
PILEDRIVERS, DRIVING, PULLING, PLACING COLLARS AND WELDING
SAWFILER
S!1INGLER
STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR
STATIONARY WOODWORKlNG TOOLS
CEMENT MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
DIVERS & TENDERS
DIVER
DIVER TENDER
DREDGE WORKERS
ASSISTANT ENGINEER
ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND)
BOATMEN
ENGINEER WELDER
LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC
MAINTENANCE
MATES
OILER
DRYWALL TAPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
ELECTRICIANS. INSIDE
CABLE SPLICER
CABLE SPLICER (TUNNEL)
CERTIFIED WELDER
CERTIFlED WELDER (TUNNEL)
CONSTRUCTION STOCK PERSON
JOURNEY LEVEL
JOURNEY LEVEL (TUNNEL)
ELECTRICIANS - POWERLlNE CONSTRUCTION
CABLE SPLICER
CERTIAEO LINE WELDER
GROUND PERSON
HEAD GROUND PERSON
I
I
I
1
I
1
1
, I
1
1
I
1
I
Page 1
:1
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note
~ ~ ~ Code
$34.36 1M 50
$47.47 1C 5N
$42.47 1M SA
$14.67
$41.43 1M 50
$41.33 1M 50
$41.33 1M 50
$41.37 1M 50
$41.31 1M 50
$41.40 1M 50
$41.40 1M 50
$41.40 1M 5D
$42.27 1M 5D
$41.47 1M 50
$41.40 1M 50
$41.40 1M 50
$41.40 1M 50
$41.40 1M 5D
$34.36 1M 5D
$85.75 1M 5D SA
$44.22 1M 50
$42.02 1T 5D 6L
$41.51 1T 50 8L
$42.02 lT 5D 8L
$42.07 1T 50 8L
$43.64 1T 50 8L
$41.51 1T 5D 8L
$42.02 1T 5D 8L
$41.64 1T 5D 8L
$41.14 1E 5P
$52.30 10 5A
$56.21 10 SA
$50.53 10 SA
$54.26 10 5A
$27.32 10 SA
$48.75 10 SA
$52.30 10 5A
$55.40 4A 5A
$49 64 4A 5A
$35.92 4A SA
$37.88 4A 5A
I
I
, , CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 03-03-07 I
************~*******************.**********************************************2*******************************.
(See Benefit Code Key)
: ' Over
PREVAILING lime Holiday Nole I
, I Classification WAGE Code Code Code
,
HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $49.64 4A SA I
JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $37.88 4A SA
JOURNEYLEVELUNEPERSON $49.64 4A SA
LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $42.26 4A SA
POLE SPRAYER $49.64 4A SA
POWOERPERSON $37.88 4A 5A I
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $12.07
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
MECHANIC $57.88 4A 50
MECHANIC IN CHARGE $63.45 4A 50 I
, ! FENCE ERECTORS
FENCE ERECTOR $13.80
FENCE LABORER $11.60
FLAGGERS I
JOURNEY LEVEL $29.68 1M 50
GlAZIERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $42.41 1H 5G
HEAT & FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS
MECHANIC $45.13 1S 5J I
HOO CARRIERS & MASON TENDERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $34.84 1M 50
INLAND BOATMEN
CAPTAIN $38.04 1K 5B
COOK $31.90 1K 56 I
DECKHAND $31.59 1K 5B
ENGINEERlDECKHANO $34.37 1K 5B
MATE, LAUNCH OPERATOR $36.02 1K 56
INSULATION APPUCATORS I
JOURNEY LEVEL $20.50
IRONWORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $46.25 10 5A
LABORERS
ASPHALT RAKER $34.84 1M 50 I
6ALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE $34.36 1M 5D
BATCH WEIGHMAN $29.68 1M 50
BAUSH CUTTER $34.36 1M 50
BRUSH HOG FEEDER $34.36 1M 5D I
BURNERS $34.36 1M 50
CARPENTER TENOER $34.36 1M 50
CASSrON WORKER $35.20 1M 50
CEMENTOUMPE~PA~NG $34 84 1M 50
CEMENT FINISHER TENDER $34.36 1M 50 I
CHANGE. HOUSE MAN OR DRY SHACKMAN $34.36 1M 60
CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS) $34.84 1M 50
CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS) $34.36 1M 50
CHOKER SETTER $34.36 1M 50 I
CHUCK TENOER $34.36 1M 50
CLEAN.UP LABORER $34.36 1M 5D
CONCRETEDUMPE~HUTEOPERATOR $34 84 1M 50
CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER $34.36 1M 5D
CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR $34.84 1M 5D I
CRUSHER FEEDER $29.68 1M 5D
CURING LABORER $34.36 1M 50
OEMOLmON, WRECKING & MOVING (INCLUDING CHARRED $34.36 1M 50
DITCH DIGGER $34.36 1M 50 I
DIVER $35.20 1M 50
DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND) $34.84 1M 50
DRILL OPERATOR. AIRTRAC $35.20 1M 50
Page 2 I
I
1
I
I
I CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 03-03-07
*****************************************************************************************************************
(See Benefit Code Key)
I Over
PREVAILING Tlma Holiday Note
Classification WAGE Code Coda Coda
1 DUMP MAN $34.36 1M 50
I EPOXY TECHNICIAN $34.36 1M 50
EROSION CONTROL WORKER $34.36 1M 50
FAlLERlBUCKER, CHAIN SAW $34.84 1M SO
FINAL DETAil CLEANUP (l.e.. dusting, vacuuming, window cleaning; NOT $27.36 1M 50
I construction debris cleanup)
FINE GRADERS $34.36 1M 50
FIRE WATCH $29.68 1M 50
FORM SETTER $34.36 1M 50
I GABION BASKET BUILDER $34.36 1M 50
GENERAL LABORER $34.36 1M 50
GRADE CHECKER & TRANSIT PERSON $34.84 1M 50
GRINDERS $34.36 1M 50
GROUT MACHINE TENDER $34.36 1M 50
I GUARDRAIL ERECTOR $34.36 1M 50
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A $35.20 1M 5D
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B $34.84 1M 50
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C $34.36 1M 50
I HIGH SCALER $35.20 1M 50
I HOD CARRIERlMORTARMAN $34.84 1M 50
JACKHAMMER $34.84 1M 50
LASER BEAM OPERATOR $34.84 1M 50
MANHOLE BUILDER-MUOMAN $34.84 1M 50
I MATERIAL YARDMAN $34.36 1M 50
MINER $35.20 1M SO
NOZZlEMAN. CONCRETE PUMP, GREEN CUrrER WHEN USING HIGH $34.84 1M 50
PRESSURE AIR & WATER ON CONCRETE & ROCK, SANDBLAST,
I GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER
PAVEMENT BREAKER $34.84 1M 50
PILOT CAR $29.68 1M 50
PIPE POT TENDER $34.84 1M 50
PIPE RELlNER (NOT INSERT TYPE) $34.84 1M 50
I PIPElAYER & CAULKER $34.84 1M 50
PIPELAYER & CAULKER (LEAD) $35.20 1M 50
PIPEWRAPPER $34.84 1M SO
POT TENDER $34.36 1M 50
I POWDERMAN $35.20 1M 5D
POWDERMAN HELPER $34.36 1M 50
POWERJACKS $34.84 1M 5D
RAILROAD SPIKE PUUER (POWER) $34.84 1M 50
RE-TIMBERMAN $35.20 1M 50
I RIPRAP MAN $34.36 1M 50
RODDER $34.84 1M 5D
SCAFFOLD ERECTOR $34.36 1M 50
SCALE PERSON $34.36 1M 50
I SIGNAlMAN $34.36 1M 50
SLOPER (OVER 20') $34.84 1M 5D
SLOPER SPRAY MAN $34.36 1M 50
SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) $34.84 1M 50
SPREADER (CONCRETE) $34.84 1M 50
I STAKE HOPPER $34.36 1M 50
STOCKPILER $34.36 1M 50
TAMPER & SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR & GAS $34.84 1M 50
TAMPER (MULTIPLE & SELF PROPELLED) $34.84 1M 50
I TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE) $34.36 1M 50
TOPPER-TAILER $34.36 1M 50
TRACK LA80RER $34.36 1M 50
TRACK UNER (POWER) $34.84 1M 5D
I Page 3
I
I
I
CLALLAM COUNTY I
Effective 03-03-07
*****************************************************************************************************************
I : (See Benefit Code Key)
I Over I
I PREVAILING TIme Holiday Note
I
Classification WAGE ~ Code ~
TRUCK SPOTTER $34.36 1M 50 I
TUGGER OPERATOR $34.84 1M 50
VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC) $34.36 1M 50
VIBRATOR $34.84 1M 50
VINYL SEAMER $34.36 1M 50
WELDER $34.36 1M 50 I
well.-POINT LABORER $34.84 1M 50
LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION
IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKlER INSTALLERS $11.42
LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS $7.93 I
LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $7.93
LATHERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $41.31 1M 50
I \ PAINTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $33.16 2B 5A I
I PlASTERERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $25.83 1
PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $55.34 1G 5A
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS I
I I ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $39.57 1M 50 aL
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YO & UNDER) $42.35 1M 50 aL
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YO & UNDER 6 YO) $42.84 1M 50 aL
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YO AND OVER WITH $43.39 1M 50 aL I
BACKHOES. (75 HP & UNDER) $41.93 1M 50 aL
BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) $42.35 1M 50 aL
BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER) $42.35 1M 50 aL
BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE $42.35 1M 50 aL
BELT LOAOERS (ELEVATING TYPE) $41.93 1M 50 aL I
BOBCAT (SKIO STEER) $39.57 1M 50 8L
BROOMS $39.57 1M 50 BL
BUMP CUTTER $42.35 1M 50 8L
CABLEWAYS $42.84 1M 50 6L I
CHIPPER $42.35 1M 50 aL
COMPRESSORS $39.57 1M 50 8L
CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE - LASER SCREED $39.57 1M 50 8L
CONCRETE PUMPS $41.93 1M 5D 8L
CONCRETE PUMP-TRUCK MOUNT WITH 800M ATTACHMENT $42.35 1M 50 8L I
CONVEYORS $41.93 1M 5D aL
CRANES, THRU 19 TONS. WITH ATTACHMENTS $41.93 1M 50 aL
CRANES, 20-44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $42.35 1M 50 8L
CRANES. 45 TONS - 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF 800M (INCLUDING $42.84 1M 50 8L I
JIB WITH ATACHMENTS)
CRANES, 100 TONS - 199 TONS, OR 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $43.39 1M 50 8L
WITH ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $43.96 1M 50 6l
WITH ATTACHMENTS) I
CRANES. A-FRAME. 10 TON AND UNDER $39.57 1M 5D aL
CRANES, A-FRAME, OVER 10 TON $41.93 1M 50 aL
CRANES, OVER 300 TONS, OR 300' OF BOOM INCLUDING JIB WITH $44.52 1M 5D 6L
ATTACHMENTS
CRANES. OVERHEAD. BRIDGE TYPE (20 .44 TONS) $42.35 1M 5D 8L I
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE ( 45 - 99 TONS) $42.84 1M 5D aL
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BR1DGE TYPE (100 TONS & OVER) $43.39 1M 5D aL
CRANES, TOWER CRANE UP TO 175'IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $43.39 1M 5D aL
CRANES. TOWER CRANE OVER 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO 800M $43.96 1M 50 aL I
CRUSHERS $42.35 1M 50 8L
DECK ENGINEER/OECKWINCHES (POWER) $42.35 1M 5D 8L
DERRICK, BUILDING $42.84 1M 50 8L
Page 4 I
I
! :
I
II
f I
:1 CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 03-03-07
************~*********~*************.****************************************************************************
I I (See Benefit Code Key)
'I Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Nole
Classification WAGE Code Code Code
I DOZERS. D-9 & UNDER $41.93 1M 50 8L
DRILL OILERS - AUGER TYPE. TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $41.93 1M 50 8L
DRILUNG MACHINE $42.35 1M 50 8L
ELEVATOR AND MANUFT. PERMANENT AND SHAFT-TYPE $39.57 1M 50 8L
I EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $41.93 1M 50 8L
FINISHING MACHINElBIDWELL GAMACO AND SIMILAR EQUIP $42.35 1M 50 8L
FORK UFTS. (3000 LBS AND OVER) $41.93 1M 50 BL
FORK UFTS. (UNDER 3000 LBS) $39.57 1M 50 8L
GRADE ENGINEER $41.93 1M 50 8L
I GRADECHECKERANDSTAKEMAN $39.57 1M 50 8L
GUARDRAIL PUNCH $42.35 1M 50 8L
HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND MANLIFTS), AlR TUGGERS $41.93 1M 50 8L
HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $41.93 1M 50 8L
, HORIZONTAUDIRECTJONAL DRILL OPERATOR $42.35 1M 50 8L
I HYDRALIFTSlBOOM TRUCKS (10 TON & UNDER) $39.57 1M 50 8L
HYDRALlFTSIBOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON) $41.93 1M 50 8L
LOADERS, OVERHEAO (6 YO UP TO 8 YO) $42.84 1M 50 aL
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YD & OVER) $43.39 1M 50 aL
I LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YO). PLANT FEED $42.35 1M 50 aL
LOCOMOTIVES, ALL $42.35 1M 50 aL
MECHANICS, ALL $42.84 1M 50 al
MIXERS, ASPHALT PLANT $42.35 1M 50 aL
, MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) $42.35 1M 50 aL
I MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON-FINISHING) $41.93 1M 50 aL
MUCKING MACHINE. MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL AND/OR SHIELD $42.84 1M 5D 8L
OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH SEEDING $39.57 1M 5D 8L
, OPERATOR
I PAVEMENT BREAKER $39.57 1M 50 BL
PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $42.35 1M 50 8L
PLANT OILER (ASPHALT, CRUSHER) $41.93 1M 50 BL
POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $39.57 1M 50 8L
I POWER PLANT $39.57 1M 50 8L
PUMPS. WATER $39.57 1M 5D BL
QUAD 9, 0.10. AND HD-41 $42.84 1M 50 aL
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER TIRED EARTH MOVING $42.84 1M 50 8L
EQUIP
I RIGGER AND BELLMAN $39.57 1M 50 8L
ROLLAGON $42.84 1M 50 8L
ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $39.57 1M 5D 8L
ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MUl TllIFT MATERIALS $41.93 1M 50 8L
I ROTO-MILL, ROT()..GRINDER $42.35 1M 50 8L
SAWS, CONCRETE $41.93 1M 50 Bl
SCRAPERS. SELF PROPELLED. HARD TAil END DUMP, ARTICULATING $42.35 1M 50 BL
OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT ( UNDER 45 YO)
SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING $42.84 1M 50 8l
I OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT (45 YO AND OVER)
SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $41.93 1M 5D 8L
SCREED MAN $42.35 1M 50 Bl
SHOTCRETE GUNITE $39.57 1M 50 8L
SUPFORM PAVERS $42.84 1M 50 8L
I SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR - BLAW KNOX $42.35 1M 50 BL
SUBGRADE TRIMMER $42.35 1M 5D BL
TOWER BUCKET ELEVATORS .$41.93 1M 50 8L
TRACTORS. (75 HP & UNDER) $41.93 1M 50 8L
I TRACTORS. (OVER 75 HP) $42.35 1M 50 BL
TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE $42.35 1M 50 aL
TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $42.84 1M 5D 8L
TRENCHING MACHINES $41.93 1M 5D 8L
I Page 5
I
I
I
CLALLAM COUNTY I
Effective 03-03-07
***************************************w*************************************************************************
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over I
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note
Classification WAGE Code Code ~
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER ( UNDER 100 TON) $41.93 1M 5D 8L I
TRUCK CRANE OILERIORIVER (100 TON & OVER) $42.35 1M 50 8L
TRUCK MOUNT PORTABLE CONVEYER $42.35 1M 50 8L
WHEELTRACTORS.FARMALLTYPE $39.57 1M 50 8L
YO YO PAY DOZER $42.35 1M 50 8L
POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS I
JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $35.62 4A SA
SPRAY PERSON $33.82 4A SA
TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $34.27 4A SA
i. TREE TRIMMER $31.88 4A SA I
TREE TRIMMER GROUND PERSON $24.03 4A SA
REFRIGERA nON & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS
MECHANIC $27.68
ROOFERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $35.78 lR SA I
USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $38.78 1R 5A
SHEET METAL WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $49.97 lE 6L
SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $33.76 16 SA I
SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS
JOURNEY LEVEL $10.31 16 50
SPRINKlER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION)
JOURNEY LEVEL $19.67 I
SURVEYORS
CHAIN PERSON $9.35
INSTRUMENT PERSON $11.40
PARTY CHIEF $13.40
TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS I
TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $31.15 1D SA
TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION - OUTSIDE
CABLE SPLICER $29.89 28 SA
HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $16.81 28 5A
INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $28.68 28 SA I
JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE UNEPERSON $27.82 28 SA
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER I $29.89 28 5A
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $29.30 28 SA
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $29.89 28 5A I
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (UGHT) $27.82 28 SA
TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $15.96 28 SA
TELEVISION LINEPERSON/lNST ALLER $21.17 28 5A
TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $25.15 28 SA I
TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $22.64 2B SA
TREE TRIMMER $27 82 2B SA
TERRAZZO WORKERS & TILE SETTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $40.33 18 5A
TILE. MARBLE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS I
FINISHER $3416 16 5A
TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $34.90 1K 5A
TRUCK DRIVERS
ASPHALT MIX (TO 16 YARDS) $39.04 1T 50 8L I
ASPHALT MIX (OVER 16 YARDS) $39 62 1T 5D 8L
DUMP TRUCK $20.23 1
DUMP TRUCK & TRAILER $20.23 1
OTHER TRUCKS $39.62 1T 5D 8L I
TRANSIT MIXER $23.73 1
WELL DRILLERS & IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS
IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER $11.60
Page 6 I
I
'I
:1
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
EHective 03-03-07
****************************************~***********~************~***********************************************
Classification
PREVAILING
WAGE
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
Time
Code
Note
~
!I
II
OILER
WELL DRILLER
$9.45
$11.60
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page 7
1
Holiday
Code
I ,
I
.*.......**.***********.*****.*.*******...**..**.***...**.......***...**.*****.................*........***...**........
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03-3-07
I
1.
OVERTIME CODES
OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE AcruALL Y PAID TO THE WORKER. ON PUBLIC
WORKS PROJECTS, THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE MINUS THE
HOURLY RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER.
I
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE
AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
A. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF
TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE
B.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHAll BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE.
I
C.
THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN
(10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. All
OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE
THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS BEFORE OR AFTER A FIVE - EIGHT (8) HOUR WORKWEEK DAY OR A FOUR - TEN (10)
HOUR WORKWEEK DAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED THE NEXT DAY AFTER EITHER WORKWEEK
SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE.HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL ADDITIONAL HOURS WORKED
AND ALL WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
I
D.
E.
THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT
(8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES TIlE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
OTHER HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND
HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
F.
THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY nmOUGH FRIDAY AND TIlE FlRST TEN
(10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE.HALF TIMES TIlE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED, EXCEPT LABOR DAY, SHAll BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH
CALENDAR WEEKDAY IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE. SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH
SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE.
I
I
G.
I
H.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SA TURDA YS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY OVER TWELVE (12) HOURS AND ALL HOURS
WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
J.
THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR I.IOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN
(l0) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED OVER TEN (IO) HOURS MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE
PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
K.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SA TURDA YS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TlMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
1.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SA TURDA Y AND ALL HOURS
WORKED ON SUNDA YS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE
I
M.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED
ON SUNDAYS At'lD HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
N.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
O.
THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA Y SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS, HOLIDAYS AND AFTER TWELVE (12) HOURS, MONDAY
THROUGH FRlDA Y, AND AFTER TEN (to) HOURS ON SA TURDA Y SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE.
I
P.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF CIRCUMSTANCES WARRANT) AND SUNDAYS
SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS
SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE
I
I
Ii
Ii
I'
I
I
I
I
I
It
I:
I~
I
I
I
I
'I
1
I
1
2.
4A.
S. A.
B.~
C.
D.
E.
P.
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03-03-07
-3-
I.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-
HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE
PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
1.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS
WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
INCLUDING THE HOLlDA Y PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNP AlD HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO
THE HOLIDAY PAY.
K.
M.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE.
O. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE.
P. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SA TURDA Y SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT 8) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON
SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAlO AT
DOUBLE
TIffi HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS. SUNDAYS AND HOUDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT
DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
HOLmA Y CODES
HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORlALDAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY. FRIDAY
AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY. FRIDAY
AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY.
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, THE
FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, PRESIDENTIAL
ELECI"ION DAY. THANKSGIVING DA Y. THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
ROLIDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY.
INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y, VETERANS' DAY, THANKSGNING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFrER THANKSGIVING
DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (11).
G. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE
LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7)
H. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, TIlANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER
THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS (6)
1. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND
CHRISTMAS DAY (6).
1. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER
llIANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DA Y, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
N. HOLIDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DA Y,PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL PAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS'
DA Y, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
P. "OLIDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY
AND SA TURDA Y Ar~rER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
Q PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6).
R. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEARS DAY, MEMORIAl. DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY
AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, ONE-HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7 112).
8.
: I
! I
I i
, I
I ,
I I
I
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECflVE 03-03-07
-5-
I
NOTE CODES
A.
THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DNERS SHALL BE ONE-HALF TIMES THE DNERS RATE OF PAY. IN ADDITION TO
THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET
OR MORE:
OVER 50' TO 100' - $1 00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET
OVER 100' TO 175' - $2 25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET
OVER 175' TO 250' - $5 50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET
OVER 250' - DNERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE, PROVIDED IT IS NO LESS THAN THE SCALE LISTED
FOR 250 FEET
I
I
I
C.
THE STANDBY RATE OF FAY FOR DNERS SHALL BE ONE.HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY. IN ADDmON TO
THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRlNGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET
OR MORE:
OVER 50'TO 100'-$1.00PERFOOTFOREACHFOOTOVER 50 FEET
OVER 100' TO 150' . $1.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET
OVER 150' TO 200' - $2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET
OVER 200' - DNERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE
I
I
WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMA T PROJECTS RECENE AN ADDITIONAL $1.00 PER. HOUR.
WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDmONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - LEVEL A: $0.75,
LEVEL B: $0.50, AND LEVEL C: $0.25.
M. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECENE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS: LEVELS A & B: S1.00,
LEVELS C & D: SO.50.
D.
L.
I
I
N.
WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDmONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - LEVEL A: S1.00,
LEVEL B: $0.75, LEVEL C: $0.50, AND LEVEL D: $0.25.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Attachment C:
Request for Information and Construction Change Order
Forms
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) FORM
PROJECT NAME: PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT/CONTRACT NUMBER: 06.11
ORIGINATOR: 0 Owner 0 Contractor
ITEM:
REFERENCE DRAWING OR SPECIFICATION:
DESCRIPTION OF CLARIFICATION/REQUEST:
DATE REPLY REQUESTED:
CRITICAL TO SCHEDULE: 0 YES 0 NO
ORIGINATOR SIGNATURE:
DATE:
COMMENTS:
RFI Number:
I
I
CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER (CCO) NO.
I
Project Name PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
I
Date
Contractor
Project No. 06-11
I
I
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
You are ordered to perform the following described work upon receipt of an approved copy of this Change
Order:
I
1. Describe work here
2. Additional work, etc....
I
Such work will be compensated by: check one or more of the following as applicable [ ] Increase or [
Decrease in bid items; [ ] Force Account; [ ] Negotiated Price: The described work affects the existing
contract items and/or adds and/or deletes bid items as foHows:
I
Qty.
Unit
$ Cost Per Unit $ Cost
Item Description
No.
RFI#
I
2
I
Rev.
I
ORIGINAL CURRENT EST. NET CHANGE TOTAL CHANGE ORDE;RS, EST. CONTRACT AFTER
CONTRACT CONTRACT THIS CHANGE ORDER INCLUDING THIS ONE THIS CHANGE ORDER
. . . . .
DAYS: XX DAYS YY DAYS. ZZ DAYS: XX+ZZ-YV DAYS' VY+ZZ
I
I
* Amount with applicable sales tax included
I
All work, matenals and measurements to be in accordance with the provisions of the anginal contract and/or the standard specifications
and speaal prOVIsIons for the type of construction involved. The payments and/or additional lime speCified and agreed to in this order
include every claim by the Contractor for any extra payment or extension of tIme with respect 10 the work described herein. Including
delays to the overall project
!f~~t~~~ ~~;M~~~~j;~~~~~sj".
- -" . ~- -
~i;~ ~-:i":~ "':,=..;:
- .~ ~...:-;;--~";:.
I
PROJECT ENGINEER
CITY ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DIRECTOR
CITY MANAGER
CITY COUNCIL APPROVAL DATE:
....,-;..;:'.:;; ._-.:.-;: -~--",,---
2. ~::~~~:;;':-=~.:
~~~. _...."':'".'".-_.;::_ h":
-,. '-- ----, -:. --:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Attachment 0: Contractor's Application for Payment Form
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION, PROJECT NO. 06-
. 11
TO: City of Port Angeles DATE:
Public Works & Utilities Department
P.O. Box 1150
Port Angeles, W A 98362
FROM: PAYMENT REQUEST NO.
PERIOD From: to [end of period]:
Page 1 of 2
STATEMENT OF CONTRACT ACCOUNT
1 Original Contract Amount [Excluding Sales Tax] $
2 Approved Change Order No(s). [Excluding Sales Tax] $
3 Adjusted Contract Amount (1 +2) $
4 Value of Work Completed to Date [per attached breakdown] $
5 Matenal Stored on Site [per attached breakdown] $
6 Subtotal (4+5) $
7 8.3% Sales Tax [at 8.3% of subtotal], As Applicable $
8 Less Amount Retained [at 5% of subtotal] $
9 Subtotal (6+7-8) $
10 Total Previously Paid [Deduction] $
11 AMOUNT DUE THIS REQUEST (9-10) $
WAIVER OF CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST OR TIME: The undersigned Applicant waives
and releases, up through the date hereof, any and all claims for costs or item extensions
arising out of or relating to extra or changed work or delays or acceleration not specifically
identified and reserved in the amounts identified below or previously acknowledged in
writing by the City of Port Angeles.
CERTIFICATE OF THE CONTRACTOR: I hereby certify that the work performed and the
materials supplied through the ending period date noted above represent the actual value
of accomplishment under the terms of the contract (and all authorized changes) between
the Applicant and the City of Port Angeles, relating to the above referenced project, and
that the remaining contract balance is sufficient to cover all costs of completing the work in
accordance with the contract documents.
Continued on Page 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Page 2 of 2
I also certify that all/ower-tier payments, less applicable retention, have been made by the
Applicant for the periods covered by previous payment(s) received by the Applicant to (1) all lower-
tier subcontractors/ suppliers, and (2) for all materials, equipment and labor used or in connection
with the performance of this contract. I further certify that I have complied with all federal, state
and local tax laws, including Social Security laws and Unemployment Compensation laws and
Workmen's Compensation laws, insofar as applicable to the performance of this work, and have
paid all such taxes, premiums and/or assessments arising out of the performance of the work.
I further certify that, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, all work for which previous
payment(s) have been received shall be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests and
encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the
worle
Within seven (7) days of receipt of the payment requested herein, all payments, less applicable
retention, will be made through the period covered by this pay request to all my lower-tier
subcontractors/suppliers and for all materials, equipment, labor, taxes and assessments arising out
of the performance of all said lower-tire work.
DATED:
CONTRACTOR:
SIGNATURE:
PRINTED NAME AND TITLE:
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this
day of
,20_"
Notary Public in and for the State of
residing at
My appointment expires
APPROVAL:
Project Manager
Date
City Engineer
Date
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Attachment E: Permits
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BUILDING PERMIT - APPLICATION
Fill out COM:PLETEL Y and in INK. Your application and site plan MUST B (
COMPLETE to be accepted for review. If you have any questions, call
PERMITS (360) 417-4815 FAX(360)417-4711
5E$tJ/Z ed-7hE7Z /p-Z/p/7/o I'll'
Applicant or Agent: tu/l.U/71J12 ;9, S7E!Zu M~
Owner: Of r)" " 1= 17 ~pr ;iJN~CltF5
Address: ? 0 J30 X- j / SlJ City: .ft;ur /IN'~/fZt:5/ uN?
Architect/Engineer: /./ N/)~~ t/ .9n f 7'fI
Contractor /11/ N State LIcense #:
Address: J /9 S, J1't:/?-$~ Y' City: PtJn--r /?# .Et.ES
.JZ$ ~.. 771t5~
'117- L/ss /
Phone: tj /7.fsS'tJ
Zip: 983~Z
Phone: ~5Z- ~//~
Phone:
Phone:
Exp:
tvl4
Zip: 'l$3~ z.
ZONING:
PROJECT ADDRESS:
LEGAL DESCRIPTION: Lot:
CLALLAM COUNTY PARCEL NUMJ3ER.:
Subdivision:
Block:
TYPE OF WORK: SIZEN ALUATION:
o Residential 0 New Constr. 0 Re-roof 0 Stove SF. @ $ ISF. = $
o Multi-family ~ Addition 0 Move 0 Garage SF. @ $ ISF. == $
Jt Commercial J(Remodel 0 Demolition 0 Deck SF. @ $ ISF. == $
o Repair 0 Sign 0 Other TOTAL VALUATION $ 400,,000
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT: "//11t) 5rOP-Y J'f]J.Z)J7/t>N (/7}J25.J!:.) /?N~ 7ZL/J?&JPEL t?r H
P"7Z/'/OIl.l 0;: #- Z.I/P ,cLotJlZ- ~1ST/N6 72E~ ~A7 /0 1'9 F1'JmJl.~ 7Zf.d'$~,(J/Y1.
COMMERCIALIRESIDENTIAL: Occupancy Group: /} ~3 Occupant Load: Construction Type: V~~
No. of.Stories: ~ Lot Size: $3, L/7:3 5,f. Existing Sq. Ft /l),/tJQ & Proposed Sq. Ft 985 = TOTAL Sq. Ft. l!;lJ8{:
Totallot coverage 7-j %
APPROV AL8:
PLAN:
BLDG:
DPWU:
FIRE:
OTHER:_
PLANNING USE ONLY:
ESAlWetland(s): 0 Yes 0 No SEPA Checlclist reqUITed? 0 Yes 0 No Other
VALUATION OF CONSTRUCTION: In all cases, a valuation amount must be entered by the applicant
This figure will be reviewed and may be revised by the Building Division to comply with current fee schedules. Contact the Perrmt
Coordinator at 417-4815 for assistance.
PLAN CHECK FEE: IF a plan checlc fee is due it must be submitted at the time the buildmg permit appIicatlOll and COllStructlOll plans are
submitted. All other pernJlt fees are due at the time of permit issuance.
EXPIRATION OF PLAN REVIEW: Ifno permit is issued within 180 days of the date of application, the application will expire. The
Building Official can extend ihe time for action by the applicant up to 180 days upon written request by the applicant (see Section
RI05.3.2 of the International BuildingIResidential Code, 2003). No application can be extended more than once.
I hereby certffythat J have read and examined this application and know the same to be true and correct. J am authorized to
apply for thiS permt and understand that it/s my responsibility to determine what permits are required ,not the City's, and that I
must obtain such permits prior to work. J / J
T:\FORMS\BldgPemUtfurm.wpdApplicant: !fiLA ~ of Date: J/B/01
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PORT ANGELES FIRE DEPARTMENT
PLAN REVIEW
Project Name: Senior Center Addition and Remodel
Address: 328 East ill Street
Plan # 07-07 I Com ~ Residential 0 I Date:3.13.2007
We have checked this plan and find that it conforms to the requirements of our codes and
ordinances.
!) Separate fire alarm plans are required for review.
2) Separate fire sprinkler plans are required for review.
NOTE:
Prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy, compliance with the above
conditions must be met.
Reviewed by: 'fO~O
o Building Department Copy
IltI Contractor! Owner Copy
D Fire Department Copy
Date: 3.11.07
I
I
<1"'Rr~
~
'l.il,,~
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT - BUILDING DIVISION
321 EAST 5TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, W A 98362
Separate Permits are required for electrical work, SEPA, Shoreline, ESA, utilities, private and public improvements. This permit becomes
null and void if work or construction authorized is not commenced within 180 days, if construction or work is suspended or abandoned
for a period of 180 days after the work as commenced. or if required inspections have not been requested within 180 days from the last
inspection. I hereby certify that I have read and examined this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of
laws and ordinances governing ,this type of work will be complied with whether specified herein or not. The granting of a permit does not
presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any state or local law regulating construction or the performance of
construction.
I
07-00000243 Date
206945
328 E 7TH ST
06-30-00-0-2-2900-0000-
SENIOR CENTER
COMM ADDITION
4/03/07
Application Number
Application pin number
Property Address
ASSESSOR PARCEL NUMBER:
Tenant nbr, name
Application type description
Subdivision Name
Property Use
property Zoning . . .
Application valuation
I
PUBLIC BUILDINGS & PARKS
400000
I
Contractor
owner
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
PO BOX 1150
PORT ANGELES WA 983620217
OWNER
other struct info .
HARD SURFACE AREA
NUMBER OF STORIES
EXISTING LOT COVERAGE
TOTAL LOT COVERAGE
NUMBER OF UNITS
ASPHALT
2.00
10914.00
10914.00
1.00
I
I
BUILDING PERMIT - COMMERCIAL
985 SF ADDITION
96891
2700.25 Plan Check Fee
4/03/07 Valuation
9/30/07
Permit . . . . .
Additional desc .
Permit pin number
Permit Fee
Issue nate
Expiration Date
1755.16
400000
I
Qty Unit Charge Per
Extension
1020.25
1680.00
I
BASE FEE
300.00 5.6000 THOU BL-IOO,001-500K (5.60 PER K)
MECHANICAL PERMIT
Permit . . . . .
Additional desc .
Permit pin number
Permit Fee
Issue Date
Expiration Date
98145
64.sb Plan Check Fee
4/03/07 Valuation
9/30/07
.00
o
I
Qty Unit Charge Per
Extension
50.00
14.50
I
BASE FEE
2.00 7.2500 ECH ME-VENT FAN
I
Permit . . . . .
Additional desc .
Permit pin number
permi t Fee
Issue Date
Expiration Date
.00
o
PLUMBING PERMIT
98152
86.00
4/03/07
9/30/07
plan Check Fee
valuation
I
Qty lJnit Charge Per
BASE FEE
2.00 7.0000 ECH PL- EA. FIXTURE ON ONE TRAP
1.00 7 0000 ECH PL- EA. INSTALL WATER PIPE
1.00 15.0000 ECH PL- EA. BLDG SEWER
Extension
50.00
14 .00
7.00
15.00
I
Special Notes and Comments
. . .
I
I
I
Date
Signature of Contractor or Authorized Agent
T:IPolicie.\II02 _15 bU11ding penmt inspcchon record05 wpd [11412005]
I
~/.J.h
D te
I
S
"Iit,,~
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT - BUILDING DIVISION
321 EAST 5TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, W A 98362
I
I
Application Number . . . . . 07-00000243
Application pin number 206945
Page 2
Date 4/03/07
I
I
Special Notes and Comments
plans for review.
Owner is responsible for ongoing fire alarm system
inspection and maintenance per the current add~t~on of NFPA
72.
owner is responsible for ongoing fire sprinkler system
inspection and testing per the current addition of NFPA 25.
This project will require seperate permit and fire
sprinkler plans for review.
Electrical load calculations and elctrical permits are
required.
Any modifications to the City'S electrical facilities will
be at the customer's expense.
public Works Utility Engineering has no requirements for
this plan review.
I
I
Other Fees
STATE SURCHARGE
4.50
I
Fee swmnary Charged Paid Credited Due
----------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
perroit Pee Total 2850.75 2850.75 .00 .00
Plan Check Total 1755.16 1755.16 .00 .00
Other Fee Total 4.50 4.50 .00 .00
Grand Total 4610.41 4610.41 .00 .00
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
Separate Permits are required for electrical work, SEPA, Shoreline, ESA, utilities, private and public improvements. This permit becomes
null and void if work or construction authorized is not commenced within 180 days, if construction or work is suspended or abandoned
for a period of 180 days after the work as commenced, or if required inspections have not been requested within 180 days from the last
Inspection. I hereby certify that I have read and examined this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of
laws and ordinances governing this type of work will be complied with whether specified herein or not. The granting of a permit does not
presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any state or local law regulating construction or the performance of
construction.
I
1
I
Signature of Owner (if owner is builder)
Date
Signature of Contractor or Authorized Agent
Date
T \Policies\ 1102_15 building permit mspcclion record05 wpd [1/4120Q5J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BUILDING PERMIT INSPECTION RECORD
CALL 417-48]5 FOR BUILDING INSPECTIONS CALL 417-4735 FOR ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS
CALL 417-4807 FOR PUBLlC WORKS UTILITIES
PLEASE PROVIDE A MINIMUM 24 HOUR NOTICE IT IS UNLA WFUL TO COVER, INSULATE OR CONCEAL ANY Jl"ORK BEFORE
INSPECTED AN]) ACCEPTED. POST PERMIT IN A CONSPICUOUS LOCA TJON
KEEP PERMlT CARD AND APPROVED PLANS AT JOB SITE
INSI'ECTION TYPE DATE ACCEI'TED COMMENTS
YE& NO
FOUNDATION
FOOTINGS
SHEAR WALLS / WALLS
FOUNDA TION DRAINAGE / DOWN SI'OUTS
PIERS
POST HOLES (POLE BLDGS )
PLUMIlING
UNDER FLOOR / SLAB
ROUGH-IN
WATER LINE (METER TO BLDGl
GAS LINE FINAL DATE ACCEPTED BY
BACK FLOW / WATER
AIR SEAL
WALLS
CEILING
FRAMING
JOISTS / GIRDERS
SHEAR W ALlJHOLD DOWNS
WALLS / ROOF / CElLING
DRYWALL (INTERJORBRACED PANEL ONLY) I
T-BAR
INSULATION .
I
SLAB I
WALL I FLOOR / CEILING I
MECHANICAL
ROUGH-IN I
fffiATPUMY/FURNACE/DUCTS
GAS LINE FINAL DATE ACCEPTED BY
WOOD STOVE / PELLET / CHlMNEY
MANUFACTURED HOMES
FOOTING / SLAB
BLOCKlNG & HOLD DOWNS
SKlRTING
PLANNING DEPT SEPARATE PERMIT #'s SEPA.
PARKING/LIGHTING ESA.
LANDSCAPING SHORELINE
FINAL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY/USE
RESIDENTIAL DATE YES NO COMMERCIAL DATE ACCEPTED
YES NO
ELECTR.ICAL - LIGHT DEPT 417-4735 ELECTJUCAL
LIGHT DEPT
CONSTRUCTJON R W /PW/ CONSTRUCTION - R W
ENGINEEJUNG 417-4807 PW I ENGINEEJUNG
fIRE 417-4653 FlRE DEPT
PLANNING DEPT 417-4750 PLANNING DEPT
BUILDn,G 417-4815 BUILDING
. _ _ ____...If'lC' ....~,.I r I JA''1('('l':::l
. </.S~S
Original 1
PROJECT MANUAL
for
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER ADDITION
PROJECT NO. 06-11
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
WASHINGTON
JUNE 2007
GLENN A. CUTLER, P.E., DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES
STEPHEN SPERR, P.E., DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES
For Information regarding this project, contact:
William Sterling, City of Port Angeles
360-417-4551
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Attachment F: Project Plans
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES AND COMMUNITY CENTER
BUILDING ADDITION & REMODEL
328 E. 7th STREET, PORT ANGELES
GENERAL NOTES
J) ALL WORK SI-!ALL COMPLY WITI-! APPLICA6LE CODES AND ORDINANCES.
2) veRIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS ON TI-!E J06 6EFORe
PROCEEDING WITI-! TI-!E WORK DISCRePANCIES, IF ANY, ARe TO 6E
ReFERReD TO TI-!E ARCI-!ITeCT FeR SETTLEMENT.
3) DRAWINGS ARe PARrlALL Y DIAGRAMTIC AND DO NOT NECESSARILY
SI-!OW ALL CONDITIONS, MATERIALS, OR METI-!ODS OF CONSTRUCTION.
TI-!E CONTRACTOR SI-!ALL AOCERT AIN TI-!E FULL SCOPE OF TI-IE WORK
AND 6RING ALL COMPONENTS TOOETI-!ER A& A COMPLETeD PROJECT.
4) ALL FiRe WALLS AND SMOKe PARTITIONS ARe TO 6E CONTINUOUS FROM
FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF SEPARATION Aeove.
S) ALL ReCESSED ELECTRICAL PANELS, FiRe EXTINGUISI-!ER CA6INETS, AND
ALL OTI-IER ReCESSED EQUIPMENT OR CA61NETS SI-IALL 6E 6ACKED WITI-I
GYPSUM WALLeoARD OR 6ACK PLASTEReD TO MAINTAIN TI-IE FiRe-
ReSISTive RATING OF TI-!E PARTITION WI-!ICI-I TI-IE UNIT IS INSTALLED.
6) TI-!E CONTRACTOR SI-!ALL CONSULT PLANS OF ALL TRADES FeR ALL
OPENINGS TI-lROUGI-! NEW OR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION FOR DUCTS, PIPES,
CONDUITS, CA6INETS, EQUIPMENT, AND SI-IALL VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION.
1) PROVIDE CLOSURe, MEETING TI-IE ReQUiReMENTS OF TI-!E GOveRNING FiRe
AUTI-!ORITIES, 6ETWEEN ALL FiRe-RATED SUILDING PARTITONS AND lOR
PENETRATING DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUIT, MECI-!ANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND
OTI-!ER EQUIPMENT.
5) PACK NONCOMSUSTI6LE MINERAL WOOL AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS,
OR OTI-!ER EQUIPMENT PENETRATING TI-!ROUGI-! NON-FiRe RATED PARTITIONS.
~) TI-!E CONTRACTOR, AND EACI-! SU6CONTRACTOR, SI-!ALL veRIFY ALL ROUGI-!-
IN DIMENSIONS FeR EQUIPMENT FURNISI-!ED AND INSTALLED 6'1' I-IIMSELF
OR OTI-!ERS.
10) TI-!E CONTRACTOR SI-!ALL SUILD IN ALL ROUGI-! 6UC1<.5 FOR GRILLES,
ReGISTERS, ETC.
II) ALL CONTRACTOR FURNISI-!ED ITEMS SI-!ALL 6E SUPPLIED WITI-I ReQUiReD
MECI-!ANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO PROVIDE PROPER OPERATION
OF ITEMS FURNISI-!ED.
12) ALL PIPING, CONDUIT, DUCTS, ETC., SI-!ALL 6E FURReD-IN, IN ALL FINISI-!ED
ROOMS.
13 ALL WOOD IN CONTACT WITI-! CONCReTE OR MASONRY SI-!ALL I-!Ave A
PReSERVATive TReATMENT.
14) ALL WOOD STUD PARTITIONS SI-!ALL 6E CONSTRUCTED WITI-! 2x4 OR 2xi&
FOR ~.LL WALLS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OR DIMENSIONED
OTI-!ERWISE. STUDS OF EXTRA DEPTI-! OR STUD FURRING SI-!ALL 6E USED,
Wl-!ERe NECESSARY, TO CONCEAL MECI-!ANICAL OR ELECTRICAL WORK
IS) Wl-!ERe NEW WORK IS INDICATED OR ReQUiReD IN EXISTING AReAS, TI-!E
MATeRIAL AND FINISI-I OF TI-IE NEW WORK SI-IALL MATCI-! TI-!AT OF
ADJACENT EXISTING MATERIAL OR FINISI-!, UNLESS SCI-!EDULED
OTI-IERWISE. TI-!E FINISI-! SI-!ALL EXTEND TO Tl-!E FIRST NATURAL 6ReAK
OR, AS SCI-IEDULED.
16) Wl-!ERe EXISTING WORK IS DAMAGED, CUT, OR DEFACED DUE TO TI-!E
PERFORMANCE OF WORK. TI-!E CONTRACTOR SI-!ALL PATCI-! OR RePAIR SAME
TO MATCI-! ADJOINING AS TO MATERIAL AND FINISI-!. RePAiReD FINISI-!ES
SI-!ALL 6E EXTENDED TO TI-!E ,NEAReST ViSUAL 6ReA'< LINES SUCI-! AS
CORNERS, CEILING LINES, TOP OF 6ASE, ETC.
11) ALL NEW DOORS IN NEW OPENINGS SEPARATING ROOMS FROM EXIT
CORRIDORS, SI-IALL 6E PROVIDED WITI-I APPROveD SELF-CLOSING OR
AUTOMATIC CLOSING DEVICES.
18) WI-IERE ITEMS ARE INDICATED TO 6E REMOVED OR RELOCATED ON
EXISTING PARTITIONS TO REMAIN, PATCI-I WALLS TO MATCI-I ADJACENT
MATERIAL AND FINISI-!.
PROJECT DATA
~
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SITE ADDRESS:
328 E. 1th STREET
PORT ANGELES, WASI-IINGTON
LEGAL DESCRIPTION:
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
TWO STORY ADDITION AT SOUTI-I EAST CORNER OF EXISTING eUILDING.
SOME RENOVATION << REMODEL OF EXISTING STRUCTURE WILL OCCUR
REMODEL OF EXISTING UFPER LEVEL U.IOMEN'S TOILET ROOM WILL
CREATE NEW PRIVATE TOILET ROOM AT WEST END OF EXISTING TOILET ROOM.
CONSTRUCTION WILL CONSIST OF WOOD FRAMED FLOOR, WALLS, AND ROOF
ON CONCRETE FeUNDATION WITI-! CONCRETE SLA6 ON GRADE.
ROOFING, SIDING, AND EXTERIOR FINISI-IES WILL MATCI-I EXISTING.
EXISTING MECI-IANICAL << ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WILL eE EXTENDED INTO
NEW ADDITION.
CODE DATA
CODES << REGULATIONS:
ALL WORK SI-!ALL CONFC~ TO TI-!E FOLLOWING:
2003 INTE~ATIONAL eUILDING CODE, 2003 WASI-IINGTON STATE VENTILATION AND
INDOOR AIR QUALITY CODE, AND ALL RELATED WASI-IINGTON ADMINISTRATIVE
CODE CI-IANGES, WITI.j CI-IANGES AND EXCEPTIONS SET FORTI-! IN
ORDINANCE No. 286"
UNIFO~ FEDERAL ACCESSlelLITY ST AI'lDARDS
CITY OF PORT ANGELES ZONING ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS.
Z~ (CITY OF FORr ANGEL.ES)
F'6P - f'UeLlC euILOtNa.S . PAIO!K&
NEW CONSTRlJCTION IS ALL. WIn,lIN EXISTING
ElUIL.DING SETBACKS
NEW CONSTRlJCTION REPLACES EXISTING PATIO
THEREFORE, NET IMPEF<YIOUS AREA
REMAINS T1-IE SAME.
BUILDING CODE DATA:
OCCUPANCY GROUP.
ASSEMBL. Y GROJP 'A.3"
COMMUNITY HAL.L.
(303.1)
CONSTF<LICTION TYPE. TYPE v-A
ALL.OWABL.E I4EIGI4T. 2 STORIES
ElUIL.DING AREA. (TABL.E &(3)
~ 11.&00 SF (FER FLOOR!
EXISTIN6 16t FLR. 8,'a14 SF
EXISTING 2nd FL.R. ~,'362 SF
F'ROFOSEO 16t FLR: 'a8& SF
F'ROF'OSEO 2nd FLR: '38!i SF
~
16t FLOOR. 'a,'3&'a SF
2nd FLOOR. 6,'341 SF
EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLERS EXTENDED INTO NEW SPACES
PI \\'lAI'I, t)\ 'l)3'1
l~ .1 .s.\"-'.....~l...) 1.1i'L Dcn',
EXISTING ELEVATOR AVAILA6LE TO NEW ADDITIONS
-~Q.-
VAl\:.. ~-1.\'\ 07
I) *:~~(l.O<(.. PI"".5 fp.\"'wu. ~
r'llL 'i'l.NL1-\ ~I>IJS ~'1I1!.G.
SI-IEET INDEX
ARCI-IITECTU~L.
A-I-'" coveFi! el-leeT << PFi!OJeCT DATA
A-I.\ AFi!CI-IITeCTUFi!AL elTe PLAN. DeMOLITION PLAN
A-2~ MAIN Level.. F1..00Fi! PALN
A-2.1 uppeR Level.. F1..00Fi! PLAN
DOOR << WINDOW DeT AILe
A-22 Fi!OOF PLAN
PAFi!TITION eCl-leDULe
A-3~ eXTeFi!IOFi! eLeVATION&
DOOFi! . WINDOW eCl-leDULee
A-4-'" 6UILDING eeCTIONe . DeTAILe
A-S~ INTeFi!IOFi! eLevATIONe
A-6~ MAIN Level.. Fi!eFLeCTeD CeiLING PLAN
uppeFi! Level.. ReF1..eCTeD CeiLING P1..AN
eTRUCTU~L
e-l NOTEe AND TYPICAL DETAILe
S-2 FOUNDATION P1..AN
e-3 uppeFi! FLOOFi! FFi!AMING PLAN
e-4 Fi!OOf' FFi!AMING PLAN
MECI-IANICAL
M -1-'" NOTe&. eCl-leDULe&
M-I.\ FIFi!eT FLOOR MeCI-IANICAL
M-12 eeCOND FLOOFi! MeCI-IANICAL
M-I.; eeCTIONe
e-I~
e-I.\
e-12
e-2.1
e-3.1
EL.ECTRICAL
NOTe& << eCl-leDULe&
eLeCTFi!ICAL eUPPL Y
FIRST << seCOND F1..00R ELECTRICAL
FIFi!&T . eeCOND FLOOFi! LIGI-ITING
PANeL SCl-leDULe&
fILE
ViCINITY MAP
cITY OF PORT ANGEU!S - CQttStrUCtfon (II",.
TMlssuMCtollldsperlllllbadapolll/lese(l.'ns.SO"Cl~
CIbOlISlnd~lbbsbdllOtprft'tdtthtbcdldlnlo/lldal
lnlaIllIem'*~thlcorIIdlaa"errorIlnald
p1a~s,spKlfa\lollSlndatherdlla,OfInllll~ttn'C
bllIklllll openUw bIIftl earned on IhefeUndw .!Ian III
:,-:.::.;~ '" """;&0 30 ::J:"E,c..
_"",3 ..,,,~ 0f<:'"
~\\ U)t,il2:.\C. ~<.>CbJH:} ~v1AL
I~ ~
w~
Ih~Q
f>~~ In
'J-CO<;;" ~C:?c....
9 ~
~ 5
!ia t)
It ~ i^
r:.. z~,
o ::>":::1'
5 ~ ~
ll:l 0' <
~ t) '.
~ ~;~,
::II
~ CI) -
o'd ~,~,
~ >,~
E ~'rn
~ ~ is
~ ~.
~ ~. r..1\
~1Il z' cO~
s ~ Nt.
CI) C?
-
o AI"
~g i~ 1{
~~ : ~ \ '
!~
a r !!I.
1.- ~.{
~ ~,
1:1
~ ::~
~ ~ 8:'
~ I'i,!
l~~ ~~
~i 1J~ 'it
::1m ............,
: J~
~ ~ 11.
~:
,~:
i~
~~
o "
CO
.A\~.O
-
-
S6
Pi(J)
J> _
~-t
:..om
"'1)
Q
~r
J>.
z
~
~
:do
!EICl
..~~ 2
'r \l'
)>(1)
Z()
lLJINDIB3JER.~~
ARCHlI1rlEC1rS
-
-
-
-
-
-
"
"
"
"-
"-
,
\
\
\ \
\ \
\ \
\ \
I i~ I
d:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
\ \
\ \
\
\
\ "-
\ "
,
"-
'.....-...........
319 South Peabody Sl.
Suite B
Porl Angeles. WA 96362
Phone: (360) 452-6116
Fax: (360) 452-7064
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
m
G\
:x::
--i
:x::
<P
--i
~
m
--i
-
-
2000'
~ f
I I
"', ,'"
~I is I~
,
I
PROf'ERTT'LINE 140.03' ---4 ~- f'RI?F'ERl'YLINE 140.03'
------------
FROFERTY LINE 150.03'
:
is
FEAI30DY STREET
DATE: 12-20-06
REVISED
COw. NO 0404h
l!!~
POi
0-<
j!;j!;
I
I
~
I
~
<P
m
~
:x::
<P
--i
~
m
--i
BUll.DING ADDmON & REMODEL FOR THE CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER
328 E. 7th STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA
VlA 'S:n3~NV .LHOd '.L33H.LS till. .3 BZ8
H:IJ.N:IJ lJ.INflWWO:) ~ S:IJIAH:IS HOIN:IS
0.1 NOI.Lmav
\,
9VOl'O ON """0:>
:a:iSJA:m
'3O-0~-~1 :!LLVa
ra---------------",
1
I
,0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
,0-.01
.0-.'1(.
,0-.9
o
w
o
z
~
~
o
W
--1
:::s
Ul
;:::
d)
~
w
o
~
II!:
~
d)
. i
"',
-' 1!!
~:o
Iii
~
z
~
<D
<(
--1
o
,
I
01
1
I
I
I
1
I
1
1
1
01
I
1
1
~ - mJ.91X3
,0-.'1(.
Y90L-GC;y {09C):n>,j
9119-GC;y (09C):auolld
G9C96 V JA 'saTalhIy l-lod
II "l!I1S
.S h:poq""d 1I1noS 6IC
~JL0>EJ:JL][H0>~V
lHIJL.][JN~~EI~R(Thm1[
/l'EIK
,g..IE
,0-.10
.0-.10
~I ! ~ i
~1II 1i! ;;t ~
~~ I.i Ii! ~
I II
o~
"'-'
~
-'
Og,
g
~
5
~
-------------------
1
1
1
I
1
01
I
1
1
I
I
1
1 9DG
z
W
:J:
~
'iZ
~
t-
~
JdR9\ - 'JlIG191X3
,9-.LOI
9DG
9
9~
G !!l
~ ~g~ 9
... 0
--1<:( i ::i~
~ .... Q
>- ~~ ~1!!;; ~
o.~2
Ul ~~ ~xi il>
Ul I @!---- 0
0 ~~@ ii'~ .a
--1 ~~
) : ~!~ ~
.. ~ '"
9tIoM!Il
9DG,v 3:)\f~ _'
~~
w ~
d)
~ ~
~~
--1 ~
~
~
1!!
:0
/;\
9
ill
~
'"
~
o
:n
z~
'<t:J>
-lil
(L
OC
o
zo
O-I
-lLo
t- d..
-f-o
O~~
OOCui
<f-<l
'l.lL~
(9!
x
i~ !
If ~
o 0
o 0
~
( ~
\~ ~
ID~ ~
"'~
Ii N ~
;li
1\ II
I
I
t-iB! >W.l. ~ ~-t
4/4 )( 5 HOOD TRIM
I
-.... PROVIDe FL.A5HIN6
-seE 4/M.2 FOR TYP
6ROOVE Pli'ElISIONS
I
-+
I~
j-- tti DOOR . FRAtoe, 6ROUT SOl.ID
J-~ J-~J
HOLLO~-MET AL DOOR HEAD
I
5C.ALE. 3- l:I 1'-0.
PASD~2to
I
r sa; ~_TI1'f?,~ -f
'r
II
'I
- PROP 5lPlOO, TI'l'
I
6/;' x 6 HOOD TRlM
-SEe 511ll.lGMlAL FOR IlEGIIIlB>
_ Of 51105
I
--ttt ODOR . DOOR FRAtE
PROP SlPIN6, TI'l'
TI'l' 6ROOVE . AU. IHTERlOR
DOOR. WINDOW . REUlE IEAOS
PROVlPE F\.A5HlH<>
-2 x 6 HOOO 1RlH
_SEe51lllJGMlAL
4/4 x 5 HOOO TRlH
5/4 x HOOO TRIM
~Go'l.U:
AU.t11...... FRAME H1HOOH, TI'l'
_M IVoO 5lHJl.AR
CD r!~~. ~~DO~ HEAD
PASOr.f204
5/4 lC HOOD TRIM
GI<.\.l(
~2 x6 HOOD TRIM
SEE STNJJC1\RJrL FOR RfGIJIRED
tu-lBEROFSltJDS
"'4 x" HOOD TRIM
~~-j. J.-~ ks~ TYP5"-~
o ~~~;~,~-MET AL DOO~A~~B~ 8) ~!~. ~,~O~ JAMB ~ASDq2oq
t~~~'!"l
I
I
,~4/4 x 5 HOOO lRlM
I
~ - TYP 6ROOVE, 5EE PEr 41M2
. - --_SEe51lllJGMlAL
I
~
- ~\L,c-l'-o' POOJ'156HT
~ HOOt> FRAHE
- POOR - 5EE POOR sam.u:
I - -- _ __ L_ -- RaITE - 5EE DOOR OR HHOOH SGIEW..l:
I
o ~~~ ,I?~~R/RELlTE HE~~20'
I
-t-5E~ Ho'oLL-'!!'!'3!:'P_ t
I
~.. 4/4 x 4 HOOP TRIM
~~ ~t-fl~N&~r~tri~~\Nl~
---- SEE 51lllJGMlAL FOR REaJlREV
_ Of 511DS
I
I
!t
-- \t
l ./ HOOP FRAME
~ ~__ DOOR . 5EE DOOR SGIEIJ\U
_ _ JU_ - RalTE . SEE DOOR
OR H1NDOH SGI-EU..E
I
RaITE 5lLL 5lHJl.AR
CD ~~~ ?~3R/RELlTE JA~q::
I
I
'3/4 x rt)OD S1U,
6"A-K
2x6HOOOTRlH
PROVlPE F\.A5HlH<>
1t14 x" HoOD TRIM
PROP 51DIII6, TI'l'.
,0 ~~~.~~DO~ SILL
PA5DQ214
1021..6U
I!XI&TIN6 . \'E1'lIFY
DECK
ART5 . CRAFT5
CARD5
CONFERENCE
HEAL. TH
--,
I
I
I
I
L.OBBY I
lJm I
I
~J BIL.L.IARD5 I
I
I
.' , ----'
~~
., ~
11\
5TAIR COMPUTER L.AB ~
CDD ~
DECK
MUL. TI-PURP05E
"
"
"
"
I'
IL__-
r---
I,
"
"
:'
t!:----
~~I~~~~
. FRooI/'II!.IN 0I"l!NINCl&
~~~~~,~~FlNlew E
(TTFICAW
I!XTG
I!XTG I!XTG I!XTG
12'.3'
26'.0'
12'.3'
I!XTG
IS'-O'
NEW
18'-0'
NEW
WALL LEGEND
33'.0'
NEW
~
tolOAAl
ADDITION
SECOND FLOOR FLAN
5CAL.E, 1/8" . 1'-0" ~ eF NEW
//////""" /// //// // //.
t!Q!fu
AL.L. TOIL.ET ~OM REMODEL. 1IiOFil< TI-U5 FLOOR
15 ADDITIVE AL.TERNATE 'I
~
g
;~
~~
!i;~
a: U-<
\:; :::- ~
~ t:: ui
tJ Z ~
f::l ~r.::l
~ ~ c;
~ ~~
~ UE-<
~
~ ~ a:
SlU)
~ Pz::I e-<
Ur.::l
oll ~~
~ ~ &i
t:l U),t:l
Sl ~r:
~ 8r;,j
9Zc:o
S Pz::I t\I
~ U) t".l
9
~
ill
9~
illg
2
~ 9 ~
t:l
I -l-
()
~ g
!:! ~
~ i ~
0
A tJ
t\!
.. ~ ,,,'OJ>
rt.l ...'"
<Xl ...0
t>- O) "'''"
'tl I I
.8 ~ t\!t\!
~ III . ~~
J1. oS ..!l 0''0
;lSj !!
::lrt.l
0 ;; H
rt.l ~&l
0) 1::
Ol 0 ..cl
J1. J1.
~
~
9
Go
;>iil
i<ilJ!
~~
~~
i~
i~
~~
9
Go
EXI&TIN6I11AU.&
TO ElE ilS'1O\'EO
EXI&TIJoIi IIIAU.&
NEW IllALL6
6I!I!AA 1llALL6
o C
2FLI'<F'LAN
A2.~
I
I
PARTITION SCHEDULE
I
WALL:
R en N
I
PACING
TINe
ERUAl lNSUl R-21 BATTS
U
2
SIDE 1: (JHSIDE)
NSTRUCTION 58'fIPE'X'GW80N
o snJOS 0 18' o,c,
SIDE 2: (DUISIDE)
ONSTRUcnON DROP SIDING ON 1 't Pl'lWOOD
OR 7 18' 05.8, SllfATHING
REF:
I
I
85/8'
{
WALL TYPE
SCALE. r=1'-0'
L
1
A
I
~ WALL:
K:ONSTRUCTION
ACING
TING NON RATED
>< ERMAL INSUL R-21 BATTS
",UN" ,NSUI.
1 c;: 2 .,'" ""
SIDE 1: (\1110 SPlCE)
ONSTRUcnON 2xO snJOS 0 HI' 0 c.
SIDE 2: (OUTSIDE)
j . 8' t ONSTRUCTION DROP SlDIle ON 1 't Pl'lWOO
OR 7 18' O.S 8 SHfATHING
WALL TYPE B REF:
SCALE. r=1'-o'
A WALL:
I ONSTRUCTlON
I :
':
~ PACING
- TING
~: ERUAL INSUL
;oUN" 'NSU'.
1 2 "'" NO
SIDE 1:
': ONSTRUcnON snJOS FWSH TO EXlSl1NG \mJ.
;
SIDE 2:
+ . } ONSTRucnON 5/8' TYPE '1(' CWB ON
4 1/8' 2x4 snJOS 0 18' oc
WALL TYPE C REF
SCALE r=l'-o'
WALL:
. ONSTRUCTION ~ wonn <mln w.,
>:
PACING
nNG l-HR
:>< ERt.IAllNSUl
N ,
1 2 0"" NO.
SIDE 1
': ONSTRUCTION 5 8' TYPE 'J(' GW8 ON
; : M snJOS 0 18' OC.
, SIDE 2:
~ } ONSTRucnON 5/8' TYPE 'X' GW8
43/(
WALL TYPE 0 REF:
SCALE r=l'-o'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WALL TYPE
SCALE' :i = 1 '-0"
E
WALL:
NSTRucnON
EXISTING OPENING IN-FllL
AC'NG
TlNG
ERMAl INSUl R-21 BATTS
2
SIDE 1. (INSIOE)
ONSTRUCTlON 5 8' TYPE '1(' GW8 ON
2xO snJDS 0 18' .C.
SIDE 2: (OUTSIDE)
ONSTRucnON SllfA1HINC TO MATCH EXISTING
5 8' GW8 OVER SHfATHING WHER[ OCCURS
REF:
CD
-------l
I
I
I
I
I
----I
I' ,
I' I
" I
" I
" I
1[====
"
"
I,
:'
~---
~
NOFml
+-.
WALL TYPE
SCALE' r = 1 '-0'
I
I
L_______
I
I
_______J
eKYLIGl1T
RIDGE
dbdbLD
D6
D6
ADDITION
ROOF PLAN
SCALE: 1/6" . 1'-0'
WALL:
ONTR
ACING
TING
ERt.IAl INSUL R-ll BATTS
2--
SIDE 1:
ONSTRucnON 5 8' TYPE 'X' GW8 ON
t 't SOUND 8ONlO ON 2x4 snJOS 0 18' 0 C
SIDE 2:
ONSTRucnON 5 8' TYPE 'X' GW8 ON
4 snJOS 0 18' OC
ANISHES 10 MATCN EXlSTNG
F
REF:
--.,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
__...J
~
6TANDU;C; 6EAM
METAL ROGI'ING
TO MATCIol EXI6TINci
ElUILT.1N GUTTEIll
(MATCIol EXTGJ
D6
'- ~ 6TIlUC1UI<E ea.OW
(IlELOCATED Fr<oM
!A6TIllALLJ
RIDGE
-,
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
nl
I
1
I
I
I
I
_________-.J
~~
~~
Z
!ia~
~ U<
r.. :>-t ~
Oe--<_
b - UJ
u ?3;
~ ~~
~O
~ U~
&i ~ ~
i::l
~ gs~
Urz:l
~ !> ~
Z 0== E-<
~ ~ UJ
i::l (I).Q
~ ~ r:
~ 8r.::i
9ZCXJ
=> ~ t\l
III (I) t"J
~ ~
6
N ~
D ~
~ ~ ~
0
l:l C)
..J CIl
~ "'....
'" ...'"
'" ...0
>> 0> ",r-
'tI I I
.8 ~ CIlCll
III III
tilI1 . ""''''''
Po. ~ 1l cO'
:S'9 " !!
s'" l
'" ;; ~
0> 1:: ~r..
OJ If .<l
Po.
~~
~~
i~
i
~
~
u---
~
-<
006C
~OOFF'LAN
A2.
I
I
CD ~~'~'~I,.~LEVATION
r
#~
~~
~~
~Z
o~
lJ. u<
i:i ::- ~
b t:: rri
u Z~
f;::l ~J::<<
e:: ~~
~ ~~
~ UE-<
0::
~ ~~
~(/)
fj;J ~ e-<
UJ::<<
: >~
g ~r,:
~ ~ '"
Cl (/).Q
~ ~ r:
~ $2 r4
~ ~ co
~ (/)~
I
WINDOW SCHEDULE
WINDOW WINDOW DETAIL AEMAFlK8
tew AOPIllClN NUMBER 8IZII TYPII MATL 1'INI8H CILAZ MUD .IAM8 lIlU. RAIL
W1 6'-O"x5'-0" A MTL PAINT
W2 4'-O"x4'-0" B MTL PAINT
I
I
m
/
/
EEBJEEBJ
WINDOW SCHEDULE NOrE8:
I. WINDOW DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN FOR TI4E PURPOSE OF 61DDING ONLY.
CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFy AJ..1. ~14 OPENING DIMENSIONS IN TI4E FIELD
DURING CONSTRUCTION.
2. ALL NEW WINDOW& TO MATCI4 EXISTING. VERIFY ON SITE.
I
EEBJEEBJ
/
I
~=========="'
WINDOW TYPES SCALE: 1/4' . 1'-0'
[I
I
tew ADDIllClN
eKYl.1GIlT D6L
I~~,UI j,..-~ ........ E 16T Jot;,I~pp
F= Ir e !YC NO r--
I~ DOl ~ ~ ~
ml ........
~ ....>V F=:= =
an .r::; ~QCI!T - ....
CD CD CD CD ~t 0
~EBEB~ 'PiR ;;;; ~ J
/ \ ~~II.~ / III 'I~I 1-1-
[J 0 []II 1-1-
I I
c--------i--~~6~
- - - - - 0Qfl6 -;-- -;.::, - - l<ELoc:ATED FRa'I
TYFE A
~x~
CASEMENT
TYFE 6
FICTURE
I
I
~
I
~
,
()
~ ~
~ :::Ii
~ ~ ::II
~ ~ 8
I
EA6TIllAl.l.
N
Cil 1Il
a:l
~ 0>
] ~
~~ .
lJ..sll
:S '8 "
g rn J
CIl
S!l ~
'" lJ.
<0""
...<0
...0
<or-
I I
NCII
"''''
""""
I
@ ~'?e~&~~. ELEVATION
P FRM'1B
l<ELoc:ATEP
FRa'I EA6T
IllAl.l.
'0'0
!!
ij H
]&l
lJ.
B
DOOR SCHEDULE
DOOR DOOR SIZE
NUMBER WlI7TH HIIGHT THICK
- ~----1200- -6'-0"- -7'-0"- ~1-3 4"
203b 3'-0" 7'-0" 1-3 4"
203c 3'-0" 7'-0" 1-3 4'
2120 3'-0" 7'-0" 1-3 4"
ABBREVIATIONS
EXTG EXISTING
FF. FACTORY FINISI4
GL GLASS, GLAZING
14.c. 140LLOW CORE. WOOD
14M. 140LLOW METAL
IN&UL. IN&ULATED
PT. PAINT
RATING DOOR
TYPE MAT.
-8- -STL -
A S.C.
A S.C.
20 MIN A S.C.
PINI8H CWl88
PT. W
S&V
S&V
S&V
LOUVER PRAMS
WIDTH HBICIHT TYPII MAT.
2 HM
1 WD
1 WD
1 WD
HDWA DETAILS
I'INI8H CIUl88 GROUP H&AD JAMB
PT
S&V
S&V
S&V
REMARKS
~:
~~
i~
I~
~~
I
I
I
DOOR
. WIDTI4 .
IEXI6TING)
1~~Dr 1 IE~=) I
[~ (m
THFUl8H
I
1 RELOCATED EXISTING DOOR
2
2
2
I
1 lelNGL.I!)
2 IDOUeL.E)
A
PR PAIR
s.c. SOLID CORE, WOOD
STL. STEEL
SW STAIN _ VARNISI-I
T TEMPERED GLA55
W WIRE GLA&&
WD WOOD
REMARKS KEY NOTES:
1. VERIFY EXISTING SIZE AND CONFIRM NEW OPENING SIZE
EXISTING I4AFlDWARE TO 6E MAINTAINED TO EXTENT POS&16LE
2. NEW FLU&14 DOO~ TO MATCI-I EXI6TING
I4AFlDWARE TO MATCI4 EXI&TING
COFlDINATE KEYING WITI4 EXI6TING KEY &YSTEM.
006C
EXTEL VI
I
CD ~~~ES
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
TO MATCH EXISTING
CD
DOOR TYPES
SCALE: 1/4' . 1'-0'
A3.D
I
I
IC"
________.!.~'="9"_le:_.~_'!!.~~ -4-
..-~
~ _ __--_- - GRlGI:ET fV6HI..I.
- ~_. 00 HOT FASTEN TO
~ \
~ \
~I "--_/)
...... 6tEff IGf . SNOH l.IHDERL.A'01EtfT. /
EXTeID HIM 20' H16tER ll-fAN
L.fAD1HEl EI>6E OF ROOf PA/'EL
__ _eo v1tiEr ~
PANEL TERHlH,\ TlOH
,{
J;,
1lI00E eeAM
PEJIl&fIlIUC1UItAL
2x~ RAFTERe
I"EFtFl'lAMltl<iFLAN
NEW2x
CMFt_iN<1I
I
I
I
--+------
CD ~~J,~~~~
I
2)( lRlM
- 2Xl2 flELLY BNI:> l-\I V4' f\.YH:> BAGKlNG
I
E><I&TiN<1II11AU.
fIlS10YE IOOEFtlOFt &IDINCt
~DE NEWCillB CMFt
EXler. HATHING
I
NEW CQoIC. IlLAe
FiJJeIl uJ EXler.
~
~
I
DFlILl. I EPOXl' SET
" IX!lEt.L& INTO
EXler. &TEI1I11AU.
SECTfON A-A
SCALE: 14" . 1'-0"
I
CD ~;~: 3~~~GERS t TRIM
I
-r--- 00Wl5P0IIT 1lel'0I0
=--r=--- ---- 2)( CORNER TRlM_OHD
I ' ----SIDING
€ _ ---~ DRIP FlASHltl6, 24 eA. PRf'FINISK:D!lTl.,
TYP . DRIP R.A5HINe
_ --.- 2Xl2 BB..L'f 6N<<;)
.- -- V4' f\. YH:> BAGKlNG
~- ~OUT SlRJoP BEYOND
1-_"_
I
r"
s ':
N ,
,
I
I
------RQOF ASSEI13LY AS lICIGATED. EAve
-. GUPS . 2'-0" OJ:,
- --- -- GOHT'5 BLOGKlN6
-.---. 246'" PREFINISf-ED 5TL 6A61.J!
PLASHIH6. TYP. ATTACH TO c.oNT'S
GLEAT, BEND oveR ROOF RIB . GLIP
- eArrEH AS OGGI.IRS.
FU/5H eurr TO 6LOGl:11I6
I V2'
CD ~f~ OF FYLL SIZE
AI. ROOf PA/'EL
--eAeU! i:Nl> Fl.A5IlIH6
-
llMrr fV6HING ro
24 6A. PRfFINtSIED SlL
EiVTTER eo PNE!..
I<EM<N
armROlIlIJ!T
2J<bTRIM
DOHI5FOI1T
SIDING
CD ~~~'~I,;ND
"
I!: >:
fll' \
ji \,'
':i \ ~
't 1 I
Ii: \ \
III I
iI,
II!
,
'I,
, ,/ I~l
I 11'
, '
\/
"
--~ '-~-
--___ c.oNT'S SOFFIT VENT
---- 2><12 eELLY BAND
,
,II
l \
o ~~;..~-o,SOFFIT
(8 ~~~,. 1'-0"
, ______---~~r~rffil~~mr5ROOF
~......-:---- PROVIDE v-MOTGIIIHe. eLOGKING,5 PER __ SPAGIII6
.- --- ~ol: R.ASHIHB FROM SIDlNe TO 8ITTER
. WoLL TEI<M1AAnON
#---- SAtv STt EiiI!T1CR.
CLEAr. 5'-0' OoG PER 5I1i\G/IA PlATE 22,
, ' F1EU> PAINT roP I FAGE
- - \
--r-.;.l.,,;-, I \
, r---- ,'\
flirtt- f~- - I j -----
r- 1--
~:8~-.. , :jj{-)-
[' I" ---.;
t__l~>- --......: __
f. 5!4'J.- 0 :::------......
- - ,_ ---_---=-.----GOHr56J04.V STLSOFFlrvarr
----- ------- 5 I/~' HIDE DOH-lSPGVT . SIH.. 0'V'E'R!..}If' ElITTER GV1l.Ef
M1N 3', PER SHAGAA F'l..ATf 33. DETAIL 2,
HOlD TOP OF DOH45POJT ABOVE BOrrOM OF FA!:GIA
g
...
I
_ _ r:LATE _
I
9
'"
I
I
\" NEW ,. CQoIC.IlLAe
\ FiJJeIl WITH EXI&TiN<1I
MQR.
r~
, ,
:=~J
SECTION B-B
SCALE. '4" . 1'.0"
CD ~~~!~~TTER
I
- ---STL FI\5G'....
GOlIT'5 CLEAT . 1lO1T0M EI>6E
- --2)(
_ ___StEET IGE . SHaH utDERLAYMENT,
----- EXTEtO 3<r \.f' ROOF , l>> Fe. T OVER HEHBRANE &',
PROVIDE oPEN,He FOR aI1'TER 0lIlIJ!T . SIM.,
eurr_TOOllltET
------- e'LONG 26 SA _ 0IIl\.ET. SIM,
R1\IET15OIJ:lERro_
01MCl1510l15 IllI6Tl'I.lJ\nOH PER 5MACHII Pl.ATl! 33, OerNL 2
.5/4 TRIM
lZl 0::
~
rzl Pil
~ Eo<
~ Z
~ Pil
~ U
r.. :>-<
0 Eo<
1--1 CIJ
~ z f:3
u ~ r:.:l
~ ~ 0
~ ~
It: 0
~ U Eo<
c::
..:I ~ 0
rzl ~
Q
fj (f)
~ r.::l e-<
U
o'll !> r:.:l
:z: 0:: ~
0 r.::l Eo<
E en
Q (f)
~ .c:
0:: +>
l:'-
~ 0 r:.:l
1--1
~ Z CO
Pil C\l
~ (f) t":l
~
~
~
~
~
Q
rzl
~ I
~
o
u
(II
.... <0 <0""
CIl O'l ....<0
<Xl ....0
C>. Ol <or-
] ~ I I
NN
"''''
~ ~ . """"
p" .8 1l 0'0'
.<:1'9 " ee
g rn J
CIl 8 ~
Ol 1:: .8~
0> 0
p" p"
~~
~~
~~
~~
~ (J-
~~
~
OO~C
BLDGeeCI
A4.D
S:n:3:~NV IHOd '1:3::3:HIS HI.!. :3: 9;:::8
B3:J.N3:;) AJ.INflWWO;) ~ S3:;)lL\B3:S BOIN3:S
s:n:mNV J.80d dO J.JJ;) mu. ~lOd 'I:iIOOJ'lmI 7i NOJJJaav DNIcrnna
<J1>O?O ON 1Ul.O:>
a:;{S!A:!la
qo-OZ-Zl :uva
1>90L. G91> (09f:) :x...d
9H9-G91> (09f:) :"uoll:d
G9f:96 VAl 'S"l"~UV 1-lod
B "1mS
is APoq.....d ll:lnos 61f:
I
SJL~E[JLlIIHI6~V u_ D.
~~(ill3I~[(OINJIlI ~; ~
~
~
~
~ 3
~
~ !~
~~
.l1
.~~
19
"
-1
W
:I: Ih >
I- :I: ~~
::> I- W
2 ::> ~8
() -1
<I> 1:S~
;z.
OC
~ w
--' {l
{l
~ ~
II '-'
11 I~ 11 '" L
III 0
~l ~l ~ 0
oc
J-
ill
-1
-
/ o~
/ ~ J--;
"- ::.
3:
ill<i
! ~ z~
/
!~ , cf\
~ ~ / '!
~~ I
.l1 ~ ill
:'~ ~
19 ~
"
l- I- 0
<I>
<I> UJ
~ :3 W
~
Z
Ii J-
m z
~g I " 0
, [E] 0
Ii I 0
I ill
I ~ '-'
L_____-1
Z Z
H3 ~ ~ J- 0
Z -
.. .. J-
~ i 0
~ i ! ~ 0 ! 0
h iL '-' 0
~!l! t~! Z ~ !i z ~ -<[
12w Hlii
~Q U~I 0 ~ 0
~~ l:i~ I- ..fi - {Q {Q
.~~ J- -<[ -<[
I; - ~~ m
0 0 -1 -1
0 0 OC OC
! -<[ -<[ ill W
I- J-
~ W= I- W= ~i:> I- ~o
<I>
\')2 <I> \')2 {l:- ~1 '<l: {l:-
:t ~
w w
z: Z~ L~ --------- L~
~~ ~=: :I: !l
:I: O~ h I- O~ O~
~ OW oc
~ --1~ ~ I~ --1~ ~~ () O~ ~ I~ O~
z
r
~i N N
I;
-------------------
-------------------
~/U3
~ml>
!!1 -n -
~rZ
~m-n
QOr
- -l 0
~O
Iv/U
o
m
Ir
'z
G\
IlJ
r
l>
Z
I
0 0
0 0 0
--
0
0 0 0
::r g I~ 0
1> 0
0 G C ~\
r. Z 1\' 0
m -f l~ ~ ~ \\
X ^ h
0 0 G\ 'z 0 0 (j) C ~:s
-t =y-
O G\ -G\ 0
.1-
..
0 0 \ 0 <\
1\ \ 0 0
,
r
o o>~
mmo
-m-i
~:r..
G\m
QQ
=01>
O1Z
t::-
0>0
m1>
:;ur
rQ
R~
1>E
-i-
-Z
OG\
ZO>
0>01
o
:;u
-0_
mG\
:;Ur.
m-i
r01
mX
O-i
-it::
~~
00>
~1>
o>Z
r.Q
mr
m()
-io
m1>
'-i
"'-
'-0
~
-to>
()t::
(j)
::r-o
1>m
-tZ
OQ
I.m
mQ
~l>
(PO
::!()
Zt::
G\o>
-i
o
o
m
r
Z
G\
-io>
()t::
::r(P
1>;g
-iZ
OQ
r.m
mQ
~1>
~2 I G\(f) I G\(f)
G\(P
-i E-f E-t
0 IDO IDO m Irs:<
(J> /U<P 0 AJ AJ
0
l> mm m
r
!!1 -nO r
~ rO ~
.
q mZ
~D
IrzLJLJ?<
m-n
IDr
00
mO
-IU
Ir
Z
G\
'lJ
Ir r
l> ~ ~ Ie><:
Z
"""""'1 r I , I ....""""'-~"t1-.
...." '- '- '-" '-"" '- '-"" '-. I""""""'"
)?> I~I()'
~ ~I~I
JLlIND:ra1ER~~
ARCHK1rlEC1rS
319 South Peabody SL
Swte B
Port Angeles. WA 98362
Phone: (360) 452-6116
Far (360) 452-7064
BUILDING ADDITION & REMODEL FOR THE CITY OF PORT ANGELES
SENIOR SERVICES & COMMUNITY CENTER
328 E 7th STREE. PORT ANGELES
DATE- 12-20-06
REVISED
COw. NO. 04046
I
I
GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES
(the folowlng apply Irina shown Otherwise on the pion.)
~~~ONSTRUCTION SHAll COH='ORt.l WITH THE INTR[NA TIONAL BUl.DING CODE (IBC) 2003 EDITION.
I
I
I
TWEEN TI-E PLANS . SPECIFICATIONS, REFERENCED STANDARDS At<<)
STRINGENT REOIJR8.ENT SHAlL GOVERN. ALL DlSCREPANCES
TTENTION OF THE ARCHTECT AND ENGINEER PRroR TO PROCEEDtm
~ ~~ (GROLtID SNOW)
125 PSF
I
DESIOH DEAD LOADS'
ROOF 20 pSf'
PARTITIONS 20 PSF
WOOD FLOOR 25 PSF'
DESlON WIND LOADS:
BASIC WINO SPEED 100 MPH. EXPOSURE C. fa, 0
DESIGN SEISMIC LOADS'
:t~~~~ ~~ArLs-o.46g. SITE a.ASS D. Sm..0.87g
I
INSPECTIONS
NOTifY BUILDING DEPARTMENT FOR BlIL[)N) DEPARTloCENT tlSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL
0Rll1NANCE.
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS'
A SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE HREO BY THE OWNER TO PERfORU TK: FDlLOWWG SPECIAL
INSPEC110HS PER use SECTION 1701.:5
1. EPOXY GROUTED HOLD DOWNS.
NSPECTOR. PROVllE
ECTOR, SUB),IT SIGNED
PECTlON WAS IN CONF
P PROVISIONS Of TtE
AND BUILDING OEPAR
I
A.r,.~(~ME~~~~ AS A
WI1ll THE APPROVED PLANS AND THE
F1NAL REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO
I
JOISTS SHALL
AND STRUCTl..RAL ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO F'ABRlCAnON.
/EW
I
I
fOUNDA nONS:
~~ ~8~F~s5~RfRM ~~?s~W"R8~'6S~lND ~A[~~N~5w=LT~E~~~~~~~TA~~
SOIl. IS NOT FOUND AT MINlt.IIJI.l FOOTING DEPTHS
CONC
MOONe
WITH
CEMENT
OF AlL CONCRETE AND SELECTION OF I.lATERIAlS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE
MAXlI.IUU SIZE AGGREGATE SHALL BE 1-1/2 INCHES w.xu.IUM SUIMP AND WNI1.Md
T SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS
1m SACKS
8t ~lhCY
5-1/2
I
MAX SLUMP
.. ~CHES
LOCATION
ALL CONCRETE
r'c
2500 PSI
I
BE SECURELY TIED IN
0- ~IMUM UNLESS
AT CORNERS Atil
WITH 6 II 6 W29 II W29
ESS NOTED
2.
CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERWANENTL Y EXPOSED TO EARTH
3 tlCHES
CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER
~~sc~g Frl~A~R~~ER.
OTHER CONCRETE.
WAlLS J/4- INCH
SLABS 1 t4CH
I
3.
I
GROUTED ANCHOR BOL T5 AND REINFORCEMENT
GROUTED ANCHOR 80l TS AND REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE SIMPSON -SET- ADHESIVE
SYSTEM OR APPROVED EQUAL FOllOW t.lANUFACTURERS RECOMMEMlATIONS FOR
TIGN.
EXPANSION SOL T5
EXPANSION DOLTS INTO CONCRETE SHAU. BE Hn.. TI '1<WIK SOL T ... OR APPROVED EQUAl FOLLOw
MANJF ACTURERS RECOut.lENlA TlONS FOR INST AlLA TION.
I
AS MANLf"ACTlJREO SY TRUS JOIST CORPORATION OR
STIFFENERS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS
ON TI-E STRUCTURAL ORA WINGS
JOISTS BELOW t.lECHAtfCAL UN
FABRICATOR SHALL SlJBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS BEARING THE STAMP Of A
REGISTERED IN 11-E STArE OF WASHINGTON AND SHOWWG All. DETAILS
A COMPlETE INSTALLATION SHALL BE SlB.IITTEO TO llE ARCHTECT F
F ABRlCA TlON. MANUF Ac-rURER SHALL VERlf'Y ALL JOIST LENGTHS PRIOR T
I
I
~~ ~~ UNSER psLl BEAt.lS SHALL BE AS NOTED ON PlANS AItJ AS I.lAN..FACTUREO BY
TRUS JOIST CORPORA TION O~ AfS?ROVED EQUAL. M1NIt.lUM ALLOWABLE DESIGN STRESSES SHAlL. Bt::
Fb - 2900 PSI AND E _ 2,000,000 PSl
I
j!1J\~ ~S
2-18d
J-16d S
led T T 8- OIC
2-16<1
18dT 18"O/C
2-16d F EACH EN)
J-t8d F EACH EN)
2-16d A
12.-1&:1 LAP
4-16<1 F'ACE
TO TOP PLATE 2-16d TOE HAL5 AJ() H1 TIE
~crOF THE IBC F'OR CONNECT1~" ~~ t:r~T ~;J.lC WI 9- DlBEDMENT
i.i ~~F'~~~ ~ro~n8J~ri,(&.~,,8b~ ~~H
= ~S~;::k~,,}3,k~RS18JON~J ~~~C~~GERED
FLOOR
APPlY :5 4 0 TO FlOOR FRAP.ING t.EMBERS WITH 10d GALV BOX \mE
~:rs.6 NOT~Q~t1rE~X~~~~ 10" Ole AT INTERIOR
AlL SHEATHNG SHALL BEAR TIE UARK -APA- AND BE LoW UP WITH GRAIN PERPENDICUlAR TO SlFPORTS
WITH PANELS STAGGERED AU. F'lOOR SHEQTHt4G SHALL BE RATtO EXPOSURE t
'~"'{~
1
MAX EXCAVATlON WITHOUT)
LOWERING UPPER FOOTNG
OR PlAONG AGAINST
U/'IJISTUR8ED SOL AS
SHOWN
~
t.,~~rn; -\!
I
i.g!,wIl1wll~F'
SrzE PER FTG SCHED
COMPACTED STRUCT
FLL PER SOCLS REPORT
'11~mJ)!,mt
'II - UIOSTUR8EO
BEARING LAYER
0)
TYPICAL FOOTING EXCA V A TION
SCALE. 1/Z" 1'-0"
o BACKFILL FOR OVER EXCA V A T~~ ~~f~
'11m' .
ig ~J~~T~l'wiTE.14t~ ~T~PO~~ ACTUATED 'ILjilJlim.fu
"O/CEMBEDl"t.IN. / -
FIRM utlJlSTURBEO
(fb EARTH OR STRUCT
~LL FU PER SOLS
ER REPORT
PIPE PARALLEL
TO FOUNDATION WALL
~:?~ M~~ ~~~E ~
fOR MSTC28 STRAP
W/ 8-l6d EA ENO
2-16d AT 16" OIC
/ TOP It TO BOTTOM It
;' ..--- DBL TOP PLATE
Z-A35 CLIPS TOP ANO BOTTOM
WHERE OPENU'<G EXCEEOS 6'-0"
AND STUD HEIGHT IS GREATER
THAN 12'-0"
4-16d KING STUD
TO HEADER
2><6 STUDS AT
18" O/C TYP
HEADER SEE
PlANS
TRIMMER STUDS (DBL
TRIMMER STUDS WHERE
OPENING EXCEEDS 6'-0")
DBL KING STUD WHERE
OPENING EXCEEDS 6'-0"
~ ~ ,;-N\'~6" 56J~ ~~ FOUND
BELOW OR l6d AT 6" OIC TO
r WOOD FRAMING BELOW (SEE SHEAR
WALL SCHED FOR AOD'L A B 'S ANO
NAILING)
(0
TYPICAL STUD WALL W / OPENING
NTS
ADDED STUD AT
HOLD DOWN AT
CORNERS
WALL CORNER
CD
PIPE SLEEVE
BY CONTR
FOOTiNG REM"
PER PLANS
~ot\,E:TgWEw~~RE
CROSSING SLAB JTS
BURKE KEYED KOLO
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WALL INTERSECTION
{
FACE OF STEPS SHALL BE
CAST AGAtJST LKlISTl1R8ED
EMn-L F EXCAVATKlN RAVELS,
BACKFILL WITH CONCRETE
WHEN FOOTING IS CAST
PLACE: LEAN CONC. STRUCT
FLL OR FT'G CONe AROUND
SLEEVE BEFOR POURING Fr'G
PIPE PERPENDICULAR
TO FOUNDATION WALL
CD
TYPICAL STEPPED FOOTING
SCAlE 1/Z" -r-Q"
TYP PIPE AND TRENCH AT FT'G
SCALE- 1/2"-r 0"
Jill[ ~dl~{2~ S~~s1~J
SAWCUT WITH~ 4 TO l~ \ CUT EVERY BAR
HOURS OF POURING SL~B AT CONTROL JOINT
~;;~t E:T6WEW~~RE
CROSSING SLAB JTS PLACE REINF AT MID-
DEPTH OF SLAB
~ ~ ~ ~
1=-=111-111=1'
~~~~~ ~~~b~Clc~B ~- I II "
ON GRADE
1=-=111=111=1'
FULLY COMPACTEO "/ 'II "
EARTH BELOW SLAB
ON GRAOE
PANEL EDGE NAJlING EA STUD
r PER SHE~ WALL SCHEO
(IOd AT 6 O/C MlN)
NA~ER FOR GYP
we BY CONTRACrOR 16<1 Ar S" O/C
TYPICAL UNO
SHRINKAGE JOINT
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
CD
V ARING WALL SIZE
CD
NOTE UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE PLACE SHRINKAGE JOINT IN
APPROXIMA TEL Y SQUARE AREAS ENCLOSING A MAXIMUM AREA
OF 600 SQ FEET, AND AT REENTRANT CORNERS OR AT OTHER
ABRUPT CHANGES IN DIMENSIONS
NOTE
AT INSIDE CORNERS PROVIDE
'4 x S'-O" DIAGONAL BARS
TYPICAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINT
SCAlE 3/4"=r-o"
(PANEL EDGE NAILU'<G EA STUD
PER SHEAR WALL SCHED
(10d AT 6" O/C MlN)
'" AT SW 4 (EXTERIOR WALLS)
"-- PL YWOOO SHEA TH'G ON INTtRIOR
FACE TO BE CONTINUOUS
2-1Sd AT 4" OIC STAGGER
WALL INTERSECTION AT SW 3
STUD FRAMING AT CORNERS
NTS
IY~I
EOWARO JONSON ANO ASSOCIATES, P S
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
5990 SA TTLE POINT DRIVE
BAINBRIDGE IS. WA 98110-3407
(Z06) 780-0S24 FAX (Z06) 7BO-5587
p::
~
E-<
Z
~
u
:>-<
E-<
>-<
Z
:::> z
:::21
:::21 0
E-<
0 t:l
U Z
1-0
o'<:l :J::
en
if). <
~ il=
u
>-< rn
>- w
p:: ....:l
~ W
if). Z t:l
p:: 0 Z
>-< <
0 E-<
>-< >-< E-<
Z t=l a::
~ t=l 0
if). < 0...
r-
o
I
r-
I
.0
o
z
Cl
!7i
:>
ll!
~
o
u
~
<(
Cl
'"
.0
Vi ~
>- Ol
" <(
~~ ~
~5~
~ Vl '"
il ~
Vl
~ 6
,..., D-
....
~~
~r-
.01
I",
"'t{)
~....
~O'
~ti
'>-'x
21 c
0"-
.J::
Cl.
I
r-
2~
UJ
~~
Gf-
ct:I
~ 0_ ___
00:::
Z<(
~
6-7-07
S1
I
I
I
~J l?'i'D~D~T 16. O/C \
2l<6 P T P W.I~ 5}.8. DIA
AES AT 48 silf,(j EMBED
~ ~5J~ ~.JA~f
I
I
!i
SlAB S\.IlCRADE
PER ARCH\..
l"
I
!i
ill ;"
I
SECTION
SCALE 1-"'1' 0"
I
I
REMOVE (SAW CUT) AND Afl'Il!L~I'lrIJ['I"11
~~~C~06~~,~LAB FOR l' ~I-=W-
I
EXIST FND
I
I
(0
SCALE 3/4"-1'-0"
SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f:F~~\
flEW 2x6 Sn.o WALL
/ W/ 1/2" COX
2l<6PT PW 58.OlA
AB'S AT 48'10% EMBED
8. Mtl
3/4.x3 1/2. CONT KEY
EXIST STEM WALL
~~~{T'G (VERIFY
NEW SLAB ON GRADE
.. FU..L Y COMPACTED EARTH
111---: ~ BELOW SLAB ON GRADE
ft HORG! AT 12. OIC
~WGR1Irr16;OO~T
FTG', EMBEO 6.
o
SECTION
SCALE 1.=1' O.
MARK
I@l
t@J
@:9l
~
r~~
1
I'~i
: I '.IIuI_'
~"-l ~.:
i>. l: -;, _ ..~.
I:,.\\JD Ii
. ~
L_._
fir It'
~::.' \1 1\
I r'''''=--==- _c-'c
!
I 'rr,"IT
I
. I
1,:i::IH
FOOTING SCHEDULE
SIZE
REINFORCING
4'-6- x 4'-6" x 12'"
4-15 EA WAY
5-15 EA WAY
3 *-5 LONGtT
5-15 TRANSV
5 15 LONGIT
6-85 TRANSV
5'-0" x 5'-0- x 12"
3'-6" x 5'-0. x 12"
5'-0. x 6'-0" x 12"
NOTES:
SEE DEl AIL 1/S5 FOR FOOTING DOWELS AT PLINTH
1.....-.---
'I ,
~__J
~ .. _.
I
t EXISTING J
FOUNDATION
11 I -i-~
I
':"t
$
~_.
'0-01'
C_ \=_ 'UJ, I:
I
~~
'. Ii IL. -cr J r
Iju iLt
_/~/..
II :'~~=. . __~o.~r-
I
I _'
! t'it.Lrl
;
!r 'f--1iT
Ii
5,1
"
I
Ill~I"" ]
t~:.! J
'--- ..-- --.-L_
J
~~rJf1- "
t
I'
LJBci\
',:=.=,dcUI.::' :
1
l~
1
' I
=-=--1
i
-1"'- -~- _J
I
I,
i~._--_'i
I {NOTE 5\
l' ~_.o__ _~ ~
. I roool
r,
li\ "
'I
i I EX1SrG SLAB ON GRADE
I' I
"
'i ,.1 UNi.'~
::;=rc;r
EXlST'G SLAB ON GRADE /
{! HD 12
I\... NOTE 6
i
EXISTING
HOLO DOWN STEM
WALL AT DOOR
OPENNG
NOTES:
SCALE 1/8"-1' 0"
1 ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS MUST BE
FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR
NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF
ANY DISCREPANCIES
2 SEE ARCH'L FOR ALL DIMENSIONS
3 REFER TO ARCH'L FOR SLAB SUBGRADE
~1^c)ILLARY BREAK. MOISTURE BARRIER.
4 ALL FOOTINGS TO BEAR ON FIRM
UNDISTURBED EARTH LOWER FOOTINGS
AS NEEDED FOR FIRM BEARING
5 REMOVE PORTION OF EXISTING SLAB ON
:rr~Dfo~~~G CUT) AND RE~LACE FOR
6 ~~O:~s~R~VUwf~L~ ~~~T :J.o O/C
HOLD DOWN SCHEDULE
HD 11
MSTC28 STRAP W / 8-16d SINKERS
EACH END (OVER SHEATHING)
PHD2 W / SSTB16 A B OR EPOXY GROUT
Ug;.J"~R~e~' !~BE~S~D.STEM WALL
HD 12
NOTES
1 ATTACH HOLD DOWNS TO DBL STUOS OR KING
PLUS TRIMMER STUD
2 SPEC'L INSPECTION REQ'D FOR EPOXY GROUTING
HOLD DOWNS
~
If>
B
EXPIRES 6/02/09
EaWARD JONSON AND ASSOCIATES. P 5
CONSUL TING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
5990 SA TTLE POINT DRIVE
BAINBRIDGE IS. WA 98110-3407
(206) 780-0524 FAX (206) 780-5587
~
f;z:4
E-t
Z
f;z:4
u
:>-+
E-t
.....
Z
:::>
:::E z
:::E 0
E-<
0 0
U Z
......
~ ::c:
a:l
lfl <(
f;z:4 ;;::
U
..... rn
>- w
~ ...:l
f;z:4 W
lfl Z 0
~ 0 Z
..... <(
0 E-t
..... ..... E-<
Z C1 ~
f;z:4 Q 0
lfl -< a...
t;
,.L
I
lD
2
B
111
>
l!!
:::;
:::;
o
()
~
o
'" ...
Ul ~ ~~
co -"
>. (j) lD,
"8 <: I",
"'10
-glD:: ~...
a... 2 gf cO'
:5~~ lD~
::J .:i: t')~
bl ~1j
\1l b ,g"-
t') a. a.
I
t---
2~
(f)
c<)~
Gf-
ctI
W
OJ .0---
00:::
Z<t:
~
6-7-07
S2
I
I
I
2x6 BlK'C BTWN
JOISTS W / f6d AT
4" O/C
L-='_-_ UPPER FLOOR UPPER FLOOR
I
,-
f
EXIST 24" TJ -
JOISTS
STUO BELOW EA NEW
AND EXIST JOIST
0 SECTION 0 SECTION
SCALE 3/4"-1'-0" SCALE 3/4"-1' 0"
BOTTOM P NAILING
PER SHEAR WALL
=,,~ ~J 6n:~~16d AT 6"
UPPER FLOOR
TO ROOf
T JL JOISTS
NEW 24" TJL
2,6 STUOS W/ 1/2" JOISTS
CDX SECTION
0
SCALE 3/4"=.' 0"
eD SECTION
SCALE 3/4"=1'-0"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ct. SYM
DBL TOP PLATE
I
2x4 BLK'G (FLAT)
BEHIND STRAP
BTWN STUDS
PLYWOOD ABOVE WALL
OPENING SAME NAILING
AS SHEAR WALL EA
SIDE OF OPENING W /
BLK'G
I
I
+ 1+ +
+
+
I
STUD
MSTC66 STRAP W / 16-lOd
EA END OVER PLYWOOD
(EA END OF WINDOW SILL)
I
I
2x4 BLK'G (FLAT)
BEHIND STRAP
BTWN STUDS
DBL WINDOW SILL
I
o
STRAP DETAIL
SCALE 3/4" I'D"
BOTTOM P NAIUNG
PER SHEAR WALL
6J~E~16d AT 6"
STUDS FULL
HEIGHT
ALL EXT WAUS
1/2" CDX
UPPER FLOOR
LEGEND
.
HD H1 1
SW 1
/////
NEW 24" TJL
JOISTS
BEARNG WALL BELOW
NON-BR'G WALL BELOW
BR'G WALL ABOVE
BEARING POINT 2 STUD MIN OR
ONE TRIMMER PLUS ONE KNG STUD
HOLD QOWN SEE SCHEDULE
SHEET S2
SHEAR WALL SEE SCHEDULE
SHEET S4
HEAOER OR BEAM
CD NUMBER OF TRIMMER STUDS
I
I=-= f'''=- ~~~
11~"I'-' _j~,
r I
I c--- 'r- U
I - -' -no L
il
L__ ___I
=-1-
,
II
,I
I[
l
~UFF _',
c~,l
l
=J
err n\
, ~
,-----[1
l'Ib-'_J
,- ,[
lk_
47
~=---=
::ICe
LLI-I:J:J _b,./'L,
1--_
~~.
I 'Jel '-' II
I' 'L_' I
II ;1 L:Lev ]
IUL-~-
i:
~~ I :=!.o
;-,
Ci~=-l -
CCi~F::=:::' :~F
/^'.'-..
- "
-->/
(;
~_.:::.J-
!LJ!
__-F
CFCE~E
-~I;n~l'l~
___ll
'I II
___I \ LU,}J'r y~
" ,
~I /1 ~:~,'G UPPER
I ,r,--'
~l I r-, I 0 L
- ~ ,I 1__1' ' : \
- -~ ~ EXISTING FL007R
r - !'---L /11 ... I ~
'L_r--c"F'=,::: I!--l;;~t - ~ -~~\ c
x....
LL.lN 51/4x 51/4)(
5Y,4'SW3,,1/B ,,1/B
~"7 ---:-St;T~~
B'-O" 0 NOTE 4
"tJI~.-~,
-r-
V=-'~ IlIcl"Lc
. I
t
1 11- 11
HD HI HD H1 HD H1 CLIPS T &B AT CANOPY
\ SUPPORT, TYP
NEW LOCATION OF
EXISTING CANOPY
NOTE 6
F: (.C F\l..JN~
[~,~;~ I, ,\It.oO\~_
,h u\J 'iI...
f--hl{l_ -'I \~"I[,O,\' J
For ) A~: , (\J'<' T '
f[,\' ,'l(j'!>J
o
"-
o
I
Q0 ~D~I u
"-
0
'" ...
I- ~
< 0
~ z
,
I-
;1;
r-r
5 1/4'20 PSL FB
I -,I ,[,r
'LLl JJ\
I-
< ...
~ ...
, l-
I- 0
Z
6-2x6
STUDS
;1;
~
z
EXISTING
UPPER FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
SCALE 1/B"-I' 0"
NOTES:
ALL EXISTING CONDITtONS MUST BE
FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR
NOTIFY ARCHITECT N WRJTING OF
ANY DISCREPANCIES
SEE ARCH'L FOR ALL DIMENSIONS
3 ~lf~gds~UJHJ~~ %4~"T~JCG~~D
1 1/2" GYP CRETE
ALIGN STUDS W / POST ABOVE
EXISTlNG HEADER AND HOLD DOWNS TO
REMAIN
PRIOR TO A TT ACHING EXISTING CANOPY
CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ACCURATE
SCALED SKETCH OF EXISTING CANOPY
AND CONNECTION DETAILS TO ENG1NEER
FOR REVIEW AND POSS9.E REVISIONS
ALLOW ONE WEEK FOR REVIEW
7 PROVIDE STUO CENTERED BELOW JOISTS
WHERE BOTH TOP PLATES ARE BROKEN
MSTC2B STRAP w/ B-16d EA END
'll
...
~ HDH'
i HD H1EA Q0
END 1
I 53
:"HDI/1
POCKET WALL
FOR BEAM
NOTE B
EDWARD JONSON AND ASSOCIATES, P S
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
5990 BATTLE POINT DRIVE
BAINBRIDGE IS, WA 98110-3407
(206) 7BO-0524 FAX (206) 7BO-55B7
~
r.::I
E-<
Z
r.:l
U
:>-<
E-<
I--<
Z
~ z
::2! 0
::2! Eo-<
0 0
U Z
.....
~ :r:
rn
rn <
r.::I ~
U
I--< en
>- r.;l
~ """
r.::I r.;l
rn Z 0
~ 0 Z
...... <
0 E-<
...... ...... Eo-<
Z Cl ~
r.::I Cl 0
rn < p..
"
o
I
"
I
<0
W
'<
o
o
~
W
0::
~
~
~
iil <Xl
>0 (])
~ lD ~
If ~ iii
,s.Jj t
1) ~
Vl _
\IJ 5
'" 0.
....
I'l~
~"
<01
I",
ffj<ll
........
~o
0<0
~t:!-
'q)'Ej
8"-
.<:
0.
I
~
2~
(f)
~~
(jf-
cr:
W
m
o
z
--.1
I
U
----.
0:::
<(
6-7-07
S3
--I ~:.
I :1' EX GLB EX GLB EX GLB
,.( ~ ~ 1~
I :i1 EXGLB I;j EXGLB; EXGLB ~ I;j
I::~ in
~Iun..~,nnnu I:!
~.s__ __.;;::;;::;;_____.:::;:;::;____..r:;::;:;;__ ___=;;::-,'~
I
I
-----~----
I
10d GAVL BOX AT
6" O/C TO BLK'G \
2x eLK'G (VENTEO) W /
3-l6d TOF.:NAILS TO
TOP PLATE
r10d AT 6" o/c
; AT DBL TOP P
:i
:11
'I
c.---- !I
:'d
L~..-. ,
:-.~
L--.~[" '--J]l
)-=~ I
I, .__ ,'_
:31 C',I.If:'L':...__.__
1~1L +-.~. ...:,_o~.~~:J
i': : r
~=UlJj~L} - .-nn
2x12 RAF'TER
.'- 1'0 cl _ .'.",- 1'0
I
I
SCALE 3/4"-1' 0"
o
SECTION
SCALE 3/4"-r-0"
SECTION
o
I
/'" OVER FRAl.llNG
Ij...... __... .n::,~"" n__
1."'" ;';
;7"'! '","
~!j I
'.... I
'..... if
EXIST 5 1/B x '35 /.", "
GLe
EXIST'G ""'"
OORt.lERS '\.
2x BLK'G
I
EXIST STUD
WALL
81c._1'lc[1S
,.-....:..:: ----
~
1,
:1
~ 1
"
I
'I
"
;
1
"1,
I,
I'
"
EX GLe
I
RIDGE eM
PER PLANS
2x12 RAFTERS W /
U21Q HANGER
I
@
SECTION
SCALE 3/4"-1' 0"
SECTION
SCALE 3/4"-"-0"
0)
F-
:;...l----L-.....!
'Ii
!
;
:'1
EX GLB
I
L't.U~
OVER FRAMING \
:::::::::\=/====:::::::::
I Ivl
"t:.'l::q 'II'
/!.. ~~~~~"=4
~~-"''''::t:1:...'t:;
It"""..:::..
"",
2x12 RAFTERS
l;-..
I
I
F ~......
I ,
'--.....,
EXIST / ""
RAFTERS
2x6 PONY WALL WI
Y.2~)i:DX W/ ,Od AT
I
ADD HI CLIP TO
EXIST RAFTERS
\ TRIM EXIST
RAFTER T AP..S
I
SECTION
SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE
MARK SHEA nUNG ANO PANEL BOTTOM PLATE NAILING BLK'G eTWN JOISTS ANCHOR eOL TS
TD TOP PLATE AT
EDGE NAlLlNG AT INTERIOR WALLS INTERIOR WALLS NOTE 5
SW I PANEL ONE SIDE W / 16d AT 6" O/C '6d AT 6" o/e K'b'" Dt;t ~M~D a"
10d GALV BOX AT 6"
O/C, BLK'G REQ'D
SW2 PANEL ONE SIDE W / 16d AT 4" O/C '6d AT 4" O/C ~~~: g~e \'I.a~6 a"
10d GALV BOX AT 4"
o/e, BLK'G REQ'D
SW 3 ~tdN~AC~~~i~~ ~( NOT APPLlCAeLE NOT APPL1CABLE ~~g: ~JCA~B~6 B"
~6'.fE ~L~~ R~a'D
(0
SCALE 3/4"-" 0"
I
I
I
NOTES'
I WALL SHEAnuNG SHALL BE 1/2" COX OR 76"6" ose PANELS INSTALLED EITHER HORIZONTALLY OR VERTICALLY
~6 ~J?,~~D~TJT sJ~D~If~H~Wl~G ~~oilEwEA~IT~n~~-~tf€SJ~~~Af~':..~o1s'i_LL~ttelHI~gp_
PLATE (SEE TYPICAL EXTERIOR WALL NAP..ING DETA1L)
2 ALL NAlLS SHALL BE DRIVEN FLUSH BUT SHALL NOT FRACTURE THE SUR, ACE OF THE SHEA THING
AT ABUTTING PANEL EDGES USE DBL STUDS SPIKED TOGETHER w/ 2-16d AT 6" O/C
4- WHERE PANElS ARE APPLIED TO BOTH FACES. PANEL JOINTS SHALL FALL ON DIFFERENT FRAMING MEMBE~S
OR DBL STUDS SPIKED TOGETHER W/ 2-16d AT 6" O/C
5 ~r~1~~~tRN~'6~~sB~~T~.Aef8;.~~ ~~~D~~s~~~S' EPOXY GROUTED. EMBED 8-
I
I
P::
>:r:i
E-<
Z
>:r:i
D
:>-<
E-<
.......
Z
:::>
:::E z
:::E 0
E-<
0 c:l
D Z
>-<
6d ::r::
rJ)
U) <(
>:r:i ~
U
....... r;i
> ~
0:::; ...:I
>:r:i I'Ll
""- U) Z c:l
P:: 0 Z
EX1ST1NG ....... <(
ROOF BELOW 0 E-<
....... ....... E-<
Z ~ 0::
>:r:i ~ 0
U) <I: 0..
..-.-:':-:-::-~
--:... --1
_H_~_.~
.Ie_i
II:
i~r-r- I
f ,- ~ I -! I
"
l'
K
,=0\0 C:hE~ICE
~''"\
L j]U
Ii II I H=A.If-
Ii : :::LE'! I,
I
"
---,- , I
j]
J....w,
lL_.-
---=--:-_- ---...::~- .- ~I
~--!li--- --..-
___...__j.. ____...!~Q~rJJ_.....
,I 1"-
II I
II
n~ _ ~
"-11
- ~f\,---J .'.nJ....I.n~~=.J.,..
1 f II II ~
~: ~ '-_~~:-Jd- I
'E~ r5~W~11
"1'- - , - - - -- --J--:.--:-- -~:l
~ _---I:
~
U
!
L......,
: -- _.~,--..---
.
"
EX GLe
EX GLe
r
~
EX GLB
EX GLe
ExJ
CllQt
...~
~..
...~
EX GLB
< '....t __n.
\ EX GLB
,
,
,
EXG~
1 '\ "
~ \I
,'JL i I-PJ-,fJ _'~r
$
I
I
f
I
ROOF FRAMING PLAN
10' TO 12'
OVERFRAMING SCHEDULE
UP TO B'
2x6 AT 24" O/C
2xa AT 24" O/C
2x10 AT 24' O/C
B' TO 10'
EXISTING
SCALE' 1/a"=l'-o"
LEGEND
NOTES:
BEARING WALL BELOW
--==-,NO!'l-.BR'G W!-':.L..BEL,<:J,,! OR EXlST'G __.
ROOF SHEA nuNG 7 L16" OSB WI 10d GAL V BOX AT
~~g.6C PANRL EDGES, 10" 0/ FIELD PL YCLIPS
ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS MUST BE FIELD VERIFIED
BY CONTRACTOR NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING
OF ANY DISCREPANCIES
SEE ARCH'l FOR ALL DIMENSIONS
.
BEARING POINT 2 STUD MIN OR
ONE TRIMMER PLUS ONE KJNG STUO
UNO
SW 1
/////
SHEAR WALL SEE SCHEDULE
SHEET S4
MSTC2a STRAP HORIZ BTWN BEAM AND DBL TOP
PLATE w/ a-16d SINKERS EA END
ADD Hl CLIP TO EXIST RAFTERS
WHERE DBL TOP PLATE IS BROKEN, AOD MSTC28
STRAP w/ 6-16d EACH END
AT OVERFRAMING OF EXISTING ROOF, REMOVE ALL
ROOFING. ROOF' SHEA THING TO REMAIN.
EDWARD JONSON AND ASSOCIATES, P S
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
5990 BATTLE PO/NT DRIVE
BAINBRIDGE 1$. WA 98110-3407
(206) 7aO-0524 FAX (206) 780-5587
HEADER OR BEAM
EXPIRES 6/02/09
~
I
"
I
eD
W
I-
c5
~ 2
> ~
ll:! u
N
eD
ill !:<
>- ~
~CD~
~~ ~
.c0!~
- ~
~ -
\2l l;
'" "-
(!;
~R
,\,1
NN
Itlltl
......
~o
OeD
~S-
E~
.c
"-
I
~
2
(f)
~~
Gf-
ctI
Wu
aJ--
00::
z<{
~
(f)
f-
6-7-07
S4
I
I
I
MECHANICAL NOTES
I
General
~ri< to c:onfo"" to Intomatlonal M<lGhanlcal code. Unlto"" Pluml>l"ll Coda. City of Port Mgelas Cod... and
Washington 5ta1;a Energy Code
2. Taka out and pay for all poMl1lto. and f..s r",\ulred.
:3 UN eufflGlant Joumeyman wortonm1 and com~ eupeMsore In thG 4XC(;tItlon of "thle work to ,,"sure proper and
ad",\uata Inat4lllatlon titrougho~.
4. ProAdd 0"" year M'f'ttMl 6uarant&l: on all workmanship and matMtale
5 Cutting, Patching. and Demolition:
a Do aU cu~tlng, pauhl"ll and demolition r",\ulrad to 1n&~1I ~.I. .nd syewm. .p""lfted and shown on tite
drawl"lls.
~. ~tI"ll ohall ~ done In a ne.~ and workman II"" m.nner limiting scopa to only tita~ which 10 n<lG88sa", to
accomplish tha work. Rmnove all cu~ maWrial from alto.
c. 00 no cutting of auuCWral mem~ro wttIto~ poMl1lsalon of tite Owner
d. T a"" praca~na to prot.ac1; ~Ildlng. con~ and oocupanW .nd rap.lr to """ now condition or raplaco If
dlracud. all damage to ~lIdlng and titelr contonto
6. Tho Col1l'raCtor ahall vlolt alW prior to sumltting a I>Id and not.a .11 condltlona affactlng hiS work. No ~a will ~
.Iiow<ld for coordl~n or ralocation ofaxlsti"ll conditions _ shown on tIta drawt"ll.' All worlc ohall ~ In
COnfom14l1C8 wttIt UPC, IMC, WSEC s~rda.
7. ProvId. all nu;lcs, ~nda .nd supports for m<lGhanlcal ",\ulpme~ and duct:worlc as r",\ulred.
6. Th. drawlnga ara g_rally dlagrammatio. ComplaW daWlla of tite ~Ildl"ll which aff_ tit. In.~latlon may n~ ~.
shown. CoI1I'raCtor to provIda compIaW HV AC oyeWm .s ahown on tha drawt"lls. Exact; Iooatlon of .11 worlc to ~
vanfled In tita flotd.
9 Contractor ahall ~ raaponall>le for damag.. cauaad I>y thalr _ and that of~.... ~aa, In tIta """"ution of
thalr _ and that of ~.r ~ad.. and ah.1I ma"", or pay for, all nacaaaary rapalrs to r..tora damag. to IIl<.o-now
condition ~ no ~ to tIta Owner
10. Elactrlcal E<lulpm~ and WIrIng: ProvId. all com:roI condul~ and wlra alltlOClaWd wttIt tit. mechanical ",\ulpmant.
Inoun In cornplla_ wttIt tIta ",,\ulr~ of tIta alOC1:rtcal work.
11. ProvIda ftnal a....~llt drawt"ll. and malntonance manual..
12. 6alanol"ll: Ilala_ all air outlaw to wttItln + 10% of that ahown on tIta drawl"llo. 6alanclng co~aor shan ~.
Naudorfar EnglnO<<'O Inc.
13. ProvIda _aIon of flra ~n piping .a ""'Iulred. Run now m.ln liMa from _ aa r",\ulred. ModI~ aprlnklar
rfear If ""'Iulrod. provIda complaw daalgn ~11d oyeWm. S88 9p<lGlflcatlona for additional r",\ulramanto.
Produ~s
1. U.. all moana _sa", to p~ ~rfalo, ~afor., durf"ll .nd aftor Inawllatlon and to ~ tit.lna~11ad
worlc of ~r ~ad... In tite av~ of damage, ImmadlaWly mao. .11 repairs and replac<:manto nacaasa", to tIta
approval of tite Owner .nd a~ no addltlon.1 ~ to tite Owner
2. WaW Piping. Typ. "L' copper wltit wrough~ or forged coppar~tlngs.lead fraa oolder.
:3 OVW Piping: All OVW piping to ~. no-hu~ caa~ Iron wltit haavy duty s~lnla.. _el flttlng..
4 Sh~ M~1: All duawork to ~ oh~ ~I .nd comply wttIt SMACNA Ductwork S~ndarda.
5. Du~ Insulatlon, 5aa In.ulatlon ul>la for titlolcn..a Sound lining ah.1I ~.1' titlck,:3'o pef dan6lty and ~e glued on
with clips at r..eOl on center oach way maxfmum. Ducu Galled out, for eoundllnrng do not requlro mctemallnsulatlon.
If titoy m~ WSEC In.ulatlon ",,\ulramenW
6. Wmr Plpa Insulation 5aa Insul.tIon ~l>Ie for titlckn.... FI~ergl.a.lnsulatlon with flama-~rda~ kraft; pap.r
vapor ~am..... ProvIda Prafa~rfoa~ Tha""allnaulatlng FI~t1"ll Covers.
7. HV AC E<lulpmant. Fumloh .nd Ino~1I HY AC a. .hown In tite schedule. Iocawd on tite plan..
Ex<lcutlon
1. Prfor to any worlc or fa~catlon, carefully Inap~ ~ha axIatlng condition. and vorf~ titat all .uch condition. ara
compatll>la to tit. point whore titl. Ina~llatIon may commence
2. Pluml>lng-waW piping.
a. M.ka all JoI"" In coopor tu~e wltit Iaad fraa ooIder appllad In .~rf~ accordance wttIt tit. manufaCWro".
recommendations
~. Ma"" all plpa pen~r.tlon. In walla, flocrs and roof waWr and alr-tlg~. Provide piping aupports aa ra",ulrod I>y
coda. Ina~1I par UPC.
:3 Sh~ M_I Conouuatlon and In.ullatlon of.1I ductwork .hall comply wttIt .IISMACNA SUlndarda (:3" W.C.).
4. Record drawl"lla ah.1I ~e ka~ on alto .nd updawd d.lly. Provide me..urement to .11 underground and concaalad
work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
End of Machanloal N~
I
INSULATION SCHEDULE
DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
I
REFRIGERANT PIPING INDOOR
1" FII>ERGLA5S IMTH KRAFT PAPER
MAKE / MODEL
MCD 2'><2' FACE
5OFZ>Z FACE EGG
CRATE RETURN
1l5O RL STEEL
DESCRlP110N
SUPPLY DIFFUSER
RETURN GRILLE
RELIEF GRILLE
MARK
A
I>
C
REFRIGERANT PIPING OUTDOOR
ARMA FLEX 1" W ALUMINUM COVER
I
DUCT WORK
1.5 PCF SOUND LINING
'"
6ASED ON TITUS
I
I
LOUVER SCHEDULE
*
MODEL / DESCRIP110N
ELF 68116" FRAME W/:3/4" I>IRD
SCREEN
Elf 68116" FRAME W/:3/4" 61RD
SCREEN
ELF 6811 6" FRAME W/:3/4" I>IRD
SCREEN
MARK
S.P.
0:3"
FREE AREA
2.SI> "'I' Ft
2.74 aq. F1:.
LV-l
LV-2
.05
I
0:3
2.51> "'I Ft.
LV.:3
'"
RUSKIN IS flASIS OF DESIGN
I
~J:~'::~
C8:l
o
IZl
CZI
9-
1:----"T~
r----~
.........
t:::I}J
t:::u
t Kl t
t::::c=:{
t:~=-=~
~
~
ese.~e.a
OR
~=::t
~
~
~
I
t:cr:~
.F/S
Qe.D.D
~DL:~
I
I
tl)J:~
~
~:U:~
t 1111 t
~
A THROAT SIZE
t
SIZE
24"x1l6"
72"xll)"
24"><:36"
DUCT - FIRST NUM6ER IS SIDE SHOWN
euPPL Y DUCT UP
sum Y DUCT DOWN
RETURN DUCT UP
RETURN DUCT DOWN
SQUARE ELOOW
SQUARE ELOOW TURNING VANES
RADIUS ELOOW
ROUND ELllOW TURNING VANES
ROUND TO RECTANGULAR TRANSITION
LARGE TO SMALL TRANSITION
DIRECTION OF FLOW
INCLINED DROP IN DIRECTION
OF AIR FLOW
INCLINED RISE IN DIRECTION
OF AIR FLOW
SOUND LINING
VOLUME DAMPER
FIRE DAMPER
SMOKE DAMPER
FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER
flACKDRAFT DAMPER
MOTORIZED DAMPER
SPLITTER DAMPER
ACCESS DOOR.
FLEXI6LE CONNECTION.
DIFUSER TYPE
SEE SCHEDULE
NOTES
LEGEND
-<i---
-c-
-55-
~
--$-
1-
....csJ..,..
.;.
,..-----"-1
L.._____~
. . .
1>4"x6'-LD :375 CFM
~
2O'x 10"-L 650 CPM
t H t
(j)
MARK
MAKE/MODEL
CARRIER I
HP-l PERFOMANCE 13
MYXA024:30l
CARRIER I
HP-2 PERFOMANCE 1:3
MYXA024:301
MARK
MAKE / MODEL
AH-l
CARRIER I FX48N6
0:30 6.2
AH-2
CARRIER I FX41>N6
000 6.2
GAS PIPING
CONDENSATE PIPING
COLD WATER PIPING
HOT WATER PIPING
HOT WATER REClRC. PIPING
SANITARY SEWERS
VENT LINES
STORM DRAINS
sum Y OUTLET CEILING DIFFUSER
ARROWS INDICATE THROW DIRECTIONS
RETURN INLET CEILING DIFFUSER
ARROWS INDICATE THROW DIRECTIONS
EXHAUST INLET CEILING DIFFUSER
ARROWS INDICATE THROW DIRECTIONS
LINEAR DIFFUSER
INTAKE LOUVER & SCREEN
EXHAUST LOUVER
THERMOSTAT
40R 4-0R L
ot- OR 0--
C+ OR c-
-P+ OR -L
-K>+- OR -0-
te+ OR ~
-
UPIDN
..i:::t...
---
~
~
-t:P-
-I>cl-
-*"
+
r
~
t=J
ELOOW
ELOOW UP
ELOOW DOWN
TEE
TEE UP
TEE DOWN
FLOW DIRECTION
PIPE PITCH UP OR DOWN.
GATE VALVE.
QiECK VALVE.
SOlENOID VALVE.
flALL VALVE
2-WAYVALVE.
2-WAY AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE.
UNION
STRAINER.
METER.
CIRCUIT SETTER.
TOTAL
CAP ACllY
HEAT PUMP SCHEDULE
REFRIGERANT
SEER EER WEIGHT CHARGE LINES VOLTAGE MCA MCIl S~~~D NOTES
VAPOR LIQUID
2 TONS
1:3
11.1
201
7.16
:3/4
:3/6
201> 11 19.7 00 7D
2 TONS
1:3
11.1
201
1.16
:3/4
:3/6
206/1 197 00 70
ESP" W.C.
FAN
H.P.
AHU SCHEDULE
CFM MIN 05A VOLTAGE
NOTE:3
.:35
11:3
675
000
ELECTRIC
HEAT
SMART HEAT
KFCEH010H10
9kw (C24OV)
:3 STAGE
SMART HEAT
KFCEH010H10
9kw (G24OV)
:3 STAGE
2 CONNECTION
POINTS
CONNECTlDNl
I HEATER
CONNECTION 2
I FAN
CONNECTION 1
I HEATER
CONNECTION 2
I FAN
FLA M~ MC8 NOTES
:325 44 45
24 :3.0 15
:325 44 45
24 :3.0 IS
.1l5
11:3
675
206/1
000
208/1
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NOTES'
1. PROVIDE TXV VALVE, TOR. CRANK CASE HEATER. EV APORA TER FREEZE T-ST A T, IMNTER START CONTROL. COMPRESSOR START ASSIST
CAPACITOR & RELAY. LON AM61ENT CONTRCLLER. 6ALL 6EARING FAN MOTOR. SOUND HOOD: TYPICAL ALL UNITS.
2. EAQi UNIi SHALL HAVE MOTORIZED 24 VAC DAMPERS FOR FULLY MODULATING ECONOMIZER. DOC SYSTEM PROVIDED 6Y OWNER.
3. PROVIDE CO2 SENSOR AT RETURN DAMPER. MODE~ AIR SENSE 310.
4. PROVIDE DISCONNECT KIT W/SINGLE POINT IMRlNG ALL AHU(S)
5. PROVIDE LONG LENGTH REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIES PROVIDE 1" INSULATION ON VAPOR LINE INTERIOR (FIElER GLASS W KRAFT
PAPER) SECURE TUIlING TO PREVENT \16RATlON PROVIDE HARD SHUT OFF, Ill-FLOW TXV CHARGE PIPING FOR EXTEND LENGTH
1..J11
,Iii
0==
~
~
Pc:l
c...:>
>--:
It::
~.
Sj~
O~
c...:>
~sa
C'/Ja:
~e-:
o~1
Eo< ~ rn
C'/J,l:l
....
ZO==l'-
~o.
~Z:
~~t\l
<C'/Jt':l
~
VJ)
~.
EXPIRES os '07
~
~
~n
~ I
] ~
Bill .
;~!
jlii !
~ !
!ls
lDt-
~~
~~
ii
J~
Cl.
~~
~<~
i~
i~
2~
d
'!&OOOA6C
I Eng~ne~r1ng Se~lc:s Inc.1
1MOw.........,. ~..WA..UO
I'bcIINI ZOLOoIUM' ,.. 2ICIOt.I4a......
Mc~ .0
f7\SUPPL Y DIFFUSER DETAIL /
VSCALE: NONE ! \
------l-------\lf ~-~~ ~---rv ----TOy l -~j:--=-:-~ ~[ /~ ' / -- r----
IL -------J ll,ll J ~ -- :-_:-/ 0 0 I
------- II 1
I! I I'
'IlL 1'1:,
I l -7 1- :,--- - -
I ___ AiTACHTO I 0 0 0 Iii
1-,- _ _ If ~ ,::::;"" - - -'I ROUND METAL DUCT Ill__ "'__ =_ -"1__ _r' "" ". " "' ~ ___ _ ___ _ _ _ _:::c ""'Y~_"" ;;., J!,
--- ~) :":: _: lf~~ c___ -- ___l- -- K i. ,J r~~~L/~DN~ ~~CA O-~
-----...... ~_ t,-- I .....8xi} / ~V""
HEATPUMPCLEARA,~~~___ ~:J RETURN GRILLE .} VOLUME DAMPER ~ /: : 0 X 0 0 '/ 0)< 0 :i
l ri UP TO AHU-' + '. , A,.. ..r r 12 3 ..LL..J I
HP-' i;-- ____ ________J I 1/ \. "" " ...,' I
OUTDOO~~~~~ :~- ~~-=-~~JlL__,,\ 0~~!N~~N GRILLE DETAIL - -', 0 4- 0 0 ~1~ ~o 0 I
HP-2 i: : II r~~ ri~J do; =~~ ~~ I {A ~ ;1
'+...J----Jl II I~ v h..r- "'./ ~
II: 111-------1111 01" I^ IT Ih ~.
I I ' II I . .1 0 0 0 I '(YiJ ;; _
: : I t.=--==-=-=-7-JJ I i~ ~
! ! ----------11 tfl U;;M12 n
I : II 3/4" COND I' II ~1Ii4Xi I
l_l:::::[~~~~~:!;E~;~;~~;d~::1f~;1!:j~B~-:'~7~~~~~ J
<.V LV-1J .1
- ./.: 7~'" 22'/.2t/~ ---+- - -f:LZ~7-...z~:::?&
12" flAC flaX " 1 I
I /\,. J
I I
L. __ _ _ _ __. __ __J
I
I
A IT ACH TO STRUCTURE, (TYP)
~ HANGER STRAP. (TYP)
SHEET METAL
STUfl DUCT
DUCT STRAP
FLEXlflLE DUCT. 4 FT MAX LENGTH
6e1' MAX. TOTAL ANGLE FOR ALL flENDS
I
~OUNDMETAl
DUCT
VOLUME DAM PER
SUSPEND ;36" ON CENTERS
50UNDLlNED
I
PLENUM
DIFFUSER NECK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL
@ 012 4
I-Ijlb..........d I
~ 5CALE 114";1'-0"
5CAlE: 114" ; l' - 0"
I
I
0::
~
E--<
Z
~
u
Ii
o~
u
E-<
~p::
U)~
t3tf
o~~
E-<~rI.I
U):S
:z; 0=: z..
sa,
~z:
~~(\J
<U)rn
~ ~
.!.
"'i i
tl &i
~ ~ ~
R 8
~
~ I lDi
'"' Cll il
~~~ ~~
i i j II
; ~ J~
~:
~~
~~
tJJ=
~~ I
---I
~
'3&000 ec
FI. N
M"~J
,- - -- - ---- --<- ~-- . -------
~
~
z
j Po:::!
.. -- --- u
~~
i~
I
I
o~
I u
E-t
I co"d~
0
I U)~
~ .
1" INSULAlION CLOSED TYPE ASTM B 88M, TYPE A BRAZED g~1
I CELL FOAM COPPER REFRIGERANT LINES.
VERlICALL Y RACK
REFRIGERANT LINES ON WALL
I 8~~~~~~ROUND REFRIGERANT PIPING CONDUIT DETAIL U):S
:Z;~t'-
I y-.o~ EO.
VACUUM BREAKER OPEN CLEANOUT (TYP.) ~Z:
'. TO ATMOSPHERE ~~~
DX COOLING
.-- COIL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL
SCALE: 1/4" = l' - 0"
@
I
I
SEE CONDENSER MOUNlING DETAIL FOR
ADDI1IONAL INFORMATION
I
SIGHT GLASS
BYPASS ON FILLER
FILTER/DRYER INSTALL WI FLARED FITnNGS FOR REMOVAL
INVERTED TRAP HEIGHT SLIGHTLY AElOVE EVAPOATOR COIL
_~G~~~~~______________LL:^TE AT AHU
TXV ------f" TYPICAL COIL . :
I TXV SENSING BULB I
I
I
I
I
I
CONDENSATE 15 PIPE DIAMETERS I
----____~~~~~___~~~~~~~~__J
SEE REFRIGERANT COIL -- ----
CONNEC1ION DETAIL
-5EE DETAIL([)
I
r--
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONCRETE PAD I
I
I
I
I
I
0REFRIGERANT PIPING DETAIL
5CALE NO SCALE
I
~
@~~~~EENSATE TRAP DETAIL
~
.!.
;n
REFRIGERATION NOTES:
~ i CIllJ;
loo. CD s~
~ ~ ~~
ifill .,;f
!~Hj
~~
~~
~~
i=
~~
~
1. SLOPE SUCTION LINES TOWARD THE COMPRESSOR TYPICAL
2 FIELD VERIFY EQUIVALENT LENGTH OF REFRIGERATION PIPING MEETS MANUFACTURES
RECOMMENDATIONS PRIOR TO START OF INSTALLAlION. TYPICAL.
:3. ALL REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SHALL BE BRAZED WITH DRY NITROGEN BEING
CIRCULATED THROUGHOUT THE PIPING WHILE BRAZING IS TAKING PLACE. NO SOFT SOLDER
CONNEC1IONS SHALL BE PERMISSIBLE.
THERMOSTATIC
EXPANSION VALVE
EQUALIZING LINE
THERMOSTAlIC BULB
TO BE AS CLOSE TO
COIL AS POSSIBLE
NOT ALLOWED ON
VERlICAL LINES
CLAMP
SUC1ION LINE
THERMAL BULB LOCATION
0~;f,N~!~L~RANT COIL CONNECTION DETAIL
'35000 ac
FL N
M"t2
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12'~ - r; f[111_[[J_- ,
I
I
I I
I I
J~.: ):-: ='.~-=-- ::-c. -=::::'_-=--=-'=:C:--=_:-=--=-_-=--==--=-=--=--==- -=-.--=:=__--===--::=..-:--=-=_
I I I
, . SECTION A
SCALE: 1/4" = l' - 0"
I I
I . -- ,-, J "'~, Ill' j I t I j I'll
/~m~ )i~" i+ I
[ IIIt L:.:~=-:.:=::::.::::.;;_.~:::::=--=,~. -d", f j 1111
I 1 --~-----'--;:c:~"-----' -- ~~l I I
z:=-';;:-::?::::=-==.::r:::::::; -~.::-_-=-"'-'--"'- -- 1 I'
J // ---".-:;.c... ___..J r-- ---.---- -- -'.' , 1_.
~ - - -- -- - -;;:: :..:...---===:::: / --=----1 --- -- ~ -'r-;':~ -:f - I
:-;;r--=-=-':"~~:':'~~:::::-==-,,:;:;2'~-~=:-= - ===--=-::\:.-=--=='-=---=~=-'---=-':lJ ! I !
I I >> - -1------ _u -------.-.- ---> -- -- -- . I I I
/;,z-:-_=--:=-:-=--=-==== -----.: -==;.~ -':,- -----T~~ r 1_ -- I .
, L~T ~~-=-- := ~~J[l==I'll~Jll ~=~II:~--::~~ I I! I
]~==f -j L_ = --=-- [___ ----llC-J-J ~::-1' I !
--==i ~ ~L-___._ ------- _____) I~.____I
t: -..::~ -- - -::--_::::- -=-------==- ---- ~ --=-:::-------:..-:1 ' I o-:-.-~--
~ - ----------..----.--- --------".,------------ --- -"", --- n_ II
I - ~~ :~~;;_ ~~ =~~~:;.=~~~~~ ~ ~ :
----.------.--- ---- C:~::J 1 I _. __
~---~ -. -=~ ----.~ I I'"
--- ------- r . I '
___=~T~= - -- - F II:~- --~~J: I H
~~~ j-;. - =~~=::--- '[\-11[/] -==~~~ i r=~l
t ~ _ _________ I I 1-- ~
f---=-:::--::::::':::-":::"--=:--=:"-=-':--~-"" - ::---=-=---,,-- -:::.'-::'- ~-=-~~-~"'-- ~-"-I-- -,~. - ;":.~'-
ELEVATION
SCALE: 1/4" = l' - (Y'
SCALE. 1/4" = I' - (Y'
p::;
~
Z
P:::l
U
>-;1
~
~.
~;
O~
U
E-<
~~
CZ)l1.
P:::lE-i
Urz:I
>~
o P::; E-<
E-< P:::l rn
CZ)..c:l
....
Zp::;/:'-
~O,
QZ:
QP:::l",
<CZ)O')
~ ~
;n
~ I ai
] ~ ~~
!~ . ~~
~ ~ I !!
: 1: J~
~ If Il.
~~
~~
~~
~~
~;
~
I
I
DEVICE
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONDUIT
I
-
--
1. Th. G.......I Condltlon. .nd Suppi.mOl1tary G.n....1 Condltlon. ,h.1I ~. con.ld...... ., p.rt;
of thl. Sp""lfioa1;lon.
2 Contl'.c:w .h.1I vI.1t .Its prior to ~lddlng Elld. .h.1I ..rv. .. ovIdonce of knowl<de. of
Old.tlng condltlon..
:3. Furnl.h .1I1.~r. materl.I.. O<julpm.nt .nd tool. to perform .1_no.1 worlc .hawn. notad or
eoheduled for . oomplots .nd finl.hed Installatlon.
a All matorlal. .nd O<julpment .hall ~ commercl.1 grsdo and .hall o.rry a U L laNl
~. M.terl.I.. produote .nd ,,\ulpm.nt. Inoludlng all components thoroof. .h.1I ~ new .nd
euoh a. .ppear on tho Und.rwrlto.. L.""r.ton., L1,t of Approved ltam. .nd ,hall meet
re'l"lrements of ASTM. IEEE. IPCEA. NEC. NEMA. RLM. CEM .nd _ r"""6n12ad
.tand.rd. .nd sh.1I ~ sl2ad In oonformlty with r.,\ulr.m.nts of ths N.tlonal EIO(;trlo.1
Cod. .nd oth.r .ppllo.l>Is codss. whloh""... .rs mors 'trlng.nt.
4. lnolud. all wort to r...lv. and Install Raviaw pnor to ~Id. Provld. all wort and .ddltlon.1
matanal. for ths Installation of this O<julpment.
5. Th. word "provid," as uoed h.r.ln m.an'-to furnish and lnetall complots.
6. All wort to ~ In accord.nce with NEC and allappiloa~l. Fed...al. State .nd Local Cod...
7. S.ours and pay for .11 rO<jul.od permlta .nd Inspection oertlfio._.
8. Sumlt materl.llIste .nd .hop drswlngs for major O<julpmsnt to tho Engln..r for approv.1
5u~mlttols shall ~ In .ccord.nce with G.ner.1 Condltlons .nd ,hall ~.ar tho 'tamp of tho
EI.ctnoal Contractor ,howlng thot hs has rovlawed and .pprov.d th.m L.ok of suoh
Contr.cto~s .pprov.1 will ~ o.u.. for .oj_on without r""law by tho Engineer.
9. Conduit sh.1I ~ standard steel ngld. IMC or EMT (thin wall) .ccordlng to Cods
rO<julremente. Conduit sh.1I ~. conc..led In finished .r.... .,.,.pt as oth.rwI.. .pproved
by Engineer.
.. Minimum "us of condulte shall ~ 3/4" EIO(;trlo MotaIllo Tul>lng (EMf) sh.1I ~
g.lv.nlztld or .1O(;tro-g.lv.nlztld. Fittings shall ~a of tha steal oompr.."on typ.. EMT
sh.1I ~ used for feeda.. .nd ~.nch <:lroulte run .i1ovo su'pended ceiling' or conoe.lad
In Intenor p.rtltlons. EMT ,h.1I not ~ oonoealad In poured oonorots ,I."" or w.lI, IMC
or heavy w.1I oondult Is permitted with ,oraw conn_Ions
~. L1,\uld Tight metal conduit to ~ used only for ,hart; (ioee thon 4 foo1;) conn_ons to
flxtur., .nd O<julpmont ., pormltted by Cod..
o. No oondult to ~ run In ductwork.
10. Wlrs sh.1I ~ slngl. conduotor coppsr with 600 volt Insulation. #10 .nd "",allor .hall ~.
solid. #8.nd Iargar sh.1I ~ str.ndod Minimum wire sl2. shall ~ #12 .,.,opt #14 may ~
used for oontrol. All wl.o .nd oal>l. .hall ~ naw .nd .hall ~a ~ought to tha .Ite In
un~kon p.okaga. All wlnng of .ny tyPO .h.1I ~. In conduit.
.. Gonar.1 wiring shall ~ THHN (Aluminum conductors .ra not permitted.)
11. Wlra connoctors .h.1I ~. ...u.1 to 500t0hlook for #8 and .m.lI.r .nd T & El "Look- TIta" for
#6 .nd I.rg....
12. Lighting flxtur... Inoludlng I.mps. shall ~a furnl.hed .s Indloated on alO(;trlo.1 pian.
Electrlo.1 Contractor sh.lllnstall .11 flxtur.. .nd I.mps. Fluor.soant Muras shall hava
oIectronlo. rapid start; ~.II..te..
13 Alllln..nd low volt.g. pawsr .nd control wlnng Including tamperatura oontl'ol.
conn_ons to motors. d.mpers. Installation of th.rmo.tat.. Interlooklng. ate. .,.,.pt
that whloh ,. .peclflo.11y notod .. ~Ing by M""hanlo.1 Contl'.otor. sh.1I ~ provided I>y
EIO(;trlo.1 ContI'aotor.
14. This Contrsotor .hall do .11 outtlng. oh..lng or oh.nn.llng and p.tchlng .o,\ulrad for .ny
worle und.r this DMslon. Any outtlng sh.1I h.vs pnor .pprov.1 of Englne.r
51eev.. sh.1I axtBnd at la.st 2" .~. flnlshed floor .nd .11 .Ieev... openings. oto . through
fl.o rated wall. and floors .h.1I ~ _lad .ttor conduit In.tallatlon to rotaln th.lr flr.
rating.
15. Color of wlnng dovlo.. .hall match Old_tlng.
. R"".pt.ol.. .h.1I ~, 2OA-I25V - 3-wlr' grounding type ...u.1 to LovIton 5362.
~ 5w1tch.. .h.1I ~ 5peolflo.tlon Gr.d. reted 20A .t 120 volt Leviton 1201.
o. Speol.1 davio.. sh.1I ~. . Fed.r.1 5p""lflo.tlon grad.
d. Previd. staJnloss .ta.1 cav.r pl.te. for .11 devio...
16. Provido safoty .nd dleoonn.ct swltche.. .h.1I ~ fuse or non-fused .. o.lIed for on
dr.wlngs .nd .. rO<julr.d by Cod. 5w1tch.. .h.1I ~ h..vy duty. lo.d .nd horeopower
rated
17 Outlot ~0lC.. .nd cav.r. .h.1I ~. g.lv.nlud. one. pi.... pr..sed .teel knockout type
18 Junction. pull ~. .nd cav... .hall ~. g.lv.nl2ed .te.l. oodo gaug. .120
19 Thr.. ph... .t.rtars .h.1I ~. provld.d with ov.no.d device In ..oh ph... M.gnotlo
motor .tarters .h.1I ~ uoed for Intogr.1 horeopow.r motors Com~lnatlon .tart;ore. wh.n
used. .h.1I contain fu.1U1o .wltch... 5tart;or .h.1I ~ AElEl. Furn.ce or Allon 6rsdlay
20. All .I.ctno wort .h.1l ~. In.tall.d .0 .. to ~ r.adlly aoo...I~I. for operstlng. ..rvlolng.
m.lntalnlng .nd rop.lnng. H.ng.rs .halllnoludo .11 ml.cell.noou. .teel. .uch .. oh.nnol..
rods. oto.. n""....ry for tho Install.tlon of worle .nd _h.1I ~ f..tened to .te.l. ",,"orots
or m..onry. M not to piping. All oondult .h.1l ~. oono..I.d wh.r. po..I~I.. Expo.ad
oondult. .h.1I ~ In .tr.lght IIn.. p.r.II.1 with or .t nght IIn.. wher"".r thay run .long.ld.
or .oro.. .uch IIn... Conduoto.. .hall ~. In conduit. ducts. or .pproved raoaw.yo.
21. EIO(;trloal Panal. and .wltch ~oard. .hall ~ oopper ~.. fully rated and hay. ~It on
c;lroult ~..kers. Hlng.d oov... .han ~a door In door con.tructlon.
22. GUARANTEE.
a. M.tenal., O<julpm.nt and Inst.llatlon .h.1I ~. gu.rante.d for a penod of on. (1) y.ar
from d.ts of .oo.ptsno.. Dofoote whloh .ppe.r dunng th.t penod .hall ~. co"octad
at thl. Contr.oto~. ""pen'"
~. For tho s.ma p.rlod. EI.ctnoal Contractor .hall ~. r..pon.I~la for .ny dam.ga to
pr.mlse. oauoad ~ dof.cts In workman.hlp or In tho wort or .,\ulpment furnlohed
and/or Inatall.d ~ him.
23. FINALLY'
a It I. tho Intont that tho forogolng wort .h.1I ~ compiote In "".ry r..pect .nd that any
matsn.1 or work not .peolfloally mentioned or .hawn on tho dr.wlngo, M neoee..ry to
fully complots tho worle .h.1I ~ furnl.hed.
~ The locatlon of outioto and O<julpment .hown On tho drawing. I. approximate .nd tno
Engln.... .hall hay. tho nght to r.locate any outleta or flxtur.. ~r. thay ar.
In.tallad wIt/1out additional coat.
CONDUIT
G~WP
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
WP INDICATES WEATHER PROOF COVER. W WlRf:oNAY
GFIINDICA TE5 GROUND F AUL T INTERUPTER. $
LIGHTING SWITCH
FOURPLEX RECEPTACLE $.
LOM:R CA5E LITTER INDICATE5 SWITCH LEG.
51NGLE RECEPTACLE $:3
THREE WAY SWITCH
PULL ElOX OR JUNCTION 60X, SIZE PER NEC $4 FOUR WAY 5W1TCH
FU5ED DISCONNECT $D LIGHT DIMMER
NON-FUSED DiSCONNECT. TELEPHONE/DATA TERMINAL ElACKOOARD.
MAGNETIC STARTER 18145 TRAN5FORMER, NUM6ER INDICATES KVA
MAGNETIC STARTER W/ DISCONNECT
PUSH6UTTON STATION 0 FIRE RATED POI(E THROUGH DEVlCE5 AS
INOICA TED
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ~ 5PECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET.
MOTOR CONNECTION.
FLU5H FLOOR OOX DEVICE AS INDICATED. KDoo SIGN OUTLET
~
FLEXl6LE CONDUIT
..
-e
Q)
IZJ-I
[J.I
181
I8I-l
G
~
9)::{
-------
CONDUIT RUN 6ELOW FLOOR OR 6ELOW
GRADE
I
~
DENOTE5 HOME RUN TO PANEL "A".
NUMERAL5 DENOTE ORCUIT 6REAKER #.
SLASH MARKS INDICATE # OF WIRES
CURVED SLASH INDICATES INSULATED
GROUND IF NO SLASH MARKS ARE SHOWN.
PROVIDE WIRES AS REQUIRED.
I
~
C--i
CONDUIT 5TU6 DOWN
CONDUIT 5TU6 UP
I
I
LIGHTING
ABBREVIATIONS
I
D
~
I---O-l
FLUORE5CENT 5TR1P FIXTURE.
FLUORESCENT LIGHT FllCfURE
A AMPERE
AC ALTERNATING CURRENT LTF L1QUIDTIGHT FLEXlElLE CONDUIT
AHJ AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION LTG LIGHTING
AFF A60VE FINI5HED fLOOR
AIC AMP5 INTERRUPTING CAPACITY MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE MCM THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILS
MFR MANUFACTURER
60/0/ MRE COPPER WIRE MGEl MA5TER GROUND ElAR
6LDG 6UILDING MIN MINIMUM
ElKR 6REAKER MLO MAIN LUG5 ONLY
C COIL or CONDUIT ~N) NEW
eEl CIRCUIT 6REMER NEUTRAL
CKT CIRCUIT NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ~NFPA-70~
CO CONDUIT ONLY NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANU ACTURE 5 A550CIA TION
COMM COMMUNICATION5
CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER OH OYER HEAD
DISC DISCONNECT SWITCH PCS PER50NAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DPDT DOU6LE POLE, ooU6LE THRON P5E PUGET SOUND ENERGY
DWG DRAWING PNL PANEL
~J EXl5TING ~~5 RELOCATED
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR RIGID GALVANIZED 5TEEL CONDUIT
EF EXHAU5T FAN RECEPT RECEPTACLE
ELEC ELECTRICAL RWY RACf:oNAY
EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TU61NG SCH 5CHEDULE
F6. FURNISHED 6'1' 5D FIRE/5MOKE DAMPER
FMC FLEXl6LE METALJ:ONDUIT 5E SERVICE ENTRANCE
5PEC 5PECIFICA TION
GAL GAL 5T 5HUNT TRIP
GEN GENERATOR TY55 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE 5UPPRES50R
GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER
GFO GROUND FAULT ORCUIT INTERRUPTER TYP TYPICAL
G.GND GROUND UL UNDERWRlTER5 LA60RATORlES
HH HANDHOLE UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
HID HIGH INTEN51TY DISCHARGE UP5 UNINTERRUPTAElLE POM:R SUPPLY
HP HOR5EPOWER U5W UNSWlTCHED
HPS HIGH PRESSURE OODIUM V VOL T5
Hz HERTZ (CYCLES/SECOND)
IG 150LATED GROUND W WATT5
IGR 100LA TED GROUND RING (HALO~ WP WEATHER PROOF
IMC INTERMEDIATE MET ALlC CONDU T XFMR TRANSFORMER
KVA KILOVOLT AMPERES
KW KILOWATT
FLUORESCENT LIGHT FllCfURE WITH MTTERY
I
__ '" I
FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURE. WITH ElA TTERY.
I
c::::oJ
c:2i:J
~
~
o
@
o
1-0
WALL MOUNTED INCANDESCENT FIlCfURE
FLUORE5CENT FllCfURE
WALL MOUNTED FLUORESCENT FllCfURE.
CEILING MOUNT EXIT SIGN
PROVIDE ARROWS PER PLAN.
WALL MOUNTED EXIT 5IGN.
I
INCANDE5CENT OR H.I.D. FllCfURE
LETTER DENOTES FI)(fURE TYPE
I
RECESSEO FIXfURE.
I
A
2=32
LETTER DENOTES FIXfURE TYPE
NUMERAL5 DENOTE NO OF LAMPS/
NOMINAL WATTAGE PER LAMP
I
POWER
0 METER
\ SURGE SUPPRESSOR
~ GROUND CONNECTION
~ MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT 6REAKER
.... .-
-7- POWER PANEL.
(FLUSH MOUNTED)
9 POM:R PANEL
(5URFACE MOUNTED)
9 ELECTRICAL PANEL
End of Elootrloal Speolfloatlon
I
COMMUNICATION
I
<II TELEPHONE OUTLET
IQJ DATA OUTLET: (2) CAT 6 MODULAR JACKS
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
@ 5MOI(E DETECTOR.
III FIRE ALARM PULL STATION.
rB FIRE ALARM AUTO VISUAL
I
I
I
._----~
0::::
~
~
U
Ii
o~
u
~~
CJ:l~
~l
g~CIJ
CJ:l,Cl
....
zo::::t--
~o.
~z:
~~CIl
<CJ:lOO)
~
i
~
~
I
i I
.,J ~ Q)'"
~ ~ ,~
]~~ ~~
1 21 11 '"' '"'
~ ~ i !!
dl t ~~
; If f
i:
~~
~~
i~
~~
~
~ooo
E"~.O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
""^"
"" Af
NEtM 5R
HP-l
~I I
-, ( I""^"
, lL 30Af
"~D'^f-; ~rtA":r
PNL D -19, 21, 23, 25 ~ .1\, L _
4 #10, #12 Gi1.D. -____ COORDINME LOCATION WI
REFRIGERATION PIPING, P1WV1DE
12" VERTCAL SEPERATION.
UP TO 2ND FLOOR DATA
RACEWAY
.. : mVNEW ADDITION
-~ 04816
MJU' I
SCALE 1/16'=1'-0'
FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL
SCALE 1/16" = I' - 0'
@
~U{)?~~:~~l
Y=<=::~J
PARTIAL ATTIC PLAN
SCALE. 1/16" = l' - 0'
o 4 I} 16
IotIU' I
SCALE 1/16"=1'-0'
@
"
P=:
~
Pz::l
u
!~~~~. ---~~i~l
~~.."..)j
"'~-=-=-~,
~=-
~I 'Fi ~ ~-< ~i
rC: '~-~----,-- '-1
,-,. ~ ~ T[j------j
.~f:~.)r::; l-~--'~.' .',.
":--:.-= .. '- J I
J,
I;
O~
U
~~
CIJ~
~I
~~fI.l
CIJ:s
:Z:o:;l'-
~O.
~Z:
~Pz::l(\l
<ClJO')
NEW ADDITION
g ~
I
::: i
I I
a
~ ~
j:l
ul i ii
'"' CIl
] I I
~ ~'" I
IlZl. ~
i i j Ii
I
~ ~ J~ I
i
~~ I
I
~~ I
I
~~ !
i
I
i
i= i
I
~~ I
I
I
~
'35OO0AeC
F N
E"~.~
SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL
SCALE: 1/16" = l' - 0'
048 16@""z
1.11.1" I 0
SCALE 1116"=1'-0'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1',\
.,
I "-
I
i
I
@
, '0'&1' . :
. ~
bwiLJ\J' C T'#F,
I i
L _ _. _. .J
FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL
SCALE: 1/4" = l' - (J'
o 1 2 4
~Lb...........d I
SCALE 114"=1'-0"
-r------ r-----u-----y\~-_-_~=~-:.~~] -----
-.'-
-- + - - --- I' - - ---- -- ---~,~~:~~~GN~~~~~ioWORK-J---
I 1 I EXISTING WALLS
: II
I' 1,1-- .=_.";;"-::u;;;-";_~~O[--'=:J -- -=----,;w-g'm;r~Zk ,-
I rJf'~----- ;- _u_ i \
I ~
I h
I ~1
l-b:a.=-~J
)
.~/
"
\
-~~\~ELOCATE EXIsTING
~~l - ELECTRICAL WORK TO
" ACCOMMODATE NEW WORK TO
, 1 EJ()STlNG WALLS
~
r}~~
_ ~- _:~_Jl~
I' r4 .~
Ii ~# t,1
.' ,;J p .
IJ .",.~ '''n..'Ydl' -. - ::'-_C;-.":7=~m
::t':""'''.!.!~'~/Ja~u...:..J~~~~':';'
AHU-1
(HEAT)
AHU-l
(FAN
PNL
2#6
G-4000 SURFACE
METAL RACEWAY FOR
DATA JACKS 24" O.C.
/1
@
-'-
;>
AHU-2
(HEAT)
AHU.2
(FAN
@
SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL
SCALE. 114" = l' - (]'
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTES,
1. CONNECT TO EXISTING FIRE ALARM PANEL
2 PROVIDE ADDITIONAL ZONE CARDS IF REQUIRED.
;3, PROVIDE ANALOG ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DEflECTORS.
4. PROVIDE CONDUIT FOR ALL WIRE.
5 PULL STATIONS TO MATCH EXISTING
6. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A CONTRACTOR TRAINED AND
CERTIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE EJ()STINF FIRE ALARM
PANEL.
. G-4000 SURFACE
METAL RACEWAY FOR
POWER RECEPTACLES
24" O.c
LOCATE 1e>" AFF DRILL
CASEWORK AND
INSTALL GROMMETS
FOR CABLE DROP.
01 2 4
I.B~' , I
SCALE 114"=1'-0'
@
~
~
~
U
>-~
~.
~~
O~
U
Eo<
~~
cno.
~E-i
o~m
e;.~rn
cn:s
~~l'-
~O.
~Z:
~~~
~
~
~n
~ I ~i
IrQ: ~~
~ ~ 1 !!
~ t J~
~ II: IlO
~:
~~
i~
i~
~~
~
Ect2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
i r- __J
i--1\-j--um
I I : t1
: II 1'1
I r.
. I",':'
!
i
I
i
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PNLD.
\
p--'- H.______ . --- -..---.-- -- -:"'"- _ ~ 1"\ .::- -- -- .::- .._~-
'i ~ V
Ilu _.~_ _ _. ~__ ,..
1- ""''"-r:-=o.=1-. II. ) II 4
[t1 lL.. "- IJI \
,
''V- ~I "'\!)S ~ '1 I.-es
l[ s ..r- '1. ,... I,J'S LtG
E = -~4 ~ .r (22)
1 ,^ l)Y .... ...... '-"'" ~
'1 ,
. - / ~ I "'" :"'>s CJG" ,.. '-. ~ ~
-
. ,.;=, ~j l,)
If:'
I tiJ
r~1 ~ 4 <JB" ~ ~s <\.
:~ - -
( 'l. .r i )
I': ~ II""\... ...r"~ ~
1-
" ~s ~ 6s I... ....Qs J rJ; L I
r.1 [7"
; I
~ I CJ;' ~, & ~..
; It~, ;Z':!~ .E_;'~' ~~~~.!.~0 ..~~~
~
a'
~ .."..,..."..,., r. "" >:
I LJ\,J I
I I N
I
I I
L __ __ _ _ _ _ ~
FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
SCALE' 1/4" ~ l' - 0"
01 2 4
WdI:J----.J I
SCALE 1/4"~1'-o"
HllNG FIXl1JRE LAYOUT HM
CHANGED FROM (14) FIXTURES TO
FIXl1JRES.
J
<~,
OTE:
DEcORATOR TYPE
SWITCHES. TYPICAL.
~-l
I
I
I
@
;\
! \
I 1!\1 1\ / 1\ ;.: Ii Ir\l
,,, 'X 'X 'X
1\
IV \ '/ \ 1/ \ : / \
~
I .-JI
tl..g-Z~t:. .- . - ;0; _"._J
:ti
" ~ XA
S ACE MT I~ :c j n .r I
WAAP -'\X 2 .J 1/ ~
D-2 c ~ "- ../ ~ ,r FW" '-t,.
" =d I~J ~A \ XA
""
A
PANEL "D" / = ~
,.../ 2';
~~' ../ ~ ) ~ X
S '~J
A I r A
.- C'- ,J
- , ~ I
~~=E.~~'~' II
',,~ z.:;-r/ -.. -. ---~..2 7'7;':'-" /77" X ,..1 ~ K
.;,..:. _______ ~ ;.c,_.:L._ hri
/
A A ~
~~- -~ " j
. -: ._:t= --;:7 ___
- ....rl1O -
L =-----.. URITY LIGHT.
) EXTERIOR
--------
SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
01 2 4
I{HJ' I
SCALE 1/4"~1'-a'
SCALE: 1/4" = l' - (J'
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
MARK DESCRlP110N LAMPS VOLTS INPUT NOTES
WATTS
A COLUMEllA, 41'524-2 SPEClFICA1l0N GRADE (2)32W 120 60
NON-AIR TROFFER 2'><4", 2 LAMP T-Il
Ax SIMILAR TO TO TYPE A EXCEPT 1100 LUMEN, (2)3'2Y1 120 60
UNIT MOUNTED flATTERY PACK T-8
EI INFINITY, COMPACT "PL" FLOURESCENT 6" (2)26W 120 50
ROUND RECESSED DOWNUGHT CF
fix SIMILAR TO TO TYPE EI EXCEPT 1100 LUMEN, (2)26W 120 50
UNIT MOUNTED ElA TTERY PACK C.F
C COLUMEllA, WC4-2 PRODIGY TWO LAMP WRAP (2)32W 120 60
AROUND T-Il
INFINITY, LED EXIT SIGN - WHITE
X THERMOPLASllC HOUSING WI ElA TTERY LED 120 5
flACKUP
~
~
g:3
::z;
Pc:1
U
~:
~g
~~
O~
u
..:dsa
o
C1)ll.
Pc:1 .
~~I
00:5
:Z;~l'-
EO
~z~
~~~
@
~ I
;n
: I iii
~ ~ tla~
11Zl1 !:
~ ~ t !!
~ ! 1~
~~
~~
~~
i=
~~
~
~OOOAec
LN
E"2.~
I
-1-----
SCHEDULE 1"".llNG
208 \Ol.TS 3 PHME
NO t.lOUHT SURF
DESCRIPl10N ~ NO
UGHTlHO. ROOM 110 UQHllHG.ROOId8115.118 ~ 2
UGHTlNO-R0<*11Q lJQHT1HG-ROOM114 ~.-
lJGH1'lHO-ROOMS 112, 113 UGHT1HQ.ROOIIIt14A,122.1:Q ~ 8
UOHTINQ.ROOMS101,t02.103 UOHnNQ. ROOM 121 ~ I
UQHT\NQ.ROOM8102.103 LICJHTINQ-ROOM121 ~ to
UGHT1NG. ROOMS .104, 108 Ul3HTING.. ROOM 121 ~ 12
UCJHT1NG.. ROOM 121 UQH1'1NG.. ROOM121 ~ 14
.J.JGHT1NO-ROOMt21 e ..\Jl3IfTIHB. ROOM 121 ~ 18
UGHTtHQ-RCQMt21 W UOHT\HO-liOCIU120 ~ 18
SPME IPJft& 20 20
1
~E ~ ~~
1
RECEPTJCL6-DINING .8IUAE 20 .24
t
RECEPTN:U-lOILE't8,I.OBBYCI.OCK REQUlF!YENT.:rrB ~ _21
RlCEPTJCLE.lDILS1"8 ~ 21
RBCEPT.H:LE..o1NIHG RECEPT.tCt.&.MJUIoPURP08l ~.ao
IQUIPlI!laNURl&.CA.L -Rscar.r.ta.a.LALIHCR~ ~ 12
&aU1P1IEHl'tQUND.8'f'8TIM .aGURENT-IOUHD.awT&M ~ M
RSCEPloCU:.OlNlNO .fI1CEPVG.&..t.lJLfWlURPQIi ~ 38
&QUlPMENT 8QUHO 8Y8TEM IiQUAENlWASHER ~ 31
AECEPTJrCUi-I&ILnPURP08& -EQUlPhEHTDRYER ~ -48
EQUIPMENT SOUND 6Y8TEN 6QUAENf DRYER 20 42
1
SE TOTALS.. VA
PHASE TOTALS.. AMPS TOTAL. AMPS
:r: -~-T___ J~~;~~~_~ _:~_- __ .._ :-:::t:._ ~_ _ _ __-J__
I
I
NO~~
1 20
t
, 20
1
. 20
1
, 20
1
. 20
1
11 20
1
1> 20
1
" 20
1
17 20
1
.. 20
1
21 20
1
23 20
1
,. 20
1
7r 20
1
.. 20
1
., 20
1
.. 20
1
.. 20
1
~ 20
1
30- 20
1
" 20
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,.
7r
..
21
..
..
~
30
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I PANELI
1A
-mf -_81 LUGS
l.OCATION
DESCRIPTION
"WRE
i PANELI
~~;l LUGS
DE8CRIPTlOH
I SCHEDULE 1"".",",-
208 VOLTS 3 PHME
He IlDUNT SURF
DESCRIPTION an.: NO
RECEPTJCI.&.. \oCt.UHTEERS 20 2
1
RECEPTJClE-\G.UNTeER8 ,:..
EQUIPMENT.. ELEVATOR PIT ~ I
EQWPNENT.. DOOR OPERATOR 20 8
1
EQulPteNT -COFFEE BAR 20 10
1
EQUIPMENT COFFEE 8M ~ 12
EQUIPMENT.COFFEEBM 20 14
.
IQUIPhENT. conee 8M 2Q 18
I
EQUI9ttENT.COFFEEBM ~ 18
EQUIPMENT -lICRaNAW ~ 20
EQUIPMENT DIS~ER ~ 22
EQUlPfoENT _ UNDER COUNTER FRIDGE 20 24
,
EQulPhENT. UNDER COUNTER FRICGIi ~ 28
EQUlPhENT. U C ICE MtKER 2Q 28
1
'~L.E-OUTS&OEENT L.OUNGEFAN ~ 3D
COFFU 20 32
1
~~o~eR ~ M
SPME 20 38
1
&PME 20 38
,
SPME 20 4Q
1
SPME 20 42
1
Dem.nd - -
DemaNi
___ :::J
18
o
l..OJQlN\OL.T-NoPS
A I B , C
......
RECEPTICLE. OFFICE
RECEPT~a.e. OFFICE
RECEPTICL.E. OFFICE
RECEPTICLE- OFFICE
EQUlPfoEHT. COPIER
EQUIPMENT _ COPIER
RECEPTK:.a.e .L.OBBY
EQUIPMENT. E'NC
"Nt.
..Nt.
..Nt.
IOUIPMENT. aevATOA CJ8UGHT
nME CL.OCK/PHOTO CONTROl.
"Nt.
UGHTlNG. BUIUIING EXl'ERIOR
UGH11NG. BUtI.DIHG EXTERIOR
LJQHnNG _ BUII.DlHO EXl'ERIOA
UGKTIHG BUILDING E.XrERIOR
UGHTINO . BUII.DlNO EXfERtOR
UGHTING. Bun.DING EX'l'ERJOR
..Nt.
I~
PHAS~-VA
~-=:=-_ii(w~~~~~
TOTAL VA
TOTAL AMPS
I
I
I
NO-
......
. 20
1
, 20
1
. 20
1
, 20
1
. 20
1
" '"
1
1> 20
1
,. 20
1
17 '"
1
.. 20
f
.21 20
1
~ 20
1
-25 20
1
.21 20
1
... 20
1
31 20
.
.. 20
1
.. 20
1
.31 20
1
-31 20
1
.. 20
1
EE?~--P;
L-L--t---Pftj
L_L_--J___
I
PANEl]
125 MF8 LUGS
L.OCATIOH . ---
,,"BeRPTlOH
'.-s
-C
1
2.A
SCHEDULE IEJQSlING
2OB1:L.TS It.'DUHil:e
OE"""""""
......
o
Uiiiiiii
.-
>>....
..-
~~ NO
....
RECEPT.-ca.e_CMQS ~ 2
RECEPTACt.e CMOS ~ 4
RECEPTACu.CNU1S ~ 8
ItECSPJ'JCUi ~ ~ 8
RECEPTIlCLE.&XHIIlROOM ~ 10
RECEPT.ccu. OFACE ~ 12
RECEPTJCLE. OFACE ~ 14
RECEPTACLi_QfRCE ~ 18
RlCEPTICLI-0FFIC6 ~ 18
&PME ~ zg
UGHTING.ROOt.l2lJ3 ~ 22
.UGtfDNa.ROOMS204.208 ~ 24
.L.IGHl1NG-ROQY5.2Q1,.21~ ~.28
J.Jatt1WG. ROQM2j 4 ~ 28
.LJat.rmtG.RDOMS.212.213 ~ 30
IPME ~ 32
.LIGf:fTUICJ.AECKfHfC.C.ROOlV ~ 34
RECEPT.4CLE.t.ECI:tMIUC.Irl.R.OOM ~ 31
.EQU1PIBll. flIECH,tHlCAUtOOM ':' 38
.HOTWAlSRTNoh(_HEJL1tUWOM ~ 40
UGI:InNQ_ROOM201 _~ 42
RECEPToICL.E.CRJFTS
RECEPTACIJ!.CRJFT.S
IlEC&PLOCUi . CRAFTS
~.CfWTB
RECEPT/ICU!; . TOlLETt QIII
aeca>TIlCLE .JllU.IBllS
..-
"Nt.
.uaHl1NG- ~2OI,.2QI, 201
UGHT1NO ..R0DM20II
UOHDIllB.IlOOM2D8
.LDIIJNG.ROOM211
>>111.
..-
..IllS
..-
-.
......
SPJRE
I PANEL!
I SCHEDULE I
D
-~~~
llISC1llP11OH
11.0
.....".
10:l::L.TS It.f)tJN:I~~
DSSCRIPlJoH
'\MR"
o
~
"Nt.
"Nt.
L..IGttnNO - 2nd flOOR 2
RECEPTJCl.ES.2ndFLOOR 4
RECEPTJrCLES.2nd FLOOR 0
$PMe 8
$PMe 10
SPME 12
VMS 14
SPME 18
SPM6 18
&PME 2Q
&PM.E 22
SPNtE 24
SPIRE 28
&PME 28
SPM! 3D
SPM! 32
SPME M
$PItRE 38
SPME 38
$PME 40
SPME ~2
-VA 11050 11040 7910 TOTAL VA 30.000 Demand
UGHTlHG.1IlA.OOR
RECEPT.tCl.ES-1.lA.OOR
RECEPTJCL.E8-1atR.QOR
RECEPTJCL.ES - 2nd F\.OOR RN;eNJ\t
RECEPTJCI.ES. 2nd fLOOR lVGeNAY
RECEPTJCL.E8-1nd FLOOR RlCeNAV
RECEPTACl.E8.2nd FLOOR RlCEWA,Y
tfP.11tl.1f,CA
HP.2197ht:A
NiUo1 FHt
NiU_1 HEAT
NtlJ.2 FAN
NtU-2 HEAT
l'
iif
I
1 PANEL
22fI~LlJGS!
LOCA11OH
SCHEDULE "".1tNQ
208 \,01..18 3 PHJSE
NDUHT 8URF
.....
1K
I
o
L.OJOIN IJOL.T-N*S
A I 8 I C
NO-
-
1
1
3 .,
,
. 20
1
, 20
t
. 20
1
11 '"
1
" 20
1
,. 20
1
17 20
1
,. '"
1
21 '"
1
23 .,
1
,. 20
1
7r 20
1
.. 20
.
31 20
1
.. 20
1
.. 20
1
~ 20
1
.. 20
1
" '"
1
!!!!k* NO
Po,.
~ '
20 .
1
20 .
1
~ .
f 10
~ 12
20 ..
1
20 ,.
f
20 ,.
1
~ 20
:;0 22
20 ,..
1
~ ,.
20 ,.
1
':" 3G
':" ..
20 ,..
I
20 ..
1
20 ..
1
20 ..
1
20 ..
1
PHASe lllt . VA
-~ PHASElllTAlS._.
::. c-=:.: .-:=~~;~~!:::--.:-~ ~_-=t~:-
0ESCRJPTt0If
OESCR......
GAYLORD P.-HEL
RECEPTACLe. KrTCHEN
RECEPTACl.2-IOTCHEN
-IHUNT
RECEPTICIJ!. KITCHEN
RECEPTACLE. KITCHEN
_......ll1SPQI.Ol.
RECEPTICLS: .-Kn:CHEN
<:ome......
8l1UHT
..-
KITCHEN STEMlER
..-
.."'"
IGTOHEN.. Dl8HWAIHER
..-
1fJIN.lQAotm.ET
RECEPTICU!
KITCHEN E>>iHJ8T F....
KITCHEN HOT SER\'ER
-
-.UNKlCllel
8l1UHT
..-
............",
FRIDGElFREElER COt.PResSOR
"'WEll
{MAIN 1200 AMP CIRCUIT 6REAKER
WITH GROUND FAULT PROTECTION
[ 1000 AMP 206YI120 VOLT MAIN
1 - ..- -. .-- -- -- -- _~IST~~~O~ ~~~6~_A~D_ __ _ __ _ . __ u _ - _ _
J I r-----------l
. ~__ __~--- __ : r---, I
~. - . ~:~-:J [ I ~ - - I L:' I J I - -'- - - -'- - !
=--.-:>t ..:.~ ,I , I I ,,~p +- I ~2O/2O& ~20/2O&
-AI-:g _J I: , \ I r,,225A3p ~ _.J ~25 AM~ ~25 AM~ (4) #4/0, (1,) #2 I
f POLE MOUNTED I r- __ \:. __J ~ ~-f-----, llfG/l.f'Wl1. llfG/l.FWf: GRD.2-1/2' C. ,
: TRANSFORMERS I I+,: f:~+--.., : ~~N~t,J ~~N~L..! :
II I '-:--1'< ''':'na;;;y-r--, I , '
I I : Ii" It.: 'we^,,- L.., I I I 4-4/0, #4 GRD 2-1/2" C
I I I I '"' I I I I
I I : I 1 I r' 2211"" I :-1-'-'
I , ,I I I I- I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
I _L_-+- _~ I -I'..L I L_. __ ___ __~:CH ROOM A60VE 2nd FLOOR
I I I I 1'1 ___u ------_._--
I I I I I I I
PROVIDE NEW C.6 AND I I I I I I I
I' MOUNTING HARDWARE TO ': I : I I I
MATCH EXISTING MOP I I : I
I : : I ~-------------
I I I I L________-, I
, I L..___-, I I ELEVATOR
i WATTHOUR METER I : ~~~ f;W~~ \20;20& 25A,~
I AND KVAR METER J I f25 AMPj f25 AMPj ~ AM~ I
I I PER UTILITY I I'ITCHENI 4TG /l. f'Wl1. llfG /l. FWf: ""'-,
III REQUIREMENTS I I II ~~NE:t,J I P~NEL I I PANEL I 'T'
j I I lK - lA- - - - - - I
I GRADE I I L________________.!.6____'
__ _ . L_ _._ ..__ ___ _... __ _ _ I 16t FLOOR
, _ -., ---- - -- -- _ -. _ -- -- _ -. -- -.- -. -- --
L..________~-------'
SECONDARY (206Y/12O VOLT, 3
PHASE 4 WIRE)
(13) H50MCM. 3" CO
SCHEMATIC ONE LINE DIAGRAM
SCALE. NONE
1;11
d91
r::-~IU 11 III I
I Engineering Services Inc.
1610 ... ROad-.
PIl_zoe.142.11M1
hIn~ I.. 'ItA aallo
,.. 201.042.1141
~
~
Pz;:l
u
:::-~
I~
8~
~~
o
CZlll.
E:3tf
O~~
FoPz;:lOO
en
:z: ___ :i
0_1:-
ES2~
~~CX)
<en~
DCAAES 06/31/01
~
::!:
a
~
Iii
~
@
Q
I
N
,.J ~ lD'"
fI.l lD ;I 8
'" ClD lIIll'-
11 I I
.ll ~ NN
8lEl . ~~
~ i I II
&l .. H~
ClD .. .8
~ .e llo
~~
~~
i~
~=
;~
~
'!&OOOABC
6CI4ECULE&
E<l~